Home

Device Specifics Reference Manual for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS

1. 125 Rectangle Two Corners 0 eee eee eee eens 332 Fill Area Set 2 0 ce ee eee eens 333 Filled Circle Center and Point on Circumference 334 Filled Circle Three Points on Circumference 835 Filled Circle Center and Radius 00 0000 eee 336 Filled Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius 338 Filled Arc Center and Two Points on Arc 339 Filled Arc Three Points on Circumference 840 Filled Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius 841 Filled Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius 842 Filled Arc Center Starting Point and Angle 843 Filled Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors 845 Filled Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference 846 Filled Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two but SERERE ERILICTEERITQIELTIDIO SR ee i es Be ee 848 Filled Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc 849 Filled Rectangle Two Corners llle 400 Packed Cell Array s scsrsresessscsrsessscrosescrsd eA B 118 B 120 B 122 B 123 B 124 B 126 B 128 B 130 C 45 C 47 C 49 C 50 Xi D Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS E D 1 D 1 1 D 1 2 D 2 D 2 1 D 3 D 4 D 5 Starting the PCM Server 0 0 ce ees PCM on OpenVMS Systems llle lees PCM on UNIX Systems
2. llle D 3 D 2 Hardware Choice Box Buttons llle ee eens D 5 Tables 1 1 Supported Devices 5238s eee he ee ke HARES RC Rc a a 1 3 1 2 Device independent Fonts llle 1 6 1 3 HLHSR Mechanisms for DEC GKS 00 eee 1 11 1 4 HLHSR Mechanisms for DEC PHIGS 00005 1 11 1 5 PostScript Environment Options llle eens 1 14 2 1 CGM Environment Options 0 0 ee es 2 2 2 2 CGM Element Descriptions 0 000 ee nes 2 8 3 1 DDIF Environment Options 0 0000 ees 3 2 3 2 Color Table Files 2 2 c5 w oa we EE RE Sek wR ee dere 3 5 4 1 DECwindows Environment Options llle een 4 2 4 2 DECwindows Font Modes lees 4 22 5 1 HPPCL Printer Environment Options 00000 00s 5 1 6 1 LCGO01 Environment Options 0 eee 6 1 7 1 LJ250 and LA324 Environment Options lessen 7 1 8 1 Plotter and Recorder Environment Options 005 8 1 8 2 LVP16 Switch Settings llle 8 4 9 1 OSF Motif Environment Options 0 000 e eee ees 9 1 9 2 OSF Motif Font Modes 20 000 cc eens 9 22 10 1 OpenGL Environment Options 0 0 0 0 0 ee ees 10 1 11 1 PEX Environment Options llle eee 11 1 12 1 PostScript Environment Options 0 000 cece eee eens 12 1 13 1 ReGIS Environment Options llle 13 1 13 2 Bit Masks for ReGIS File Output llle
3. Visual Properties PHIGS VISUAL_PROPERTIES PHIGSvisual properties Specifies the properties of the visual that will be enabled The visual properties available are double buffering anti aliasing and transparency Each property corresponds to a single bit of hexadecimal bit mask double buffering is controlled by bit 0 anti aliasing by bit 1 and transparency by bit 2 You enable a property by setting the bit to 1 and disable a property by setting the bit to 0 Each combination of property settings is represented by a decimal value which you enter to define this environment option The decimal values are 0 No properties are enabled 1 Double buffering is enabled This is the default 2 Anti aliasing is enabled 3 Double buffering and anti aliasing are enabled 4 Transparency is enabled 5 Transparency and double buffering are enabled 6 Transparency and anti aliasing are enabled 7 Transparency double buffering and anti aliasing are enabled For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to enable double buffering and anti aliasing properties for the visual as follows DEFINE PHIGS VISUAL PROPERTIES 3 On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable to enable the transparency property for the visual as follows setenv PHIGSvisual properties 4 Return Workstation Type PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the works
4. setenv PHIGSuse dials and buttons 1 For specific information on hardware dials and buttons support see Appendix D Language GKS LANGUAGE Specifies whether to use the English value 0 Hebrew value GKSlanguage 21 or Japanese value 22 language The default value is 0 PHIGS LANGUAGE See Section 11 7 for more information on font support PHIGSlanguage 11 4 PEX Workstation For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the Hebrew language as follows DEFINE PHIGS LANGUAGE 21 On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the Japanese language as follows setenv GKSlanguage 22 Return continued on next page PEX Workstation 11 1 Environment Options Table 11 1 Cont PEX Environment Options Syntax Description MIT Double Buffering GKS MIT DB ENABLE GKSmit db enable PHIGS MIT DB ENABLE PHIGSmit db enable Specifies which type of double buffering is to be enabled MIT double buffering is supported on all platforms except VS3520 Pixmap double buffering is supported on all workstations that support double buffering When swapping buffers pixmap double buffering is slower than MIT double buffering However when doing window repairs following an expose event pixmap double buffering is faster This option defaults to a value of TRUE 1 When the value of the double buffering flag is 1 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS first attempt to
5. setenv GKSuse standard color map RGB DEFAULT MAP Return For more information on standard color maps see the following books Jones Oliver Introduction to the X Window System Englewood Cliffs New Jersey Prentice Hall 1989 Schiefler Robert W and Gettys James X Window System Third Edition Burlington Massachusetts Digital Press 1992 continued on next page DECwindows Workstation 4 7 DECwindows Workstation 4 1 Environment Options Table 4 1 Cont DECwindows Environment Options DEC GKS Syntax DEC PHIGS Syntax Title Size GKS DECW TITLE SIZE When you run a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS application on a GKSdecw title size DECwindows workstation geometry management conflicts may PHIGS DECW TITLE SIZE arise with different window managers If you get the error PHIGSdecw title size message TITLE SIZE attribute incorrect set this logical name to the value printed in the error message and run the application again For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the title size as follows DEFINE PHIGSSDECW TITLE SIZE 10 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the title size as follows setenv GKSdecw title size 20 UID Search Path GKS UID PATH Specifies the UID search path and overrides the standard UID GKSuid path file area See Section 4 12 for more information on UIL files PHIGS UID PATH For example on OpenVMS
6. Value Paper Orientation 0 Landscape The picture is wider than it is tall This is the default setting 1 Portrait The picture is taller than it is wide If you use the workstation type constant within the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS program you can use a bitwise OR operation to specify either landscape or portrait orientation by logically relating the mask constant with the workstation type constant OR in a declaration 6 3 Device Queues and Allocation To use the LCGO1 printer as either an allocated or queued device on a OpenVMS system set terminal characteristics by entering the following DCL command SET TERMINAL device name NOBROADCAST NOECHO EIGHTBIT NOWRAP Return SCOPE NOTYPEAHEAD LOWERCASE FULLDUP NOMODEM INTERACTIVE Return TTSYNC FORM TAB NOESCAPE SPEED set speed WIDTH 132 Retum PAGE 0 DEVICE TYPE UNKNOWN Return Replace device name with the name of the device to be allocated Replace set speed with a value equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the printer 6 2 LCGO Workstation LCGO01 Workstation 6 3 Device Queues and Allocation For more information on device allocation see the ALLOCATE command in the OpenVMS DCL Dictionary When using the LCGO1 printer as either an allocated or a queued device on an ULTRIX system you need to set terminal characteristics by entering the following command stty pass8 echo new cols 132 speed lt de
7. 16 12 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 5 Input Information 16 5 8 Valuator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported valuator class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 workstations Valuator Device Input Device Types Input Action No mouse or puck 1 2 3 4 Select with arrow keys Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U Mouse 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Supported PETs The valuator input class for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 devices support PETs 1 2 and 3 Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 valuator class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial value 0 5 Echo area Varies by device Data record Minimum 0 0 maximum 1 0 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 13 VWS Workstation 17 VWS Workstation This chapter describes the information you need to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with devices running VAXstation Workstation Software VWS DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support these devices as workstations of category WSCAT_OUTIN Note DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support these devices under the OpenVMS VAX operati
8. NODISCONNECT NOAUTOBAUD PASSTHRU TAB EIGHTBIT HANGUP Return SPEED set speed Replace device name with the name of the PostScript device Replace set speed with a value equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the printer For more information on device allocation see the ALLOCATE command in the OpenVMS DCL Dictionary To use the PostScript printers as either allocated or queued devices on a UNIX system set the terminal by entering the following command 9 stty pass8 echo new speed raw dev ttynn Retum Replace speed with a value equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the printer Replace nn with the port number 12 4 2 Printer Description Files Because the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS PostScript graphics handlers support numerous PostScript printers you may need to pass printer specific information to the handler by means of a printer description file The following example shows the format of a PostScript printer description file This example is meant to show format see your printer s user manual to obtain the correct values left margin 0 25 inch right margin 0 5 cm top margin 1 bottom margin inch 0 25 Set a 1 4 inch left margin Set a 1 2 cm right margin Set a 1 cm top margin Set a 1 4 inch bottom margin resolution 300 inch 300 pixels per inch max path 1000 Maximum number of points in a PostScript path stack size 300 Maximum
9. elles Dial Suppott eqs soe tay xat oe a eae BR ee AIR ew Spaceball Support 0 0 ccc ee ees Button SUpport 2 204 40 krake E eee ee ee ee EERS OER Workstation Support 0 0 ce ee Error Messages llle Input Values E 1 E 2 E 2 1 E 2 1 1 E 2 1 2 E 2 1 3 E 2 1 4 E 2 1 5 E 2 2 E 2 2 1 E 2 3 E 2 3 1 E 2 4 E 2 4 1 E 2 4 2 E 2 4 8 E 2 5 E 2 5 1 E 2 6 E 2 6 1 E27 E 2 8 E 3 E 3 1 E 3 2 E 3 3 E 3 4 E 3 5 Logical Input Device Numbers leeren Logical Input Devices ace eR a epe EERIE RR e Ra de DR RT Choice Devices lessen Choice 1 6 7 8 i coke x Rea REX COR RR m ER Chite 2 4kegck4sg pe EROR EREX ed eu sawed as CHOICE PD ChiolGe 2 ore eRe nud e ea ae A ew os IN Choi6e D ves rv Ane ER ESAE Rees eee DE Locator Devices ome e tia a b ROS dee ead eS Locator 1 2 3 and 4 0 0 ccc eee eee Pick D6ViC6S a oss sk oh Loe SLEDS Law RA ew es Pick 1 2 3 and 4 3 5 xu CES ha ae Cal ee RES EERE A String Devices 0 eens String Land 4 v6 024 408 bec Ci dales eet eweed ae jugi DEP Ep Sing 22s eee se Se oboe Sac ee ee es SESS es qud ade Stroke Devices 22x aces ans rete Ce yu ted do uie Stroke 1 2 3 and 4 sese oso Valuator Devices llle Valuator 1 2 3 and4 0 eee eee Input Devices and Echo Area Titles Changing the Title String llle Keypad Functionality 0 0 0 0 eee C
10. in data number of integers 1 number of reals 12 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array xform address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id The workstation identifier xform An array of reals that specifies the values for the transformation matrix For more information on transformation matrices see the description of the EVALUATE TRANSFORMATION MATRIX 3 function in the DEC GKS binding reference manuals Escapes B 37 200 Set Edge Representation 200 Set Edge Representation Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape function sets the representation for a given edge bundle index ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data out_data number of integers 5 number of reals 1 number of strings 0 address of intege
11. 2 1 1 2 and 3 See Appendix D for more information on hardware dials and buttons support Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the OSF Motif workstation valuator class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial value 0 5 Echo area Varies by device Data record Minimum 0 0 Maximum 1 0 9 12 Font Support The following sections describe how to manipulate the set of fonts supported by the OSF Motif workstation They describe the default set of fonts for each language type 9 12 1 Default Fonts The default set of fonts for each language is determined by defining the language logical name or environment variable See Section 9 15 9 12 1 1 English and ISO Latin 1 Fonts The following fonts are the default fonts for English and ISO Latin 1 They are available in string precision only X Font Name Font Index Courier Medium R 1 Times Medium R 101 Times Medium I 102 Times Bold R 103 Times Bold I 104 Helvetica Medium R 105 Helvetica Medium O 106 Helvetica Bold R 107 Helvetica Bold O 108 Courier Medium R 109 Courier Medium O 110 Courier Bold R 111 Courier Bold O 112 Symbol 113 If the font mode option is all all the fonts listed in Section 9 12 3 in the range 101 to 300 are included in the list of available fonts 9 20 OSF Motif Workstatio
12. setenv GKSwstype 91 Return 7 2 Valid Bit Mask Values The LJ250 and LA324 device handlers support several bit masks to control the format of output These involve color support print density and paper orientation The following bit masks are valid for use with an LJ250 printer Workstation Type 91 92 Hexadecimal Value Description xmDnn005B Digital LJ250 ink jet printer xmDnn005C Digital LJ250 ink jet printer at 180 dpi The value in the first part mDnn specifies the page orientation the use of colors and the density The value in the second part is the hexadecimal value of the workstation type value 91 or 92 The possible values for m include the following Value Paper Orientation 0 1 Landscape The picture is wider than it is tall Portrait The picture is taller than it is wide The value D is a 4 bit abcd value determined by color allocation and print density The possible values for D include the following True Value of D Description ab 00XX Use full 256 colors ab 01XX Use 2 colors ab 10XX Use 8 colors ab 11XX Use 16 colors cd XX00 Use 90 dpi 7 2 LJ250 and LA324 Workstation LJ250 and LA324 Workstation 7 2 Valid Bit Mask Values True Value of D Description cd XX01 Use 72 dpi cd XX10 Use 144 dpi cd XX11 Use 180 dpi The default yields 90 dots per inch dpi printing with 256 possible simultaneous colors Not all the previous combinat
13. Terminal Medium R Wide ISO8859 1 117 Terminal Bold R Normal IS08859 1 118 _Terminal Bold R DoubleWide ISO8859 1 119 Terminal Bold R Narrow ISO8859 1 120 _Terminal Bold R Wide ISO8859 1 121 I nterimDM Medium I 122 _BigelowHolmes Menu Medium R 123 AvantGardeBook R 124 _AvantGardeBook O 125 AvantGardeDemi R 126 _AvantGardeDemi O 127 _LubalinGraph Book R 128 _LubalinGraph Book O 129 LubalinGraph Demi R 130 LubalinGraph Demi O 131 NewCenturySchoolbook Medium R 132 NewCenturySchoolbook Medium I 133 _NewCenturySchoolbook Bold R 134 NewCenturySchoolbook Bold I 135 _Souvenir Demi R 136 Souvenir Demi I 137 Souvenir Light R 138 Souvenir Light I 139 DEC David Medium R 301 DEC David Medium O 302 DEC David Bold R 303 DEC David Bold O 304 DEC Narkisstam Medium R 305 DEC Narkisstam Medium O 306 4 24 DECwindows Workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 11 Font Support X Font Name Font Index DEC Narkisstam Bold R 307 DEC Narkisstam Bold O 308 DEC Gam Medium R 309 DEC Gam Medium O 310 DEC Gam Bold R 311 DEC Gam Bold O 312 DEC Miriam Medium R 813 DEC Miriam Medium O 314 DEC Miriam Bold 815 DEC Miriam Bold O 816 DEC MiriamFixe
14. The plotters supported by DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS have pen speeds that are within the range 0 38 to 38 1 cm second The graphics handlers round your increment values to the nearest multiple of 0 38 You can specify the value 0 0 to obtain the default speed of 0 38 cm second If you are using one of the plotters to produce acetate slides the recommended speed is 10 cm second ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 1 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array display_speed address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier display_speed A real number specifying the display speed expressed in centimeters per second This value must be greater than or equal to 0 101 Generate Hardcopy of Workstation Surface 101 Generate Hardcopy of Workstation Su
15. ZK 9843 GE 4 14 Internationalization The DECwindows device handler provides the following internationalization features e Default font set for the specified language e Translated text in output widgets e Control over text direction in output widgets Any text that is displayed outside of a widget is not translated Use environment options to dictate which language to use See Table 4 1 The language environment option can be set to any of the following integers e 0 English e 21 Hebrew e 22 Japanese If no language environment option is set the default integer is 0 English By setting the language environment option a language specific UID file is read in at startup In addition the text direction field is set in accordance with the language type To notify the toolkit of the current language in use the language type can be set through the session manager If a session manager is not available the language type can be set through an environment option or with the Xdefaults file See the DECwindows Toolkit documentation appropriate to your operating system To use the Japanese fonts with the English DECwindows workstation types you must set the language environment option to Japanese value 22 If you use the Japanese DECwindows workstation types 317 you do not need to set the language environment option The bit mask values and many other characteristics of the Japanese DECwindows workstation types are the sam
16. 526 Inquire BQUM Flags 526 Inquire BQUM Flags B 122 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All This escape allows a DEC PHIGS application to inquire the values of the erase and draw flags ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array erase flag draw flag address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description erase flag The erase flag When this argument is FALSE 0 all erase traversals that are normally done as part of BQUMs are suppressed When this argument is TRUE 1 all erase traversals are enabled draw flag The draw flag When this argument is FALSE 0 all draw traversals that are normally done as part of BQUMs are suppressed When this argument is TRUE 1 all draw traversals
17. 532 508 501 523 525 204 440 100 500 158 156 158 15 7 200 154 155 205 108 163 206 continued on next page Escapes B 2 List of Escape Identifiers Table B 1 Cont Alphabetical Listing of Escapes Escape Function Escape Identifier Set Line Cap Style Set Line Join Style Set Line Pattern Set Marker Pattern Set PEX Begin Render Clear Action Set PEX Clear Region Set Plane Mask Set Reset String Set Segment Highlighting Method Set Swap Mode Set Transparency Set View Dirty Flag Set Viewport Event Set Window Title Set Writing Mode Software Clipping Swap Buffers Toggle Double Buffering Target 151 152 509 512 520 521 511 208 162 514 552 530 109 202 150 111 515 528 B 3 Escape Syntax This section describes the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS escape functions in detail For a list of the escape functions supported on your device run the GKS_PREDEF or PHIGS_PREDEF program Escapes B 5 100 Set Display Speed 100 Set Display Speed B 6 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations The LVP16 and all HP GL protocol plotter workstations This escape controls the speed of output generation DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS measures the speed in device coordinate vector second measurements
18. C 24 GDPs Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the elliptic arc using a center point one axis vector the largest of the two to establish the distance and direction of the major axis a second axis vector to establish the distance of the minor axis and two vectors whose directions are used to determine the arc end points The largest axis vector determines both the distance and direction of the major axis of the elliptic arc GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 6 pts array center point vector origin point two directional axis vectors and two end point vectors gdp id 114 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL address of integer array data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Component Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 1 Form an arc 2 Connect both ends of the arc to its center 3 Connect the beginning and end points of the arc 114 Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors Error Messages Erro
19. L 01 6 D M mm E gt N n8 F 0 o 8 18 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation string B C D E F ZK 3008 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 14 LVP16 Font Number 5034 Font 5034 Prectston string 0 1 23 4 587 89 A B C D EF 0 O0 a8 P p 1 Ii 4AQaq 2 2 BRobr 3 3 C Scs 4 4DTdt 5 5 EU eu 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 76 Wg w 8 8H Xh x 9 9IYigsy A x JZjz B K k C amp be 1 a D 2MSme E saN om F 0 _o0 ZK 3004 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 19 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 15 LVP16 Font Number 5035 Font 5035 Prectston string o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B C D E F 0 0 P p 1 1AQaq 2 e BRbr 3 3 CSc s 4 4DTdt 5 45 E EUeu 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 76 Wg w 8 8H Xhx 9 9IYniy A x JZ jz B K k c GE we x ud d D M m E N n F 0 0 ZK 3005 GE 8 20 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 16 LVP16 Font Number 5036 Font 5036 Precision string 0 12 8 5 6 7 89 A BC DE F 0 08B p 1 1 4AQaq 2 2 BRbr 3 i 3 L 9S rs 4 4DTdt 5 4 9EUeu 6 amp 6 F Vf v 7 76 Ng w 8 8H Xh x 9 SIYiy A xoa Z3 B K ka C f L 6 1 8 D M me E oe MN Osa F
20. Menu bar widget NULL No command window NULL No horizontal scrollbar NULL No vertical scrollbar phigs_widget Work area Widgets must be realized before the call to popenws ui XtRealizeWidget top level return phigs widget 10 18 OpenGL Workstation PEX Workstation 11 PEX Workstation DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS use the DECwindows and OSF Motif Toolkits for input support when you use PEX for output Workstation type 241 uses the OSF Motif Toolkit for input and PEX for output Workstation type 221 uses the DECwindows Toolkit for input and PEX for output PEX devices are supported only on X11 servers that support the PEX X11 extension 11 1 Environment Options Table 11 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with the PEX workstations Table 11 1 PEX Environment Options Syntax Description Anti Aliasing GKS ANTI ALIASING Specifies the anti aliasing mode in the range 0 to 3 See GKSanti aliasing Section 11 2 2 for detailed information on using anti aliasing on PHIGS ANTI_ALIASING PEX devices PHIGSanti aliasing For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to enable anti aliasing mode 1 as follows DEFINE PHIGS ANTI ALIASING 1 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable to disable anti aliasing as follows setenv GKSanti aliasing 0 Retum Clear the Image and Z Buffer PHIGS CLEAR
21. occas ous coed bru UR bode ae E vae hee boda s 4 25 4 43 Customization ecd eee raded dee eede eeeracea dee x ue 4 26 4 13 1 Use of Xd fa lts Files eoe E EE RS ee 4 26 4 13 2 Widget Hierarchies 0 cece eee 4 28 4 14 Internationalization 0 ccc cee eee eee teens 4 32 4 15 DEC GKS Sample Application 0 0 000 0 eee 4 32 5 HPPCL Workstation 5 1 Environment Options llle 5 2 Valid Bit Mask Values 0 0 0 0 cc eee ee 5 2 1 Device Queues and Allocation 0 0 0 cee ee eee 5 3 Printer Resolutions 45 2 m doen Re Ha ew ee REE Sw aN S 5 4 File Format iugzu e dq bbexe se E we euo DEN SU Page Pa seda C EU 5 5 Performance Notes llle es 6 LCGO01 Workstation 6 1 Environment Options lees 6 2 Valid Bit Mask Values 0 0 0 ccc eee 6 3 Device Queues and Allocation llle 6 4 Pattern and Hatch Values 0 0 0 cece ee eee 6 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 0 000 cece eee 6 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS 7 LJ250 and LA324 Workstation d Environment Options lees 7 2 Valid Bit Mask Values 0 0 cc Ih 7 3 Device Considerations 0 ccc eee eee 7 4 Pattern and Hatch Values 0 0 cc cc eee eae 7 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 0 0000 ccc eee 7 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS 8 LVP16 and HP GL Graph
22. 0 0 ZK 3006 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 21 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 17 LVP16 Font Number 5037 Font 5037 Precision 0 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 A 0 gpp 1 i1 4 AQaadq 2 e BAbr 3 i 3 L 8S 68 4 A4DrTdt 5 425 E EUeu 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 76 Wg w 8 8H Xh x 9 9IYiy A x JzZjz B Kik c L1L Nh D Me em e E gt gt N n F 0__o0 8 22 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation string B C D E F ZK 3007 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 18 LVP16 Font Number 5038 Font 5038 Precision string 0 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F 0 6g p p 1 1 0a qg 2 2 BRobr 3 3 CSc 4 4DTdt 5 25 E Ueu 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 76 Wg Ww 8 8H Xhx 9 9SIYiy A x JZjz B K KkGA amp C Lcb ak D M nm6 E gt N n F 00 ZK 3008 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 23 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 19 LVP16 Font Number 5039 Font 5039 Precision 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 0 0 0 P p 1 1 1 Ada qg 2 2 BRobr 3 3CScs 4 4DTdt 5 25 E EUeu 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 76 Wg w 8 8H Xh x 9 SIYiy A x d x Z B t KEtkea C L 0128 D M m E gt Ne 3 F 0 0 8 24 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation string B C
23. 00 eee ns 10 2 1 HLHSR Mechanism Support for OpenGL Devices 10 2 2 Anti Aliasing Modes llli elles 10 3 Workstation Type Values llle 10 4 Programming Considerations 0 00 eee eee ee eee 10 4 1 General Information 0 0 0000 eens 10 5 Input Information 4 229 tae ERs Rr RR ESAS UR ERR Re 10 6 Font Support dccem ree qwe ee eee kote noe a Oud d ds ot os 10 7 H8C DOS 2h ang coRak oe ado RR ORE CORRS OREN REG GE EEDA EEG CE 10 8 imitations 4 3 4 2 6 denn ae dd ote ROE ee HOw deals Pare dee we aya OOS 10 9 Examples 5549225220 wold we coe Sha ue GE Ra Gees Chadds Seas PEX Workstation 11 4 Environment Options l l 11 2 Connection Identifier s scrie erimesi nen i RAKE eee ene 11 2 1 HLHSR Mechanism Support for PEX Devices 05 11 2 2 Anti Aliasing Modes llle 11 2 2 1 PXG Accelerators ss ode m Ree o geb ure eee 11 2 2 2 VAXstation SPXg and SPXgt Accelerators 11 2 2 3 SFB Accelerators os oues ee Rr oe oes X Re e i we 11 2 2 4 ZLX Accelerators llle 11 8 Workstation Type Values llle 11 3 1 Opening Multiple Motif Workstations 00000 00 11 4 Programming Considerations llle 11 4 1 GeneralInformation eee es 11 5 Input Information 11e dusk Re dr OR Rue Se eR 11 6 Lighting Support for DEC PHIGS 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee TL Font Support aX UE Gb ed oh ce See AO ee ends Ree ee
24. 10 Bundles in color DDIF in color 3 4 Index 1 C Cap line A 1 Cell arrays DECwindows restriction 4 12 17 7 OSF Motif restriction 9 12 CGM environment option connection identifier 2 2 font element list 2 2 workstation type 2 2 environment options 2 1 CGM metafiles 2 1 Character descriptor A 6 elements A 7 Characters fonts A 1 Choice DECwindows 4 16 keypad functionality E 8 E 9 logical input device numbers E 2 OSF Motif 9 16 ReGIS devices 13 5 Tektronix 4014 15 5 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 9 Choice input VWS 17 12 Circle Center and Point on Circumference 101 C 9 Circle Center and Radius C103 C 11 Circle Three Points on Circumference 102 C 10 Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius 104 C 12 Circumference See also GDPs ellipse C 5 Clear image environment option PEX 11 1 Color reservation VSII GPX 1 2 table dynamics 9 9 table size 9 9 defining 4 10 VWS workstation mapping 17 2 Color cube environment option PEX 11 5 11 6 Color indexes DDIF 3 4 Color map environment option DECwindows 4 6 PEX 9 6 11 2 11 7 Index 2 Color map cont d size environment option VWS 17 1 Color map size environment option DECwindows 4 2 OSF Motif 9 1 Color reservation DDIF 3 4 Colors DDIF 3 1 DDIF mapping 3 2 DECwindows mapping 4 9 environment option PEX 11 5 OSF Motif mapping 9 8 pseudo PEX 11 6 workstations
25. 16 9 locator devices on VWS 17 13 lock key E 9 OSF Motif 9 15 pick devices on DECwindows 4 18 pick devices on OSF Motif 9 17 pick devices on Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 10 pick devices on VWS 17 13 ReGIS devices 13 5 string devices on DECwindows 4 18 string devices on OSF Motif 9 18 string devices on Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 11 string devices on VWS 17 14 string input control characters E 4 stroke devices on DECwindows 4 19 stroke devices on OSF Motif 9 19 stroke devices on Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 12 stroke devices on VWS 17 15 Tektronix 4014 15 5 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 6 valuator devices on DECwindows 4 20 valuator devices on OSF Motif 9 19 valuator devices on Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 13 valuator devices on VWS 17 15 VWS 17 12 zoning mechanism E 7 Input devices OpenGL 10 12 PEX 11 15 Input mode environment option DECwindows 4 5 OSF Motif 9 4 Inquire Background Pixmap 503 B 95 Inquire BQUM Flags 526 B 122 Inquire BQUM Range 524 B 118 Inquire Closest Color 516 B 105 Inquire Current Display Speed 300 B 52 Inquire Current Edge Attributes C254 B 48 Inquire Current Line Cap Style 252 B 46 Inquire Current Line Join Style C253 B 47 Inquire Current Writing Mode 251 B 45 Inquire Default Display Speed 351 B 67 Inquire Double Buffer Buffers C513 B 102 Inquire Double Buffer Pixmap 502 B 94 Inquire Edge Facilities C354 B 70 Inquire
26. 320 DEC FrankRuhl Medium R 321 DEC FrankRuhl Medium O 322 DEC FrankRuhl Bold R 323 DEC FrankRuhl Bold O 824 DEC Terminal Medium R Normal I1SO08859 8 325 DEC Terminal Medium R DoubleWide ISO8859 8 326 DEC Terminal Medium R Narrow ISO8859 8 327 DEC Terminal Medium R Wide ISO8859 8 328 DEC Terminal Bold R Normal ISO8859 8 329 DEC Terminal Bold R DoubleWide ISO08859 8 330 9 24 OSF Motif Workstation OSF Motif Workstation 9 12 Font Support X Font Name Font Index DEC Terminal Bold R Narrow ISO8859 8 331 DEC Terminal Bold R Wide 1808859 8 332 J DECW Screen JISX0201 RomanKana 10001 JDECW Screen JISX0208 Kanjill 10001 JDECW Mincho JISX0201 1976 0 10101 J DECW Mincho JISX0208 1983 1 10101 JDECW Gothic JISX0201 1976 0 10102 JDECW Gothic JISX0208 1983 1 10102 9 13 UIL Files Much of the widget creation logic is written in User Interface Language UIL When the UIL files are compiled a User Interface Database UID file is created At startup widgets are fetched out of the UID database There are two UID files one containing most of the widget definitions and a language specific file The language specific file contains text strings font specification and may contain text direction The UID files for DEC GKS are e gks uid The UID files for DEC PHIGS a
27. 9 16 DEC GKS Sample Application For a DEC GKS sample program performing pick input using workstation type 233 see the DEC GKS development kit The program GKS_PICK233 samples the pick input device creates a simple detectable pickable segment and puts the pick input device into sample mode OSF Motif Workstation 9 31 OpenGL Workstation 10 OpenGL Workstation DEC PHIGS uses the OSF Motif Toolkit for input support when you use OpenGL devices for output OpenGL devices are supported only on X11 servers that support the OpenGL X11 extension Before using an OpenGL device you should read this chapter and Chapter 9 Note DEC GKS does not currently support the OpenGL X11 extension 10 1 Environment Options Table 10 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with the OpenGL workstations Table 10 1 OpenGL Environment Options Syntax Description Anti Aliasing PHIGS ANTI ALIASING Specifies the anti aliasing mode 0 1 or 3 See Section 10 2 2 PHIGSanti aliasing for detailed information on using anti aliasing on OpenGL devices For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to enable anti aliasing mode 1 as follows DEFINE PHIGSSANTI ALIASING 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable to disable anti aliasing as follows Q setenv PHIGSanti_aliasing 0 Return continued on next page OpenGL Workstation 10 1 OpenGL Work
28. Input Values E 3 Input Values E 2 Logical Input Devices E 2 3 Pick Devices The following section describes the pick class logical devices and specifies which DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations support each device E 2 3 1 Pick 1 2 3 and 4 Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN For workstations that do not have a mouse or puck these devices require you to press the arrow keys to move the pick aperture The workstation marks the currently picked segments or portions of segments by outlining the extent rectangle of all or part of the segment To trigger the device press Return To cause a break during request mode press Ctrl U For workstations that do have a mouse or puck these devices require you to move the tracking device to move the pick aperture To trigger the device press the left button To cause a break during request mode press the middle button on the mouse and the top button on the puck On Digital ReGIS terminals and on the Tektronix 4107 workstations you can use the numeric keypad as a zoning mechanism using device numbers 1 and 2 For more information concerning the numeric keypad see Section E 3 E 2 4 String Devices The following sections describe the string class logical input devices and specify which DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations support each device E 2 4 1 String 1 and 4 Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of cat
29. continued on next page Mathematical Concepts for DEC PHIGS F 1 Mathematical Concepts for DEC PHIGS Table F 1 Cont Variable Definitions for the Lighting Equations Symbol Description Data Type Source Ve Unit vector from object to eye Array of three reals 2 point Vn Unit normal vector to object Normal 3 Vr Unit reflection vector from object Array of three reals 2 Vi Unit vector from object to light Array of three reals 2 source The sources in the preceding table are defined as follows Source Description 1 Light source representation 2 Calculated 3 Explicit or derived from object geometry 4 Color table direct color vertex color back face color 5 Surface or back face surface properties F 1 Lighting Equations The dot character in the following equations represents the inner product of the two operands Total color sum color contribution from each light source Color contribution from a light source Ca Cg Cg For ambient light sources Ca Ka Lc K Og Ca 0 Cs 0 For directional light sources Ca 0 Cd Kd Od Lc Vm V1 Cg Kg Os Le Ve Vr 0e For positional light sources Ca 0 Cd K Og Lc Vw V1 La Cg Kg Og Lc Ve Vr Oe La For spot light sources Ca 0 Cg Kq Og Le Vn V1 hg V1 Le La 4 Cg Kg Og Lc Ve Vr Oe Lg V1 Le La 4 For spot light sourc
30. num_edge_types number_edge_widths num_indexes address of real array nom_edge_width min_edge_width max_edge_width address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description The workstation type 354 Inquire Edge Facilities The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status The error status total_edge_types The total number of edge types available num_edge_types The number of edge types returned num_edge_widths The number of edge widths available num_indexes The number of predefined edge bundle table entries nom_edge_width The nominal edge width min_edge_width The minimum edge width max_edge_width The maximum edge width Escapes B 71 355 Inquire Predefined Edge Representation 355 Inquire Predefined Edge Representation B 72 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes the predefined edge bundle information for the specified workstation type to the output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer ar
31. number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 530 Set View Dirty Flag The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id num_views view_id1 dirty_flag1 view_id2 dirty_flag2 view_id_last dirty_flag_last The workstation identifier The number of views to set The first view identifier The first view dirty flag The second view identifier The second view dirty flag The last view identifier The last view dirty flag Escapes B 125 531 Inquire View Dirty Flag 531 Inquire View Dirty Flag B 126 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All This escape allows the application to inquire which views in a workstation will be repainted when DEC PHIGS updates the workstation If the number of integers in the output integer array is less than 33 DEC PHIGS stores as many flags as possible starting with view 0 ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data out_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 33 number of reals 0 n
32. output only 88 xnnnn0058 Tektronix 4129 and Digital VS500 workstations The value in the first part nnnn specifies the number of SYN characters written to the terminal in between primitive generations For instance if your terminal is running at 9600 baud you should specify five SYN characters by defining the first part of the bit mask as 0005 The second part of the bit mask 00WW contains the hexadecimal value for example 56 for an input output device and 57 for an output only device of the workstation type These hexadecimal values correspond to the decimal workstation type values for example 86 for an output only terminal and 87 for an input output device When using the decimal workstation type values 80 83 85 and 87 you can pass a file specification to the connection identifier argument to the OPEN WORKSTATION function After program execution type the file at your terminal to view the generated picture 16 3 Programming Considerations You should review the following sections before programming with DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS using the Tektronix 4100 series or the 4207 workstation Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 3 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 3 Programming Considerations 16 3 1 Setup Requirement When using DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS with the devices listed at the beginning of this chapter you need to set the setup command FLAGGING to the value IN OUT at the setup p
33. 1 2 and 3 See Appendix D for more information on hardware dials and buttons support For DECwindows devices key F1 through F6 are available and are returned as choice numbers 21 through 26 See Appendix E for more information on keypad functionality Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the DECwindows workstation choice class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial choice 1 Initial status STATUS_OK Echo area Varies by device Data record Varies by device list of choice strings 4 10 2 Locator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported locator class logical input devices for the DECwindows workstation Locator Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 7 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 5 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 2 6 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 3 8 Movement is selection and trigger Supported PETs The locator input class for the DECwindows workstation supports PETs 13 DEC GKS only 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 See the chapter on input functions in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETS Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the DECwindows workstation
34. 1 Convert your arrays to data records The include files contain language specific escape data records 2 Make sure you are passing both an input and output record In previous versions of DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS you could have a 0 size output data record when no data was to be returned Using both input and output data records allows DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS to distinguish the old format from the new format 3 Load the appropriate sections of the data record for the escape to be performed Make sure to enter 0 in all counts that are not used and make sure unused pointers are a safe invalid value such as NULL in C This is true for both the input and output data records even if they are not used If the escape is one of the escapes listed in Section B 1 1 you must rearrange some of the data 4 Make sure the sizes passed for the data records are correct especially if your sizes were previously hardcoded Use a compiler or language feature such as the C sizeof operator to get the size in bytes because the size will vary depending on the architecture and operating system B 1 1 New Escape Record Definitions B 2 Escapes Digital UNIX supports only the new escape record format Escapes that previously passed pointers or objects such as X11 identifiers declared long in C will require the most changes These escapes are as follows e Inquire Background Pixmap 503 e Inquire Closest Color 516 e Inquire Double B
35. 1 Highlight the segment by drawing it in complement mode 2 Highlight the segment by drawing it using the color index specified in the integer array 3 Highlight the segment by drawing an extent box around it using the line attributes specified in the integer and float arrays The extent box is drawn using complement mode The extent will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width 4 Highlight the segment by drawing a complement mode fill area around it using the fill area attributes specified in the integer array The extent box will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width 5 Highlight the segment by drawing both a line and fill area around it using the attributes specified The extent box will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width If the highlighting method is not available on the workstation on which the segment is displayed the default value of 0 is used Escapes B 59 306 Inquire Highlighting Method 306 Inquire Highlighting Method B 60 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes the values of the current primitive highlighting method and attributes to its output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real
36. 1 Introduction 1 1 Capabilities of Supported Devices l l 1 2 Using Workstation Type Modifiers llle 1 3 Using Constant Names for Workstation Types and Connection Identifiers 122i rr RR eee de KOREA HEAR ORG E Ur e E 1 4 Supported Workstations uui me e Rx eur dex 1 5 Supported Fonts caseo hace DER ERRARE EEG HE ea 1 6 Predefined Bundle Table Indexes for DEC GKS 1 7 Predefined Bundle Table Indexes for DEC PHIGS 1 8 Color and Bundle Indexes llle 1 9 Device Independent HLHSR Mechanisms Support 1 10 Lighting Support for DEC PHIGS 0 0 2 eee eee eee 1 11 Depth Cueing Support for DEC PHIGS 02 0005 1 12 Pattern Support for DEC GKS 0 0 0 0 cee ee 1 13 Generalized Structure Elements 0 0 0 0 0c ccc ee ene 1 14 Pixel Inquiries for DEC GKS 2 2 0 ee eee 1 15 Device Coordinate Information for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS 1 16 Environment Options 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 2 CGM Output 2 1 Computer Graphics Metafiles llle 2 2 Environment Options llle 2 3 Valid Bit Mask Values 1 0 cee ees 2 4 Differences Between DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS and CGM 2 5 CGM Structure swere dika 2b date erad Oe 4 9 qure E ao a bodanade 2 6 Character Encoding 0 ccc cece eee EEEE EEEE 2 7 Clear Text Encoding s ese Gs ss tias tEn IVERS Ea ee ea Hw 2 8 Elem
37. 113 C 23 Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors C114 C 24 Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc 116 C 26 End Transformation Block 161 B 32 Environment options 1 2 CGM 2 1 Environment variables 1 2 Errors GDPs C 3 Escapes B 1 to B 131 110 Associate Workstation Type and Connection Identifier B 14 attribute Inquire Edge Representation B 77 Set Edge Aspect Source Flag B 29 Set Edge Color Index B 27 Set Edge Index B 28 Set Edge Representation B 38 Set Edge Type B 24 Set Edge Width Scale Factor B 26 Set Highlighting Method B 35 Set Line Cap Style B 19 Set Line Join Style B 21 Set Segment Highlighting Method B 33 Set Writing Mode B 17 103 Beep B 8 160 Begin Transformation Block B 31 164 Begin Transformation Block 3 B 37 control Associate Workstation Type and Connection Identifier B 14 Beep B 8 Generate Hardcopy of Workstation Surface B 7 Pop Workstation B 9 Push Workstation B 10 Set Connection Identifier String B 90 Set Display Speed B 6 Set Error Handling Mode B 11 Set Viewport Event B 12 Software Clipping B 16 data records B 1 to B 2 DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif Inquire Background Pixmap B 95 Inquire Closest Color B 105 Inquire Double Buffer Buffers B 102 Inquire Double Buffer Pixmap B 94 Inquire Menu Bar Identifier B 63 Inquire Pasteboard Identifier B 62 Inquire Shell Identifier B 64 Escapes DECwindows PEX
38. 14 4 precision with stroke A 3 C bI T b o H y 9 A K do IO b X A B M H a D E 6 H O B E I m D T gm e K II BI ZK 1587 GE Figure A 21 Large Complex Roman o S9 cH d 4 5 Font 15 wi o He ES H I th stroke R S Device Independent Fonts f E A 6 Device Independent Fonts precision ZK 1588 GE Device Independent Fonts A 23 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 22 Large Complex Italic Put 4 o D bi 6 7 8 f 9 Kc 0 IMEEM 2 A 24 Device Independent Fonts 16 with stroke precision du d a t 2 3 lt p H I D R S SS No x X J 9 M U ZK 1589 GE Figure A 23 Large Gothic German NS Fe Ss m Font 17 S with o G S Ge e A c oO stroke e e iF R B B e oo amp Device Independent Fonts f A 6 Device Independent Fonts precision p 3 q S r OB 8B t 3 it D fo x Y Device Independent Fonts A 25 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 24 Large Gothic English Font 18 with stroke precision d i H R p
39. 62 63 64 65 Vertical lines sparse 50 Vertical lines sparse 75 Vertical lines very fine 50 Vertical lines 25 Vertical lines 50 Vertical lines 75 Horizontal lines sparse 6 25 Horizontal lines sparse 12 5 Horizontal lines sparse 50 Horizontal lines sparse 75 Horizontal lines very fine 50 Horizontal lines 25 Horizontal lines 50 Horizontal lines 75 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 6 25 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 12 5 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 50 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 75 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 25 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 50 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 75 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 6 25 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 12 5 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 50 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 75 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 25 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 50 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 7596 Sparsely woven grid Sparsely woven grid Sparsely woven grid Sparsely woven grid Sparsely woven grid Downward scales fish like Downward scales fish like 9 11 Input Information Each of the following input class sections lists the supported logical input device numbers and supported prompt and echo type PET numbers This input class information also applies to OSF Motif software on PEX workstations For a complete desc
40. Allows you to pass printer specific information to the handler In the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS syntax nn refers to the decimal value of the particular PostScript device See Section 12 4 2 for more information on printer description files To use the printer description file on an OpenVMS system give the file any valid device specification for example 61 After you create the file define a logical name as shown for DEC PHIGS DEFINE PHIGS PS_DESCRIPTION_61 filename ext Retum To use the printer description file on UNIX systems give the file any valid device specification such as 62 After you create the file define an environment variable as shown for DEC GKS setenv GKSps description 62 filename ext Retum Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the monochrome PostScript printer workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSS WSTYPE 61 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the color PostScript printer workstation type as follows setenv GKSwstype 62 Return 12 2 Valid Bit Mask Values When using the PostScript graphics handler you can use bit masks to specify the workstation type value The following bit masks are valid f
41. GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes the value of the current line join style see 152 Set Line Join Style to its output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error status join style address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error status The error status join style The line join style See the appropriate language definition file for the list of values for this element Escapes B 47 254 Inquire Current Edge Attributes 254 Inquire Current Edge Attributes B 48 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes all the values of the curren
42. MPS 2000 8 1 Rectangle Two Corners C125 C 28 Reds environment option PEX 11 6 ReGIS device coordinate information 1 13 environment options 13 1 connection identifier 13 1 workstation type 13 1 environment variables 13 1 logical names 13 1 pixel inquiries 1 13 workstation type 13 2 ReGIS devices 13 1 to 13 10 choice input 13 5 hatch values 13 4 locator input 13 6 logical input devices 13 5 mode restrictions 13 4 pattern support 13 4 pick input 13 7 string input 13 8 stroke input 13 8 valuator input 13 9 writing screen messages 13 4 Render Element Range 532 B 128 Resize mode environment option DECwindows 4 5 OSF Motif 9 5 Resolution of HPPCL printers 5 3 of sixel printers 14 7 RMS CGM metafile structure 2 13 Rotation GDPs C 3 S Scalable fonts environment option OSF Motif 9 5 Set Anti Alias Mode 508 B 96 Set Background Pixmap 501 B 93 Set BQUM Flags 525 B 120 Set BQUM Range 523 B 115 Set Cancel String C204 B 41 Set Connection Identifier String C440 B 90 Set Display Speed 100 B 6 Set Double Buffering 500 B 92 Set Edge Aspect Source Flag ASF C158 B 29 Set Edge Color Index C156 B 27 Set Edge Control Flag 153 B 23 Set Edge Index C157 B 28 Set Edge Representation 200 B 38 Set Edge Type 154 B 24 Set Edge Width Scale Factor C155 B 26 Set Enter String 205 B 42 Set Error Handling Mode C108 B 11 Set
43. Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape sets the current edge width factor entry in the DEC GKS state list to the specified value This escape is functionally equivalent to the SET EDGEWIDTH SCALE FACTOR function ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 0 number of reals 1 number of strings 0 address of integer array 0 address of real array scale factor address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description scale factor A real number greater than 0 that specifies the edge width scale factor 156 Set Edge Color Index 156 Set Edge Color Index Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape sets the current edge color index entry in the DEC GKS state list to the specif
44. Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations This escape sets the double buffering state to either ON or OFF For DECwindows and OSF Motif workstations if double buffering is turned ON using the escape function an optional third integer should exist If the third integer is not present the pixmap is initialized by copying the pixmap from the window If the third integer is present and equal to the value 1 the pixmap is explicitly cleared and initialized by redrawing from the display list ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id control_flag address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier control_flag A flag that indicates whethe
45. Tektronix 16 2 Tektronix 4014 15 1 Index 18 Workstation type environment option cont d VS500 16 2 HPPCL 5 2 LCG01 6 2 LJ250 and LA324 printers 7 2 LVP16 and HP GL 8 2 OpenGL 10 9 OSF Motif 9 8 PEX 11 13 ReGIS 13 2 sixel graphics 14 2 size environment option VWS 17 2 Tektronix 4014 15 2 Tektronix and VS500 16 3 VWS 17 2 Workstation types connection identifier 4 12 9 12 Workstation type values OpenGL 10 10 PEX 11 13 Workstation Value 220 11 13 Workstation Value 221 11 14 Workstation value 222 11 14 Workstation value 223 11 14 Workstation Value 240 11 13 Workstation Value 241 11 14 Workstation value 242 11 14 Workstation value 243 11 14 Workstation Value 270 10 10 Workstation Value 271 10 10 Workstation value 272 10 10 Workstation value 273 10 11 X X event handling 11 15 Z Zoning input cursor E 7
46. U UID search path environment option DECwindows 4 8 OSF Motif 9 7 V Valid bit mask values 1 2 Valuator DECwindows 4 20 logical input device numbers E 5 OSF Motif 9 19 ReGIS devices 13 9 Tektronix 4014 15 8 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 13 Valuator input VWS 17 15 VAXstation OpenVMS Workstation Software 17 3 Vector origin point C 4 See also GDPs transformations C 4 Vectors GDPs C 3 Vertex array extension environment option OpenGL 10 5 Virtual color map DDIF 3 2 DECwindows 4 9 OSF Motif 9 8 VWS workstation 17 2 Visual depth environment option OpenGL 10 5 Visual properties environment option OpenGL 10 6 VS500 environment options connection identifier 16 2 workstation type 16 2 VT125 13 1 to 13 10 bit masks 13 2 choice input device numbers E 2 choice keypad functionality E 8 keypad zoning during input E 7 keypad zoning mechanism E 5 string input device numbers E 5 VT240 13 1 to 13 10 bit masks 13 2 choice input device numbers E 2 choice keypad functionality E 8 E 9 keypad zoning during input E 7 keypad zoning mechanism E 5 string input device numbers E 5 VT330 13 1 to 13 10 bit masks 13 2 VT340 13 1 to 13 10 bit masks 13 2 color map bit mask 13 3 VWS 17 1 to 17 20 bit masks 17 2 choice input 17 12 default input values 17 12 depth cueing F 3 device considerations 17 4 device coordinate information 1 13 environment opt
47. Workstation type 271 performs input and output and uses the OSF Motif Toolkit Because of a restriction in the OSF Motif Toolkit your application may not initialize this toolkit if it uses workstation type 271 In addition you should not select events on any windows created by the DEC PHIGS workstation You can create widgets that are children of some widgets belonging to the DEC PHIGS workstation Escape functions are provided to obtain the identifiers of these widgets When the user or window manager resizes workstations of type 271 the picture may be clipped at the new window boundaries A push button on the menu bar enables the user to restore the window to its default size and location Scroll bars enable the user to pan the displayable region of a clipped picture OpenGL Window Value 272 Workstation type 272 uses a pre existing drawable and is output only Before opening the workstation you must perform the following steps 1 Open the X display 2 Obtain a visual that is valid for use with OpenGL You can obtain a visual of the correct type by using the glXChooseVisual or glGetConfig function Refer to Section 10 9 for an example of using the glXChooseVisual function to obtain a visual 3 Create a color map You will probably need to create a color map for use with the visual 4 Create a drawable using the visual type obtained in step 2 You can then pass the drawable to the OPEN WORKSTATION function Be sure to call
48. address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id The workstation identifier clip flag A flag that determines whether software clipping is always used 1 or used only if hardware clipping is unavailable 0 150 Set Writing Mode 150 Set Writing Mode Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP Supporting Workstations ReGIS DECwindows OSF Motif PEX LJ250 LA324 and LCGO01 workstations This escape sets the current writing mode entry for all subsequently drawn primitives that use this facility An example of a writing mode is complement mode which reverses the foreground and background colors when text is generated The initial writing mode is 1 which is workstation dependent If a workstation cannot implement a specified writing mode DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS uses mode number 1 ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers DEC GKS 1 or DEC PHIGS 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array DEC GKS wr mode or DEC PHIGS ws id wr mode address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NU
49. address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements 110 Associate Workstation Type and Connection Identifier Component Description ws type The workstation identifier set A flag used to define 1 or to cancel 0 an association length conid The length of the connection identifier string conid The connection identifier string Escapes B 15 111 Software Clipping 111 Software Clipping B 16 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All workstations Because some hardware may not correctly clip very large primitives you can force DEC GKS to use software clipping in some cases DEC GKS uses hardware clipping by default if the graphics device has this capability The parameter clip flag controls this behavior ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id clip flag address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0
50. address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description edge index The edge index 158 Set Edge Aspect Source Flag ASF 158 Set Edge Aspect Source Flag ASF Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape establishes the aspect source flag ASF setting for each of the edge attributes Each flag can either be bundled value 0 use the bundled attributes or individual value 1 use the individual attributes All initial ASF flags are set to individual ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 4 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array asf flags address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL
51. enabled The change takes effect at the next structure traversal or at the next call to the immediate mode function BEGIN RENDERING In structure mode DEC PHIGS automatically makes multiple passes during structure traversal to render the opaque and transparent polygons In immediate mode the application needs to make multiple passes to render the opaque and transparent polygons The immediate mode function END RENDERING returns either SUCCESS indicates normal completion or ERROR NEG 1717 indicates another pass is needed ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id transparency flag address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 113 522 Set Transparency The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier transparency_flag A flag spec
52. number of strings 0 address of integer array segment name high method color index linetype fill style fill index address of real array line width expand factor address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 33 162 Set Segment Highlighting Method B 34 Escapes The input data record contains the following elements Component Description segment_name high_method color_index linetype fill_style fill_index line_width expand_factor The name of the segment for which the highlighting attributes are to be set The highlighting method The color index to use with the highlighting method color The line type to use with the highlighting method The fill area attributes to use with the highlighting method The fill index to use with the highlighting method The line width scale factor for the line drawn around the extent of the item being highlighted The distance the highlighted region should extend around the item
53. out_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 3 num escapes number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error_status total_escapes ret_escapes escape_list address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_type The workstation type Escapes B 65 350 Inquire List of Available Escapes B 66 Escapes The output data record contains the following elements Component Description num_escapes error_status total_escapes ret_escapes escape_list Number of elements escapes you want returned Inquiry error status Total number of escapes supported by the workstation type Number of escape identifiers written to the remaining elements of the output data record s integer array Identifiers of the supported escapes 351 Inquire Default Display Speed 351 Inquire Default Display Speed Operating States
54. the two to establish the distance and direction of the major axis and a second axis vector to establish the distance of the minor axis GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 4 pts_array center point vector origin point and minor and major axis vectors gdp_id 843 data rec number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance one of the vectors may have a length of 0 GDPs C 43 345 Filled Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference 345 Filled Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference C 44 GDPs Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the ellipse using the two focal points and a single point on the circumference GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 3 pts_array two focal points and the point on the circumference gdp_id 345 data_rec number of integers 0 data_rec_len number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real a
55. the value of the existing pixel When you use arbitrary colors overlapping lines are distorted because the numerical value of a pixel is not necessarily a good indication of pixel brightness For example the values of pixels within a PseudoColor visual are indices into a color map rather than color values themselves It is the client s responsibility to set up the color map appropriately Anti aliasing is enabled when the HLHSR MODE is set to OFF When the HLHSR MODE mode is set to ZBUFFER anti aliasing is suppressed e Mode 2 Lines are 2 5 pixels wide DEC PHIGS blends the anti aliased lines from the line color to the anti aliasing background color color table entry 0 DEC PHIGS writes all pixels of a line regardless of existing pixel values Anti aliasing is enabled when the HLHSR MODE is set to OFF When the HLHSR MODE mode is set to ZBUFFER anti aliasing is suppressed e Mode 3 DEC PHIGS performs essentially the same operation as in mode 1 except it blends each pixel on the anti aliased line with the anti alias background color color table entry 0 rather than with the contents of the frame buffer All pixels are written regardless of their computed value This mode is useful for erasing anti aliasing lines in immediate mode as the line color must be set to the background color to erase an anti aliased line 11 12 PEX Workstation PEX Workstation 11 2 Connection Identifier 11 2 2 4 ZLX Accelerators For PEX server
56. used with this escape 153 Set Edge Control Flag 153 Set Edge Control Flag Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape sets the current edge flag entry in the DEC GKS state list to the specified value This escape is functionally equivalent to the SET EDGE FLAG function ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array edge flag address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description edge flag A flag specifying whether edges are on 1 or off 0 Escapes B 23 154 Set Edge Type 154 Set Edge Type B 24 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape sets th
57. 00 P p 1 1 1 A0a dq 2 2 BRobr 3 3CS cs 4 4DTdt 5 5 Ueu 6 amp 6 F Vf v 7 76 Ng w 8 8HXh x 9 SIYiy A x JZjz B K K co CL E1 D Mag m E gt Na n F 0_ 0 ZK 2094 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 9 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 5 LVP16 Font Number 5004 Font 5004 Precislon string 0 1 2 38 458789 A B C D E F 0 0 0 P p 1 1 1 Ada qg 2 2 BRbr 3 i 3 S amp S s 4 4DTdt 5 25 E EUeu 6 amp 6 F Vf v 7 76Wgw 8 8H Xh xX 9 S9IYiy A x JZjz B KIK C z wb dX D Mj M E gt N n F 9 0 0 8 10 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 6 LVP16 Font Number 5006 Font 5006 Precision string 0 12 8 4 56 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 08 P p 1 1 1A 0a dq 2 2 BRobor 3 3CSces 4 4DTdt 5 25 EUeu 6 amp 6F Vf v 7 76 Wg w 8 8H Xh x 9 SIYiy A x JZjz B K k C 4 lt L d D M m E gt N p F 0_o LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 11 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 7 LVP16 Font Number 5007 Font 0 12 28 0 1 2 3 E 4 5 6 iN 7 lf 8 E 9 ME A a B ow C D 8 E f F 8 12 LVP16 and HP GL Graph
58. 1 Using Vector Origin Points Radius Center Vector Origin 0 0 Angles Radius 0 0 Vector Origin ZK 5929 GE The following information applies to specific types of GDPs Arc When forming an arc the DEC GKS GDPs begin at the first specified arc point and move towards the second point in a counterclockwise direction Ellipse You can form an ellipse in two ways First you can pass the center point and two axis vectors to GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE DEC GKS calculates which vector specifies the greater distance and uses both the distance and angle values to form the major axis Then DEC GKS calculates the distance specified by the second vector and uses the distance for the minor axis GDPs C 5 GDPs C 2 Generalized Drawing Primitives GDPs To form an ellipse a second way you can pass the two focal points and one point on the circumference of the ellipse to GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE If you pass the focal points to GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE DEC GKS uses the following formula to form the ellipse focal_l point focal_2 point 2a The letter a equals the distance from the center point to the circumference along the major axis Figure C 2 illustrates the formation of an ellipse Figure C 2 Forming an Ellipse P Center point and major Sum of distances from focal and minor axes points to any point equals 2a ZK 5788 GE C 3 List of GDP Identifiers C 6 GDPs This appendix presents the
59. 13 1 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 1 Environment Options Table 13 1 Cont ReGIS Environment Options Syntax Description Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the Digital color VT240 workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYPE 13 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the Digital monochrome VT125 workstation type as follows setenv GKSwstype 12 Retum 13 2 Valid Bit Mask Values When using the ReGIS graphics handler you can use bit masks to specify the workstation type values The following sections describe the ReGIS uses for bit masks 13 2 1 ReGIS Bit Masks Use the following bit masks to specify the type of ReGIS terminal in use Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 10 x0000000A ReGIS output to a file see Section 13 2 2 11 x0000000B Digital VT125 color 12 x0000000C Digital VT125 monochrome 13 x0000000D Digital VT240 color 14 x0000000E Digital VT240 monochrome 16 x00000010 Digital VT330 monochrome 17 x00000011 Digital VT340 color mouse or tablet 110 x0000006E Japanese ReGIS output to a file see Section 13 2 2 113 x00000071 Digital VT286
60. 202 Wide Taber 0 0 0 0c cece ee eee DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS Font Lines Stroke Font Design Stroke Font File Structure Stroke Font File Header Structure llle Character Descriptor Structure 0 0 eee ees ISO Standard Character Set ISO Standard Character Set Small Simplex Roman and Greek 0 000000 eee Large Simplex Roman Large Simplex Greek Large Simplex Script Medium Duplex Roman Medium Duplex Greek Medium Duplex Italic Large Complex Roman Large Complex Greek Large Complex Italic Large Simplex Roman Large Complex Script Large Complex Cyrillic A 21 Large Complex Roman 0 ccc es A 23 A 22 Large Complex Italic 0 0 0 es A 24 A 23 Large Gothic German csse eR rers Eos A 25 A 24 Large Gothic English llle A 26 A 25 Large Gothic Italian 2 0 es A 27 A 26 Medium Complex Special Characters 0 0 0 0 eee e eee A 28 A 27 Music Astronomy and Business llle ees A 29 A 28 Large Special Characters 0 0 0 ee eee A 30 A 29 Large Special Characters llle lees A 31 A 30 Small Simple Roman 0 0 00 ees A 32 B 1 Integer Data Vector Format llle B 98 C 1 Using Vector Origin Points llle ees C 5 C 2 Forming an Ellipse lese C 6 C 3 GDP IMAGE ARRAY Order of Points 0 000000 eens C 51 D 1 Hardware Dial Box
61. 271 4 Return Vertex Array Extension PHIGS USE GL VERTEX ARRAY EXT PHIGSuse gl vertex array ext Specifies whether the OpenGL vertex array extension is used This interface allows an application to pass geometric data such as polylines polyline sets and fill areas to the server as arrays of data which reduces the call overhead By using this option you can reduce the time required to transmit primitive data from the client to the server especially when you are in OpenGL immediate mode DEC PHIGS structure mode 0 and thus improve performance If the value is 1 the default DEC PHIGS uses the vertex array interface when it is supported by the X server to pass the data to the server If the value is 0 the vertex array interface is not used Instead DEC PHIGS uses the original vertex interface whose individual functions glVertex3f glColor3f and so on are called once for each vertex For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to use the vertex array interface as follows DEFINE PHIGSS USE GL VERTEX ARRAY EXT 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable to use the original vertex interface as follows setenv PHIGSuse gl vertex array ext 0 Return continued on next page OpenGL Workstation 10 5 OpenGL Workstation 10 1 Environment Options Table 10 1 Cont OpenGL Environment Options Syntax Description Visual
62. 4 PostScript 12 4 sixel 14 4 Devices DEC GKS available logical input E 1 DEC GKS specific input values E 1 to E 10 DEC PHIGS available logical input E 1 DEC PHIGS specific input values E 1 to E 10 Index 4 Devices cont d DECwindows 4 1 DECwindows logical input 4 16 Digital VS500 16 1 input ReGIS devices 13 5 Tektronix 4014 15 5 OpenGL 10 1 OSF Motif 9 1 OSF Motif logical input 9 15 PEX 11 1 ReGIS devices 13 1 Tektronix 4014 15 1 Tektronix 4107 16 1 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 logical input 16 6 Tektronix 4128 16 1 Tektronix 4129 16 1 Tektronix 4207 16 1 Dials and buttons See PCM server environment option DECwindows 4 4 OpenGL 10 2 OSF Motif 9 4 PEX 11 4 Digital extension environment option PEX 11 2 Digital UNIX systems system tuning G 11 Digital VS500 16 1 to 16 13 device coordinate information 1 13 pixel inquiries 1 13 Digital workstations string input device numbers E 4 Disjoint Polyline C100 C 8 Display list indices environment option OpenGL 10 2 Double buffering environment option DECwindows 4 3 OpenGL 10 2 OSF Motif 9 2 PEX 11 3 11 4 Dynamics of color table 4 10 9 9 E Echo cycling with disabled input echoing E 7 Echo area titles E 6 Echo types DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS supported 16 6 to 16 13 Ellipse focal points C 6 formation C 5 Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors 111 C 22 Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference
63. 6 INITIALIZE CHOICE D 5 INITIALIZE VALUATOR D 3 on OpenVMS D 1 on UNIX D 2 PET 4 D 3 to D 4 spaceball D 4 starting D 1 supported workstations D 6 Performance tuning G 1 to G 14 on Digital UNIX systems G 11 on OpenVMS Alpha systems G 14 on OpenVMS VAX systems G 11 to G 14 minimum quotas G 11 optimizing G 13 quotas for large applications G 12 PEX 11 1 to 11 16 anti aliasing modes 11 10 bit masks 11 13 connection identifiers 11 9 device coordinate information 1 13 environment options 11 1 anti aliasing 11 1 11 4 clear the image 11 1 connection identifier 11 2 default color map 11 2 dials and buttons 11 4 Digital extension 11 2 double buffering 11 3 fixed colors 11 5 language 11 4 MIT anti aliasing 11 4 number of blues 11 5 number of greens 11 6 number of pseudo colors 11 6 number of reds 11 6 standard color map 9 6 11 7 Index 13 PEX environment options cont d stroke font index 11 7 stroke font list 11 8 structure storage 11 7 workstation type 11 8 environment variables 11 1 escapes 11 16 font support 11 16 input devices 11 15 logical names 11 1 pixel inquiries 1 13 workstation type 11 13 PHIGS multinational font A 1 predefined bundle table indexes 1 8 PHIGS VWS COLOR MAP SIZE nna 17 3 Pick DECwindows 4 18 keypad zoning of cursor E 7 logical input device numbers E 4 OSF Motif 9 17 ReGIS devices 13 7 Tektronix 4014 15 6 Tektroni
64. Argument Data Description TEXT COLOR 3 5 3 5 Either a color index integer or a set of red green TEXTCOLR and blue intensity values CHARACTER 3 5 3 6 A VDC value specifying character height HEIGHT CHARHEIGHT CHARACTER 3 5 3 7 A pair of x and y directional vector values VDC ORIENTATION CHARORI points that define which way is up and a pair of x and y directional vector values VDC points that define the text base TEXT PATH 3 5 3 8 An enumerated type value that determines the text TEXTPATH path RIGHT LEFT UP DOWN TEXT ALIGNMENT 3 5 3 9 An enumerated type specifying horizontal alignment TEXTALIGN NORMAL HORIZONTAL LEFT CENTRE RIGHT CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL an enumerated type specifying vertical alignment NORMAL VERTICAL TOP CAP HALF BASE BOTTOM CONTINUOUS VERTICAL and two real values specifying continuous horizontal and vertical alignments that align the string with a coordinate outside its text extent CHARACTER SET 3 5 3 10 An integer index value that chooses a previously INDEX CHARSETINDEX specified character set ALTERNATE 3 5 3 11 An integer index value that chooses a previously CHARACTER ALTCHARSETINDEX specified character set SET INDEX FILL BUNDLE 3 6 2 0 An integer value that points into the fill area bundle INDEX FILLINDEX table INTERIOR STYLE 3 6 2 1 An enumerated type that specifies interior fill INTSTYLE area style HOLLOW SOLID PATTERN HATCH EMPTY FILL COLOR 3 6 2 2 Either an integer color index value
65. Bold O 308 Same as Helvetica Bold Oblique DEC Gam Medium R 309 Same as Courier DEC Gam Medium O 310 Same as Courier Oblique OSF Motif Workstation 9 21 OSF Motif Workstation 9 12 Font Support X Font Name Font Index Comment DEC Gam Bold R DEC Gam Bold O 811 Same as Courier Bold 312 Same as Courier Bold Oblique If the font mode option is all all the fonts listed in Section 9 12 3 in the range 801 to 500 are included in the list of available fonts 9 12 2 Font Mode Options Table 9 2 lists the possible font mode values to use with the OpenVMS logical names GKS DECW FONT MODE and PHIGS DECW FONT MODE and UNIX environment variables GKSdecw font mode and PHIGSdecw font mode Table 9 2 OSF Motif Font Modes Value Meaning No definition check default default check all all check all 9 22 OSF Motif Workstation Only the default set of fonts is available The default set depends on the current language The set of fonts on the X server is not checked for availability The OSF Motif device handler checks the value of the font list option Any fonts listed in the font list option are added to the font list or redefined as existing fonts Only the default set of fonts is available The default set depends on the current language The set of fonts on the X server is checked for availability The OSF Motif device handler
66. Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius 336 C 33 Filled Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors 343 C 43 Filled Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference 345 C 44 Filled Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors C346 C 45 Filled Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc 348 C 47 Filled Rectangle Two Corners 349 C 49 Fixed colors environment option PEX 11 5 Focus points C 6 See also GDPs Font element list environment option CGM 2 2 stroke list environment option OpenGL 10 3 PEX 11 8 Font index environment option DECwindows 4 3 OpenGL 10 3 OSF Motif 9 3 PEX 11 7 Font list environment option DECwindows 4 3 OSF Motif 9 3 Font mode environment option DECwindows 4 3 OSF Motif 9 3 Font path environment option DECwindows 4 4 OSF Motif 9 3 Fonts DECwindows support 4 20 default 4 20 9 20 designing A 2 device independent 1 6 GKS multinational A 1 Hershey A 1 lines A 1 list of A 7 to A 9 LVP16 8 5 monospaced A 1 OpenGL support 10 12 OSF Motif support 9 20 PEX support 11 16 PHIGS multinational A 1 PostScript 12 6 software A 1 stroke font A 7 stroke font file A 3 character descriptor A 6 Stroke font file header A 4 stroke font list A 7 stroke font path A 7 supported by DEC GKS A 1 to A 9 supported by DEC PHIGS A 1 to A 9 VWS 17 16 Format description file 12 4 font file A 1 metafiles 2 1 G
67. D E F ZK a009 GE OSF Motif Workstation 9 OSF Motif Workstation This chapter describes the information you need to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with the OSF Motif workstation All information applies to both DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS unless otherwise indicated To use DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS on an OSF Motif workstation the workstation must meet the following minimum requirements e Run X11 display e Have OSF Motif software installed as a client where the application is actually being run e Have OSF Motif software installed as a server on the display device e Run the OSF Motif window manager on the display device 9 1 Environment Options Table 9 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with the OSF Motif workstation Table 9 1 OSF Motif Environment Options Syntax Description Border Size GKS DECW_BORDER_SIZE When you run a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS application on an OSF Motif GKSdecw_border_size workstation geometry management conflicts may arise with different PHIGS DECW BORDER SIZE window managers If you get the error message BORDER SIZE PHIGSdecw border size attribute incorrect set this environment option to the value printed in the error message and run the application again For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the border size as follows DEFINE PHIGSSDECW BORDER SIZE 20 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for t
68. DEC GKS color representations do not occur dynamically You can use a workstation type modifier to tell DEC GKS to use a dynamically changeable color map instead of the default color map so that color representation changes happen immediately The following bit masks are valid for use with the OSF Motif workstation 9 8 OSF Motif Workstation OSF Motif Workstation 9 3 Valid Bit Mask Values Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 230 x0nmm00E6 As an output only device using OSF Motif 231 x0nmm00E7 As an input output device using OSF Motif 232 x0nmm00E8 As an output only device within an application drawable window or pixmap 233 x0nmm00E9 As an input output device within an application widget 240 x0nmm00F0 As an output only device using OSF Motif PEX 241 x0nmm00F 1 As an input output device using OSF Motif PEX 242 xOnmm00F2 As an output only device within a PEX application drawable window or pixmap 243 x0nmm00F3 As an input output device within a PEX application widget 270 x0000010E As an output only device using OSF Motif OpenGL 271 x0000010F As an input output device using OSF Motif OpenGL 272 x00000110 As an output only device within an OpenGL X11 application drawable window or pixmap 273 x00000111 As an input output device within an OSF Motif OpenGL application widget Color Table Size Valid values for mm are 00 through FF specified in hexadecimal notation The value mm specifies the
69. DEC PHIGS with the following devices Digital LVP16 pen plotter HP7475 plotter HP7550 plotter HP7580 plotter HP7585 plotter MPS 2000 film recorder DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support these devices as workstations of category WSCAT_OUTPUT 8 1 Environment Options Table 8 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with the plotter and recorder devices Table 8 1 Plotter and Recorder Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID GKSconid PHIGS CONID PHIGSconid Specifies the default workstation connection information On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier of the device as follows DEFINE PHIGSSCONID FILE HPGL Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier of the device as follows 9 setenv GKSconid file hpgl Retum continued on next page LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 1 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 1 Environment Options Table 8 1 Cont Plotter and Recorder Environment Options Syntax Description Threshold Value GKS HPGL THRESHOLD GKShpegl threshold PHIGS HPGL THRESHOLD PHIGShpgl threshold If you have not defined this environment option or if you define it to a nonnumeric valu
70. Depth PHIGS MAX_VISUAL_DEPTH PHIGSmax visual depth 10 6 OpenGL Workstation Specifies the visual depth number of color planes to be used where the greater the depth the better the color resolution If the value is 0 DEC PHIGS will create a window having the minimum depth supported by the graphics option used For instance when a ZLXp E2 graphics option is used using a value of 0 will generate a window with a depth of 8 8 color planes If the value is 1 the default DEC PHIGS will create a window having the maximum depth supported by the graphics option used For instance when you use a ZLXp E2 graphics device with 24 bit double buffered visuals disabled in the DEC Open3D server and you select a double buffered visual entering a value of 1 will generate a window with a depth of 12 12 color planes For an 8 plane device values of 0 and 1 will result in windows of the same depth For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to create a window with a depth of 8 as follows DEFINE PHIGS MAX VISUAL DEPTH 0 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable to create a window with maximum visual depth as follows setenv PHIGSmax visual depth 1 Return Note This option applies to workstation types 270 and 271 only continued on next page OpenGL Workstation 10 1 Environment Options Table 10 1 Cont OpenGL Environment Options Syntax Description
71. Each figure includes a name that describes the font The characters are described as uniplex duplex or triplex according to the number of parallel strokes used in the construction of the character The description as simplex complex or gothic indicates the extent to which the characters contain tapered segments Figure A 6 ISO Standard Character Set Font jJ Precision stroke 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F o O0 P to ADS 1 D LOASG s 8 i tANaa 2 ee dq Be oe 4 0 ue 8 3 6G 5 SG 0ao0 4 4DTdt cs AOas 5 oEtUuUeu fur A046 6 amp dcr V7 yy Tf Oes 7 f OW gw Seo Ce as 8 S HX bh x E FgZeg 9lIYty e FU e g k gt JZ jz aef eg B 3 K Ek t K gt E Ued c ALL 3 4 U to lm3 e OY Te E n amp DiS F fey GT elpy A 8 Device Independent Fonts Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 7 ISO Standard Character Set troke Precision s Font LOC MO O O DO se QO YO 10 20 015 i WI IO OOO O0 8 O0 D XD XD ID aca ti DO COQ QDIOXO X C23 252002 LO A N Orc VC CRI ge Ie ce E C i Nul Ld ur t me H U o E QA A N SN Keo lt gt R OH q QO v 6 I eo DX o Wi 2 xX DDNS eee G Or D D Oo QE 4 SY at f X d on c3 O amp I L3 Low UXUME Ox P d a p xem TH lt mnn AL l er E Lx C2 PO OU NDT LUD OM DW
72. Edge Representation 359 B 77 Inquire Extent of a GDP 404 B 88 Index 9 Inquire Highlighting Method 306 B 60 Inquire Language Identifier 360 B 79 Inquire Line Cap and Join Facilities C352 B 68 Inquire List of Available Escapes 350 B 65 Inquire List of Edge Indexes 302 B 53 Inquire List of Highlighting Methods 358 B 75 Inquire Maximum Number of Edge Bundles 356 B 74 Inquire Menu Bar Identifier C308 B 63 Inquire Pasteboard Identifier C307 B 62 Inquire Predefined Edge Representation 355 B 72 Inquire Segment Extent C303 B 55 Inquire Segment Highlighting Method 305 B 58 Inquire Shell Identifier C309 B 64 Inquire Vendor String 517 B 108 Inquire View Dirty Flag C531 B 126 Inquire Viewport Data 255 B 50 Inquire Window Identifiers C304 B 57 Inquire Workstation Structure Memory 533 B 130 Inquiry pixel 1 13 Inquiry functions DECwindows requirements 4 12 OpenGL requirements 10 12 OSF Motif requirements 9 12 PEX requirements 11 15 Internal structure of metafiles 2 1 Internationalization 4 32 9 31 English 4 32 9 31 French 4 32 9 31 German 4 32 9 31 Hebrew 4 32 9 31 Japanese 4 32 9 31 language specific UID file 4 32 9 31 system variable 4 32 9 31 Internationalization support stroke font A 7 ISO Latin1 encoding environment option PostScript 12 1 ISO Latin1 support PostScript 12 8 Items metafile internal structure 2 1 K
73. Examples Example 10 1 illustrates the calls you could use to create a window for workstation type 272 Example 10 1 Creating a Window for Workstation Type 272 int create gl window int want double buffering Window Phigs window Visual visual XSetWindowAttributes xswa XVisualInfo visual info XWindowAttributes window attb Define the OpenGL visual attributes preferred int visual attributes GLX RGBA GLX RED SIZE 1 GLX GREEN SIZE 1 GLX BLUE SIZE 1 GLX DEPTH SIZE 16 None int visual attributes with db GLX RGBA GLX RED SIZE 1 GLX GREEN SIZE 1 GLX BLUE SIZE 1 GLX DEPTH SIZE 16 GLX DOUBLEBUFFER None int visual attr ptr XSetWindowAttributes wattr int nvals unsigned long valuemask int dummy Display x_display int want_double_buffering 1 unsigned int window_offset 0 unsigned int window_width 500 unsigned int window_height 500 x_display XOpenDisplay NULL if x_display NULL printf could not open display return 1 if glXQueryExtension x display amp dummy amp dummy printf X server has no OpenGL GLX extension return 1 if want_double_buffering visual attr ptr amp visual attributes with db 0 else visual attr ptr amp visual attributes 0 visual info glXChooseVisual x display DefaultScreen x display visual attr ptr if visual info NULL printf Can
74. Fonts Figure A 28 Large Special Characters Font 22 with stroke precision Q ada o Ff x Q0 B Q A ee E ex m A Q ZK 1595 GE A 30 Device Independent Fonts Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 29 Large Special Characters Font 25 with stroke precision E g e x e og x A 2 IIA lt e S 5s N IV 4 t AME ELO lt S ee aa a ZK 1596 GE Device Independent Fonts A 31 troke Precision s Figure A 30 Small Simple Roman Fonts 24 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts LGe UM 70 XO KO PO TO 83 Q 7D ND SD 12 ED ZK 3834A GE W O SOKXO 0 0 0 BOO D KO ED 7 NK Qiu O SO KOC POO X0 cd C23 22 201 2 a e CX VEO L eC OL N LIE LI SEL ze No 9 Mo eJ NO Cre 2 Q 9 Cre Ol AN IM B Cre e gt OQ YQ Cre gt Cre o2 keg Ol Y Cre Cre Cre Oo O oO C n gt Ss X DNWw se 1 U 7 O O O CQ QD QC to 3 V SS rA C3 C Ul 2S SX ee DWID ez TI Ter mS COG Le bp CD qp oft VO AI M DT LD ORM WO e ee VY I A e tf VR NX SS a X d o A 32 Device Independent Fonts Escapes Escapes This appendix describes the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS escapes Escapes are functions you use to access implementation or device dependent features other than output generation The escape record format has been changed to expect
75. GDP identifiers in numerical order Table C 1 lists the GDPs in alphabetical order and includes the corresponding GDP identifier Table C 1 Alphabetical Listing of GDPs GDP Name GDP Identifier Arc Center and Two Points on Arc 106 Arc Center Two Vectors and Radius 108 Arc Starting Point and Angle 110 Arc Three Points on Circumference 107 Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius 109 Circle Center and Point on Circumference 101 Circle Center and Radius 103 Circle Three Points on Circumference 102 Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius 104 Disjoint Polyline 100 Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors 111 Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference 113 Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc 116 Elliptic Arc Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors 114 Fill Area Set 332 continued on next page GDPs C 3 List of GDP Identifiers Table C 1 Cont Alphabetical Listing of GDPs GDP Name GDP Identifier Filled Arc Center and Two Points on Arc Filled Arc Center Two Vectors and Radius Filled Arc Center Starting Point and Angle Filled Arc Three Points on Circumference Filled Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius Filled Circle Center and Point on Circumference Filled Circle Center and Radius Filled Circle Three Points on Circumference Filled Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius Filled Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors Filled Ellip
76. GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the specified points have the same x or y value DEC GKS cannot form a rectangle C 28 GDPs 332 Fill Area Set 332 Fill Area Set Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP contains at least three points that together define at least one fill area A fill area set consists of one or more fill areas each consisting of three or more points that may intersect A fill area set has both interior and edge attributes Interior attributes are similar to regular fill areas and edge attributes are similar to polylines These attributes are set with various DEC GKS escape functions The filled regions of a fill area set are determined by the even odd rule which considers the entire fill area set as a single primitive It is therefore possible to create donut like objects where the area surrounding the hole is filled GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 2 8 pts array x and y points gdp id 332 data rec number of integers number of fill areas gt 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array number of points in each fill area address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec l
77. GDPs C 3 to C 51 angles C 3 106 Arc Center and Two Points on Arc C 13 110 Arc Center Starting Point and Angle C 20 108 Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius C 16 107 Arc Three Points on Circumference C 15 109 Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius C 18 arcs Index 7 GDPs arcs cont d direction of formation C 5 101 Circle Center and Point on Circumference C 9 103 Circle Center and Radius C 11 102 Circle Three Points on Circumference C 10 104 Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius C 12 data records C 1 to C 3 100 Disjoint Polyline C 8 ellipse formation C 5 111 Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors C 22 113 Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference C 23 114 Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors C 24 116 Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc C 26 332 Fill Area Set C 29 338 Filled Arc Center and Two Points on Arc C 34 842 Filled Arc Center Starting Point and Angle C 41 840 Filled Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius C 37 839 Filled Arc Three Points on Circumference C 36 841 Filled Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius C 39 333 Filled Circle Center and Point on Circumference C 30 335 Filled Circle Center and Radius C 32 334 Filled Circle Three Points on Circumference C 31 336 Filled Circle Two Points on Circumference an
78. GKS 1 or DEC PHIGS 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array DEC GKS join style or DEC PHIGS ws id join style address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 21 152 Set Line Join Style B 22 Escapes For DEC GKS the input data record contains the following element Component Description join_style The line join style For DEC PHIGS the input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier join_style The line join style The element join_style can be one of the following values Style Description lt 1 Workstation dependent 2 Mitre outer edges meet at a sharp point 3 Round circular arc at point 4 Beveled a short third line connecting lines not joined at 90 degrees gt 5 Reserved for future use See the appropriate language definition file for a list of constants and values to be
79. Greek Font 10 with stroke precision 4 gt 5 n 5 I T nH p i 4 7 A A amp tf T 8 B M X E v w Z 9 T N a Xr g Re E gt It E D ES ZK 1583 GE A 18 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 17 Large Complex Italic Font 11 4 5 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts with stroke precision E Cy mo a W H I R e X N O N S f 9 n z Qi s tow Uu U W Xx y Device Independent Fonts A 19 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 18 Large Simplex Roman Font 12 with stroke 4 amp O 1 2 3 A 20 Device Independent Fonts 4 5 gt R S T A U B V C W D X E i Z G precision f E h a kK b c m d n e O ZK 1585 QE Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 19 Large Complex Script Font 18 with stroke precision 2 c S X boh o PO Xo Wo 4 Ff X xw 3 6 090 4 For h m d dio K U amp g s 8 B L V j t m 4 3 A Wem d d amp 0 Ze ow X X 4 p 1 O XL p we p C ag od Go o ad de m 3 23 e y Device Independent Fonts A 21 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 20 Large Complex Cyrillic Font Pow S Z amp O0 1 C 3 A 22 Device Independent Fonts
80. IZ Specifies that the server automatically clear the image and Z PHIGSClear IZ buffer when it starts a structure traversal Clearing the image and Z buffers simultaneously has performance advantages on some platforms compared to clearing the image and Z buffers separately The value of this option defaults to TRUE 1 For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for clearing the image and Z buffer as follows DEFINE PHIGSSCLEAR IZ 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable to disable clearing the image and Z buffer as follows setenv PHIGSClear IZ 0 Return continued on next page PEX Workstation 11 1 PEX Workstation 11 1 Environment Options Table 11 1 Cont PEX Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID GKSconid PHIGS CONID PHIGSconid Specifies the default workstation connection information On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier of a workstation as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID SYSTEM_NAME 0 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier of a workstation using the TCP IP transport as follows setenv GKSconid nodename n n Return Default Color Map GKS USE DEF
81. Inquire BQUM Range 0 0 ee eee 525 Set BQUM Flags 0 eens 526 Inquire BQUM Flags seces ersa vere ee nee 528 Toggle Double Buffering Target 0 000000 530 Set View Dirty Flag 0 ce eee 531 Inquire View Dirty Flag 0 0 ce eee 532 Render Element Range llle 533 Inquire Workstation Structure Memory 45 Data Record Format so sche aua dua due bed Re EG SG S Bud dan Generalized Drawing Primitives GDPs 0000 eee eee List of GDP Identifiers 0 0 cc ee hat 100 Disjoint Polyline 2 0 0 ee eee 101 Circle Center and Point on Circumference 102 Circle Three Points on Circumference LL 108 Circle Center and Radius 0 0 cece eee 104 Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius 106 Arc Center and Two Points on Arc 0 0 0 0 eee ee 107 Arc Three Points on Circumference 2 000005 108 Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius 109 Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius llle 110 Arc Center Starting Point and Angle 111 Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors llle 113 Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference 114 Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors 116 Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc
82. LN03 PLUS LVP16 OpenVMS ReGIS VAXstation VAXstation 2000 VAXstation 3200 VAXstation 3500 VAXstation II VAXstation II GPX VAXstation II RC VMS VT125 VT200 VT240 VT284 VT286 VT330 VT340 ULTRIX and the DIGITAL logo Hewlett Packard HP7475 HP7550 HP7580 HP7585 HP GL LaserJet and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company MPS 2000 is a trademark of LaserGraphics Inc PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated PLOT 10 Tek and TEKTRONIX are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Company ITC is a trademark of International Typeface Corporation ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC Lubalin Graph ITC Souvenir ITC Zapf Chancery and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation Motif OSF 1 and OSF Motif are registered trademarks of Open Software Foundation Inc Peripheral Converter Module and PCM are trademarks of Spectragraphics Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Ltd OpenGL is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics Inc X Window System Version 11 is a registered trademark of Massachusetts Institute of Technology ZK6193 This manual is available on CD ROM This document was prepared using VAX DOCUMENT Version 2 1 Contents Preface oo eee he rn ME te Hee He
83. Metafile BegMF MFVersion 1 MFDesc DEC GKS CGM Generator V1 0 V3 24 MFElemList DRAWINGSET BegMFDefaults EndMFDefaults ColrIndexPrecMaxColrIndex IntegerPrec RealPrec IndexPrec ColrPrec ColrValueExt FontList CharSetList CharCoding ScaleMode ColrMode LineWidthMode MarkerSizeMode EdgeWidthMode VDCType integer IntegerPrec 32767 327167 RealPrec 32767 0 32767 0 4 IndexPrec 32767 32767 ColrPrec 255 ColrIndexPrec 255 ColrValueExt 0 0 0 255 255 255 MaxColrIndex 255 BegMFDefaults VDCIntegerPrec 32767 327167 VDCExt 0 0 4095 4095 EndMFDefaults rj rj continued on next page 2 16 CGM Output Example 2 2 Cont Clear Text Encoded Metafile FontLis t DEC ISO LATIN SIMPLEX OMAN GREEK HERSHEY SIMPL IPT HERSHEY MEDIUM_COMPL ITALIC HERSHE EX_ROMAN EX_ROMAN HERSHEY MEDIUM_COMP CGM Output 2 13 Encoding Examples DEC ISO_LATIN_SIMPLEX HERSHEY CARTOGRAPHIC_R HERSHEY SIMPLEX_GREEK HERSHEY SIMPLEX_SCR 1EX_GREEK HERSHEY MEDI UM_COMPLEX_ LEX_ITALIC HERSHEY xj UJ ILLIC HERSHEY TRIPL HERSHEY GOTHIC_ENGLISH Y SYMBOL SET 2 HERSHEY SYMBOL SET 3 CharCoding basic7bit BegPic ScaleMode abstract 1 0 ColrMode indexed LineWidthMode scaled MarkerSizeMode scaled EdgeWidthMode scaled BegPicBody ClipRect
84. Motif devices keys F1 to F6 are available and are returned as choice numbers 21 to 26 E 2 Input Values Input Values E 2 Logical Input Devices E 2 1 4 Choice 4 Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN This device is implemented in the same manner as choice device number 1 On the Digital VT330 and VT340 terminals with mouse this device can display up to four choices and does not react to the tracking device of the mouse or puck If you use a mouse you should initialize the device for three choices if you use a puck you should initialize it for four choices You trigger the device by depressing a mouse or puck button The measure is the choice number corresponding to the button released The left button corresponds to choice 1 the middle button corresponds to choice 2 the right button corresponds to choice 3 If you use a puck the bottom button corresponds to choice 4 E 2 1 5 Choice 5 Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN This device is implemented in the same manner as choice device number 1 On the Digital VT330 and VT340 terminals with mouse this device can display up to four choices and does not react to the tracking device of the mouse or puck If you use a mouse you should initialize the device for three choices if you use a puck you should initialize it for four choices You trigger the device by releasing a mouse or p
85. NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id The workstation identifier 516 Inquire Closest Color 516 Inquire Closest Color Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations PEX and OSF Motif workstations This escape allows an application to inquire an X11 color map index that DEC PHIGS has allocated and is closest to a specified color This allows applications that combine X11 calls and DEC PHIGS calls to share color map entries more effectively The desired color may be specified as an indexed color or in any supported DEC PHIGS direct color format Either the TRUE color approximation map color approximation index 0 or any of the PSEUDO color approximation maps color approximation index 1 to n can be searched for a closest color match Only the TRUE color approximation map can be searched for indexed colors ESCAPE Arguments The following table describes the data record format for an indexed color Argument Required Value in data number of integers 4 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id color approx index indexed color model color index address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of
86. NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 19 151 Set Line Cap Style B 20 Escapes For DEC GKS the input data record contains the following element Component Description cap style The line cap style For DEC PHIGS the input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id The workstation identifier cap style The line cap style The element cap style can be one of the following values Style Description lt 1 Workstation dependent 2 Butt squared at the endpoint 3 Round semicircular arc 4 Square projecting square cap gt 5 Reserved for future use See the appropriate language definition file for a list of constants and values to be used with this escape 152 Set Line Join Style 152 Set Line Join Style Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP Supporting Workstations The PostScript DDIF DECwindows OSF Motif and PEX workstations This escape sets the current line join style entry for all subsequently drawn polylines that use this facility The line join style determines the appearance of the polyline vertices The initial line join style is 1 which is workstation dependent If a workstation cannot implement a specified style DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS uses style number 1 ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers DEC
87. Note If an application coded as a PEX workstation tries to display to a PEX server supporting only Version 5 0 of the PEX protocol DEC PHIGS will substitute the EXECUTE STRUCTURE function for the INCLUDE STRUCTURE function which may slow down performance and modify the display results G 1 7 Avoiding Regenerations when Posting to Views When working with views you can ensure better performance as follows e Post structures to views to minimize regeneration In many cases regeneration is limited to a single view e Be careful with transparent views When a transparent view must be regenerated all lower priority views that it intersects will be at least partially regenerated e Be careful when posting to view 0 You should either avoid posting structures to view 0 or make view 0 a low priority view Posting to views allows DEC PHIGS to regenerate only dirty views on each call to UPDATE WORKSTATION DEC PHIGS marks all views as dirty if you perform the following operations Enable xy clipping Disable a view s background Deactivate a single view Change view clip limits G 4 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 1 Device Independent Tuning G 1 8 Performing Quick Updates When a quick update of a view is requested the old geometry is drawn in the background color and then the new geometry is drawn Quick updates are appropriate for small changes If the changes are comple
88. Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All workstations This escape returns the language identifier that is associated with the environment option ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 3 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error_status flag lang_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status The error status flag If you defined the environment option correctly this argument is TRUE value 1 Otherwise this argument is FALSE value 0 lang_id The language identifier Escapes B 79 400 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a WC Point 400 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a WC Point Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstat
89. PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for VWS stroke class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial number of points 0 Initial transformation 0 Echo area Largest square Data record Stroke buffer size 80 points Editing position 0 x interval 0 01 in world coordinate points y interval 0 01 in world coordinate points Time interval 0 0 seconds 17 6 6 Valuator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported valuator class logical input devices for VAXstation workstations running VWS VWS Workstation 17 15 VWS Workstation 17 6 Input Information Valuator Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Supported PETs The valuator input class for VWS supports PETs 3 2 1 1 2 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for VWS valuator class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial value 0 5 Echo area Varies by device Data record Minimum 0 0 maximum 1 0 17 7 Font Support The VWS graphics handler supports four hardware fonts in string and character precision Figu
90. PHIGS timer records the usage levels of each DEC PHIGS function and the approximate time used by the function You can use the timer to detect unnecessarily high numbers of calls to DEC PHIGS functions Activate the timer on OpenVMS systems by entering DEFINE PHIGS DEBUG TIMER Return DEFINE PHIGSSTIMER_OUTPUT timer out Return Activate the timer on UNIX systems by entering setenv PHIGSdebug TIMER Return setenv PHIGStimer output timer out Retum Note that the timer is not supported in DEC PHIGS Version 3 2 on UNIX systems e Memory usage tracking Memory usage can be important for determining the system resources required To compute the memory usage you can request the maximum memory used to store structures during a DEC PHIGS session This information is displayed at workstation closing and includes the memory used by DEC PHIGS on the client but not the memory used by the PEX or OpenGL server To obtain this information on OpenVMS systems define the following logical name DEFINE PHIGSS STRUCT MEM DUMP 1 Return To obtain this information on UNIX systems define the following environment variable 9 setenv PHIGSstruct mem dump 1 Return This information will also show whether DEC PHIGS was able to share the structure memory among multiple DEC PHIGS workstations G 6 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 2 Tuning DECwindows and OSF Motif
91. PostScript contains a list of PostScript fonts For the complete list see Chapter 12 in this manual In CALS or TOP mode the OpenVMS logical name is ignored and the font list contains only the following fonts e HERSHEY SIMPLEX_ ROMAN e HERSHEY COMPLEX ROMAN e HERSHEY COMPLEX ITALIC e HERSHEY COMPLEX GREEK The remaining fonts are either mapped into the list of fonts where the logical name is ignored or the fonts are simulated using the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS device independent stroke fonts This means that line elements are put into the CGM file instead of text elements when the text is simulated 2 13 Encoding Examples Example 2 1 presents a simple DEC GKS program that illustrates how to create a metafile CGM Output 2 15 CGM Output 2 13 Encoding Examples Example 2 1 Metafile Creation IMPLICIT NONE INTEGER WS_ID VT240 CONID_DEFAULT REAL X ARRAY 2 Y_ARRAY 2 DATA X ARRAY 0 0 1 0 DATA Y ARRAY 0 5 0 5 DATA WS ID 1 VT240 13 CONID DEFAULT 0 CALL GKSSOPEN_GKS SYSSERROR CALL GKSS OPEN WS WS ID CONID DEFAULT VT240 CALL GKSSACTIVATE WS WS ID CALL GKSSPOLYLINE 2 X ARRAY Y ARRAY CALL GKSSDEACTIVATE WS WS ID CALL GKS CLOSE WS WS ID CALL GKS CLOSE GKS END Example 2 2 presents the clear text encoded metafile produced by Example 2 1 Define the logical name GKS WSTYPE to be x00040007 to specify the clear text encoding Example 2 2 Clear Text Encoded
92. Standard argument count argv Standard argument values if display NULL printf ERROR Failed to open default display Wn return NULL if double buffering visual attributes dblBuf else visual_attributes snglBuf vi glXChooseVisual display DefaultScreen display visual_attributes if vi NULL XtAppError app context no RGB visual with depth buffer continued on next page 10 16 OpenGL Workstation OpenGL Workstation 10 9 Examples Example 10 2 Cont Creating a Window for Workstation Type 273 Create an application shell widget prd arg count 0 XtSetArg arg list arg count XtNallowShellResize TRUE arg count XtSetArg arg list arg count XmNwidth Dimension 800 arg count XtSetArg arg list arg count XmNheight Dimension 800 arg count top level XtAppCreateShell program name Name program class Class applicationShellWidgetClass Widget class display Display arg list Argument list arg count Argument count cmap XCreateColormap display RootWindow display vi screen vi visual AllocNone Establish the visual depth and colormap of the top level widget before the widget is realized xy XtVaSetValues top level XtNvisual vi visual XtNdepth vi gt depth XtNcolormap cmap NULL Create a main window widget ard arg count 0 main widget XmC
93. Upward scales 72 Upward scales 73 Upward scales 74 Upward scales 75 Upward scales 76 Upward scales 77 Upward scales 3 8 DDIF Output Workstation DDIF Output Workstation 3 7 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 to 196 Rightward scales Rightward scales Rightward scales Rightward scales Rightward scales Rightward scales Rightward scales Leftward scales Leftward scales Leftward scales Leftward scales Leftward scales Leftward scales Leftward scales Increasing densities incrementing first by color starting at 1 16 density incrementing by 1 16 up to 15 16 density 3 8 Japanese Fonts The DDIF device handler supports the following Japanese OSF Motif fonts in string text precision The fonts are saved as DDIF text and can be edited with a DDIF editor X Font Name Font Index JDECW Screen JISX0201 RomanKana 10001 JDECW Screen JISX0208 Kanjill 10001 JDECW Mincho JISX0201 1976 0 10101 JDECW Mincho JISX0208 1983 1 10101 J DECW Gothic JISX0201 1976 0 10102 J DECW Gothic JISX0208 1983 1 10102 To use the Japanese fonts with the English DDIF workstation type value 250 you must set the language environment option to Japanese value 22 If you use the Japanese DDIF workstation type value 350 you do not need to set the language environment option The bit mask value
94. Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Cross hatches 2 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 3 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 4 Horizontal lines 5 Vertical lines 6 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 7 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 8 Horizontal lines sparse 9 Vertical lines sparse 10 to 19 Halftone hatch densities 33 to 126 Hatching with the corresponding ASCII character 13 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern value indexes and describes the results 13 4 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 4 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 1 Mixes colors 1 and 2 2 Mixes colors 2 and 3 3 Mixes colors 3 and 1 4 Mixes colors 0 and 1 5 Mixes colors 0 and 2 6 Mixes colors 0 and 3 13 5 Input Information Each of the following input class sections lists the supported logical input device numbers and supported prompt and echo type PET numbers On a VT125 VT240 VT284 or VT286 device press the Return key to trigger input You use the arrow keys to move the cursor For pick locator stroke and valuator class devices you can use the PF3 key to move the cursor in shorter increments and the PF4 key to move the cursor in longer increments For detai
95. Workstations G 2 Tuning DECwindows and OSF Motif Workstations Tuning of DECwindows X11 and OSF Motif PEX workstation performance includes Improving pick performance Limiting the size of primitives Modifying the structure mode Grouping primitives with the same attributes Changing attributes on OpenGL devices Choosing a double buffering method pixmap versus MIT PEX only Disabling input devices that echo to the display Other tuning techniques These tuning techniques are described in the following sections G 2 1 Improving Pick Performance You can improve pick performance on DECwindows X11 and OSF Motif workstations in several ways Set the HLHSR method to painter s algorithm This allows DEC PHIGS to search the paint buffer linked list rather than perform a structure traversal Organize the application into multiple views each with fewer output primitives This enables DEC PHIGS to perform fewer structure traversals Avoid using deeply nested structures If you are not using the HLHSR method of painter s algorithm deeply nested structures may degrade performance G 2 2 Limiting Primitive Size Because X11 and PEX workstations must use X transport buffers to copy data from the DEC PHIGS client to an X server the following limitations exist with respect to large output primitives On X11 workstations DEC PHIGS breaks down large line primitives such as polylines and polyline sets into multiple X lin
96. Z cee rap 7 o4 do d B 3 T fk rv T A 5 W e i s 3 B WwW GF tin 9g CG fH BW a k u amp D N X b L u l O id E nt w 2 F Z n x 3 6 Q es y ZK 1591 QE A 26 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 25 Large Gothic Italian N Ae e Font 19 4 with O D no JS o o stroke D amp HKH DX m O D X R G OQ X amp lt a G QA Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts precision ZK 1582 GE Device Independent Fonts A 27 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 26 Medium Complex Special Characters Font 20 ry A 28 Device Independent Fonts with LA M stroke precis Oo V 9 V S 9 g o y S h 8 i Y C ca ZK 1593 GE Figure A 27 Music Astronomy and Business Font 5 AR gw e I mem o S 9 amp zd with om b stroke i o 3 E v d d B 6 X 4 1 3 2 1 g 5 Q9 Device Independent Fonts fi fi fi JF tbo L o A 6 Device Independent Fonts precision O O gt Q Q Xe ZK 1594 GE Device Independent Fonts A 29 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent
97. a structure for the data record argument The data record format change is required because of the 64 bit addresses and 64 bit long integers on the Digital UNIX system You can continue to use previous escape record formats on other operating systems but Digital recommends that you use the new format to gain maximum portability between supported platforms The escapes documented in this chapter include the new format Some of the escape functions inquire about information in the state lists and description tables These inquiry functions write an integer value called error_status to the output data record If error_status is the value 0 the remaining output data record is valid If error_status is not the value 0 the remaining output data record is invalid B 1 Escape Function Changes The addition of 64 bit addresses and data types requires changes to the escape data record In previous versions of DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS pointers were returned in the integer array as were some data objects such as X11 identifiers which were declared long in C On OpenVMS and MIPS ULTRIX systems an integer an address and a C long all fit into a 32 bit quantity On Digital UNIX systems only the integer is a 32 bit quantity the address and the C long are both 64 bit quantities The new escape data record structure for DEC GKS is as follows typedef struct Gint nints number of integers Gint nfloats number of floats
98. a workstation that is capable of both input and output All subsequent primitives are highlighted in the manner specified until this escape is used again If you use pick prompt and echo type 1 the information applies to each primitive and is stored when the primitives are created If you use pick prompt and echo type 2 the information applies to the group of primitives with the same pick identifier The information is stored the first time a primitive with a different pick identifier than any other primitive in a particular segment is stored If you use pick prompt and echo type 3 the information is stored when a segment is created and applies to all primitives within a particular segment If a WISS segment is inserted into the open segment the highlighting method is applied as follows e Highlighting methods bound to primitives when the primitives were entered into the WISS will be transferred to the inserted primitives in the open segment e Ifthe same pick identifier exists in the open segment and the WISS segment the highlighting method bound to the pick identifier in the open segment will be applied e The highlighting method bound to the open segment when it was created will be applied to all primitives when you use prompt and echo type 3 ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 5 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array high_method color_index linetype fi
99. address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id The workstation identifier anti alias mode A flag that specifies whether anti aliasing is enabled 1 or disabled 0 509 Set Line Pattern 509 Set Line Pattern Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations PEX and OSF Motif workstations except the VAXstation 3500 series This escape allows you to specify line patterns in addition to those provided by the SET LINE TYPE function solid dotted dotted and dashed dotted The line pattern is described as a series of segments alternately drawn in foreground and background colors If you specify an odd number of segments the pattern is repeated to make an even number Restrictions e This is supported only on PEX and OSF Motif workstations except the VAXstation 3500 series Other implementations will return an invalid escape error e Each segment length must be in the range from 1 to 255 e The segments are specified in terms of pixels The total of all segments must be 16 pixels Unspecified pixels default to background e The phase start must be 0 Any other value will be ignored ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 4 num segments number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id linetype num segments phase start seg lengthl seg length
100. and 223 and the OSF Motif PEX workstations types 241 242 and 243 This escape signals the application user by ringing a bell or by using some other sound generator ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array rel_loudness sound_duration address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier rel_loudness The relative loudness of the sound on a scale from 0 0 silent to 1 0 loudest possible for the device sound_duration The number of seconds to maintain the sound This value must be greater than or equal to 0 106 Pop Workstation 106 Pop Workstation Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations The VWS DECwindows OS
101. and OSF Motif cont d Inquire Vendor String B 108 Inquire Window Identifiers B 57 Set Anti Alias Mode B 96 Set Background Pixmap B 93 Set Cancel String B 41 Set Double Buffering B 92 Set Enter String B 42 Set Icon Bitmaps B 43 Set Line Pattern B 97 Set Marker Pattern B 100 Set PEX Begin Render Clear Action B 109 Set PEX Clear Region B 111 Set Plane Mask B 99 Set Reset String B 40 Set Swap Mode B 103 Set Transparency B 113 Set Window Title B 39 Swap Buffers B 104 Toggle Double Buffering Target B 123 161 End Transformation Block B 32 401 Evaluate DC Mapping of an NDC Point B 82 403 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a DC Point B 86 400 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a WC Point B 80 402 Evaluate WC Mapping of an NDC Point B 84 101 Generate Hardcopy of Workstation Surface B 7 503 Inquire Background Pixmap B 95 526 Inquire BQUM Flags B 122 524 Inquire BQUM Range B 118 516 Inquire Closest Color B 105 300 Inquire Current Display Speed B 52 254 Inquire Current Edge Attributes B 48 252 Inquire Current Line Cap Style B 46 253 Inquire Current Line Join Style B 47 251 Inquire Current Writing Mode B 45 851 Inquire Default Display Speed B 67 513 Inquire Double Buffer Buffers B 102 502 Inquire Double Buffer Pixmap B 94 354 Inquire Edge Facilities B 70 359 Inquire Edge Representation B 77 404 Inquire Extent of a GDP B 88 306 Inquire Highli
102. are enabled 528 Toggle Double Buffering Target 528 Toggle Double Buffering Target Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations This escape allows an application to write to the front buffer when double buffering is enabled This escape does not use any information in the input or output data records but you should initialize the values to NULL The following restrictions apply e This escape works only for immediate mode applications e You must disable automatic double buffering swapping using 514 Set Swap Mode for this escape to work e The escape changes only a state variable and will not take effect until the next call to BEGIN RENDERING e When you use this escape with pixmap double buffering once you toggle the targets you should toggle them back again before calling 515 Swap Buffers If you do not DEC PHIGS will not perform the escape ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL addres
103. array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the three points form a straight line DEC GKS cannot generate a corresponding circle C 10 GDPs 103 Circle Center and Radius 103 Circle Center and Radius Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms a circle from the specified center point and radius vector GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 3 pts array center point vector origin point and radius vector endpoint gdp id 103 data rec number of integers 0 data rec len number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the radius vector specifies a distance of 0 then DEC GKS can
104. at a time the workstations change the measures of all devices that use a physical device by default For example if you simultaneously use two devices that use the arrow keys to alter the prompt move both prompts when pressing the arrow keys To provide the ability to choose which device s measure to alter the workstations allow you to activate the prompts of each device individually in a workstation specific cycle In this way you can change the measure of only one device at a time The only restriction placed on the cycling of logical input devices is that cycling affects only those devices whose prompts are enabled If you use a device on a workstation whose prompt is disabled by setting the value NOECHO in one of the SET class MODE functions that device s prompt is always active You cannot cycle past a device whose echo is disabled E 3 2 Numeric Keypad Zoning Mechanism Supporting Devices Locator pick and stroke device numbers 1 and 2 Supporting Workstations The Digital ReGIS and the Tektronix 4107 workstations The workstations move the cursor to the position on the rectangular input echo area that corresponds to the position of the pressed key within the rectangular set of shaded keys For example if you press the shaded key in the upper left corner the cursor moves to the upper left corner of the current echo area If you Input Values E 7 Inpu
105. be created and no screen space will be used For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the menu bar size as follows DEFINE PHIGSS DECW MENU BAR SIZE 10 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for no menu bar as follows 9 setenv GKSdecw menu bar size 0 Return continued on next page DECwindows Workstation 4 5 DECwindows Workstation 4 1 Environment Options Table 4 1 Cont DECwindows Environment Options DEC GKS Syntax DEC PHIGS Syntax Resize Mode GKS RESIZE ZOOM Specifies the behavior of the output image when the main GKSresize zoom application widget is resized The graphics can either be PHIGS RESIZE ZOOM resized to match the new dimensions or scrolling will be PHIGSresize zoom enabled If the value is 0 the handler uses the scrolling resize mode of the output image If the value is 1 the handler resizes the graphics of the output image The default value is 0 scrolling For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the scrolling mode as follows DEFINE PHIGSSRESIZE ZOOM 0 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for resizing as follows setenv GKSresize zoom 1 Return continued on next page 4 6 DEOCwindows Workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 1 Environment Options Table 4 1 Cont DECwindows Environment Options DEC
106. be drawn is brighter than what is already in the frame buffer Anti aliasing will function whether the HLHSR MODE mode is set to ZBUFFER or set to OFF Mode 3 DEC PHIGS overwrites the three closest integer pixel locations along the direction of the minor axis for each major axis unit step with the pixel value of the line color If the current line color in the PHIGS traversal state list is set to the background color you can use this mode to erase lines drawn with anti aliasing mode 1 DEC PHIGS updates only the location in the Z buffer that corresponds to the middle of three pixels being drawn Restrictions There are some restrictions when using anti aliasing on the SPXg and SPXgt PEX servers Anti aliasing will be performed under the following conditions The line width is 1 There are no patterned lines DEC PHIGS is not in text mode Picking is disabled Highlighting is disabled Color space 888 approximation RGB is the only supported color format for 24 plane systems If the application calls any other color approximation technique the system reverts to standard no anti aliasing rendering Color per vertex constant color color interpolation and depth queuing is supported PEX Workstation 11 11 PEX Workstation 11 2 Connection Identifier Also for the SPXg and SPXgt PEX servers the logical name STP_AA_ZUPDATE_MODE allows you to control whether drawing anti aliased lines will update the Z buffer When the val
107. binding manuals to return the specific values for these indexes 9 10 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fill area pattern and hatch values for the OSF Motif workstation The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns 9 10 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Cross hatches 2 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 3 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 4 Horizontal lines 5 Vertical lines 6 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 1 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 8 Horizontal lines sparse 9 Vertical lines sparse OSF Motif Workstation 9 13 OSF Motif Workstation 9 10 Pattern and Hatch Values 9 10 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Monochrome for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern values for color index 1 and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Light diagonally woven pattern 25 2 Darker diagonally woven pattern 50 3 D
108. box The dial and button box is also referred to as the Peripheral Converter Module PCM It is connected to the host system by an RS 232 line A server process is started on the host system that directs and reads the PCM through the RS 232 connection This server process then communicates with a client process for commands and returns information to an application DEC PHIGS provides the client side within the DECwindows input support The application is therefore able to control the PCM through the standard DEC PHIGS input interface using the appropriate valuator and choice input devices For example the OpenVMS logical name for the button and dial hardware is defined as PHIGS USE_DIALS AND BUTTONS The UNIX environment variable is defined as PHIGSuse_dials_and_buttons If this logical name or environment variable value is set to 1 DEC PHIGS attempts to use the dial and button hardware If this value is set to 0 DEC PHIGS attempts to software simulate the dials and buttons If this value is undefined not set DEC PHIGS first attempts to use the dial and button hardware When it cannot find the hardware DEC PHIGS attempts to software simulate the dials and buttons D 1 Starting the PCM Server The PCM server process must be started for DEC PHIGS to be able to communicate to the PCM hardware If the PCM server process is not running DEC PHIGS will report an error when you open a workstation See Section D 5 for more informati
109. buffer mode the picture may change colors briefly as the picture is drawn into the backing buffer To minimize color traversal you can create a structure with e POLYLINE SET WITH DATA element with a different vertex color corresponding to each fixed color needed This element can be degenerate and should be clipped away e SET INTERIOR REFLECTANCE EQUATION element with the diffuse equation e TRIANGLE STRIP 3 WITH DATA element with a different vertex color corresponding to each lighted shaded and depth cued color This element can be degenerate and should be clipped away When this structure is posted DEC PHIGS allocates a cell in the X color map for each color in the POLYLINE SET WITH DATA element DEC PHIGS allocates a constant hue gamut in the X color map for each color in the TRIANGLE STRIP WITH DATA element If the rest of the application uses only these colors no reallocation of color map pixels takes place no double buffer color problems occur 4 8 Bundle Indexes Use the program PHIGS PREDEF included with the DEC PHIGS development kit or GKS PREDEF included with the DEC GKS development kit to display information on the predefined bundle tables and supported escapes for other DECwindows workstation types See Example 1 1 or Example 1 2 Use the available inquiry function in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding manuals to return the specific values for these indexes 4 9 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes
110. cc eee eee 13 3 14 1 Sixel Printer Environment Options 0 000 ce eee eee 14 1 15 1 Tektronix 4014 Environment Options esee 15 1 16 1 Tektronix Environment Options llle 16 2 17 1 VWS Environment Options for OpenVMS Systems 17 1 B 1 Alphabetical Listing of Escapes 0 0 00 cece eee eee B 3 XV xvi C 1 F 1 G 2 Alphabetical Listing of GDPs vadam ki GaU bad add eg d Ea eie C 6 Variable Definitions for the Lighting Equations F 1 Minimum Recommended Quotas for System Tuning G 12 Recommended Quotas for Demanding Applications G 12 Preface This manual provides information about all devices supported by DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS Intended Audience This document is intended for experienced programmers who are knowledgeable in programming languages and graphics Structure of This Document This manual is divided into 17 chapters and 7 appendixes as follows Chapter 1 provides introductory information on the devices supported by DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS including how to access online help and a complete list of supported devices The balance of this manual is organized into one chapter for each supported device arranged in alphabetical order Appendix A provides information about the fonts that can be accessed from the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS software in stroke precision text Appendix B describes the DEC GKS and DEC PHIG
111. checks the value of the font list option Only the default set of fonts is available The default set depends on the current language The set of fonts on the X server is not checked for availability This mode is the fastest mode The OSF Motif device handler does not check the value of the font list option Only the default set of fonts is available but the default set is checked to make sure the font exists on the OSF Motif server This is slightly slower than the previous option The OSF Motif device handler does not check the value of the font list option All known OSF Motif fonts for the current language are made available in the font list The set of fonts on the X server is not checked for availability See Section 9 12 3 for a complete list The OSF Motif device handler checks the value of the font list option Any fonts listed in the font list option are added to the font list or redefined as existing fonts All known OSF Motif fonts for the current language are made available in the font list The set of fonts on the X server is checked for availability See Section 9 12 3 for a complete list The OSF Motif device handler checks the value of the font list option Any fonts listed in the font list option are added to the font list or redefined as existing fonts All known OSF Motif fonts for all languages are made available in the font list The set of fonts on the X server is not checked for availability See Section 9 12 3
112. choice topwidget dialog Choice button box GFX choiceb topwidget dialog String GFX string topwidget dialog Valuator GFX valuator topwidget dialog e Popup mode Different for each widget type Choice GFX choice topwidget dialog popup Choice button box GFX choiceb topwidget dialog popup String GFX string topwidget dialog popup Valuator GFX valuator topwidget dialog popup e Nonpopup or popup mode Different for each widget type Menu bar GFX menubar topwidget menubar Message GFX message errors messagebox At the end of each of these strings place the class or instance of the attribute you want to change See OSF Motif documentation or widget definition include files to obtain the class names The following examples illustrate how to change colors on various devices To change the cancel button background in the valuator device to yellow use the following syntax GFX valuator cancel pushbutton background yellow To change all widgets of the valuator to blue use the following syntax GFX valuator topwidget dialog background blue To change all choice menu pushbuttons in popup and nonpopup mode to green use the following syntax GFX choice menu XmPushButton background green To change the menu pushbuttons only in popup mode to green use the following syntax GFX choice topwidget dialog popop choice menu XmPushButton background green For further information on the syntax of Xdefaults file
113. current edge width scale factor Escapes B 49 255 Inquire Viewport Data 255 Inquire Viewport Data B 50 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations This escape returns the region of the workstation that has been changed or exposed since the last time this escape was called See 109 Set Viewport Event for related viewport event information ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 1 number of reals 4 number of strings 0 address of integer array error_status address of real array viewport address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier 255 Inquire Viewport Data The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status T
114. data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Component Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 2 Fill the area formed by connecting both ends of the arc to its center 3 Fill the area formed by connecting the beginning and end points of the arc GDPs C 45 346 Filled Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors C 46 GDPs Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance due to the vector values DEC GKS may attempt to form a straight line 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you specify any value other than 2 or 3 348 Filled Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc 348 Filled Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the elliptic arc using two focal points the beginning point of the elliptic arc and the end point as one of the following components e The end point located on the arc e The second point of a ray the first point is the first specified focus point of the ellipse whose intersection with the elliptic path of the arc determines the end point of the arc GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 4 pts array two
115. element Component Description ws id The workstation identifier The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error status The error status display speed A real specifying the current display speed of the specified workstation 302 Inquire List of Edge Indexes 302 Inquire List of Edge Indexes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape returns the list of indexes supported by a given workstation See 157 Set Edge Index ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 3 ret indexes number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error status total indexes ret indexes index list address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws
116. file The file name is specified from the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS connection identifier If you choose the default font Font 1 the text is preserved as DDIF text and can be edited with a DDIF editor DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS display other fonts as a simulation DDIF does not store them as text objects DDIF Output Workstation 3 1 DDIF Output Workstation 3 3 Environment Options 3 3 Environment Options Table 3 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with the DDIF output device Table 3 1 DDIF Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID Specifies the default workstation connection information On GKSconid OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS CONID PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value PHIGSconid For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier for the device as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID FILE DDIF Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier for the device as follows setenv GKSconid file ddif Retum Language GKS LANGUAGE Specifies whether to use the English language value 0 or Japanese GKSlanguage language value 22 The default value is 0 See Section 3 8 for more PHIGS LANGUAGE information on Japanese fonts PHIGSlanguage For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the English language as f
117. focal points and two points on the circumference gdp id 348 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Component Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 2 Fill the area formed by connecting both ends of the arc to its center 3 Fill the area formed by connecting the beginning and end points of the arc GDPs C 47 348 Filled Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc C 48 GDPs Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance due to the specified values DEC GKS may attempt to form a straight line 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you specify any value other than 2 or 3 349 Filled Rectangle Two Corners 349 Filled Rectangle Two Corners Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the rectangle from the specified diagonal corner points The sides of the rectangle are parall
118. for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP Supporting Workstations The LVP16 printer and all HP GL plotter workstations This escape writes the default speed for the specified workstation type to its output data record See 100 Set Display Speed ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 1 number of reals 1 number of strings 0 address of integer array error status address of real array def speed address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws id The workstation identifier The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error status The error status def speed A real specifying the default display speed of the specified workstation Escapes B 67 3852 Inquire Line Cap and Join Facilities 3852 Inquire Line Cap and Join Facilitie
119. for a complete list The OSF Motif device handler checks the value of the font list option Any fonts listed in the font list option are added to the font list or redefined as existing fonts continued on next page OSF Motif Workstation 9 12 Font Support Table 9 2 Cont OSF Motif Font Modes Value Meaning all check All known OSF Motif fonts for all languages are made available in the font list The set of fonts on the X server is checked for availability See Section 9 12 3 for a complete list The OSF Motif device handler checks the value of the font list option Any fonts listed in the font list option are added to the font list or redefined as existing fonts 9 12 3 Known Fonts The following fonts are considered known to the OSF Motif device handler X Font Name Font Index _Courier Medium R 1 Times Medium R 101 Times Medium I 102 Times Bold R 103 Times Bold I 104 Helvetica Medium R 105 Helvetica Medium O 106 _Helvetica Bold R 107 _Helvetica Bold O 108 Courier Medium R 109 _Courier Medium O 110 _Courier Bold R 111 _Courier Bold O 112 _Symbol 113 Terminal Medium R Normal ISO8859 1 114 Terminal Medium R DoubleWide 1808859 1 115 Terminal Medium R Narrow ISO8859 1 116 Terminal Medium R Wide ISO8859 1 117 _Terminal Bold R Normal ISO8859 1 118 _Ter
120. grouping primitives with same attributes G 10 improving pick performance G 7 limiting primitive size G 7 minimizing color traversal 4 13 modifying structure mode G 8 other tuning techniques G 11 Default WSTYPE DEFAULT 1 2 Default color map environment option PEX 11 2 Depth cueing DECwindows equations F 3 LA324 equations F 3 Index 3 Depth cueing cont d LJ250 equations F 3 support 1 12 Tektronix and VS500 equations F 3 VWS F 3 Description file environment option PostScript 12 2 format 12 4 PostScript 12 4 Device See also Workstation constants 1 2 to 1 5 Digital printers 14 1 See also Sixel printer HP7475 8 1 HPPCL 5 1 LA324 7 1 LCG01 6 1 LJ250 7 1 LPS40 12 1 LVP16 8 1 MPS 2000 8 1 PostScript 12 1 VWS 17 1 VWS logical input 17 12 Device coordinates for all devices 1 13 Device independent fonts A 1 Device independent tuning G 1 to G 6 avoiding view regeneration G 4 choosing language bindings G 1 choosing primitive types G 2 defining primitive aggregation G 2 defining X transport mechanisms G 5 executing structures G 4 performance tools G 6 performing quick updates G 5 posting to views G 4 providing optional primitive information G 3 selecting drawing mode G 3 using conditional traversal G 5 Device numbers DEC GKS logical input E 1 DEC PHIGS logical input E 1 Device queues HPPCL 5 2 LCG01 6 2 LJ250 7 3 plotter and recorder 8
121. id The workstation identifier Escapes B 53 302 Inquire List of Edge Indexes B 54 Escapes The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error status The error status total indexes The total number of edge indexes supported by the workstation ret indexes The number of edge indexes written to the remaining elements of the output data record s integer array index list The edge indexes 303 Inquire Segment Extent 303 Inquire Segment Extent Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes the coordinate range of the segment extent rectangle corresponding to the specified segment name For more information concerning segment names see the chapter on segments in the DEC GKS binding manuals This escape will not report correct values if the segment is off the display surface This is a design restriction ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id segment id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 1 number of reals 4 number of strings 0 address of integer array error
122. if the server supports the MPEX extensions If the server supports MPEX requests DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS will use them If the server does not support MPEX DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS will not use MPEX requests There are cases in which DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS cannot simulate what MPEX requests can do If there is no equivalent PEX request for an MPEX request DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS will not support the feature provided by the MPEX request PEX Version 5 1 offers more MPEX features than does Version 5 0 For example if USE MPEX is 0 picking will not function on PEX Version 5 0 servers but will function on PEX Version 5 1 servers With the circle primitive if USE MPEX is 1 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS use the MPEX circle primitive If USE MPEX is 0 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS uses the PEXNurbCurve primitive to simulate the primitive For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to enable the Digital PEX extension as follows DEFINE PHIGSSUSE MPEX 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable to use only the standard PEX protocol as follows setenv GKSuse mpex 0 Return Double Buffering GKS DOUBLE BUFFERING GKSdouble buffering PHIGS DOUBLE BUFFERING PHIGSdouble buffering Specifies whether double buffering is enabled 1 or disabled 0 The default value is FALSE 0 When the value of this environment option is 1 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS first attempt to use MIT double bu
123. implemented Hardware Dials and Buttons PHIGS USE DIALS AND BUTTONS PHIGSuse dials and buttons 4 4 DEOCwindows Workstation Specifies whether the button and dial hardware is required to be available If the value of this option is set to 0 DEC PHIGS emulates the button and dial boxes with on screen widgets If the value is set to 1 DEC PHIGS aborts if the button and dial boxes are not available If no value is specified for this option DEC PHIGS uses the button and dial hardware if it is available or falls back to the on screen emulation if it is not For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the dials and buttons as follows DEFINE PHIGSS USE DIALS AND BUTTONS 1 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the dials and buttons as follows setenv PHIGSuse dials and buttons 1 Return For specific information on hardware dials and buttons support see Appendix D continued on next page DECwindows Workstation 4 1 Environment Options Table 4 1 Cont DECwindows Environment Options DEC GKS Syntax DEC PHIGS Syntax Input Mode GKS INPUT FIXED GKSinput fixed PHIGS INPUT FIXED PHIGSinput fixed Specifies whether the widgets used to display choice string and valuator input devices are fixed to the main output widget value 1 or nonfixed to any widget value 0 When input is not fixed these widgets can be mo
124. input devices for the DECwindows workstation 4 18 DECwindows Workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 10 Input Information Siring Device Types Input Action 1 2 4 Enter characters from keyboard Trigger with Return key or Enter button Break by selecting Cancel button when echoing is enabled or by selecting Ctrl U when echoing is disabled 3 ASCII encoded string Keypress enters character and triggers device Supported PETs The string input class for the DECwindows workstation supports PET 1 See the chapter on input functions in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETS Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the DECwindows workstation string class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial string NULL Echo area Varies by device Data record Input buffer size 20 ASCII characters Initial position 1 4 10 5 Stroke Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported stroke class logical input devices for the DECwindows workstation Stroke Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Points are entered with mouse motion Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Supported PETs The stroke input class for the DECwindows workstation supports PETs 1 3 and 4 See the chapter on input functions in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manu
125. its center 3 Fill the area formed by connecting the beginning and end points of the arc C 34 GDPs 338 Filled Arc Center and Two Points on Arc Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance the center point and one of the points on the circumference may be the same point 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you specify a value other than 2 or 3 GDPs C 35 339 Filled Arc Three Points on Circumference 339 Filled Arc Three Points on Circumference Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the arc beginning at the first point running through the second point and connecting to the third point GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 3 pts_array three points on the circumference gdp_id 339 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Component Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following v
126. keyboard When you press a key the device accepts the keystroke without a trigger To cause a break during request mode press Ctrl U DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS ignore any prompt and echo type specified for this device E 2 5 Stroke Devices The following section describes the stroke class logical input devices and specifies which DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations support each device VWS Workstations Using one of the VWS workstations you can use the Lock key feature for any of the stroke class logical input devices For more information see Section E 3 E 2 5 1 Stroke 1 2 3 and 4 Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN For workstations that do not have a mouse or puck these devices require you to press the arrow keys to move the stroke prompt To trigger the device press Return To cause a break during request mode press Ctrl U For workstations that do have a mouse or puck these devices require you to move the tracking device to move the stroke prompt To trigger the device press the left button To cause a break during request mode press the middle button on the mouse and the top button on the puck On the Digital ReGIS and the Tektronix 4107 workstations you can use the numeric keypad as a zoning mechanism when using device numbers 1 and 2 For more information concerning the numeric keypad see Section E 3 On the Digital VT330 and VT340 workstations use the right mouse butt
127. kx RERO REG RE X do B 41 205 Set Enter String 0 0 cece eee B 42 206 Set Icon Bitmaps 251 Inquire Current Writing Mode 0000s 252 Inquire Current Line Cap Style 0 0000 253 Inquire Current Line Join Style 00000008 254 Inquire Current Edge Attributes 00000005 255 Inquire Viewport Data 0 0 cece een 800 Inquire Current Display Speed 0 0 00 eee eeee 802 Inquire List of Edge Indexes 0 0 00 c eee eee 803 Inquire Segment Extent cee ee 804 Inquire Window Identifiers llle 805 Inquire Segment Highlighting Method 806 Inquire Highlighting Method 20 0000 c eee ee 807 Inquire Pasteboard Identifier llle 308 Inquire Menu Bar Identifier llle 809 Inquire Shell Identifier llle leen 850 Inquire List of Available Escapes llle 851 Inquire Default Display Speed llli ellen 352 Inquire Line Cap and Join Facilities 000 854 Inquire Edge Facilities llle 855 Inquire Predefined Edge Representation 856 Inquire Maximum Number of Edge Bundles 858 Inquire List of Highlighting Methods 859 Inquire Edge Representation llle 360 Inquire Language I
128. left corner of the workstation surface By default the handler uses an echo area whose lower left corner is located in the lower left corner of the display surface the origin of the device coordinate system If you use valuator choice or string input devices device numbers 1 3 4 the graphics handler creates an input window that is auxiliary to the one used for generating output your current workstation viewport For these logical input devices the graphics handler positions this auxiliary window according to your specified echo area The graphics handler generates an error if the echo area exceeds the maximum display surface size If during input you move the mouse outside the echo area auxiliary viewport the graphics handler disables mouse tracking until the mouse is once again within the echo area For input classes locator stroke and pick the sensitized area is the intersection of the echo area and the workstation viewport Be aware that if the application changes the size or position of the auxiliary window the graphics handler implicitly calls SET WORKSTATION WINDOW and regenerates the surface When you request input the graphics handler places the workstation viewport at the top of any other overlapping viewports Viewport appearance before and after the input request is unchanged 17 6 1 Choice Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported choice class logical input devices
129. match the new dimensions or scrolling will be enabled If the value is 0 the handler uses the scrolling resize mode of the output image If the value is 1 the handler uses zoom resize mode of the output image This is the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the scrolling mode as follows DEFINE PHIGSSRESIZE ZOOM 0 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for resizing as follows 9 setenv GKSresize zoom 1 Return continued on next page OSF Motif Workstation 9 5 OSF Motif Workstation 9 1 Environment Options Table 9 1 Cont OSF Motif Environment Options Syntax Description Scalable Fonts GKS USE_SCALABLE_FONTS GKSuse_scalable_fonts PHIGS USE_SCALABLE_ FONTS PHIGSuse_scalable_fonts Enables the use of X11R5 scalable fonts When this option is enabled DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS will use a scalable font when it is available and when the requested text height does not exactly match the point sizes of any available fonts If the value is 1 the option is enabled The default value is 0 disabled For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for scalable fonts as follows DEFINE PHIGSSUSE_SCALABLE FONTS 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for scalable fonts as follows 9 setenv GKSuse scalable fonts 0 Return Standa
130. number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description asf flags Flags that specify either bundled or individual attributes for each of the edge attribute settings in the following order 1 Edge control flag 2 Edge type flag 3 Edge width scale factor flag 4 Edge color index flag Escapes B 29 158 Set Edge Aspect Source Flag ASF See the following escapes for more information on edge attributes 153 Set Edge Control Flag 154 Set Edge Type 155 Set Edge Width Scale Factor 156 Set Edge Color Index B 30 Escapes 160 Begin Transformation Block 160 Begin Transformation Block Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape applies the specified transformation to all subsequently drawn primitives not contained in segments The transformation continues until you call 161 End Transformation Block or until you open a segment ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 1 number of rea
131. number of strings 0 address of integer array gdp_info address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 3 address of generic pointer array address of gdp info x points number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 1 number of reals 4 number of strings 0 address of integer array error status address of real array coord range address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The gdp_info structure is defined in C terms as follows struct Gint ws id workstation identifier Gint num points number of points that define the GDP Gint gdp id GDP identifier Gint gdp rec size size of the GDP data record in bytes Gfloat x points address of the array containing the GDP x points Gfloat y_points address of the array containing the GDP y points Ggdprec gdp rec address address of the GDP data record gdp info B 88 Escapes 404 Inquire Extent of a GDP The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status The error status coord_range The four world coordinate values of the segment s extent rectangle using the current transformation values Escapes
132. of 32 The corresponding entry in the font file would contain the number 32 This element is an integer Device Independent Fonts A 5 Device Independent Fonts A 4 Stroke Font File e unprintable This element specifies the offset to the character descriptor of the unprintable character This element is an integer e num chars This element specifies the number of characters supported in the font file There should be no gaps in the number of characters supported If there are characters that should not be displayed they should be indicated by number of polylines 0 which generates a space This element is an integer e offsets This element is an array of num_chars entry points This array contains the offsets to the character descriptor of each character to be displayed A 4 2 Character Descriptor Figure A 5 illustrates the structure of the character descriptor Figure A 5 Character Descriptor Structure xy_datasize 1 xy_datasize 2 char short short 1st 1st polyline polyline Nth Nth polyline polyline ZK 1585A GE A 6 Device Independent Fonts Device Independent Fonts A 4 Stroke Font File The character descriptor contains the following elements num_plines This element specifies the number of polylines making up a character This element is a word e width This element specifies the width of a character This element is a word and is ignored for monospaced fonts num points This
133. of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the radius vector specifies a distance of 0 then DEC GKS cannot generate a corresponding circle 336 Filled Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius 336 Filled Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms a circle from the specified circumference points and the radius vector point The circle is drawn so that the circumference clockwise from the first point to the second is no greater than pi radians half the circle GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 4 pts array two points vector origin point and the radius vector point gdp id 336 data rec number of integers 0 data rec len number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the su
134. of the current cross hair position plus some terminating characters The terminating characters may be any of the following e A carriage return CR and end of take EOT ACR e Nothing A jumper on a board in the terminal pedestal determines which option is enabled DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS require that the Tektronix 4014 terminal be configured for option 2 CR Otherwise using the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS input functions with the Tektronix 4014 terminal produces unpredictable results For example the user must press the space bar twice to register each point in stroke input To configure the Tektronix 4014 terminal for the CR option perform the following steps 1 Read the appendix on installation in the Tektronix Computer Display Terminal User s Manual Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 3 Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 3 Programming Considerations Make sure the power to the Tektronix 4014 terminal is off Open the front panel on the Tektronix 4014 terminal pedestal Locate the board labeled TC 2 usually the third board from the left Remove the ribbon cable connector Remove board TC 2 be sure to remember the slot you removed it from Locate the jumper Make sure that the jumper is in the middle location marked CR ONLY fen OG Ov gx co ON Put the board back in the same slot that you removed it from 10 Reconnect the connector to TC 2 11 Close the front panel 12 Turn on the power If after configuring
135. or equal to the offset start 1 As a result of the edits done between the activate BQUM range and deactivate BQUM range the watch range starting and ending offsets can change Elements inserted just before and just after the watch range are included in the watch range If the starting element is deleted the starting offset is incremented If the ending element is deleted the ending offset is decremented If the entire watch range is deleted the starting offset is set to be one greater than the end of the watch range and the ending offset is unchanged Escapes B 119 525 Set BQUM Flags 525 Set BQUM Flags B 120 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All This escape allows a DEC PHIGS application to set two flags in all currently open workstations that determine whether quick update erase and quick update draw traversals are performed for BQUMs ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array erase flag draw flag address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of rea
136. pattern 7596 Dark diagonally woven pattern 7596 Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees DDIF Output Workstation 3 7 DDIF Output Workstation 3 7 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 38 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 39 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 40 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 41 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 42 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 43 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 44 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 45 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 46 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 47 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 48 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 49 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 50 Finely woven grid 51 Finely woven grid 52 Finely woven grid 53 Finely woven grid 54 Finely woven grid 55 Finely woven grid 56 Finely woven grid 57 Sparsely woven grid 58 Sparsely woven grid 59 Sparsely woven grid 60 Sparsely woven grid 61 Sparsely woven grid 62 Sparsely woven grid 63 Sparsely woven grid 64 Downward scales fish like 65 Downward scales 66 Downward scales 67 Downward scales 68 Downward scales 69 Downward scales 70 Downward scales 71
137. primitives by reducing the number of structure elements which reduces the total fixed overhead It also reduces processing time by limiting the setup required to draw a new primitive Primitive aggregation can reduce the number of transformations necessary For example with an indexed primitive such as an indexed polygon with data fewer transformations are required because shared vertices are transformed only once and can be indexed to create multiple areas The disadvantage of using larger primitives is that pick input data indicates only the primitive picked not the facet of the primitive that was picked Therefore if an application requires finer picking granularity primitive aggregation may not be appropriate G 1 3 Choosing the Appropriate Primitive Types Choosing the most appropriate primitive type can speed up processing time Some guidelines you should follow are e Use nonuniform B spline primitives NURBS instead of the equivalent set of lines or filled areas e Use the two dimensional form of the primitive when the Z value is not present not important or equal to 0 0 e Use specific primitives such as spheres cones cylinders and cubes for more efficient memory usage and shorter drawing times e Use the DEC PHIGS extension primitives polyline set 3 or polyline set two dimensional instead of the polyline set 3 with color primitive These two primitives do not provide for color specification and thus enable more o
138. record used in an DRAWING PRIMITIVE interpreter dependent manner RECTANGLE 2 10 Two VDC points specifying the starting point and RECT the diagonal point of the rectangle CIRCLE 3 4 2 0 A VDC center point and a VDC distance vector used CIRCLE as the radius 2 10 CGM Output continued on next page Table 2 2 Cont CGM Element Descriptions CGM Output 2 8 Element Descriptions Element Name Opcode Argument Data Description CIRCLE ARC 3 4 2 1 A starting point an intermediate point and an end 3 POINT ARC3PT point CIRCLE ARC 3 4 2 2 A starting point an intermediate point an end 3 POINT CLOSE ARC3PTCLOSE point and an enumerated close flag PIE CHORD CIRCULAR ARC 3 4 2 3 A center point a distance x and y vector for the CENTER ARCCTR starting point a distance x and y vector for the end point and a VDC radius distance vector CIRCULAR ARC 3 4 2 4 A center point a distance x and y vector for the CENTER CLOSE ARCCTRCLOSE starting point a distance x and y vector for the end point a VDC radius distance vector and an enumerated close flag PIE CHORD ELLIPSE 3 4 2 5 A center point and an endpoint for each conjugate ELLIPSE diameter ELLIPTICAL ARC 3 4 2 6 A center point two endpoints on each conjugate ELLIPARC diameter a distance x and y vector for the starting point and a distance x and y vector for the end point ELLIPTICAL ARC 3 4 2 7 A center point two endpoints on each conjugate CLOSE ELLIPARCCLOSE diameter
139. systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier of a workstation as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID NODENAME n n Retum On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier of a workstation using the TCP IP transport as follows setenv GKSconid nodename n n See Section 4 2 for more information on specifying the connection identifier continued on next page DECwindows Workstation 4 1 Environment Options Table 4 1 Cont DECwindows Environment Options DEC GKS Syntax DEC PHIGS Syntax Double Buffering Flag GKS DOUBLE BUFFERING GKSdouble buffering PHIGS DOUBLE BUFFERING PHIGSdouble buffering Specifies that double buffering should be enabled This option defaults to a value of 0 FALSE for DECwindows workstations The only supported double buffering method for DECwindows workstations is pixmap double buffering The value of the double buffering environment option is ignored for DECwindows workstations Double buffering is enabled simply by the existence of the environment option In other words if the value of the double buffering logical name is 0 double buffering is still enabled However for PEX workstations when the value of the double buffering logical name is 0 double buffering is disabled For example o
140. systems you define the DEC PHIGS PHIGSuid path logical name for the UID search path as follows DEFINE PHIGSSUID PATH Return _ SYSTEM DISK USERNAME UID Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the UID search path as follows setenv GKSuid path usr users smith fonts Return Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS GKSwstype systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value PHIGSwstype For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for a DECwindows workstation as follows DEFINE PHIGS WSTYPE 211 Retu On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for a DECwindows workstation widget as follows setenv GKSwstype 213 Return 4 2 Connection Identifier A connection identifier must be defined for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS to work with the DECwindows workstation If you do not define the connection identifier the OPEN WORKSTATION function returns an error You can define the connection identifier in your code or in a logical names table to which your program has access 4 8 DEOCwindows Workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 2 Connection Identifier The definition depends on whether you are running under the OpenVMS or ULTRIX operating system and transport For more information on local transports see Section G 1 9 T
141. the CLOSE WORKSTATION function before you close the display or destroy the drawable Workstation type 272 does not select any X events Therefore your application is free to select any X events on this or any other drawable Furthermore this workstation will not redraw itself when exposed or when an icon is expanded to 10 10 OpenGL Workstation OpenGL Workstation 10 3 Workstation Type Values a drawable In such instances your application should call the REDRAW ALL STRUCTURES function to force DEC PHIGS to redraw the drawable This workstation does not use the OSF Motif Toolkit so your application has unrestricted use of this toolkit OpenGL Widget Value 273 Workstation type 273 uses a pre existing OSF Motif Toolkit and OSF Motif widget Before opening the workstation you must perform the following steps 1 Initialize the X Toolkit 2 Create an application context 3 Open the X display using the X Toolkit 4 Obtain a visual that is valid for use with OpenGL You can obtain a visual of the correct type by using the glXChooseVisual or glGetConfig function Refer to Section 10 9 for an example of using glXChooseVisual to obtain a visual 5 Create a color map You will probably need to create a color map for use with the visual 6 Create an application shell using the visual obtained in step 4 and the color map created in step 5 7 Create a main window a bulletin board and any other subsidiary widgets required by yo
142. the Tektronix 4014 terminal for the CR option you have any problems with GIN input contact your local Tektronix representative 15 4 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fill area pattern and hatch values for the Tektronix 4014 terminals The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns 15 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Cross hatches 2 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 3 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 4 Horizontal lines 5 Vertical lines 6 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 7 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 8 Horizontal lines sparse 9 Vertical lines sparse 15 4 Tektronix 4014 Workstation Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 5 Input Information 15 5 Input Information Each of the following input class sections lists the supported logical input device numbers and supported prompt and echo type PET numbers For a complete description of these numbers see the input chapt
143. the available fill area pattern and hatch values for the DECwindows workstation The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns 4 9 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Cross hatches 2 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees DECwindows Workstation 4 13 DECwindows Workstation 4 9 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 3 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 4 Horizontal lines 5 Vertical lines 6 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 7 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 8 Horizontal lines sparse 9 Vertical lines sparse 4 9 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Monochrome for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern values for color index 1 and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 2 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 3 Dark diagonally woven pattern 7596 4 Horizontal brick pattern 5 Vertical brick patter
144. the echo area in device coordinates The DECwindows workstation device coordinate system origin is in the lower left corner of the workstation display surface When you request input the DECwindows device handler places the workstation viewport at the top of any other overlapping viewports Viewport appearance before and after the input request is unchanged 4 10 1 Choice Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported choice class logical input devices for the DECwindows workstation Choice Device Types Input Action 1 6 7 8 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break by selecting Cancel button when echoing is enabled or with mouse button 2 when echoing is disabled Keypad key is selection and trigger Function key is selection and trigger Mouse button down is selection and trigger Mouse button up is selection and trigger on Fk c WD Select and trigger software button box with mouse button 1 10 Select and trigger hardware button box by pressing button Supported PETs The choice input class for the DECwindows workstation excluding choice device types 9 and 10 supports PETs 1 1 and 3 See the chapter on input functions in 4 16 DECwindows Workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 10 Input Information the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs The DECwindows workstation choice device types 9 and 10 support PETs 1
145. there may be a maximum allowable time by which the server must respond to a drawing request even when the server is in the process of rendering a complicated display In most cases structure modes 0 and 4 yields better server response time than structure mode 3 On the other hand structure mode 3 results in better performance during output primitive rendering than structure modes 0 and 4 To determine which structure mode is best for your application you will need to experiment with the different modes If server response time is a critical concern for your application there are two recommended methods for achieving better server response time e Method 1 With this method you use structure mode 3 reduce the size of your posted structure networks and increase the number of your posted structure networks For example instead of posting a single structure A with 10 execute structure elements in it take each of the 10 structures executed within structure A and post each separately to the workstation In structure mode 3 DEC PHIGS sends a single command to execute each of the posted structure networks If a structure network is large server response time will be slower if the structure network is small server response time will be faster e Method 2 With this method you use structure modes 0 and 4 and try to improve output primitive rendering performance One way to improve this performance is to combine as many output primitives a
146. to the OPEN WORKSTATION function names a connection identifier If you specify an invalid display DEC PHIGS returns an error when it attempts to open or query the workstation When performing input DEC PHIGS positions the input echo window as defined by the input echo area in device coordinates When generating output DEC PHIGS positions the display window as defined by the current workstation viewport DEC PHIGS provides a method to inquire about the window identifier and widget identifiers using escapes The escapes and how to use them are described in Appendix B 10 5 Input Information The OpenGL devices support input devices in the same manner as OSF Motif devices See Chapter 9 for input information on the OSF Motif workstation 10 6 Font Support All OpenGL workstation types 270 273 support 24 English fonts and a Japanese font value 10001 in stroke precision You can specify character or string precision for these fonts but the OpenGL handler always uses stroke precision To use Japanese fonts with English workstation types you must set the language environment option to Japanese value 22 See Table 10 1 for more information about available fonts 10 7 Escapes For a list of supported escapes run the PHIGS PREDEF program 10 8 Limitations When using the OpenGL driver you should be aware of the following limitations Spread Angle of the Spot Light The spread angle of the spot light in DEC PHIGS can vary from 0
147. top to bottom If the icon height and width are specified as 0 then the default icon bitmap will be used instead and the bitmap definition string for that icon must not be specified Some devices may not need more than one icon bitmap in which case only the small icon should be specified The large icon height and large icon width parameters should be set to 0 ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 5 siw sih liw lih number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id siw sih liw lih siw sih integers liw lih integers address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 43 206 Set Icon Bitmaps B 44 Escapes The input integer array contains the elements shown in the following table Component Component Name Description 1 ws_id Workstation identifier 2 siw Small icon width in pixels 3 sih Small icon height in pixels 4
148. up to 15 16 density Vertical lines sparse 6 25 Vertical lines sparse 12 5 Vertical lines sparse 50 Vertical lines sparse 75 Vertical lines very fine 50 Vertical lines 25 Vertical lines 50 Vertical lines 75 Horizontal lines sparse 6 25 Horizontal lines sparse 12 5 Horizontal lines sparse 50 Horizontal lines sparse 75 Horizontal lines very fine 50 Horizontal lines 25 Horizontal lines 50 Horizontal lines 75 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 6 25 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 12 5 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 50 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 75 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 25 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 50 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 75 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 6 25 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 12 5 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 50 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 7596 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 2596 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 50 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 7596 Sparsely woven grid black and white only Sparsely woven grid black and white only Sparsely woven grid black and white only Sparsely woven grid black and white only Sparsely woven grid black and white only Series of special character patterns black and white only 14 6 Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 5 Pri
149. up to 15 16 density Vertical lines sparse 6 2596 Vertical lines sparse 12 596 Vertical lines sparse 50 Vertical lines sparse 7596 Vertical lines very fine 5096 Vertical lines 2596 Vertical lines 5096 Vertical lines 7596 Horizontal lines sparse 6 25 Horizontal lines sparse 12 5 Horizontal lines sparse 50 Horizontal lines sparse 75 Horizontal lines very fine 50 Horizontal lines 25 Horizontal lines 50 Horizontal lines 75 LJ250 and LA324 Workstation 7 5 LJ250 and LA324 Workstation 7 4 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 45 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 6 25 46 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 12 596 47 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 50 48 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 75 49 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 25 50 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 50 51 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 75 52 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 6 25 53 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 12 5 54 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 50 55 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 75 56 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 25 57 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 5096 58 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 7596 7 6 LJ250 and LA324 Workstation LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation This chapter describes the information on using DEC GKS and
150. use MIT double buffering If MIT double buffering is not supported by the server DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS use pixmap double buffering If you want pixmap double buffering set the double buffering flag to 1 and the MIT double buffering flag to 0 For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to enable MIT double buffering as follows DEFINE PHIGS MIT DB ENABLE 1 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable to disable MIT double buffering as follows setenv GKSmit db enable 0 Return Number of Blues in the Color Cube PHIGS NUM BLUE FOR TRUE PHIGSnum blue for true Specifies the number of shades of blue that DEC PHIGS allocates in the true color map The value of this option defaults to four shades of blue This environment option is used only when DirectColor PseudoColor visuals are encountered PseudoColor visuals are common on PEX 8 plane workstations For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the number of blues to 2 as follows DEFINE PHIGS NUM BLUE FOR TRUE 2 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the number of blues to 4 as follows setenv PHIGSnum blue for true 4 Retum continued on next page PEX Workstation 11 5 PEX Workstation 11 1 Environment Options Table 11 1 Cont PEX Environment Options Syntax Description Number of Fixed Col
151. view transformation Annotation style Line attributes e Interior related Interior style Shading method Lighting method Surface properties Light source state e Edge related edge attributes G 2 6 Choosing a Double Buffering Method Pixmap Versus MIT PEX Only On PEX devices DEC PHIGS supports two methods for double buffering pixmap and MIT MIT double buffering is the best method for animation where frame rates are important This method takes advantage of hardware features to simply swap in the next frame With pixmap double buffering the image is drawn to an offscreen pixmap and then the entire pixmap is copied to the display This method uses the pixmap to repair windows after exposure events without redrawing the entire display In most cases the time required to repair the display is greatly reduced MIT double buffering on the other hand requires that the entire screen be redrawn after an exposure event G 10 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 2 Tuning DECwindows and OSF Motif Workstations G 2 7 Disabling Input Devices Input devices that echo to the output display region reduce performance significantly To maintain the correctness of input echoes and avoid complications with asynchronous input DEC PHIGS checks for input devices disables the input device if required performs the output operation and reenables the input devices Echoing input device
152. widget class include Xm BulletinB h Bulletin Board widget class include Mrm MrmAppl h UIL include GL gl h include GL glu h include GL glx h typedef void VoidProc typedef struct VoidProc proc int tag MyCallback void exit pushed Widget widget static MyCallback callbacks exit pushed NULL NULL continued on next page OpenGL Workstation 10 15 OpenGL Workstation 10 9 Examples Example 10 2 Cont Creating a Window for Workstation Type 273 Widget create gl widget int double buffering char program name char program class MyCallback callbacks int argc char argv Display display Widget top level Widget main widget Widget phigs widget Widget menu bar Widget exit button Arg arg list ARG MAX Cardinal arg count XtAppContext app context int visual attributes XVisualInfo yil Colormap cmap static int db1Buf GLX_DOUBLEBUFFER GLX_RGBA GLX_DEPTH_SIZE 16 GLX_RED_SIZE 1 GLX_GREEN_SIZE 1 GLX_BLUE_SIZE 1 None be static int snglBuf amp dblBuf 1 XtToolkitInitialize app_context XtCreateApplicationContext display XtOpenDisplay app_context Application context NULL Display name program_name Application name program_class Class name NULL Optional argument list 0 Optional argument count amp argc
153. woven pattern 50 3 Darkest diagonally woven pattern 75 4 Horizontal brick pattern 5 Vertical brick pattern 6 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 7 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 8 Finely woven grid 9 Sparsely woven grid 10 Downward scales fish like 11 Upward scales 12 Rightward scales 13 Leftward scales 14 to 28 Available 17 5 3 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Color for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern value indexes for color VAXstation workstations Style Index Appearance c Oo 10 OC t FF Co l9 H e e e e T a QO aA co l2 HL O Light diagonally woven pattern 25 Light diagonally woven pattern 25 Light diagonally woven pattern 25 Light diagonally woven pattern 25 Light diagonally woven pattern 25 Light diagonally woven pattern 25 Light diagonally woven pattern 25 Darker diagonally woven pattern 50 Darker diagonally woven pattern 50 Darker diagonally woven pattern 50 Darker diagonally woven pattern 50 Darker diagonally woven pattern 50 Darker diagonally woven pattern 50 Darker diagonally woven pattern 50 Darkest diagonally woven pattern 75 Darkest diagonally woven pattern 75 VWS Workstation 17 9 VWS Workstation 17 5 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
154. 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance one of the vectors may have a length of 0 113 Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference 113 Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the ellipse using the two focal points and a single point on the circumference GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 3 pts_array two focal points and the point on the circumference gdp_id 113 data_rec number of integers 0 data_rec_len number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance the point may be on the line segment between the focal points GDPs C 23 114 Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors 114 Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors
155. 0 0 4094 4094 Line 0 2047 4094 2047 EndPic EndMF Y COMPLEX ROMAN HERSHEY COMPI UPLEX ROMAN X ROMAN HERSHEY MATH SYMBOLS LEX GREEK HERSHEY COMPLEX SCRIPT HERSHEY TRIPLEX ITALIC HERSHEY GOTHIC ITALIAN HERSHEY COMP HERSHEY COMPLEX CYR HERSHEY GOTHIC GERMAN HERSHEY SYMBOL SET 1 HERSHE CGM Output 2 17 DDIF Output Workstation 3 DDIF Output Workstation DIGITAL Document Interchange Format DDIF is the format for the interchange of revisable compound documents including illustrations with Digital document processing systems This chapter provides the information needed to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS to produce DDIF output that can be incorporated into other DDIF documents It provides the predefined color and bundle indexes for the DDIF output facility DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS predefine these indexes for you to use within your applications 3 1 Copying DDIF Files from UNIX Systems to OpenVMS Systems On OpenVMS systems files containing DDIF information are expected to have the DDIF semantic attribute set or they are ignored by DDIF tools After copying a DDIF file from a UNIX system to an OpenVMS system check the semantic attribute using the following DCL command DIR FULL Return If the file semantic is not DDIF set it with the following DCL command SET FILE SEMANTIC DDIF filename doc Return 3 2 DDIF Output DDIF output is written to a
156. 00 000 4 12 4 5 Cell Array Restriction for DEC GKS 0 0 0 0 0 es 4 12 4 6 General Information 0 0 0 0 000 ee eee eens 4 12 4 7 Minimizing Color Traversal for DEC PHIGS 0 4 4 13 4 8 Bundle Indexes 2 9 cab o Rer em RC RE RS 4 13 4 9 Pattern and Hatch Values 0 00 4 13 4 9 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 0 0 0000 4 13 4 9 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Monochrome for DEC GKS 4 14 4 9 3 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Color for DEC GKS 4 14 4 0 Input Information 454r ebx rk ee hod bs ue oe s RO a ue 4 16 4 10 1 Choice Input Class og chads qe ae bape gag hee ah gone ede oe dust ides 4 16 4 10 2 Locator Input Class 0 0 eens 4 17 4 10 3 Pick Input Class s lt sare ose Gee Oe DY SE Wo NE Pe RW s 4 18 4 10 4 String Input Class 2 e cae acer ane RR ae bed Kowa eR ea TER 4 18 4 10 5 Stroke Input Class 2 2 llle 4 19 4 10 6 Valuator Input Class 0 0 teen 4 20 4 11 Bolt SUDDOEL 1 orte ketene eas dees Atanas ets es Se oes eee 4 20 4 11 1 Default Fonts ps4 gk Reg cR Oe Sb CES SY Rue Seva EFE 4 20 4 11 1 1 English and ISO Latin 1 Fonts 0 0 2 0 0 2 eee 4 21 4 11 1 2 Japanese Fonts cee eee eee eee 4 21 4 11 1 3 Hebrew and ISO Latin 8 Fonts 0 0 cece eee 4 22 4 11 2 Font Mode Options exea EE e Y Y eR RW E 4 22 4 11 3 Known Fonts 1232 2 be REPE ERE RE ERE T PA 4 23 442 UWE Piles
157. 1 10 Color table dynamics 4 10 Components GDP data records C 2 Connection identifier 1 2 DECwindows 4 8 4 12 DECwindows specific use 4 12 environment option CGM 2 2 DDIF 3 2 DECwindows 4 2 HPPCL 5 1 language 3 2 LCGO1 6 1 LJ250 7 1 LVP16 and HP GL 8 1 OpenGL 10 1 OSF Motif 9 2 PEX 11 2 PostScript 1 14 12 1 ReGIS 13 1 sixel 14 1 Tektronix 16 2 Tektronix 4014 15 1 VS500 16 2 VWS 17 1 OpenGL 10 8 OSF Motif 9 7 9 12 OSF Motif specific use 9 12 PEX 11 9 Tektronix 4014 15 2 VAXstation specific use 17 7 workstation types 4 12 Constants bit masks 1 2 escapes B 1 for supported workstations 1 2 to 1 5 GDPs C 1 Constants cont d paper sizes 3 3 7 3 8 3 12 3 Coordinates for all devices 1 13 Customization 4 26 to 4 32 9 25 to 9 31 widget hierarchies 4 28 9 27 Xdefaults files 4 26 9 26 Cycling logical input devices E 7 D Data records See also GDPs default input 16 6 to 16 13 escapes B 1 to B 2 GDPs C 1 to C 3 input echo area titles E 6 DDIF 3 1 to 3 9 bit masks 3 2 bundle color values 3 1 color indexes 3 4 environment options 3 2 connection identifier 3 2 language 3 2 workstation type 3 2 environment variables 3 2 file name specification 3 1 hatch values 3 5 landscape orientation 3 3 logical names 3 2 paper sizes 3 3 pattern support 3 5 portrait orientation 3 3 DDIF files copying from UNIX to OpenVMS 3 1 DE
158. 1 which performs both input and output DECwindows Input and Output Value 211 Workstation type 211 performs input and output and uses the DECwindows Toolkit Because of a restriction in the DECwindows Toolkit software your application may not initialize the DECwindows Toolkit if it uses workstation types 210 or 211 In addition you should not select events on any windows created by the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS workstation 4 10 DECwindows Workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 3 Valid Bit Mask Values You can create widgets that are children of certain widgets belonging to the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS workstation Escape functions are provided to obtain the identifiers of these widgets The escapes are documented in Appendix B When the user or window manager resizes workstations of type 211 the picture may be clipped at the new window boundaries A push button on the menu bar allows the user to restore the window to its default size and location Scroll bars allow the user to pan the displayable region of a clipped picture DECwindows Drawable Value 212 Workstation type 212 uses a preexisting window or pixmap and is output only Your application must open the display and create the drawable before calling the OPEN WORKSTATION function and it must not close the display or destroy the drawable until after it has called the CLOSE WORKSTATION function This workstation does not select any X events Consequently your application is free to s
159. 10 Input Values Mathematical Concepts for DEC PHIGS Mathematical Concepts for DEC PHIGS This appendix provides the equations used for lighting of primitives and depth cueing for DEC PHIGS The lighting of primitives and depth cueing equations are common to many of the device handlers such as the LJ250 and LA324 printers the Tektronix and VS500 GPX supported and DECwindows devices Table F 1 lists the variable definitions and their sources for the lighting equations Table F 1 Variable Definitions for the Lighting Equations Symbol Description Data Type Source Ca Ambient contribution from light Array of three reals 2 source Ca Diffuse contribution from light Array of three reals 2 source Cs Specular contribution from light Array of three reals 2 source C1 C2 Attenuation coefficients Real 1 Ka Coefficient of ambient reflection Real 5 Ka Coefficient of diffuse reflection Real 5 Ks Coefficient of specular reflection Real 5 La Light attenuation Real 2 Le Light source color Array of three reals 1 La Light source direction Array of three reals 1 Le Light source concentration Real 1 exponent Lp Light source position Array of three reals 1 NORM Coordinates of a unit normal Array of three reals 2 vector Oa Object diffuse color Array of three reals 4 Oe Object specular exponent Real 5 Op Object position Array of three reals 3 O Object specular color Array of three reals 5
160. 2 seg length last address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 97 509 Set Line Pattern B 98 Escapes The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier linetype The line type num_segments phase_start seg_length1 seg_length2 seg_length_last The number of segments The phase start This must be 0 The length of the first segment in pixels The length of the second segment in pixels The length of the last segment in pixels Figure B 1 illustrates how the line pattern data is arranged The example on the left shows the empty data vector where the start offset is the first element and the remaining elements specify the pattern list The example on the right shows a sample data vector with filled elements Figure B 1 Integer Data Vector Format Start Offset Pattern List Creates a dash dot pattern Start drawing line at
161. 2 6 2 6 3 6 3 6 3 7 1 7 3 74 7 5 8 1 8 2 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 9 1 9 7 9 11 9 11 9 11 9 12 9 12 9 12 9 13 9 13 9 13 9 14 9 14 9 11 Input Informatlon x3 oye Ge oe eRe een xr ea eR age does ets 9 11 1 Choice Input Clas8 se 2c a cee eben eee cd ea eRe EA Fr 9 11 2 Locator Input ClasS 5 252m Ga abe eke Ge eee ade dea beens es 9 11 3 Pick Input Class 2er oie as he EUR EAE ORR eee Ros RUNI EA SS 9 11 4 String Input Class 4237 wx ance RR ea Pe EES RR Re RR e ORC s Rn 9 11 5 Stroke Input Class 2s es 9 11 6 Valuator Input Class 0 0 0 ees 9 12 Font SUupDpOP s d RR UR RSGR OX bee Re SEG ES Shes KW RRGGR ERES 9 12 1 Detault Eonts 2d taeda s ere ets Ee RR Pap doe prts 9 12 1 1 English and ISO Latin 1 Fonts 0 0 00 02 eee 9 12 1 2 Japanese Konis 4 5 tege 4E RE ERR e RECEPERAT PEE 9 12 1 3 Hebrew and ISO Latin 8 Fonts 0 0 00 eee eee 9 12 2 Font Mode Options lllleeeee es 9 12 3 Known Bonis 9 gc o ues sur o RO Rus arae Dec Ru a NL QWdS UTE FileS 22 cenkeadcves ke eadtvedevaadiatereal ee Er RE SEES 9 14 Customization s eea ka a Diaa a hh hr 9 14 1 Use of Xdefaults Files 0 2 ce ees 9 14 2 Widget Hierarchies 0 0 ccc eee 9 15 Internationalization llle 9 16 DEC GKS Sample Application llllle es 10 OpenGL Workstation 11 vi 10 4 Environment Options lee 10 2 Connection Identifier 0
162. 28 4 2 Choice Menu 0 cece hh 4 29 4 3 Choice Button Box Software 0 0 0 eee ees 4 30 4 4 Maluti sic 0 28 ode oR aed eRe eR Oe PRA PER ADEE Ge WE PRESSES 4 31 4 5 DEMS so abd dad b wees amp oO eee SEU Dee we bee a bee bee 4 31 4 6 Message Box scu sese seik aens aka Sta esha eens ak 4 32 8 1 LVP16 Font Number 5000 2 2 0 0 es 8 6 8 2 LVP16 Font Number 5001 2 es 8 7 8 3 LVP16 Font Number 5002 sleeeeeee nee 8 8 8 4 LVP16 Font Number 5008 2 2 0 ees 8 9 xiii Xiv 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 19 9 1 17 1 17 2 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 6 A 6 A 8 A 9 A 10 A 11 A 12 A 13 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 18 A 19 A 20 LVP16 Font Number 5004 LVP16 Font Number 5006 LVP16 Font Number 5007 LVP16 Font Number 5008 LVP16 Font Number 5009 LVP16 Font Number 5030 LVP16 Font Number 5031 LVP16 Font Number 5032 LVP16 Font Number 5033 LVP16 Font Number 5034 LVP16 Font Number 5035 LVP16 Font Number 5036 LVP16 Font Number 5037 LVP16 Font Number 5038 LVP16 Font Number 5039 Menu Bar Choice Menu Choice Button Box Software cce Valuator VWS Maximum Display Size eee Adjusting VWS Echo Area Windows lessen VWS Font 200 Taber VWS Font 201 Bold Taber VWS Font 203 Bold Wide Taber 0 0 00 00 00 cee euee VWS Font
163. 449 GE A 3 Font Design Figure A 2 illustrates the design of the stroke font Figure A 2 Stroke Font Design TOP line CAP line HALF line BASE line BOTTOM line Character width Maximum character width X is the origin of this coordinate ZK 1582A GE The character shapes are drawn using a coordinate system in which the base line is y 0 and the left line is x 0 A 2 Device Independent Fonts Device Independent Fonts A 3 Font Design Each character in a font file is stored as one or more polylines The origin for these polylines is the left base point of the character The points of the polylines are specified in integer numbers In DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS the x and y coordinates of a character are normalized by the distance between the CAP and BASE lines The value of the distance between CAP and BASE defines the precision of the character design That is if this value is large you can make a more detailed design for a polyline A 4 Stroke Font File Figure A 3 illustrates the stroke font file structure Figure A 3 Stroke Font File Structure OFFSET bytes k 4 Bytes 0 4 unprintable A num_chars Header offsets 0 2 B offsets NC 1 C A Character Descriptor of Unprintable Character p Character Descriptor of the First Character Character Descriptor C Character Descriptor of the Last Character ZK 1583A GE This structure is divided into two parts the
164. 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 17 10 VWS Workstation Darkest diagonally woven pattern 75 Darkest diagonally woven pattern 75 Darkest diagonally woven pattern 75 Darkest diagonally woven pattern 75 Darkest diagonally woven pattern 75 Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Horizontal brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Finely woven grid Finely woven grid Finely woven grid Finely woven grid Finely woven grid Finely woven grid Finely woven grid VWS Workstation 17 5 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 57 Sparsely woven grid 58 Sparsely woven grid 59 Sparsely woven grid 60 Sparsely woven grid 61 Sparsely woven grid 62 Sparsely woven grid 63 Sparsely woven grid 64 Downward scales fish like 65 Downwar
165. 596 39 Horizontal lines sparse 50 40 Horizontal lines sparse 7596 41 Horizontal lines very fine 5096 42 Horizontal lines 25 43 Horizontal lines 50 44 Horizontal lines 75 45 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 6 25 46 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 12 5 47 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 50 48 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 75 49 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 25 50 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 50 51 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 75 52 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 6 25 53 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 12 5 DECwindows Workstation 4 15 DECwindows Workstation 4 9 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 54 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 50 55 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 75 56 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 25 57 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 50 58 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 7596 59 Sparsely woven grid 60 Sparsely woven grid 61 Sparsely woven grid 62 Sparsely woven grid 63 Sparsely woven grid 64 Downward scales fish like 65 Downward scales fish like 4 10 Input Information Each of the following input class sections lists the supported logical input device numbers and supported prompt and echo type PET numbers For a complete description of these numbers see the chapter on input functions in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding manuals For all input classes you specify
166. 7 76 Wg w 8 8H Xhx 9 SIYiy A x J Zj Zz B KAk a C t DI D MAma E 1 uu ay F IUS 0 o ZK 3000 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 15 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 11 LVP16 Font Number 5031 Font 5031 Precision string 0 1 2 3 4 558 7 8 9 B C DE F 0 OEP p 1 1 1 A0a qg 2 a BRobr 3 3 Oo 35 E Ss 4 HA4DrTdt 5 aA 99r Ueu 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 76 Wg w 8 8H Xh x 9 9IYigsy A x J Zjz B K AK a C L 016 D MAma E cR N n F 0__o ZK 3001 GE 8 16 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 12 LVP16 Font Number 5032 Fonts 5032 Precisfon string 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 0 8 P p 1 1 1 Adag 2 oe BRobr 3 3C Scs 4 4DTdt 5 25 Ueu 6 amp 6 F Vf v 7 76 Wg w 8 8H Xh x 9 SIYiy A x J Z yz B K A kK C o L B 1l 8 D M m E oe ee ac F 0 o0 ZK 3002 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 17 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 13 LVP16 Font Number 5033 Font 5033 Prectstfon 0 12 8 5 6 7 8 9 A 0 GI RE 1 1 1 Ada qg 2 e BH br 3 eo C5 cS 4 4DTdt 5 5 EU eu 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 76 Wg w 8 8H Xh x 9 8S I Y y A x J Zj z B KAk a C
167. 7 39 or 139 for the DEClaser printers The possible values for m include the following Value Paper Orientation 0 Landscape the picture is wider than it is tall This is the default setting 1 Portrait the picture is taller than it is wide Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 3 Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 2 Valid Bit Mask Values The possible values for nn include the following Value Paper Size 00 Paper size is A 8 5 x 11 inches This is the default setting 50 Paper size is A4 21 x 29 7 centimeters 70 Paper size is B4 25 7 x 36 4 centimeters This is for the DEClaser 2300 printer only 14 3 Device Considerations The following sections describe LA50 printer switch settings and device queues and allocation 14 3 1 LA50 Switch Settings To specify a 2 1 aspect ratio on the LA50 printer you must leave switches SW1 to SW5 open For more information see your printer documentation 14 3 2 Device Queues and Allocation When using the sixel devices as either allocated or queued devices on OpenVMS systems you need to set terminal characteristics by entering the following DCL command SET TERMINAL device name INTERACTIVE NOECHO NOTYPEAHEAD Return NOESCAPE NOHOSTSYNC TTSYNC LOWERCASE TAB NOWRAP HARDCOPY Retum EIGHTBIT NOBROADCAST FORM FULLDUP SPEED set speed Retum Replace device name with the name of the device to be allocated Replace set speed with a value eq
168. AULT COLOR MAP GKSuse default color map PHIGS USE DEFAULT COLOR MAP PHIGSuse default color map 11 2 PEX Workstation Specifies the color map to be used If the value of this option is 1 the workstation will use only the default color map that is associated with the root window If the value of this option is 0 the workstation will use the color map that has a sufficient number of color cells This can be either the default root window color map or a private color map depending on the workstation type and the default visual type of the system For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the default color map as follows DEFINE PHIGS USE DEFAULT COLOR MAP 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable to use a color map that has enough memory as follows Q setenv GKSuse_default_color_map 0 Return continued on next page PEX Workstation 11 1 Environment Options Table 11 1 Cont PEX Environment Options Syntax Description Digital PEX Extension GKS USE_MPEX GKSuse_mpex PHIGS USE_MPEX PHIGSuse mpex Controls whether DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS will generate any Digital Proprietary MPEX requests Setting this environment option to 0 forces DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS to strictly generate standard PEX protocol In general you do not need to set this environment option On connect to a PEX server DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS query to see
169. Appearance Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 Darkest diagonally woven pattern 7596 Horizontal brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Finely woven grid c oo 10 O A wd H Sparsely woven grid 10 Downward scales fish like 11 Upward scales 12 Rightward scales 13 Leftward scales 14 to 28 Increasing densities of grey no hatch style starting at 1 16 density incrementing by 1 16 up to 15 16 density 29 to 59 GKS pattern DEC GKS supports patterns on black and white PostScript workstation types only 61 and 65 12 6 Font Support The DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS PostScript graphics handler supports 43 hardware fonts and two Japanese composite fonts When you specify fonts use caution Not all PostScript printers support all the fonts supported by the PostScript handler DEC GKS allows these fonts to be used in stroke precision in two dimensional compatibility mode Otherwise these fonts are available in string precision The following table describes font support by printer type 12 6 PostScript Workstation PostScript Workstation 12 6 Font Support Font Numbers Supporting Printers 101 through 113 Most PostScript printers 101 through 129 Digital LPS40 printer 101 through 143 Some PostScript printers 10101 through 10102 Japanese print server For more information on fonts suppo
170. Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error_status max_num_ bundles address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_type The workstation type The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status The error status max_num_bundles The maximum number of edge bundle table entries 358 Inquire List of Highlighting Methods 358 Inquire List of Highlighting Methods Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape returns the list of supported segment and primitive highlighting methods ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data out_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address o
171. B 89 440 Set Connection Identifier String 440 Set Connection Identifier String B 90 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All workstations This escape can only be used by application programs that use the Fortran binding This escape sets the connection identifier string to be used in the next call to OPEN WORKSTATION If multiple calls to OPEN WORKSTATION are to be made this escape should be called before each OPEN WORKSTATION call ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 1 address of integer array 0 address of real array 0 address of string length array length of new string address of string pointer array conid number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description length of new string Length of the new connection identifier string conid The connection identifier string Example B 1 illustrates how a data
172. C GKS fonts A 1 to A 9 input values E 1 DEClaser bit masks 14 3 paper size 14 3 DEC PHIGS fonts A 1 to A 9 input values E 1 DECstation 5000 HLHSR 10 9 11 10 DECwindows 4 1 to 4 32 bit masks 4 9 cell array restrictions 4 12 17 7 choice input 4 16 color table dynamics 4 10 color table size 4 10 connection identifier 4 8 4 12 default input values 4 16 depth cueing F 3 DECwindows cont d device coordinate information 1 13 environment options 4 1 border size 4 2 color map size 4 2 connection identifier 4 2 dials and buttons 4 4 double buffering 4 3 font index 4 3 font list 4 38 font mode 4 3 font path 4 4 input mode 4 5 language 4 5 menu bar size 4 5 resize mode 4 5 standard color map 4 6 title size 4 7 UID search path 4 8 workstation type 4 8 environment variables 4 1 font support 4 20 hardware color map 4 9 hatch values 4 13 lighting equations F 2 locator input 4 17 logical input devices 4 16 logical names 4 1 minimum requirements 4 1 pick input 4 18 pixel inquiries 1 13 programming considerations 4 11 restrictions 4 12 string input 4 18 stroke input 4 19 valuator input 4 20 virtual color map 4 9 workstation type 4 9 DECwindows UIL Files 4 25 to 4 26 DECwindows workstations G 7 to G 11 changing attributes on OpenGL devices G 10 choosing double buffering method G 10 disabling input devices G 11
173. Center and Point on Circumference 101 Circle Center and Point on Circumference Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms a circle from the specified center point and a single point on the circle s circumference GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 2 pts_array center and circumference point gdp_id eli data rec number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the center point and the point on the circumference are the same point DEC GKS cannot form a circle GDPs C 9 102 Circle Three Points on Circumference 102 Circle Three Points on Circumference Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP draws the circle whose circumference includes the three specified points GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 3 pts_array three circumference points gdp_id 102 data rec number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer
174. DD As an input output device using the DECwindows Toolkit and OSF Motif software 222 x000000DE As an output only application window 223 x000000DF As an input output device within an application widget 240 x000000F0 As an output only device using OSF Motif PEX 241 x000000F 1 As an input output device using OSF Motif PEX 242 x000000F 2 As an output only device within a PEX application drawable window or pixmap 243 x000000F3 As an input output device within a PEX application widget PEX Output Only Values 220 and 240 Workstation types 220 and 240 are output only DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS create an output window but do not select any X events Consequently your application is free to select any X events on this or any other window In addition these workstations will not redraw themselves when exposed or when an icon is expanded to a window In such instances your application should call the REDRAW ALL SEGMENTS function for DEC GKS or the REDRAW ALL STRUCTURES function for DEC PHIGS to force DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS to redraw the window These workstations do not make use of the PEX Workstation 11 13 PEX Workstation 11 3 Workstation Type Values DECwindows Toolkit and OSF Motif software so your application is free to use the DECwindows Toolkit and OSF Motif software PEX Input and Output Values 221 and 241 Workstation type 221 performs input and output and uses the DECwindows Toolkit and OSF Motif software Workstation
175. DEC PHIGS using the DECwindows workstation e To open or query DECwindows workstation types 210 211 212 and 213 for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS your application must be running on a system that runs the DECwindows workstation client side software The client does not need a physical display device nor does it need the DECwindows workstation server side software e For DECwindows workstation types 210 and 211 the connection identifier specifies the DECwindows workstation display to use e If you resize the window it may be erased and redrawn causing the loss of primitives e The resource identification of the window created for output can be fetched using the Inquire Window Identifiers 304 escape function e The DECwindows workstation supports double buffering in two ways For example on OpenVMS systems you can enable double buffering by defining the double buffering environment option name to be any value or you can call the escape function SET DOUBLE BUFFERING When double buffering is enabled output is first written to a buffer and only displayed when you call UPDATE WORKSTATION or an equivalent flush operation 4 12 DECwindows Workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 7 Minimizing Color Traversal for DEC PHIGS 4 7 Minimizing Color Traversal for DEC PHIGS On DECwindows X11 devices DEC PHIGS does a special traversal for colors to determine what colors are needed in the X color table When regenerating the display in double
176. DL Workstation Type Values 213 DECwindows Widget 223 PEX Widget 233 OSF Motif Widget and 243 PEX Motif Widget The PCM server sends client messages to the X server to register button and dial events DEC PHIGS registers a ClientMessage event handler for these events If the application expects to receive client messages from other sources use the following template for event handling static Atom pcm atom Fetch the atom for the PCM message type if 0 pcm atom pcm atom XInternAtom decw state display PCMX MESSAGE TYPE 0 Pass button dial events to registered event handlers if event type ClientMessage amp amp event message type pcm atom XtDispatchEvent amp event gks decw receive pcmevent decw state window decw state event The event message type parameter 101 to 104 is used by the IDL for messages sent from the PCM server See the DEC Open3D IDL User Guide for more information about client messages sent by the PCM server If the application does not receive other client messages no special considerations are necessary D 5 Error Messages The following error messages exist for PCM support Error Message User Action ERROR NEG 450 Valuator device could not be Check to make sure the PCM dial box is used dials are not available on connected properly power cycle the PCM and the PCM device in routine name restart the PCM server D 6 D
177. Device Specifics Reference Manual for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS Order Number AA QMZRA TK June 1995 This manual provides information on all DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS devices Revision Update Information This revised manual supersedes the Device Specifics Reference Manual for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS Order Number AA QS3CEA TK Digital Equipment Corporation Maynard Massachusetts First Printing January 1992 Revised January 1994 Revised August 1994 Revised June 1995 Digital Equipment Corporation makes no representations that the use of its products in the manner described in this publication will not infringe on existing or future patent rights nor do the descriptions contained in this publication imply the granting of licenses to make use or sell equipment or software in accordance with the description Possession use or copying of the software described in this publication is authorized only pursuant to a valid written license from Digital or an authorized sublicensor Digital Equipment Corporation 1992 1994 1995 All Rights Reserved The postpaid Reader s Comments forms at the end of this document request your critical evaluation to assist in preparing future documentation The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation DDIF DEC DEC Fortran DEC GKS DEC GKS 3D DEC Open3D DEC PHIGS DEClaser DECnet DECstation DECwindows Digital LA34 LA50 LA75 LA100 LA210 LA280 LA380 LA324 LJ250
178. E 84 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the environment variable for the VAXstation 500 workstation type as follows setenv GKSwstype 88 Return 16 2 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 2 Valid Bit Mask Values 16 2 Valid Bit Mask Values When using with the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and the Digital VS500 graphics handlers you can specify hexadecimal bit masks as workstation type values The bit mask for these devices specify the number of SYN characters to write to the screen in between generations of output primitives The number of SYN characters written to the terminal and the current terminal baud rate determine whether the beam used to generate output has enough elapsed time between the generations to settle If you do not allow the beam to settle for an adequate amount of time you may lose all or part of a generated output primitive The following bit masks are valid for use with the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and the Digital VS500 devices Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 80 oxnnnn0050 Tektronix 4107 terminal output only 82 oxnnnn0052 Tektronix 4107 terminal 83 xnnnn0053 Tektronix 4207 terminal output only 84 oxnnnn0054 Tektronix 4207 workstation 85 xnnnn0055 Tektronix 4128 workstation output only 86 xnnnn0056 Tektronix 4128 workstation 87 oxnnnn0057 Tektronix 4129 and Digital VS500 workstations
179. EC PHIGS 1 10 Lighting Support for DEC PHIGS All of the graphics handlers support the following light source types e Ambient e Infinite directional e Positional e Spot Use the INQUIRE LIGHT SOURCE FACILITIES function described in the DEC PHIGS binding manuals to list the maximum number of light source indexes the maximum number of simultaneous active lights and the number of available light source types On PEX devices using the PXG option the maximum number of light source indexes is 32 while the maximum number of simultaneous active lights is 12 On PEX devices using the ZLX option the maximum number of light source indexes is 32 and the maximum number of simultaneous active lights is 32 To obtain reasonable results on an 8 plane system DEC PHIGS ignores light source colors with the DECwindows and OSF Motif device types and on a PEX 8 plane workstation DEC PHIGS converts light source color to hue lightness and saturation HLS and then uses only the lightness L component of the light source to compute the lightness component in an object s color Note that there are no hue shifts due to the effects of lighting See Appendix F for DEC PHIGS lighting equations 1 11 Depth Cueing Support for DEC PHIGS All of the graphics handlers support allowed and suppressed depth cueing modes Use the INQUIRE DEPTH CUE FACILITIES function described in the DEC PHIGS binding manuals to list the maximum number of depth cue table
180. EC PHIGS does not support patterns 14 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Cross hatches 2 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 3 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 4 Horizontal lines 5 Vertical lines 6 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 7 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 8 Horizontal lines sparse 9 Vertical lines sparse 14 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS The following table identifies the 68 predefined fill area pattern values for color index 1 and describes the results Style Index Appearance Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 Dark diagonally woven pattern 7596 Horizontal brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Finely woven grid OO oou DA FF Co Pl H Sparsely woven grid 10 Downward scales fish like 12 Rightward scales 13 Leftward scales Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 5 Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 4 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 14 to 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 to 68 Increasing densities of grey no hatch style starting at 1 16 density incrementing by 1 16
181. F Motif and PEX workstations This escape places the display window containing the specified workstation in front of all other display windows Remember that if you pop a workstation window you pop all input windows associated with that workstation ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data out_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier Escapes B 9 107 Push Workstation 107 Push Workstation B 10 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations The VWS DECwindows OSF Motif and PEX workstations This escape places the display window containing the specified workstation behind all
182. GKS Syntax DEC PHIGS Syntax Standard Color Map GKS USE STANDARD COLOR MAP GKSuse standard color map PHIGS USE STANDARD COLOR MAP PHIGSuse standard color map Allows several DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS 210 and 220 series workstations to share a single color map so that separate workstations do not cause their neighboring workstations to display false colors For example if you want DEC PHIGS to use a standard color map as for the true color portion of a 220 series workstation define the logical name PHIGS USE STANDARD COLOR MAP to the X atom name of a valid standard color map If the map is defined as RGB BEST MAP and the map does not exist DEC PHIGS tries to create it If the map is defined as any other color map and it does not exist DEC PHIGS returns an error and does not open the workstation Note that the contents of the standard color map environment option is sensitive to case and spelling The string is taken as presented and used to ask the server for the X atom name There is no default value for the standard color map environment option If it is not defined the handler uses a private or system color map For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the standard color map as follows DEFINE PHIGSS USE STANDARD COLOR MAP Return RGB DEFAULT MAP Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the standard color map as follows
183. GKSconid tt Return continued on next page Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 1 Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 1 Environment Options Table 15 1 Cont Tektronix 4014 Environment Options Syntax Description Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the variable for the Tektronix 4014 I O workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSS WSTYPE 70 Retum On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the Tektronix 4014 terminal output only workstation type as follows setenv GKSwstype 70 Return 15 2 Valid Bit Mask Values When using the Tektronix 4014 graphics handler you can specify hexadecimal bit masks as workstation type values The bit mask for this device specifies the number of SYN characters to write to the screen in between generations of output primitives The number of SYN characters written to the terminal and the current terminal baud rate determine whether the beam used to generate output has enough elapsed time between the generations to settle If you do not allow the beam to settle for an adequate amount of time you may lose all or part of a generated output primitive The following bit masks are valid for use with a Tektr
184. Gint nstrings number of strings Gint int_array pointer to the integer array Gfloat float_array pointer to the float array Gint str_len_array pointer to the string length array Gchar str ptr array pointer to the string pointer array Gint npointers number of generic pointers Gchar ptr ptr array pointer to the generic pointer array Gint nlongs number of longs Glong long array pointer to the long array Guesc_idatarec Escapes B 1 Escapes B 1 Escape Function Changes The new escape data record structure for DEC PHIGS is as follows typedef struct Pint nints number of integers Pint nfloats number of floats Pint nstrings number of strings Pint int_array pointer to the integer array Pfloat float array pointer to the float array Pint gtr len array pointer to the string length array Pchar str ptr array pointer to the string pointer array Pint npointers number of generic pointers Pchar ptr ptr array pointer to the generic pointer array Pint nlongs number of longs Plong long array pointer to the long array Pescaperecord The data structures contain four new items e A count of generic pointers e An array of generic pointers e A count of longs e An array of longs To use the new data record format perform the following steps
185. HIGS logical name for a connection identifier of a VWS device as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID NODENAME n n Retum Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE Specifies the workstation type The startup procedure PHIGS WSTYPE GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for a VWS workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSS WSTYPE 41 Retum 17 2 Valid Bit Mask Values When using the VWS workstation graphics handler you can specify hexadecimal bit masks as workstation type values Using the VWS workstation you use the bit mask values to control color mapping The VWS workstation contains a hardware color map that must be shared by all windows open on the workstation The VWS workstation associates a virtual color map that maintains the color values for that window If possible the VWS workstation maps the virtual color map onto the hardware color map so that the virtual maps do not overlap That is all virtual color maps are resident However if the hardware map cannot accommodate all the necessary virtual maps then selecting a given window causes the colors in one or more of the other windows to temporarily change due to virtual color maps overlapping on the hardware color map The colors change in the other windows because their portion of the virtual color map for that window is swapped out to make room for the virtual color map of the c
186. Highlighting Method C163 B 35 Set Icon Bitmaps 206 B 43 Set Line Cap Style C151 B 19 Set Line Join Style C152 B 21 Set Line Pattern C509 B 97 Set Marker Pattern 512 B 100 Set PEX Begin Render Clear Action 520 B 109 Set PEX Clear Region C521 B 111 Set Plane Mask 511 B 99 Set Reset String C203 B 40 Set Segment Highlighting Method C162 B 33 Set Swap Mode 514 B 103 Set Transparency 522 B 113 Set View Dirty Flag C530 B 124 Set Viewport Event C109 B 12 Set Window Title C202 B 39 SET WORKSTATION VIEWPORT function VAXstation specific use 17 6 Set Writing Mode C150 B 17 Sixel device coordinate information 1 13 environment options connection identifier 14 1 workstation type 14 2 pixel inquiries 1 13 Sixel graphics workstation type 14 2 Sixel printer 14 1 to 14 7 bit masks 14 2 environment options 14 1 environment variables 14 1 hatch values 14 5 landscape orientation 14 3 logical names 14 1 portrait orientation 14 3 resolution 14 7 Size of color table 9 9 SMG encoded key workstation string input E 4 Software fonts A 1 Software Clipping C111 B 16 Source color lighting 1 12 11 15 Spaceball support D 4 Standards metafile structure 2 1 Strings control characters for input E 4 DECwindows 4 18 logical input device numbers E 4 OSF Motif 9 18 ReGIS devices 13 8 Tektronix 4014 15 7 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 11 toggling overstrike inser
187. IGS PREDEF Return DEC PHIGS predefined bundle table program ed line bun ed edge bun ed text bun n n n n n ned view bun n n ned highligh all information below ned color bundle table ed marker bundle table dle table ed interior bundle table dle table dle table dle table ed depth cue bundle table ed light bundle table t bundle table connection id defaults to PPCONID DEFAULT workstation type defaul ts to PPWSTYPE DEFAULT continued on next page Introduction 1 9 Introduction 1 7 Predefined Bundle Table Indexes for DEC PHIGS Example 1 2 Cont PHIGS PREDEF Program Example Color Information for Digital LCP01 printer 15 devices Default color model RGB 1 Number of color models 1 Color models RGB 1 Number of direct color models 2 Direct color models RGB 1 HLS 4 Number of rendering color models 1 Rendering color models RGB 1 Number of colors in palette 8 Color availability Color Number of predefined colors 8 Index Red Green Blue 0 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 0 000 1 000 0 000 2 1 000 0 000 0 000 3 0 000 0 000 1 000 4 0 000 1 000 1 000 5 1 000 0 000 1 000 6 1 000 1 000 0 000 7 0 000 0 000 0 000 1 8 Color and Bundle Indexes DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS predefine color and bundle indexes for you to use within applications When you use predefined color and bundle indexes in your programs consider the following 1 10 Introduction Y
188. Index Appearance 1 Mixes colors white and green 2 Mixes colors white and red 3 Mixes colors white and blue LCGO1 Workstation 6 3 LCGO01 Workstation 6 4 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 4 Mixes colors white and cyan 5 Mixes colors white and magenta 6 Mixes colors white and yellow 7 Mixes colors white and black 8 Mixes colors green and red 9 Mixes colors green and blue 10 Mixes colors green and cyan 11 Mixes colors green and magenta 12 Mixes colors green and yellow 13 Mixes colors green and black 14 Mixes colors red and blue 15 Mixes colors red and cyan 16 Mixes colors red and magenta 17 Mixes colors red and yellow 18 Mixes colors red and black 19 Mixes colors blue and cyan 20 Mixes colors blue and magenta 21 Mixes colors blue and yellow 22 Mixes colors blue and black 23 Mixes colors cyan and magenta 24 Mixes colors cyan and yellow 25 Mixes colors cyan and black 26 Mixes colors magenta and yellow 27 Mixes colors magenta and black 28 Mixes colors yellow and black 6 4 LCGO Workstation LJ250 and LA324 Workstation 7 LJ250 and LA324 Workstation This chapter provides the information you need to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with the Digital LJ250 ink jet and LA324 printers DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support these devices as workstations of category WSCAT OUTPUT Note These devices are not supported on OpenVMS Alpha and Digital UNIX systems 7 1 Environment Options Ta
189. KE_FONT_NEG d PHIGS STROKE_FONT d and PHIGS STROKE FONT LIST On UNIX systems set environment variables for DEC GKS to GKSstroke font neg od GKSstroke_font d and GKSstroke font list For either system 96d is the font index A 6 Device Independent Fonts This section presents the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS device independent fonts These figures represent the ASCII characters 33 to 126 beginning in the upper left corner and incrementing horizontally to the lower right corner Not all characters are present in all the fonts Fonts 1 and 1 specify the same font Device Independent Fonts A 7 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts The program FONTS HEX is included with the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS development kits It displays the hexadecimal values for the ASCII characters within each font For example Figure A 6 represents the display of Font Number 1 ISO Standard Character Set on a DECwindows workstation The hexadecimal value for ASCII character 0 is 30 The hexadecimal value for ASCII character C is 43 On OpenVMS systems FONTS HEX is located in the directory SYSSCOMMON SYSHLP EXAMPLES GKS for DEC GKS and in the directory SYSSCOMMON SYSHLP EXAMPLES PHIGS for DEC PHIGS On UNIX systems FONTS HEX is located in the directory usr lib GKS examples for DEC GKS and in the directory usr lib PHIGS examples for DEC PHIGS Figure A 6 through Figure A 30 illustrate the device independent fonts
190. Keypad functionality choice input E 8 E 9 cycling E 7 input E 6 to E 10 input zoning E 7 Index 10 Keypad input functionality zoning mechanism E 5 Keys input keypad functionality E 6 L L865 landscape orientation 14 3 LA100 14 1 to 14 7 See also Sixel printer bit masks 14 2 landscape orientation 14 3 portrait orientation 14 3 LA210 14 1 to 14 7 See also Sixel printer bit masks 14 2 landscape orientation 14 3 portrait orientation 14 3 LA280 14 1 to 14 7 See also Sixel printer bit masks 14 2 landscape orientation 14 3 portrait orientation 14 3 LA324 7 1 to 7 6 bit masks 7 2 depth cueing F 3 hatches 7 4 landscape orientation 7 3 lighting equations F 2 paper sizes 7 3 portrait orientation 7 3 LA380 14 1 to 14 7 See also Sixel printer bit masks 14 2 landscape orientation 14 3 portrait orientation 14 3 LA50 14 1 to 14 7 See also Sixel printer aspect ratio 14 4 bit masks 14 2 landscape orientation 14 3 portrait orientation 14 3 programming considerations 14 4 LA75 14 1 to 14 7 See also Sixel printer bit masks 14 2 landscape orientation 14 3 portrait orientation 14 3 LA84 14 1 to 14 7 See also Sixel printer bit masks 14 2 landscape orientation 14 3 portrait orientation 14 3 LA86 14 1 to 14 7 See also Sixel printer bit masks 14 2 LA86 cont d portrait orientation 14 3 Landsca
191. LL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL For DEC GKS the input data record contains the following element Component Description wr mode The writing mode Escapes B 17 150 Set Writing Mode B 18 Escapes For DEC PHIGS the input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier wr_mode The writing mode The element wr_mode can have the following values Mode Description lt 1 Workstation dependent 2 Complement mode 3 Erase underlying graphics 4 Overlay on underlying graphics gt 5 Reserved for future use For DEC PHIGS the Set Writing Mode escape includes support for writing modes on PEX OSF Motif and DECwindows workstations However not all PEX servers support all the writing modes For example XOR writing mode is supported on all PXG PEX servers but not on the SPXg or SPXgt PEX server The writing modes are also supported on Motif and DECwindows workstations The constants map to the eq
192. O VWS workstation display Digital LVP16 A sized paper 51 Output FILE Hewlett Packard HP74758 51 Output FILE Digital LVP16 B sized paper 52 Output FILE Hewlett Packard HP75506 53 Output FILE Hewlett Packard HP75806 54 Output FILE LaserGraphies MPS 2000 55 Output FILE Hewlett Packard HP7585 56 Output FILE PostScript 61 Output FILE PostScript color 62 Output FILE Encapsulated PostScript 65 Output FILE Encapsulated PostScript color 66 Output FILE Tektronix 4014 70 Output Terminal display Tektronix 4014 72 T O Terminal display Tektronix 4107 80 Output Terminal display Tektronix 4107 82 T O Terminal display Tektronix 4207 83 Output Terminal display Tektronix 4207 84 T O Terminal display Tektronix 4128 85 Output Terminal display Tektronix 4128 86 T O Terminal display 1Also supported on OpenVMS Alpha and Digital UNIX systems continued on next page Introduction 1 3 Introduction 1 4 Supported Workstations Table 1 1 Cont Supported Devices Device Value Type Output Tektronix 4129 87 Output Terminal display Tektronix 4129 88 T O Terminal display VAXstation 500 87 Output Terminal display VAXstation 500 88 T O Terminal display LJ250 ink jet printer 91 Output FILE LJ250 180 dpi 92 Output FILE LA324 printer 93 Output FILE Digital VT284 and VT286 110 Output FILE Digital VT286 113 T O Terminal display color Digital VT284 114 T O Terminal display monochrome LA84 print
193. OC 0G PROC 0G PROC ECWSSERVER FILE LIMIT ECWSSERVER ECWSSERVER WSQUOTA ECWSSERVER WSEXTENT ECWSSERVER PAGE FILE Note 400 D D ENQUEUE LIMIT 1024 DECWSSERVER WSDEF D D D 8192 10240 16384 200000 You must define quotas for both the SYSTEM account and the server and these values should be the same G 4 2 System Requirements for Large Applications If you are using a demanding application for example an application with lengthy animation sequences large models or large assemblies you should set the working set quotas of the SYSTEM account to the values shown in Table G 2 for better performance Table G 2 Recommended Quotas for Demanding Applications Parameter Quota WSDEF 10240 WSQUO 20480 WSEXTENT 32768 You must also set the following server quotas DEF NOLOG PROC DECWSSERVER WSDEF DEF NOLOG PROC DECWSSERVER WSQ UOTA DEF NOLOG PROC DECWSSERVER WSEXT ENT G 12 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS 10240 20480 32768 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 4 Tuning on OpenVMS VAX Systems G 4 3 Optimizing Performance If the quotas shown in the preceding sections do not result in the desired performance you may need to define even larger values To determine if this is necessary you should monitor the server process during the heaviest display usage to see if its working set use approach
194. Oh ee en V Il A es e e TT T eO 9 Ww a X d a LS e A 9 Device Independent Fonts Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 8 Small Simplex Roman and Greek Font x 4 l t d x 7 8 g g amp 1 b 2 EP NE A 10 Device Independent Fonts 2 with stroke precision H R Z a H To Ui V i K WO A A X B M Y N E O ZK 1575 GE Figure A 9 Large Simplex Roman yo amp O 1 2 3 4 O with gt G2 stroke H R S J ip K U L V M W N X O Y P Z Q H Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts precision Y f D Z t h r e S j t a k u D V ZK 1576 GE Device Independent Fonts A 11 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 10 Large Simplex Greek yo amp O l 1 2 3 A 12 Device Independent Fonts 4 4 with 2 stroke 2 precision J C R N p 7 o L T i KU Ol A p 6 Hu y v wv W E O V ZK 1577 GE Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 11 Large Simplex Script Font 5 with stroke precision 24 gt X R P 3 5 3 gt g g X 6 0 939 3 hkh a j 7 A X W i 4 8 B 2 v j t gt Z 9 00 m Y a k u amp 0 B N X hb lv 1 E 0 V e m wo 2 lt 3 P 9 d w x S e 4 d HS x amp y ZK 1578 GE Dev
195. P Retum SCOPE NOTYPEAHEAD LOWERCASE FULLDUP NOMODEM INTERACTIVE Return TTSYNC FORM TAB NOESCAPE SPEED set speed WIDTH 132 Retum PAGE 0 DEVICE TYPE UNKNOWN Return Replace device name with the name of the LJ250 or LA324 device Replace set speed with a value equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the printer LJ250 and LA324 Workstation 7 3 LJ250 and LA324 Workstation 7 3 Device Considerations For more information on device allocation see the ALLOCATE command in the OpenVMS DCL Dictionary For more information on queued devices see the OpenVMS System Management Utilities Reference Manual When using the LJ250 or LA324 printer as either an allocated or a queued device on ULTRIX systems you need to set terminal characteristics by entering the following command stty pass8 echo new cols 132 speed lt dev ttynn Return Replace speed with a value equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the printer Replace nn with the port number 7 4 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fill area pattern and hatch values for the LJ250 and LA324 printers The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If
196. PHIGS define a series of constants to specify the workstation types and their modifiers within programs By performing a bitwise OR operation on certain constants you can control device dependent features such as paper size To use these constants you must include the definitions file for your programming language To take advantage of device dependent features Digital recommends that you assign default values to the workstation type and connection identifier constants within your programs and specify dependent bit mask definitions at command level By using default constants you eliminate having to recompile and relink your programs each time you change the bit mask definition On OpenVMS systems define workstation type logical names as GKS WSTYPE for DEC GKS and PHIGS WSTYPE for DEC PHIGS Define connection identifier logical names as GKS CONID for DEC GKS and PHIGS CONID for DEC PHIGS On UNIX systems set workstation type environment variables to GKSwstype for DEC GKS and PHIGSwstype for DEC PHIGS Set connection identifier environment variables to GKSconid for DEC GKS and PHIGSconid for DEC PHIGS For more information about the supported bit masks for any given device see the specific chapter in this manual 1 4 Supported Workstations 1 2 Introduction This section lists the devices that DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support and the defined workstation type of each device Use the workstation type constants in calls
197. RRAY are not supported on the following graphics handlers e HPPCL e LCGO1 e LJ250 and LA324 e LVP16 and HP GL e PostScript e ReGIS e Sixel e Tektronix 4014 1 15 Device Coordinate Information for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS return device coordinates in meters for the following devices e DECwindows devices e LVP16 and HP GL plotters and recorders e OSF Motif devices e PEX devices e PostScript devices e VWS devices DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS return device coordinates in units other than meters for the following devices e HPPCL ink jet printers e LCGOI ink jet printers e LJ250 and LA324 printers e PEX devices e ReGIS devices Introduction 1 13 Introduction 1 15 Device Coordinate Information for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS e Sixel printers e Tektronix 4014 terminals e Tektronix 4128 4129 and Digital VS500 devices The exact values depend on the screen size and workstation type Use the INQUIRE DISPLAY SPACE SIZE function to determine the exact value for your device 1 16 Environment Options Environment options that are supported for each device are listed at the beginning of each chapter For example Table 1 5 lists two of the environment options supported by a PostScript device Table 1 5 PostScript Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID Specifies the default workstation connection information On GKSconid OpenVMS systems the startup proced
198. Restrictions 13 3 Mode Restrictions To make effective use of the VT330 and VT340 devices DEC PHIGS keeps them in graphics mode while the workstation is open Because of the mode setting ASCII text sent to the screen via a Fortran WRITE or similar statements in other languages is interpreted as a ReGIS command that can leave the terminal in an unpredictable state To avoid this problem use the TEXT or MESSAGE function to place text on VT330 or VT340 screens Furthermore Digital recommends that the error file specified in OPEN GKS or OPEN PHIGS be directed to a file to avoid having DEC PHIGS issuing error messages to the terminal Digital also recommends using the OpenVMS command SET TERMINAL NOBROADCAST during the DEC PHIGS session This command prevents the display of messages sent to the terminal by the OpenVMS operating system from causing a similar problem 13 4 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fill area pattern and hatch values for the ReGIS devices The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns 13 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch
199. S ONLY SS DAT files are spacescript files There is no documentation available on the spacescript language On UNIX systems the pemserver startup has not changed but there are some new options To use the spaceball as dials perform the following actions 1 Make sure the files standard ss and dials only ss are in the directory usr lib pem 2 Replace the last line of standard ss with the following line inc usr lib pcm dials only ss 3 Start the pemserver with the b switch to inform the server of the location of the spaceball pemserver b ttyxx amp where xx is the tty number 4 Run the PHIGS application and use valuator devices 5 to 12 On UNIX systems you can also use the 1 and e options with the pemserver to obtain a log file For example pemserver p ttyxx le path filename In this example ttyxx is the tty device the PCM or spaceball if you use the b switch is connected to and path filename is the path and file name of the log file D 4 Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS D 3 Button Support D 3 Button Support DEC PHIGS supports the hardware buttons as type choice device number 10 Figure D 2 illustrates the numbering of the buttons on the choice box Figure D 2 Hardware Choice Box Buttons o e e os o o L5 B s Ls L5 L5 B Ls o E BH B 2 s 2 Lu BE a s ZK 2225A GE To use hardware buttons i
200. S code example Xix Introduction 1 Introduction DEC GKS is an implementation of the Graphical Kernel System defined by the ISO 7942 1985 E standard and the Graphical Kernel System for Three Dimensions defined by the ISO 8805 1988 E standard The GKS standard defines levels of GKS implementations that address the most common classes of graphics devices and application needs The levels are determined primarily by input and output capabilities The output level values are represented by the characters m 0 1 and 2 The input level values are represented by the characters a b and c The DEC GKS software is a level 2c implementation incorporating all the GKS output capabilities level 2 and all the input capabilities level c This manual uses the term DEC GKS when describing the level 2c GKS product DEC PHIGS is an implementation of the Programmer s Hierarchical Interactive Graphics System PHIGS is defined by the ISO 9592 1988 E standard These products each provide a set of graphics functions that can be used by numerous types of graphics applications to produce three dimensional pictures on graphics output devices 1 1 Capabilities of Supported Devices In many applications you may wish to write completely device independent programs In this way you can run your programs using different devices without having to rewrite your programs The DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS language binding manuals outline the procedure for devic
201. S escapes Appendix C describes the DEC GKS supported generalized drawing primitives GDPs Appendix D provides information on dial and button support for DEC PHIGS Appendix E provides input information that is applicable to all DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN Appendix F provides the equations used for lighting of primitives and depth cueing for DEC PHIGS Appendix G presents techniques for improving DEC PHIGS performance Associated Documents The following manuals are also part of the DEC GKS documentation set DEC GKS User s Guide DEC GKS C Binding Reference Manual DEC GKS FORTRAN Binding Reference Manual DEC GKS GKS Binding Reference Manual DEC GKS GKS3D Binding Reference Manual xvii The following manuals are also part of the DEC PHIGS documentation set DEC PHIGS Ada Binding Reference Manual DEC PHIGS C Binding Reference Manual DEC PHIGS ISO C Binding Reference Manual DEC PHIGS ISO Fortran Binding Reference Manual DEC PHIGS PHIGS Binding Reference Manual DEC PHIGS Developer s Guide Getting Started with DEC PHIGS For future releases of DEC PHIGS and DEC GKS the configuration of the documentation set may change Conventions Used in This Document The following conventions are used throughout this manual Convention Meaning Return The symbol Return represents a single stroke of the Return key on a terminal INTEGER X A vertical ellipsis indi
202. S will only honor an application s request to activate a BQUM range under the following conditions e The current display update modification mode is UQUM e The current state of visual representation is CORRECT or SIMULATED 523 Set BQUM Range A structure is currently open The currently opened structure is posted The following events result in an implicit deactivation of the current BQUM range Close structure Empty structure Post structure Delete all structures delete structure Unpost structure unpost all structures Activation of another BQUM range Note that the last condition implies that if an application has an active BQUM range and wants to replace the range it needs to activate only the new range When an implicit or explicit regeneration is done while a BQUM range is active DEC PHIGS will carry out the regeneration and reactivate the BQUM range Note that the state of visual representation changes to SIMULATED for any structure edits that are done once a BQUM range becomes active Escapes B 117 524 Inquire BQUM Range 524 Inquire BQUM Range B 118 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All This escape allows a DEC PHIGS application to determine if DEC PHIGS honored its request to activate a BQUM range ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of inte
203. S500 Series Workstations This chapter describes the information you need to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with the following devices Tektronix 4107 Tektronix 4207 Tektronix 4128 Tektronix 4129 Digital VS500 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support these devices as workstations of category WSCAT_OUTIN 16 1 Environment Options Note These devices are not supported on OpenVMS Alpha and Digital UNIX systems Table 16 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with the Tektronix and VS500 series devices Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 1 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 1 Environment Options Table 16 1 Tektronix Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID GKSconid PHIGS CONID PHIGSconid Specifies the default workstation connection information On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the logical name for the connection identifier of a Tektronix workstation as follows DEFINE PHIGSSCONID TT Return On ULTRIX systems you define the environment variable for the connection identifier of a VAXstation 500 as follows setenv GKSconid tt See Section 16 5 1 for information on defining logical names for specific Tektronix and VS500 series devices See Section 16 5 2 for information on using physical devi
204. Stroke Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported stroke class logical input devices for the ReGIS devices 13 8 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 5 Input Information Stroke Device Device Types Input Action VT125 VT240 VT284 1 2 3 4 Enter point with space key VT286 VT330 and Trigger with Return VT340 without mouse Break with Ctrl U Delete last point with Delete key VT330 and VT340 with 1 2 3 4 Enter point with space key mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Delete last point with Delete key Supported PETs The stroke input class for the VT125 VT240 VT284 VT286 and VT340 terminals support PETs 1 and 4 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the ReGIS stroke class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET Initial number of points Initial transformation Echo area Data record 1 0 0 Largest square Stroke buffer size 80 points Editing position 0 x interval 0 01 in world coordinate points y interval 0 01 in world coordinate points Time interval 0 0 seconds 13 5 6 Valuator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported valuator clas
205. TTONS 1 Reim On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the dials and buttons as follows setenv PHIGSuse dials and buttons 1 Return For specific information on hardware dials and buttons support see Appendix D Language PHIGS LANGUAGE Specifies whether to use the English value 0 Hebrew value PHIGSlanguage 21 or Japanese value 22 language The default value is 0 Stroke Font Index See Section 10 6 for more information on font support For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the Hebrew language as follows DEFINE PHIGSSLANGUAGE 21 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the Japanese language as follows setenv PHIGSlanguage 22 Return PHIGS STROKE_FONTnnn PHIGS STROKE FONT NEGnnn PHIGSstroke fontnnn PHIGSstroke font negnnn Allows you to set up file names for individual font indexes The variable nnn is the font index For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the stroke font index as follows DEFINE PHIGSS STROKE FONT NEG99 MYFONT FNT Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the stroke font index as follows setenv PHIGSstroke font neg99 myfont fnt Retum continued on next page OpenGL Workstation 10 3 OpenGL Workstation 10 1 Environment Options Table 10 1 Cont OpenGL Environme
206. US paper size 14 3 LOC GDP data records C 2 Locator DECwindows 4 17 keypad zoning of cursor E 7 logical input device numbers E 3 OSF Motif 9 17 ReGIS devices 13 6 Tektronix 4014 15 5 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 9 VWS 17 13 Lock key input on workstations E 9 Logical input devices DEC GKS available numbers E 1 to E 6 DEC PHIGS available numbers E 1 to E 6 DECwindows 4 16 keypad functionality E 6 OSF Motif 9 15 ReGIS devices 13 5 Tektronix 4014 15 5 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 6 VWS 17 12 Logical names 1 2 LPS40 12 1 to 12 8 See also PostScript LVP16 8 1 to 8 24 bit masks 8 2 device coordinate information 1 13 environment options 8 1 environment variables 8 1 Index 11 LVP16 cont d MIT double buffering fonts 8 5 environment option hatch values 8 5 PEX 11 4 landscape orientation 8 2 Modes logical names 8 1 HLHSR 1 11 paper sizes 8 3 Modifiers plotter 8 4 workstation types 1 2 portrait orientation 8 2 Monospaced LVP16 and HP GL fonts A 1 environment option MPS 2000 8 1 to 8 24 connection identifier 8 1 bit masks 8 2 threshold value 8 1 environment options 8 1 workstation type 8 2 environment variables 8 1 workstation type 8 2 hatch values 8 5 landscape orientation 8 2 M logical names 8 1 portrait orientation 8 2 Mask bit masks DDIF 3 2 N DECwindows 4 9 Numeric keypad OpenGL 10 9 choice input E 8 OSF Motif 9 8 PEX 11 13 O ReGIS device
207. Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP draws the circle whose circumference includes the three specified points GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 3 pts array three circumference points gdp id 334 data rec number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the three points form a straight line DEC GKS cannot generate a corresponding circle GDPs C 31 335 Filled Circle Center and Radius 335 Filled Circle Center and Radius C 32 GDPs Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms a circle from the specified center point and radius vector value GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 3 pts_array center point vector origin point and radius vector point gdp_id 335 data rec number of integers 0 data rec len number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address
208. _SUPPORT_ PHIGSdevice struct support Specifies client side or server side structure storage In the syntax refers to the workstation type for example 240 241 and so on The possible values are 0 client side structure store and 3 server side structure store The default value is 3 For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for client side structure store as follows DEFINE PHIGSS DEVICE STRUCT SUPPORT 240 0 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for server side structure store as follows setenv GKSdevice struct support 241 3 Return Standard Color Map GKS USE STANDARD COLOR MAP GKSuse standard color map PHIGS USE STANDARD COLOR MAP PHIGSuse standard color map Allows several DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS 24x and 22x series workstations to share a single color map so that separate workstations do not cause their neighboring workstations to display false colors To use an X standard color map set this environment option to the X standard color map you want to use such as RGB DEFAULT MAP For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the standard color map as follows DEFINE PHIGSS USE STANDARD COLOR MAP RGB DEFAULT MAP Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the standard color map as follows setenv GKSuse standard color map RGB DEFAULT MAP Return continued on n
209. a distance x and y vector for the starting point a distance x and y vector for the end point and an enumerated close flag PIE CHORD LINE BUNDLE 3 5 2 0 Integer index value into the line bundle table INDEX LINEINDEX LINE TYPE 3 5 2 1 Integer line type value LINETYPE LINE WIDTH 3 5 2 2 Either a VDC absolute value or a real scale LINEWIDTH specification LINE COLOR 3 5 2 3 Either an integer index value or a set of red green LINECOLR and blue real values MARKER BUNDLE 3 5 2 4 An integer index value into the polymarker bundle INDEX MARKERINDEX table MARKER TYPE 3 5 2 5 An integer value specifying a marker type MARKERTYPE MARKER SIZE 3 5 2 6 Either a VDC absolute value or a real scale MARKERSIZE specification MARKER COLOR 3 5 2 7 Either an integer index value or a set of red green MARKERCOLR and blue real values TEXT BUNDLE 3 5 3 0 An integer value that is a pointer into the text INDEX TEXTINDEX bundle table TEXT FONT 3 5 3 1 An integer index value associated with a previously INDEX TEXTFONTINDEX specified font TEXT PRECISION 3 5 3 2 An enumerated type STRING CHARACTER TEXTPREC STROKE CHARACTER 3 5 3 3 A nonnegative real number specifying the height to EXPANSION FACTOR CHAREXPAN width ratio CHARACTER 3 5 3 4 A real value specifying character spacing SPACING CHARSPACE continued on next page CGM Output 2 11 CGM Output 2 8 Element Descriptions Table 2 2 Cont CGM Element Descriptions Element Name Opcode
210. a drawable In such instances your application should call the REDRAW ALL STRUCTURES function for DEC PHIGS or the REDRAW ALL SEGMENTS function for DEC GKS to foree DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS to redraw the drawable These workstations do not use the DECwindows Toolkit and OSF Motif Toolkit so your application has unrestricted use of the DECwindows Toolkit or OSF Motif Toolkit PEX Widget Values 223 and 243 Workstation type 223 uses a preexisting DECwindows Toolkit and OSF Motif widget Workstation type 243 uses a preexisting OSF Motif Toolkit and OSF Motif widget The widget must be a bulletin board and must be realized before calling the OPEN WORKSTATION function These types of workstations allow the use of either SAMPLE or EVENT mode for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS input in addition to using the DECwindows Toolkit and OSF Motif Toolkit in your application However if you call the AWAIT EVENT function you must set the timeout parameter to 0 to avoid hanging up the devices Note You cannot use REQUEST mode input with this workstation type To do so results in an error Do not destroy the DECwindows and OSF Motif widgets until after a call to the CLOSE WORKSTATION function 11 14 PEX Workstation PEX Workstation 11 3 Workstation Type Values 11 3 1 Opening Multiple Motif Workstations Applications that open multiple Motif workstations of type 230 231 240 or 241 must use the same value for the workstation type each time Th
211. a pointer into the bundle COLRTABLE table where the first color value is placed and a list of sets of red green and blue intensity values used to fill the table ASPECT SOURCE 3 6 3 1 A list of pairs of enumerated ASF type values and FLAGS ASF ASF values INDIVIDUAL BUNDLED ESCAPE 3 1 2 0 An integer function identifier and a data record ESCAPE implementation dependent use MESSAGE 3 9 2 1 An enumerated type specifying the action flag that MESSAGE determines whether the application requires some action by the user before resuming application execution NO ACTION ACTION and the text string containing the message APPLICATION DATA 3 7 2 1 An integer identifier and a data record both to be APPLDATA used in an application dependent manner that does not affect the picture being generated OPEN CHARACTER 1 11 5 8 A character that signifies the beginning of a STRING i character string NOTE This character is not an opcode It usually follows an opcode that requires string data STRING 1 11 5 12 A character that signifies the end of a character TERMINATOR d string NOTE This character is not an opcode It usually follows an opcode that requires string data 2 9 Physical File Organization The DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS metafile outputs 512 byte records Using the clear text encoding the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS metafile separates element opcodes with a semicolon a line feed and a carriage return character 2 10 CALS and TOP Applicati
212. ak with puck button 2 Select with puck Trigger with puck button 2 Select with puck Trigger with puck button 3 Select with puck Trigger with puck button 4 Movement is selection and trigger Supported PETs The locator input class for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 devices support PETs 13 DEC GKS only 5 and 6 Default Input Values 12 11 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 locator class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET Initial position Initial transformation Echo area Data record 1 0 5 0 5 0 Largest square NULL 16 5 5 Pick Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported pick class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 workstations 16 10 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 5 Input Information Input Device Pick Device Types Input Action No mouse 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select with arrow keys or joydisk Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U Mouse or puck 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse or puck Trigger with mouse or puck button 1 Break with mouse or puck button 2 5 Select with mouse or puck Trigger with mouse puck button 2 6 Select with
213. al It is the screen identifier and defaults to 0 Workstation Type 232 For workstations of type 232 the connection identifier is an ASCII string consisting of the X display identifier followed by the X drawable identifier separated by an exclamation point Both values are expressed as decimal numbers An example of a valid connection identifier is 1234857 388291 Workstation Type 233 For workstations of type 233 the connection identifier is an ASCII string representing the decimal value of the widget identifier An example of a valid connection identifier is 396251 9 3 Valid Bit Mask Values When using the OSF Motif workstation you can specify workstation types as hexadecimal bit masks The OSF Motif workstation contains a hardware color map that must be shared by all windows open on the workstation The OSF Motif workstation associates a virtual color map that maintains the color values for that window If possible the OSF Motif workstation maps the virtual color maps onto the hardware color map so that the virtual maps do not overlap That is all virtual color maps are resident By default DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS allocate a color map of 64 entries where available on the hardware If you need a different size color map then you can use a workstation type modifier to specify the size of the color map By default for DEC GKS the OSF Motif workstation color maps are shared among applications This means that changes to
214. al array contains num clip sets of 4 reals XMIN YMIN XMAX YMAX The values are in device coordinates meters To clear a pair of rectangular regions 1 meters in size one with its corner at the origin and the other at the upper corner of the former the array would contain 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 where 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 is the first clip region and 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 is the second clip region The Z clear control capability is present only on Digital PEX platforms On other PEX platforms it will revert to default PEX behavior If the image I clear is not present on the PEX platform use a requested clear The clipping rectangles work on all platforms In addition this escape will not cause the swapping of double buffers To perform that action use 515 Swap Buffers to force the swap if double buffering is enabled ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 4 number of reals num_clip 4 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id clear_I clear_Z num_ clip address of real array num_clip 4 reals address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 111 521 Set PEX Clear Region Argument Required Value out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address o
215. all DEC GKS GDPs e DEC GKS applies normalization transformations to the world coordinate points of a specified GDP but draws the GDP on the normalized device coordinate plane This will sometimes cause unexpected results For instance if you include a rectangular GDP in a segment and then rotate the segment DEC GKS alters the coordinate points but still draws the sides of the rectangle parallel to the x and y axes Also when you specify coordinate values for circles the current normalization transformation affects only the size of the circle and does not alter the shape e All radius specifications constitute vector values The only significance of the radius vector is its length in world coordinate points e You specify angles in radians To calculate radians use the formula 360 degrees 2 pi radians Positive rotation is counterclockwise negative rotation is clockwise e Some GDPs require vector values in the x and y coordinate arrays passed to GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE When you specify a vector value you pass two sets of world coordinate points DEC GKS calculates the distance the angle or both values using the two specified points GDPs C 3 GDPs C 2 Generalized Drawing Primitives GDPs C 4 GDPs Using a GDP you calculate all vectors from a single vector origin point The vector origin point is the first point in a vector specification You specify the second point of the vector specification in the x and y co
216. along the x axis To form a rectangular cell array make sure that point R has the x value of the diagonal point and the y value of the starting point Argument Required Value n points 3 pts array starting point diagonal point and point R gdp id 400 data rec number of integers 3 n longwords number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array rows columns bits per index color indexes address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following elements Component Description rows This element is the number of rows in the cell array columns This element is the number of columns in the cell array C 50 GDPs 400 Packed Cell Array Component Description bits_per_index This element is the number of bits used within color_indexes to store a single color index value DEC GKS uses the color index value to color the corresponding cell in the cell array This value may be 1 8 or 16 color_indexes These components are the contiguous bit increments that specify color indexes These elements are n_longwords in size and contain the color indexes in row major order Color indexes should be specified in row major order Calculate the i
217. als for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the DECwindows workstation stroke class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial number of points 0 Initial transformation 0 Echo area Largest square DECwindows Workstation 4 19 DECwindows Workstation 4 10 Input Information Input Construct Default Value Data record Stroke buffer size 80 points Editing position 0 x interval 0 01 in world coordinate points y interval 0 01 in world coordinate points Time interval 0 0 seconds 4 10 6 Valuator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported valuator class logical input devices for the DECwindows workstation Valuator Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 or Enter button Break by selecting Cancel button when echoing is enabled or by selecting mouse button 2 when echoing is disabled 5 to 12 Rotation of hardware dials is selection and trigger Supported PETs The DECwindows workstation valuator device types 1 2 3 and 4 support PETs 4 8 2 1 1 2 and 3 See the chapter on input functions in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs The DECwindows workstation valuator device types 5 to 12 support PETs 4 3 2 1 1 2 and 3 See Appendix D for mo
218. alues Value Description 2 Fill the area formed by connecting both ends of the arc to its center 3 Fill the area formed by connecting the beginning and end points of the arc Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance the three points may form a straight line 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you specify any value other than 2 or 3 C 36 GDPs 340 Filled Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius 340 Filled Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the arc by using the two vectors to calculate directions from the center point DEC GKS uses the vector directions to form rays that determine the starting and ending points of the arc GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 5 pts_array center vector origin point two vectors and the radius vector point gdp_id 340 data_rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc_type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data_rec_len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following elemen
219. alues for DEC GKS 14 5 14 5 Printer Resolutions llle 14 7 vii 15 Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 3 1 15 3 2 15 4 15 4 1 15 5 15 5 1 15 5 2 15 5 3 15 5 4 15 5 5 15 5 6 Environment Options ise ewe WG AE e Hao eg OG ea Bes Valid Bit Mask Values lees es Programming Considerations 0 0 cee eee ees Echo of Characters 0 0 00 ees GIN Mode Configuration sesiz rres llle Pattern and Hatch Values 0 0 cece eee eee Available Fill Area Hatch Values llle Input Information 1 4 5526 RR RR ERG EROR REO S EREEES Choice Input Clas8 42e abre pce en C e CR RR Aca DR ERS Locator Input Class ossi ugue oer Ry Rx I Ro Rs Pick Input Classi eese xb bee tepert Ei Eaa rDNA ELERESE Sr String Input Class 2 5 bete beum dence era xor dav ERNA Stroke Input Class llle eee Valuator Input Class llle 16 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 17 viii 16 1 Environment Opti0ns v sents RR Re ea han ee hae RR EIS Rw WERS 16 2 Valid Bit Mask Values lllleeleeee ees 16 3 Programming Considerations 0 0 eee eee eee 16 3 1 Setup Requirement 2 2 2 2 24 vv bra eR e bar er RR ded 16 3 2 Resetting the Terminal After an Interrupt 16 4 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 Pattern and Hatch Values 16 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 0 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee ee 16 4 2 Prede
220. and HP7550 devices support only sizes A B A3 and A4 The HP7580 plotter supports all sizes except E AO A5 B4 and B5 The HP7585 plotter supports all sizes except A5 B4 and B5 The actual plot area on the paper reflected by the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS device display size is smaller than the actual paper size and depends on the paper size selected on the plotter The DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS display and raster values assume that the plotter is operated in the NORMAL mode The EXPAND mode is not supported Note Make sure the paper size selected on the plotter matches the one specified by DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS Not all Hewlett Packard plotters support all DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS paper sizes For example if you specify a DEC GKS paper size that is not supported for the plotter used then DEC GKS uses the default paper size LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 3 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 3 Device Considerations 8 3 Device Considerations The following sections provide information on LVP16 switch settings and device queues and allocation 8 3 1 LVP16 Switch Settings Table 8 2 compares the proper LVP16 plotter operation switch settings using paper sizes of 8 5x11 and 11x17 Table 8 2 LVP16 Switch Settings 8 5x11 11x17 Switch Setting Setting S2 OFF OFF S1 OFF OFF D Y OFF OFF US Met ON ON A4 A3 OFF ON B4 ON ON B3 OFF OFF B2 ON ON Bl OFF OFF 8 3 2 Device Queues and Alloc
221. ansparent mask are not supported in routine You will get this error if you specify a workstation to run in specialized X overlay planes and you select a method that is not supported If you get this error check with the vendor of the X server on how to specify the pixel to be used If the transparent pixel method is not supported DEC PHIGS cannot use the overlay planes DEC PHIGS does not support this overlay visual as its default visual due to color limitations It is also not supported for PEX workstation types or for any workstation type other than 232 Note There are usually very few 4 to 8 overlay planes You should use the workstation mask to limit the number of DEC PHIGS colors used described in the example phigs_planedemo Otherwise color allocation errors may occur either with DEC PHIGS or other applications running in the overlay planes OSF Motif Workstation 9 11 OSF Motif Workstation 9 6 Cell Array Restriction for DEC GKS 9 6 Cell Array Restriction for DEC GKS DEC GKS uses the following criteria to determine whether to simulate a cell array e The projection type is PERSPECTIVE You set the projection type by calling the function EVALUATE VIEW MAPPING MATRIX 3 e The cell array is clipped e The borders of the cell array are not parallel to the x and y axes of the device For better performance DEC GKS also simulates cell arrays if the size of the cells is big in relation to the number
222. ap markers For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to use stroke markers as follows DEFINE PHIGSS USE STROKE MARKERS 1 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable to use only bitmap markers as follows setenv PHIGSuse stroke markers 0 Return continued on next page OpenGL Workstation 10 1 Environment Options Table 10 1 Cont OpenGL Environment Options Syntax Description Structure Storage PHIGS DEVICE STRUCT SUPPORT PHIGSdevice struct support Specifies where the DEC PHIGS data structure is stored A value of 0 means that structure data is stored only on the X client side and all rendering is done in OpenGL immediate mode A value of 4 means that all structure data is stored on the X client and most output primitive data and some attribute data is also placed in OpenGL display lists to enhance performance When structure mode 4 is being used DEC PHIGS will render primitives by executing the OpenGL display list where possible In the syntax refers to the workstation type for example 270 271 and so on For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for client side structure store as follows DEFINE PHIGSSDEVICE STRUCT SUPPORT 270 0 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for server side display lists as follows setenv PHIGSdevice struct support
223. are supported for ISO Latinl Spacing and positioning errors may occur if the other font numbers are used No special set up is required to output ISO Latin1 characters on OpenVMS printer queues On UNIX printer queues provide the switch x on the lpr command line 12 8 PostScript Workstation ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation This chapter describes the information you need to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with the following ReGIS devices e VT125 e VT240 e VT284 e VT286 e VT330 e VT340 The Japanese ReGIS devices VT284 and VT286 are supported on DEC GKS for OpenVMS systems only 13 1 Environment Options Table 13 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with ReGIS devices Table 13 1 ReGIS Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID Specifies the default workstation connection GKSconid information On OpenVMS systems the PHIGS CONID startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGSconid PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier of a ReGIS device as follows DEFINE PHIGSSCONID TT Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier of a ReGIS device as follows setenv GKSconid tt Return continued on next page ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation
224. area sizes for banners and borders Assuming that you have defined two input devices active at the same time on the right side of the display surface Figure 17 1 illustrates the dimensions written to the arguments of the function INQUIRE DISPLAY SPACE SIZE Notice that DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not include the amount of space used by the single banner at the top of the surface and the single border outlining the display surface 17 4 VWS Workstation VWS Workstation 17 3 Device Considerations Figure 17 1 VWS Maximum Display Size eoe 7 Maximum Display Surface ZK 5968 GE Output Window When you define input echo areas you need to adjust each area for any banners or borders that DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS need for each active device The echo area that you specify can only be the area inside the window that contains the input values this area does not include the window banner or its border All banners are 0 00754 meters in height all borders are 0 00197 meters in width Consequently if you want to define contiguous nonoverlapping echo areas you must add the meter values equal to one banner and one border to the end of one device s echo area to determine where the next echo area begins You must also adjust the width of the echo area by two borders so that it does not overlap with the current workstation viewport window Figure 17 2 illustrates the adjustments you need to make to correctly define nonoverlapping input echo
225. areas The shaded areas are the dimensions that you pass to the INITIALIZE class functions specifying the echo area VWS Workstation 17 5 VWS Workstation 17 3 Device Considerations Figure 17 2 Adjusting VWS Echo Area Windows Tees Maximum Y 0 2735246 1 border 00197 VALUATOR 1 banner 00754 Initialized Echo Areas Output Window Minimum Y 0 0 Maximum X 0 3315748 ZK 5969 GE 2 borders 2 0 00197 By default DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS use the type of input device CHOICE LOCATOR and so forth as a title located in the banner If you choose you can replace this title by supplying extra components to the input data record If you want to eliminate the banner from an input echo area you can pass a null value to the first of the extra data record components of the device s data record You cannot eliminate the borders For more information on placing titles on input echo areas see the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals 17 3 2 Additional Information Note the following additional information about VAXstation workstations running VWS e If you are logged in to a system other than a VAXstation workstation running VWS you cannot inquire the DEC PHIGS or DEC GKS description tables You must be logged in to a VAXstation workstation that is running VWS to call DEC PHIGS or DEC GKS description table inquiry functions using the workstation type value 41 17 6 VWS W
226. ark diagonally woven pattern 75 4 Horizontal brick pattern 5 Vertical brick pattern 6 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 7 Brick pattern at 45 degrees 8 Finely woven grid 9 Sparsely woven grid 10 Downward scales fish like 11 Upward scales 12 Rightward scales 13 Leftward scales 14 to 28 Increasing densities of grey no hatch style starting at 1 16 density incrementing by 1 16 up to 15 16 density 9 10 3 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Color for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern values for color index 1 and describes the results Style Index Appearance Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 Dark diagonally woven pattern 7596 Horizontal brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Finely woven grid c 0o 10 Ot t FF Co Pl H Sparsely woven grid nA e Downward scales fish like ren N Rightward scales 13 Leftward scales 14 to 28 Increasing densities of grey no hatch style starting at 1 16 density incrementing by 1 16 up to 15 16 density 29 Vertical lines sparse 6 25 30 Vertical lines sparse 12 5 9 14 OSF Motif Workstation OSF Motif Workstation 9 10 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
227. array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 6 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array error_status high_method color_index linetype fill_style fill_index address of real array line_width expand_factor address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 306 Inquire Highlighting Method The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status high_method color_index linetype fill_style fill_index line_width expand_facto The error status The highlighting method The color index to use with the highlighting method color The line type to use with the highlighting method The fill area attributes to use with the highlighting method The fill index to use with the highlighting method The line width scale factor for the line drawn around the extent of the item being highlighted r The distance the highlighted region should extend around the item being highlighted It is defined in terms of a scale factor of the nominal line width The high_method element is one of the following constants Value Descrip
228. as follows setenv GKSwstype 233 Return 9 2 Connection Identifier A connection identifier must be defined for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS to work with the OSF Motif workstation If you do not define the connection identifier the OPEN WORKSTATION function returns an error You can define the connection identifier in your code or in a logical names table to which your program has access The definition depends on whether you are running under the OpenVMS or UNIX operating system and transport For more information on local transports see Section G 1 9 The connection identifier also depends on which type of workstation you use The following sections are broken down by workstation type Workstation Types 230 and 231 For OSF Motif workstations of type 230 and 231 the connection identifier must be defined using a valid OSF Motif display identifier The syntax depends on the transport mechanism OSF Motif Workstation 9 7 OSF Motif Workstation 9 2 Connection Identifier Syntax Transport Mechanism nodename n n Connect to display using DECnet nodename n n Connect to display using TCP IP DECW DISPLAY OpenVMS specified by the SET DISPLAY command local 0 UNIX shared memory In the previous table e The nodename is the name of the host machine to which the display is physically connected e The first n is required It specifies the display on the host machine and is usually 0 e The second n is option
229. ate point y_value The y coordinate value of a normalized device coordinate point B 82 Escapes 401 Evaluate DC Mapping of an NDC Point The output data record contains the following elements Component Description dx_value The x coordinate value of the corresponding device coordinate point dy_value The y coordinate value of the corresponding device coordinate point Escapes B 83 402 Evaluate WC Mapping of an NDC Point 402 Evaluate WC Mapping of an NDC Point Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape accepts a normalized device coordinate point and a normalization transformation number calculates the corresponding world coordinate point and writes the world coordinate value to the output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array norm xform address of real array x value y value address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array wx value wy value address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL numb
230. ation When using one of the plotters or recorders as an allocated device on an OpenVMS system you need to set terminal characteristics by entering the following DCL command SET TERMINAL device name EIGHTBIT NOBROADCAST NOTYPEAHEAD Retum _ NOWRAP INTERACTIVE HOSTSYNC TTSYNC FORM TAB NOECHO NOESCAPE Return _S PASSTHRU SPEED set_speed WIDTH 132 PAGE 0 Retum DEVICE_TYPE UNKNOWN Return Replace device_name with the name of the device to be allocated Replace set_speed with a value equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the plotter or recorder Note If you use one of the plotters or recorders as a queued device you must add PERM to the list of qualifiers on the DCL command line For more information on device allocation see the ALLOCATE command in the OpenVMS DCL Dictionary When using one of the plotters or recorders as an allocated device on UNIX systems you need to set terminal characteristics by entering the following command 9 stty pass8 echo new cols 132 speed lt dev ttynn Return Replace speed with a value equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the plotter or recorder Replace nn with the port number 8 4 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 4 Pattern and Hatch Values 8 4 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fil
231. ault Value PET 1 Initial choice 1 Initial status STATUS_OK Echo area Varies by device Data record Varies by device list of choice strings 13 5 2 Locator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported locator class logical input devices for the ReGIS devices Locator Device Device Types Input Action VT125 VT240 VT284 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Select with arrow keys VT286 VT330 and Trigger with Return VT340 without mouse Break with Ctrl U 8 Movement is selection and trigger VT330 and VT340 with 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 5 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 2 6 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 3 7 Select with puck Trigger with puck button 4 8 Movement is selection and trigger Supported PETs The locator input class for the VT125 VT240 VT284 VT286 and VT340 terminals support PETs 13 DEC GKS only 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 8 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs 13 6 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 5 Input Information Default Input Values The following table identifies the supported logical input devices for the ReGIS locator class logical input devices Input Construct D
232. being highlighted It is defined in terms of a scale factor of the nominal line width The high_method is one of the following constants Value Description 0 Use the workstation dependent default highlighting method 1 Highlight the segment by drawing it in complement mode 2 Highlight the segment by drawing it using the color index specified in the integer array 3 Highlight the segment by drawing an extent box around it using the line attributes specified in the integer and float arrays The extent box is drawn using complement mode The extent will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width 4 Highlight the segment by drawing a complement mode fill area around it using the fill area attributes specified in the integer array The extent box will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width 5 Highlight the segment by drawing both a line and fill area around it using the attributes specified The extent box will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width If the highlighting method is not available on the workstation on which the segment is displayed the default value of 0 is used 163 Set Highlighting Method 163 Set Highlighting Method Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape sets the primitive highlighting method to be used for pick highlighting This information is meaningful only on
233. ber of strings 0 address of integer array error mode address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description error mode The error mode either 0 off or 1 on Escapes B 11 109 Set Viewport Event 109 Set Viewport Event B 12 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations The VWS DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations This escape allows an application to receive events that the workstation viewport has changed in some way These events are reported through the input event queue with the input class viewport constant There is no corresponding GET INPUT function or escape The event simply indicates that something in the workstation viewport has changed The application can use the appropriate workstation inquiry functions to determine what values have actually changed This type of event is normally re
234. between CAP and BASE int Distance between TOP and CAP int bottom base Distance between BOTTOM and BASE int Reserved for future use int The first character code int unprintable Offset to the character descriptor of the unprintable character int Number of characters in this file int offsets 0 Offset to the character descriptor of the first character int offsetsinum chars 1 Offset to the character descriptor of the NUM CHARSth character ZK 1584A GE The header contains the following elements e file id This element helps identify the file as a DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS font file In DEC GKS for example this identifier is a 32 bit integer with the value 1 e filesize This element specifies the size of the font file in bytes This is used to map the font file into virtual memory It is stored as an integer value A 4 Device Independent Fonts Device Independent Fonts A 4 Stroke Font File version_number This element specifies the version number of the stroke font file This identifier is a 32 bit integer with the value 2 proportional This element indicates whether the font is proportionally spaced This integer is 1 if the font is proportionally spaced and 0 if it is monospaced Proportionally spaced means that different characters have different widths Monospaced means that every character has the same width outline font This element is an integer flag that indicates if the font is stored as out
235. ble 7 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with the LJ250 and LA324 printers Table 7 1 LJ250 and LA324 Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID Specifies the default workstation connection information On GKSconid OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS CONID PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value PHIGSconid For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier of the device as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID FILE LA324 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier of the device as follows 9 setenv GKSconid file 1a324 Retum continued on next page LJ250 and LA324 Workstation 7 1 LJ250 and LA324 Workstation 7 1 Environment Options Table 7 1 Cont LJ250 and LA324 Environment Options Syntax Description Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the Digital LJ250 ink jet printer workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYPE 91 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the Digital LJ250 ink jet printer workstation type as follows
236. ble Buffering B 92 158 Set Edge Aspect Source Flag ASF B 29 156 Set Edge Color Index B 27 153 Set Edge Control Flag B 23 157 Set Edge Index B 28 200 Set Edge Representation B 38 154 Set Edge Type B 24 155 Set Edge Width Scale Factor B 26 205 Set Enter String B 42 108 Set Error Handling Mode B 11 163 Set Highlighting Method B 35 206 Set Icon Bitmaps B 43 151 Set Line Cap Style B 19 152 Set Line Join Style B 21 509 Set Line Pattern B 97 512 Set Marker Pattern B 100 520 Set PEX Begin Render Clear Action B 109 521 Set PEX Clear Region B 111 Index 6 Escapes cont d 511 Set Plane Mask B 99 203 Set Reset String B 40 162 Set Segment Highlighting Method B 33 514 Set Swap Mode B 103 522 Set Transparency B 113 530 Set View Dirty Flag B 124 109 Set Viewport Event B 12 202 Set Window Title B 39 150 Set Writing Mode B 17 111 Software Clipping B 16 state list inquiry Inquire Current Edge Attributes B 48 Inquire Current Line Cap Style B 46 Inquire Current Line Join Style B 47 Inquire Current Writing Mode B 45 515 Swap Buffers B 104 528 Toggle Double Buffering Target B 123 transformation Begin Transformation Block B 31 Begin Transformation Block 3 B 37 End Transformation Block B 32 utility Evaluate DC Mapping of an NDC Point B 82 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a DC Point B 86 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a WC Poi
237. ble program Parameters all list all information below color list predefined color bundle table marker list predefined marker bundle table line list predefined line bundle table fill list predefined fill bundle table pattern list predefined pattern bundle table edge list predefined edge bundle table text list predefined text bundle table view list predefined view bundle table highlight list predefined highlight bundle table hlhsr list available hlhsr modes identifiers escapes list available escapes connid connection id defaults to CONID DEFAULT wstype workstation type defaults to WSTYPE DEFAULT PREDEF COLOR WSTYPE 15 Retum continued on next page Introduction 1 7 Introduction 1 6 Predefined Bundle Table Indexes for DEC GKS Example 1 1 Cont GKS_PREDEF Program Example Color Information for Digital LCP01 or LCGO01 printer 15 devices Default color model RGB 1 Number of color models 4 Color models RGB 1 CIE 2 HSV 3 HLS 4 Number of colors 8 Color availability Color Number of predefined colors 8 Index Red Green Blue 0 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 0 000 1 000 0 000 2 1 000 0 000 0 000 3 0 000 0 000 1 000 4 0 000 1 000 1 000 5 1 000 0 000 1 000 6 1 000 1 000 0 000 7 0 000 0 000 0 000 Number of colors 8 1 7 Predefined Bundle Table Indexes for DEC PHIGS The program PHIGS PREDEF is included with the DEC PHIGS development kit It displays information on the followi
238. call to GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE generates an error Note GDPs are supported only by DEC GKS DEC PHIGS does not support GDPs C 1 Data Record Format Each of the GDPs described in this appendix contains a list of arguments to the GDP function call like the following sample list Argument Required Value n_points 3 pts_array three points on the circumference gdp_id 199 GDPs C 1 GDPs C 1 Data Record Format C 2 GDPs Argument Required Value data rec number of integers 2 number of reals 1 number of strings 3 address of integer array int value 1 int value 2 address of real array real value 1 address of string length array str len value 1 str len value 2 str len value 3 address of string pointer array str addr value 1 str addr value 2 str addr value 3 number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The data record portion of this GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE description data rec specifies that the data record has 11 components The first component is an integer value in this example the value 2 specifying the number of valid elements in the integer array The next two components of the data record specify the number of valid elements in the real array a value of 1 and the string arrays a value of 3 of the data record The fourth component speci
239. cape is for OpenVMS systems only This escape returns the widget identifier of the menu bar widget ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 1 address of generic pointer array widget id number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws id The workstation identifier The output data record contains the following element Component Description widget id The menu bar widget identifier Escapes B 63 309 Inquire Shell Identifier 309 Inquire Shell Identifier B 64 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows workstation types 210 and 211 PEX workstation type 221 and OSF Motif workstation type 231 This escape is for OpenVMS systems only This escape re
240. cates that not all the text of a program or program output is illustrated Only relevant material is shown in the example option A horizontal ellipsis indicates that additional arguments options or values can be entered A comma that precedes the ellipsis indicates that successive items must be separated by commas Horizontal ellipses in illustrations indicate that there is information not illustrated that either precedes or follows the information included in the illustration itself bold Boldface text represents the introduction of a new term Boldface text in code examples shows user input italic Italic text is used when referencing a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS argument name or to show variable names In this manual the percent sign in a command line represents the default user prompt under UNIX In this manual the dollar sign in a command line represents the default user prompt under OpenVMS UNIX systems In this manual references to UNIX systems refers to operating systems based on UNIX software ULTRIX and Digital UNIX formerly DEC OSF 1 systems xviii Throughout this manual when code examples are used to illustrate the use of constant values you can often substitute GKS in place of PHIGS to achieve the same program effects for both products For example GKS K_CONID_DEFAULT can be substituted for an occurrence of PHIGSS K CONID DEFAULT within a code example to create a similar GK
241. cause if values are too large performance may be degraded After you redefine the parameters run AUTOGEN and reboot the system for the new values to be taken into account If after initial tuning and considerable use the server is failing or is unnecessarily unresponsive the server may be out of memory or the memory may be fragmented For example you may find a message similar to the following in the server error log SYS MANAGER DECW SERVER 0 ERROR LOG xxx Out of memory Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 13 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 4 Tuning on OpenVMS VAX Systems In such a case you should perform the following steps 1 Increase the server s page file quota by modifying both the system quota PGFLQUO and the server quota in DECW PRIVATE_SERVER_ SETUP COM 2 Increase the virtual page count MIN_VIRTUALPAGECNT in the MODPARAMS DAT file 3 Run AUTOGEN to take into account the new values If these steps do not resolve the problem then you should submit a problem report G 5 Tuning on OpenVMS Alpha Systems To ensure optimum performance of your three dimensional applications you may need to tune the system and the DECwindows server For information on tuning the PEX and OpenGL extensions to the server refer to the DEC Open3D Installation Guide for Digital UNIX Systems G 14 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS A Addresses GDP data records C 2 Allocation HPPCL 5 2 LCGO1 6 2 LJ250 7 3
242. ce string and valuator devices and for locator devices using prompt and echo type 6 you can specify a character string that the workstation places at the top of the echo area In this manner you can place an application specific title at the top of the logical input device VWS Workstations If you do not pass the extra components of the data record to INITIALIZE STRING 3 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS always place a title at the top of the input window In this case you cannot eliminate the title If you want to create an input device that does not contain a title pass a title length of 0 to the first of the extra components of the input data record E 2 8 Changing the Title String You can change the title string for all the choice string and valuator PETs and locator PET 6 The default title is the name of the device class To change the string increase the data record size by 8 and add the following components to the end of the data record Component Description Data Type Used or Ignored Nexttolast Title string address Integer U Last Title string length Integer U If you want to have a blank title for a particular device use a title string of one blank C and a title string length of 1 If you do not specify the title string and the title string length DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS use the default title If you set the title string to NULL and the title string to 0 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS use the default title Be sure the data reco
243. ce coordinate point ny_value The y coordinate value of the corresponding normalized device coordinate point Escapes B 81 401 Evaluate DC Mapping of an NDC Point 401 Evaluate DC Mapping of an NDC Point Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape accepts a normalized device coordinate point calculates the corresponding device coordinate point using the current workstation transformation and writes the device coordinate value to the output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array x_value y_value address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array dx_value dy_value address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier x_value The x coordinate value of a normalized device coordin
244. ce to logical device mappings Physical Input Devices GKS mm INPUT DEVICES GKSmm input devices PHIGS mm INPUT DEVICES PHIGSmm input devices Specifies the physical input device to use with the device specified by mm In the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS syntax mm refers to the decimal workstation type value for example 84 for the Tektronix 4207 workstation For example on OpenVMS systems to use the mouse as the pointing device for all logical input devices on the Tektronix 4207 workstation define the DEC PHIGS logical name as follows DEFINE PHIGSS WSTYPE 84 Retum DEFINE PHIGS 84 INPUT DEVICES MOUSE ALL Retum On ULTRIX systems to use the mouse as the pointing device for all logical input devices on the Tektronix 4207 workstation define the DEC GKS environment variable as follows setenv GKSwstype 84 Return setenv GKS84 input devices mouse all Return See Section 16 5 1 for information on defining logical names for specific Tektronix and VS500 series devices See Section 16 5 2 for information on using physical device to logical device mappings Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the logical name for the Tektronix 4207 workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYP
245. ces OpenVMS DEFINE PHIGS 84 INPUT DEVICES MOUSE ALL Return ULTRIX setenv PHIGS84 input devices mouse all Retum In this example the mouse is defined for all input devices except string OpenVMS DEFINE PHIGS 84_INPUT_DEVICES MOUSE CHOICE 1 2 5 8 Return ULTRIX setenv PHIGS84_input_devices mouse choice 1 2 5 8 Retum 16 8 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 5 Input Information In this example the mouse is defined as choice devices 1 2 5 6 7 and 8 The joydisk is used for all remaining devices 16 5 3 Choice Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported choice class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 workstations Input Device Choice Device Types Input Action No mouse or puck Mouse 3 buttons Puck 4 buttons 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 Select with arrow keys or joydisk Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U 2 Keypad key is selection and trigger 1 3 6 7 8 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 2 Keypad key is selection and trigger Mouse or puck button down is selection and trigger 5 Mouse button up is selection and trigger 1 3 5 6 7 8 Select with puck Trigger with puck button 1 Break with puck button 2 Keypad key is selection and trigge
246. code For example for the BEGIN METAFILE opcode CGM places the two ASCII characters 3 0 and 2 0 into the metafile Table 2 2 in Section 2 8 lists the ASCII notations that correspond to each of the element opcodes To translate the opcode notation into an ASCII value that corresponds to a character multiply the first number by the value 16 and add the product to the number after the slash character The notation 3 0 corresponds to ASCII value 48 For many 7 bit ASCII charts the first number specifies the chart column and the number following the slash indicates the chart row To find the ASCII character that corresponds to 3 0 look in column 3 row 0 CGM Output 2 5 CGM Output 2 6 Character Encoding To encode data the CGM character encoding uses a basic format The basic format applies to the following CGM data types e Enumerated types e Color indexes e Indexes other than color indexes e Integers e Real numbers Figure 2 2 presents the CGM character encoding basic format Figure 2 2 CGM Basic Data Encoding Format Bit Bit 8 1 PETIT em e e PETE EEE ne ZK 5848 GE CGM encodes each type of data in one or more bytes Each byte contains bits that specify data values In Figure 2 2 bit X is the value 0 Bit e the sixth bit is the extension flag This flag contains the value 1 in all bytes except the last byte in the data specification In the last byte the flag contains the value 0 Bit s the fifth bit
247. color 114 x00000072 Digital VT284 monochrome 65552 x00010010 Digital VT330 monochrome no mouse or tablet 65553 x00010011 Digital VT340 color no mouse or tablet 13 2 2 ReGIS Output to a File An application program can send the ReGIS terminal commands to a file instead of directly to a terminal You can later type the file on the ReGIS screen to see the picture 13 2 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 2 Valid Bit Mask Values Use the following bit masks to specify that ReGIS output be sent to a file The application program specifies the name of the file in the connection identifier argument Table 13 2 Bit Masks for ReGIS File Output Workstation Type Hexadecimal Description 10 x0000000A File suitable for any ReGIS device 110 x0000006E File suitable for any Japanese ReGIS device 1048586 x0010000A File suitable for VT125 color 2097162 x0020000A File suitable for VT125 monochrome 3145738 x0030000A File suitable for VT240 color or VT286 color 3145838 x0030006E File suitable for VT286 color 4194314 x0040000A File suitable for VT240 monochrome or VT284 monochrome 4194414 x0040006E File suitable for VT284 monochrome 5242890 x0050000A File suitable for VT330 monochrome 6291466 x0060000A File suitable for VT340 color 13 2 3 Bit Mask for the VT340 to Restore the Color Map DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS change the color map when the
248. color indexes The VWS workstation has a limit of reservable indexes depending on whether you have a 4 or 8 plane system The physical color map of a 4 plane VWS workstation has 16 entries while that of an 8 plane system has 256 entries If several processes are attempting to reserve too many total colors in the resulting color map an error is generated Also the number of color indexes that you reserve can affect the size and content of the bundle tables When you reserve colors DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS pass the number of colors to VWS VWS reserves the number of colors that corresponds to the next power of 2 For example if you reserve 16 color indexes VWS reserves 16 indexes If you reserve 17 indexes VWS reserves 32 indexes VWS Workstation 17 3 VWS Workstation 17 2 Valid Bit Mask Values Note DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS are layered on the VAXstation Workstation Software VWS However DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not support calls to VWS from a DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS program 17 3 Device Considerations You should review the following information before you program with DEC PHIGS or DEC GKS for any of the VAXstation workstations running VWS 17 3 1 Display Size Windows and Echo Areas VWS provides a banner that runs across the top of each window and borders that line each side DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not include borders and banners in specified window sizes or input echo area sizes You must adjust your window and echo
249. cumented in Appendix B OSF Motif Workstation 9 9 OSF Motif Workstation 9 3 Valid Bit Mask Values When the user or window manager resizes workstations of type 231 the picture may be clipped at the new window boundaries A push button on the menu bar allows the user to restore the window to its default size and location Scroll bars allow the user to pan the displayable region of a clipped picture OSF Motif Drawable Value 232 Workstation type 232 uses a preexisting window or pixmap and is output only Your application must open the display and create the drawable before calling the OPEN WORKSTATION function and it must not close the display or destroy the drawable until after it has called the CLOSE WORKSTATION function This workstation does not select any X events Consequently your application is free to select any X events on this or any other window In addition this workstation will not redraw itself when exposed or when an icon is expanded to a window In such instances your application should call the REDRAW ALL STRUCTURES function for DEC PHIGS or the REDRAW ALL SEGMENTS function for DEC GKS to force a redraw of the window This workstation does not make use of OSF Motif software your application has unrestricted use of OSF Motif software OSF Motif Widget Value 233 Workstation type 233 uses a preexisting OSF Motif widget The widget must be a bulletin board and must be realized before calling the OPEN WORKSTATION
250. d Medium R 317 DEC MiriamFixed Medium O 318 DEC MiriamFixed Bold R 319 DEC MiriamFixed Bold O 320 DEC FrankRuhl Medium R 321 DEC FrankRuhl Medium O 322 DEC FrankRuhl Bold R 323 DEC FrankRuhl Bold O 824 DEC Terminal Medium R Normal ISO8859 8 325 DEC Terminal Medium R DoubleWide ISO8859 8 326 DEC Terminal Medium R Narrow ISO8859 8 327 DEC Terminal Medium R Wide ISO8859 8 328 DEC Terminal Bold R Normal ISO8859 8 329 DEC Terminal Bold R DoubleWide ISO08859 8 330 DEC Terminal Bold R Narrow ISO8859 8 331 DEC Terminal Bold R Wide ISO8859 8 332 JDECW Screen JISX0201 RomanKana 10001 JDECW Screen JISX0208 Kanjill 10001 JDECW Mincho JISX0201 1976 0 10101 JDECW Mincho JISX0208 1983 1 10101 JDECW Gothic JISX0201 1976 0 10102 JDECW Gothic JISX0208 1983 1 10102 4 12 UIL Files Much of the widget creation logic is written in User Interface Language UIL When the UIL files are compiled a User Interface Database UID file is created At startup widgets are fetched out of the UID database There are two UID files one containing most of the widget definitions and a language specific file The language specific file contains text strings font specification and may contain text direction The UID files for DEC GKS are e gks uid DECwindows Workstation 4 25 DECwindows Workstat
251. d Radius C 33 343 Filled Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors C 43 345 Filled Ellipse Focal Points and Point on Circumference C 44 846 Filled Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors C 45 348 Filled Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc C 47 349 Filled Rectangle Two Corners C 49 400 Packed Cell Array C 50 radians C 3 radius specifications C 3 125 Rectangle Two Corners C 28 rotation C 3 transformations C 3 vector origin point C 4 vectors C 3 Index 8 Generate Hardcopy of Workstation Surface 101 B 7 GIN mode configuration 15 3 GKS input levels of 1 1 levels 1 1 multinational font A 1 output levels of 1 1 predefined bundle table indexes 1 6 GKS changes GDP image array C 51 Greens environment option PEX 11 6 H Halfline A 1 Hardware color map DDIF 3 2 DECwindows 4 9 OSF Motif 9 8 VWS workstation 17 2 Hatch LA324 7 4 LJ250 7 4 Hatch values DDIF 3 5 DECwindows 4 13 HP7475 8 5 LCG01 6 3 LVP16 8 5 MPS 2000 8 5 OSF Motif 9 13 PostScript 12 5 ReGIS devices 13 4 sixel printers 14 5 Tektronix 4014 15 4 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 5 VWS 17 7 Hershey fonts See Fonts HLHSR 1 11 DECstation 5000 10 9 11 10 device independent 1 11 HP7475 8 1 to 8 24 bit masks 8 2 environment options 8 1 environment variables 8 1 hatch values 8 5 landscape orientation 8 2 logica
252. d run the application again For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the title size as follows DEFINE PHIGSS DECW TITLE SIZE 10 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the title size as follows setenv GKSdecw title size 20 Return continued on next page OSF Motif Workstation 9 1 Environment Options Table 9 1 Cont OSF Motif Environment Options Syntax Description UID Search Path GKS UID_PATH GKSuid_path PHIGS UID_PATH PHIGSuid path Specifies the UID search path and overrides the standard UID file area See Section 9 13 for more information on UIL files For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the UID search path as follows DEFINE PHIGSSUID PATH SYSTEM DISK NAME UID Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the UID search path as follows setenv GKSuid path usr users smith fonts Rem Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for an OSF Motif workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYPE 231 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for an OSF Motif workstation widget
253. d scales fish like 66 Downward scales fish like 67 Downward scales fish like 68 Downward scales fish like 69 Downward scales fish like 70 Downward scales fish like 71 Upward scales 72 Upward scales 73 Upward scales 74 Upward scales 75 Upward scales 76 Upward scales 77 Upward scales 78 Rightward scales 79 Rightward scales 80 Rightward scales 81 Rightward scales 82 Rightward scales 83 Rightward scales 84 Rightward scales 85 Leftward scales 86 Leftward scales 87 Leftward scales 88 Leftward scales 89 Leftward scales 90 Leftward scales 91 Leftward scales 92 to 196 Increasing densities incrementing first by color starting at 1 16 density incrementing by 1 16 up to 15 16 density VWS Workstation 17 11 VWS Workstation 17 6 Input Information 17 6 Input Information Each of the following sections lists the supported logical input device numbers and supported prompt and echo type PET numbers For a complete description of these numbers see the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals For detailed information on cycling logical input devices and numeric keypad functionality see Section E 3 1 and Section E 3 2 For VAXstation workstations running VWS the default PET for each device class is the value 1 Echoing is enabled by default For all input classes you specify the echo area in device coordinates The VAXstation device coordinate system origin is in the lower
254. d using escape function 520 For more information on using this escape see Appendix B Combining structure and immediate modes can result in good performance With this technique large primitives are stored in structures that are executed in immediate mode The sample DEC PHIGS battle zone program provided in the PHIGS EXAMPLES BATTLEZONE OpenVMS or the Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 3 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 1 Device Independent Tuning usr lib PHIGS examples battlezone Digital UNIX directory illustrates this technique G 1 6 Executing Structures When an execute structure element is present during structure traversal the DEC PHIGS traversal state list is saved before the traversal of the executed structure and restored after this traversal These save and restore operations can negatively affect performance On non PEX workstations if no attribute changes occur in the traversal state list DEC PHIGS optimizes performance by not performing the save and restore of the traversal state For information on optimizing performance on PEX workstations refer to Chapter 11 By using the INCLUDE STRUCTURE function you can prevent the save and restore of the traversal state thus causing the attributes changed by an included structure to remain in effect after this structure is traversed Because the INCLUDE STRUCTURE function does not perform the push and pop of the attribute stack performance can be improved
255. ddress of real array NULL address of string lengths array length of new string address of string pointer array new string number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id length of new string new string The workstation identifier An integer array containing the length of new string in bytes The new cancel button character string Escapes B 41 205 Set Enter String 205 Set Enter String B 42 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows workstation type 211 PEX workstation type 221 and OSF Motif workstation type 231 This escape sets the string used by the enter buttons of input devices It has no effect on input devices presently displayed ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 1 address of integer array ws_id address of real ar
256. dent fiet a usc uera ER EUER EER ERAT 400 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a WC Point 401 Evaluate DC Mapping of an NDC Point 402 Evaluate WC Mapping of an NDC Point 403 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a DC Point 404 Inquire Extent of AGDE P 440 Set Connection Identifier String llle n 500 Set Double Buffering llle 501 Set Background Pixmap llle 502 Inquire Double Buffer Pixmap 0 000 eee 503 Inquire Background Pixmap 0000 e eee eeeee 508 Set Anti Alias Mode 0 0 ccc eee 509 Set Line Pattern 511 Set Plane Mask 512 Set Marker Pattern llle 513 Inquire Double Buffer Buffers llle 514 Set Swap Mode 515 Swap Buffers 516 Inquire Closest Color 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 517 Inquire Vendor String 0 eee eee 520 Set PEX Begin Render Clear Action 005 521 Set PEX Clear Region 0 0 eee 522 Set Transparency 523 Set BQUM Range B 43 B 45 B 46 B 47 B 48 B 50 B 52 B 53 B 55 B 57 B 58 B 60 B 62 B 63 B 64 B 65 B 67 B 68 B 70 B 72 B 74 B 75 B 77 B 79 B 80 B 82 B 84 B 86 B 88 B 90 B 92 B 93 B 94 B 95 B 96 B 97 B 99 B 100 B 102 B 103 B 104 B 105 B 108 B 109 B 111 B 113 B 115 C GDPs C 1 C 2 C 3 524
257. display list execution commands to the PEX or OpenGL server G 8 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 2 Tuning DECwindows and OSF Motif Workstations The primitives to be stored in the PEX or OpenGL server display list are determined by an environment option which indicates the minimum size of the primitives that will be stored on the server To set this environment option on OpenVMS systems enter DEFINE PHIGS DEVICE_STRUCT_ELMSIZE_xxx 100 Retun To set the environment option on UNIX systems enter setenv PHIGSdevice struct elmsize xxx 100 Retum In both cases xxx is the workstation type The default value of the environment option is 100 If the value is too small each small primitive will be stored in a separate display list resulting in a large display list overhead If the value is too large the performance will resemble the performance when structure mode is set to 0 where no structures are stored in the PEX or OpenGL server Structure Mode and Server Response Time The structure mode you select will affect the response time of the X11 server when your DEC PHIGS application is running This response time is the time required for the X11 server to react to operator input and requests from DEC PHIGS and other X11 applications Operator input is generated for example when the user moves the mouse presses a mouse button or types at the keyboard In some applications
258. e the handler uses the default Xoff threshold level If the environment option is defined as a negative value or a value less than the maximum HP GL threshold value 1023 the handler uses the default value In all other cases the handler sets the Xoff threshold level to the specified value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the maximum threshold value of 1023 as follows DEFINE PHIGSSHPGL THRESHOLD 1023 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for a threshold value of 0 as follows 9 setenv GKShpgl threshold 0 Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for a Digital LVP16 printer as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYPE 52 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for a Hewlett Packard HP7550 printer as follows setenv GKSwstype 53 Return 8 2 Valid Bit Mask Values For the LVP16 HP7475 HP7550 HP7580 and HP7585 graphics handlers you can specify hexadecimal bit masks as workstation types The following bit masks are valid for use with these devices Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 51 xm0nn0033 Digital LVP16 pen plotter 8 5 x11 51 xm0nn0033 HP7475 pen plot
259. e use the following prefix e Nonpopup mode Different for each widget type Choice GFX GFX Pasteboard choice topwidget dialog Choice button box GFX GFX Pasteboard choiceb topwidget dialog String GFX GFX Pasteboard string topwidget dialog Valuator GFX GFX Pasteboard valuator topwidget dialog e Popup mode Different for each widget type Choice GFX GFXChoicePopup Choice button box GFX GFXChoiceBBoxPopup String GFX GFXStringPopup Valuator GFX GFXValuatorPopup e Nonpopup or popup mode Different for each widget type Menu bar GFX GFXMenuBar Message GFX message errors messagebox 4 26 DEOCwindows Workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 13 Customization At the end of each of these strings place the class or instance of the attribute you want to change See the DECwindows Toolkit documentation or widget definition include files to obtain the class names The following examples illustrate how to change colors on various devices To change the cancel button background in the valuator device to yellow use the following syntax GFX valuator_cancel_pushbutton background yellow To change all widgets of the valuator to blue use the following syntax GFX valuator_topwidget_dialog background blue To change all choice menu pushbuttons in popup and nonpopup mode to green use the following syntax GFX choice_menu DwtPushButton background green To change the menu pushbuttons only in popup
260. e CGM clear text encoding provides a character string for each of the element opcodes and numbers and delimiters to specify argument data Using this type of encoding you can easily type or edit the metafile For example this encoding represents the BEGIN METAFILE opcode as the character string BEGMF DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS use the semicolon to separate element opcodes Table 2 2 in Section 2 8 lists the character strings that correspond to each of the element opcodes DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS specify integers as numbers and separate the decimal portion of real numbers using a period If you edit a clear text encoded metafile you can insert comments delimited by percent signs 46 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS use the single quote character to delimit strings The DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS CGM clear text encoding mechanism for point lists is as follows e DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS enclose each pair of points in parentheses e DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS separate each point specification within a pair using a comma e DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS separate the parenthetical point groupings using spaces For more information concerning clear text encoding see the CGM standard CGM Output 2 7 CGM Output 2 8 Element Descriptions 2 8 Element Descriptions Table 2 2 lists the opcodes required for each of the CGM elements The first opcode listed is the 7 bit ASCII notation of the character or characters used by the character encodi
261. e Complex Cyrillic 15 Large Complex Roman 16 Large Complex Italic 17 Large Gothic German 18 Large Gothic English 19 Large Gothic Italian 20 Medium Complex Special Characters 21 Music Astronomy and Business 22 Large Special Characters 23 Large Special Characters 24 Small Simple Roman 10001 Japanese Character Set 1 6 Predefined Bundle Table Indexes for DEC GKS 1 6 Introduction The program GKS PREDEF is included with the DEC GKS development kit It displays information on the following predefined bundle tables and supported escapes e Color bundle table e Marker bundle table Introduction 1 6 Predefined Bundle Table Indexes for DEC GKS e Line bundle table e Fill bundle table e Pattern bundle table e Edge bundle table e Text bundle table e View bundle table e Highlight bundle table e HLHSR bundle table e Available escapes e Connection identifier e Workstation type On OpenVMS systems GKS_PREDEF is located in the directory SYSSCOMMON SYSHLP EXAMPLES GKS The logical name GKS EXAMPLES points to this directory On UNIX systems GKS PREDEF is located in the directory usr lib GKS examples Example 1 1 provides an example of using this program on a OpenVMS system to list predefined color indexes for the Digital LCP01 printer device Example 1 1 GKS PREDEF Program Example PREDEF GKSSEXAMPLES GKS PREDEF Retum PREDEF Return DEC GKS predefined bundle ta
262. e The arc type angle The angle in radians The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 1 Form an arc 2 Connect both ends of the arc to its center 3 Connect the beginning and end points of the arc C 20 GDPs 110 Arc Center Starting Point and Angle Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the center point and the point on the circumference are the same point DEC GKS cannot form a circle 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance the specified arc type is not from the supported set OPEN PIE or CHORD GDPs C 21 111 Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors 111 Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors C 22 GDPs Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the ellipse using a center point one vector to establish the distance and direction of the first axis and a second vector to establish the distance of the second axis GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 4 pts array center point vector origin point minor and major axis vectors gdp id 111 data rec number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers
263. e a break during request mode press Ctrl U For workstations that do have a mouse or puck this device requires that you move the tracking device to highlight various choices To trigger this device press the left button To cause a break during request mode press the middle button on the mouse or the top button on the puck or select the Cancel button For more information on button support for the choice input devices see Appendix D E 2 1 2 Choice 2 Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN This device activates the arrow keys and the numeric keypad keys to highlight the various choices For more information concerning the numeric keypad see Section E 3 By pressing any of the arrow or numeric keys you immediately trigger the device and the measure corresponds to the number assigned to the pressed key To break input during request mode press Ctrl U E 2 1 3 Choice 3 Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN This device activates the top six keys of the auxiliary keypad and the keys F7 to F20 to highlight choices 1 through 20 For more information concerning the auxiliary keypad or the keys F7 through F20 see Section E 3 By pressing any of the arrow or numeric keys you immediately trigger the device and the measure corresponds to the number assigned to the pressed key To break input during request mode press Ctrl U For DECwindows and
264. e as the English DECwindows workstation types Note Hebrew support is not included as part of the base DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS product but is included as part of the localized versions 4 15 DEC GKS Sample Application 4 32 For a DEC GKS sample program performing pick input using workstation type 213 see the DEC GKS development kit The program GKS_PICK213 samples the pick input device creates a simple detectable pickable segment and puts the pick input device into sample mode DECwindows Workstation HPPCL Workstation 5 HPPCL Workstation This chapter provides the information you need to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with the Hewlett Packard LaserJet II which uses the PCL Level 4 printer language DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support HPPCL printers as workstations of the category WSCAT_OUTPUT 5 1 Environment Options Table 5 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with the HPPCL printer Table 5 1 HPPCL Printer Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID Specifies the default workstation connection information On GKSconid OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS CONID PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value PHIGSconid For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier of the device as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID FILE HPPCL Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environme
265. e calls Therefore DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS can display line primitives that require more than one transport buffer without any apparent problem DEC PHIGS applies a reduction algorithm to individual facets of fill primitives however thus allowing a large number of vertices per facet such as fill areas or fill area sets This algorithm enables a single facet to fit into a single transport buffer The X11 transport buffer size varies between platforms usually in the range 16 to 64 kilobytes See the operating system documentation for X11 transport buffer sizes for the exact buffer size Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 7 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 2 Tuning DECwindows and OSF Motif Workstations e On PEX workstations A DEC PHIGS primitive cannot be larger than 256 kilobytes If you attempt to send a primitive larger than 256 kilobytes DEC PHIGS issues an error message and ignores the primitive Note With OpenGL workstations there are no limitations on primitive size G 2 3 Modifying the Structure Mode For PEX and OpenGL devices structures can be stored in the client or the server In most cases you can improve performance significantly by storing structures in the server To determine where structures will be stored on OpenVMS systems you define the logical name DEFINE PHIGS DEVICE_STRUCT_SUPPORT_xxx n Return To determine where structures will be stored on UNIX systems you define the envir
266. e current edge flag entry in the DEC GKS state list to the specified value This escape is functionally equivalent to the SET EDGETYPE function ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array edge type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description edge type The edge type The edge type element can be one of the following values Type Description lt 0 Workstation dependent 1 Solid edge 2 Dashed edge 154 Set Edge Type Type Description 3 Dotted edge 4 Dashed dotted edge gt 5 Reserved for future use See the appropriate language definition file for a list of constants and values to be used with this escape Escapes B 25 155 Set Edge Width Scale Factor 155 Set Edge Width Scale Factor B 26 Escapes
267. e different graphics accelerators 11 2 2 1 PXG Accelerators For PEX servers for the DECstation 5000 series PXG class accelerators there are three available settings for anti aliasing each with a separate set of functionality and restrictions The three modes are as follows e Mode 0 No anti aliasing When you use mode 0 no restrictions due to anti aliasing exist e Mode 1 Lines are 2 5 pixels wide DEC PHIGS blends the anti aliased lines from the line color to the anti aliasing background color color table entry 0 DEC PHIGS writes pixels only when the computed pixel value is greater than the value of the existing pixel When you use arbitrary colors overlapping lines are distorted because the numerical value of a pixel is not necessarily a good indication of pixel brightness For example the values of pixels within a PseudoColor visual are indices into a color map rather than color values themselves It is the client s responsibility to set up the color map appropriately Anti aliasing is enabled when the HLHSR_MODE is set to OFF When the HLHSR_MODE mode is set to ZBUFFER anti aliasing is suppressed e Mode 2 Lines are 2 5 pixels wide DEC PHIGS blends the anti aliased lines from the line color to the anti aliasing background color color table entry 0 DEC PHIGS writes all pixels of a line regardless of existing pixel values 11 10 PEX Workstation PEX Workstation 11 2 Connection Identifier Anti aliasing is e
268. e equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the printer Replace nn with the port number 5 3 Printer Resolutions This section describes the printer resolutions in dots per inch dpi Printer Horizontal Vertical HP LaserJet II 300 300 5 4 File Format DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS generate an HPPCL raster graphics image bitmap 5 5 Performance Notes For best performance Digital suggests using 75 dpi mode whenever possible The 300 dpi mode takes significantly longer to process and produces a much bigger file than does 75 dpi mode HPPCL Workstation 5 3 LCGO01 Workstation 6 LCGO1 Workstation This chapter provides the information you need to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with the Digital LCGO01 ink jet printer DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support this device as a workstation of the category WSCAT_OUTPUT Note The LCGO1 ink jet printer is not supported on OpenVMS Alpha and Digital UNIX systems 6 1 Environment Options Table 6 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with an LCGO01 device Table 6 1 LCGO01 Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID Specifies the default workstation connection information On GKSconid OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS CONID PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value PHIGSconid For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection ide
269. e following HLHSR modes Mode Description 0 HLHSR none uses the HLHSR identifier 2 Z buffer 5 HLHSR ignored If the HLHSR mode is set to HLHSR MODE NONE the current HLHSR identifier a structure element is used to determine which HLHSR mode is used All Digital OpenGL servers support forced color highlighting which overrides interior and back interior color specifications Using forced color highlighting with HLHSR may cause artifacts to be generated when unhighlighting is performed 10 2 2 Anti Aliasing Modes For OpenGL servers there are three modes of anti aliasing available each with a separate set of functionality and restrictions These modes are Mode 0 No anti aliasing When you use mode 0 no restrictions due to anti aliasing exist Mode 1 DEC PHIGS renders anti aliased lines DEC PHIGS blends each pixel on the anti aliased line with the contents of the frame buffer The pixels are always written regardless of the computed value The width of the anti aliased line is a function of the line width Anti aliasing will function whether the HLHSR MODE mode is set to ZBUFFER or OFF If Z buffering is on the Z buffer will be updated when anti aliased lines are drawn Mode 3 DEC PHIGS performs essentially the same operation as in mode 1 except it blends each pixel on the anti aliased line with the anti alias background color color table entry 0 rather than with the contents of the frame buffer All pi
270. e for the stroke font list use the INQUIRE TEXT FACILITIES function For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the stroke font list as follows DEFINE PHIGS PEX STROKE FONT LIST 101 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the stroke font list as follows setenv GKSpex stroke font list 101 103 Return Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for a PEX workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYPE 240 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for a PEX device as a device within an application widget as follows setenv GKSwstype 243 Return 11 8 PEX Workstation PEX Workstation 11 2 Connection Identifier 11 2 Connection Identifier A connection identifier must be defined for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS to work with the PEX devices If you do not define the connection identifier the OPEN WORKSTATION function returns an error You can define the connection identifier in your code or in a logical names table to which your program has access The definition depends on whether you are running under the OpenVMS or UNIX operating system and on the communication tran
271. e independent programming using DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS Instead of writing device independent programs you may wish to review the range of capabilities of the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS supported devices or write device dependent subroutines within your application In either case it is helpful to review relevant chapters in this manual before you begin coding your application The device dependent chapters contain the following information e Workstation type modifiers e Programming considerations e Color capabilities e Initial input values e Other pertinent information about the device Introduction 1 1 Introduction 1 2 Using Workstation Type Modifiers 1 2 Using 1 3 Using Workstation Type Modifiers The workstation type value for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS is actually the value of a data structure that fits inside a 32 bit integer The least significant 16 bits contain the workstation type The most significant 16 bits are workstation specific It is helpful to examine workstation type values in hexadecimal form as the bit boundaries are shown more clearly than in decimal form For example a PostScript printer is specified by the workstation type 61 For this device the least significant byte of the second word specifies the paper size The value 1 specifies legal size paper In hexadecimal form this would be represented as x0001003D Constant Names for Workstation Types and Connection Identifiers DEC GKS and DEC
272. e workstation type values for the LA50 LA75 LA84 LA86 LA100 LA210 LA280 LA380 LN03 PLUS LN03 J PLUS and DEClaser devices The following sections describe the bit masks in detail 14 2 1 LA50 LA75 LA84 LA86 LA100 LA210 LA280 and LA380 Graphics Handlers For the LA50 LA75 LA84 LA86 LA100 LA210 LA280 and LA380 graphics handlers you can specify hexadecimal bit masks as workstation type values Using these devices you use the bit mask values to specify the paper orientation The following bit masks are valid for use with the LA50 LA75 LA84 LA86 LA100 LA210 LA280 and LA380 printers Workstation Type Hexadecimal Value Description 31 32 34 35 131 xm000001F Digital LA100 xm0000020 Digital LA50 with 2 1 aspect ratio xm0000022 Digital LA210 xm0000023 Digital LA75 xm0000083 Digital LA84 LA86 LA280 and LA380 The value in the first part m000 specifies the paper orientation The value in the second part is the hexadecimal value The printers and their associated hexadecimal values are as follows Printer Hexadecimal Value LA50 LA75 LA84 and LA86 LA100 0020 0023 0083 001F 14 2 Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 2 Valid Bit Mask Values Printer Hexadecimal Value LA210 0022 LA280 0083 LA380 0083 These hexadecimal values correspond to the decimal workstation type value equivalents 32 for the LA50 print
273. e_horz_scrollbar DwtScrollBar choice_vert_scrollbar choice n DwtPushButton choice_xxx_pushbutton ZK 9839 GE DECwindows Workstation 4 29 DECwindows Workstation 4 13 Customization Figure 4 3 Choice Button Box Software DwtDialogBox choiceb topwidget dialog DwtLabel DwtScrollBar choiceb dialog label choiceb horz scrollbar DwtScrollBar choiceb vert scrollbar DwtDialogBox choiceb clip dialog box DwtDialogBox choiceb buttonbox dialog box choice 1 choice 2 choice n DwtPushButton DwtPushButton DwtPushButton choiceb buttonbox pushbutton choiceb buttonbox pushbutton choiceb buttonbox pushbutton ZK 9840 GE 4 30 DECwindows Workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 13 Customization Figure 4 4 Valuator DwtDialogBox valuator_topwidget_dialog DwtLabel DwtPushButton valuator_title_label valuator_enter_pushbutton DwtPushButton valuator_cancel_pushbutton DwtScale valuator_values_scale DwtLabel DwtLabel valuator_minval_label valuator_maxval_label ZK 9841 GE Figure 4 5 String DwtDialogBox string topwidget dialog DwtLabel DwtPushButton string title label string reset pushbutton DwtSText DwtPushButton string text stext string cancel pushbutton DwtPushButton string_enter_pushbutton ZK 9842 GE DECwindows Workstation 4 31 DECwindows Workstation 4 13 Customization Figure 4 6 Message Box DwtMessageBox message_errors_messagebox
274. ecord contains the following elements Component Description error_status num_cap_styles ret_cap_styles num_join_styles ret_join_styles cap_style_list join_style_list The error status The total number of line cap styles supported by the workstation type The number of cap styles written to the returned integer array The total number of line join styles supported by the workstation type The number of join styles written to the returned integer array The variable list of the supported cap styles The variable list of the supported join styles Escapes B 69 354 Inquire Edge Facilities 354 Inquire Edge Facilities B 70 Escapes ws_type Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes the edge facilities available for the specified workstation type to the output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data out_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 5 number_edge_types number of reals 3 number of strings 0 address of integer array error_status total_edge_types
275. ection Identifier 110 Associate Workstation Type and Connection Identifier B 14 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations This escape associates a connection identifier with a specified workstation type When the association is made a workstation description table inquiry function returns information for the workstation connection identifier pair This lets the user inquire from the workstation description table from different locations such as from a DECwindows workstation Apart from this escape DEC GKS provides minimal support for distributed environments The association can also be canceled For DEC GKS if no association is defined the environment options GKS CONID OpenVMS systems and GKSconid UNIX systems are used if workstation type and connection identifier pairing is needed as in DECwindows workstation ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 1 address of integer array ws type set address of real array 0 address of string lengths array length conid address of string pointer array conid number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL
276. ection identifier of a workstation as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID NODENAME n n On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier of a workstation using the TCP IP transport as follows Return setenv GKSconid nodename n n Return Double Buffering GKS DOUBLE BUFFERING GKSdouble buffering PHIGS DOUBLE BUFFERING PHIGSdouble buffering 9 2 OSF Motif Workstation Enables double buffering on OSF Motif devices if this environment option is defined to any value Otherwise the option is not used For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the double buffering flag as follows DEFINE PHIGSSDOUBLE_BUFFERING 1 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable as follows Return setenv GKSdouble buffering 1 To disable double buffering on an OpenVMS system use the following command DEASSIGN PHIGSS DOUBLE BUFFERING Return To disable double buffering on a UNIX system use the following command unsetenv GKSdouble buffering Return continued on next page OSF Motif Workstation 9 1 Environment Options Table 9 1 Cont OSF Motif Environment Options Syntax Description Font Index GKS DECW_FONT nnn GKSdecw font nnn PHIGS DECW FONT nnn PHIGSdecw font nnn Specifies the X font name string associated with the font index For example on OpenVMS systems
277. efault Value PET 1 Initial position 0 5 0 5 Initial transformation 0 Echo area Largest square Data record NULL 13 5 3 Pick Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported pick class logical input devices for the ReGIS devices Device Pick Device Types Input Action VT125 VT240 VT284 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select with arrow keys VT286 VT330 and Trigger with Return VT340 without mouse Break with Ctrl U VT330 and VT340 with 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 5 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 2 6 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 3 Supported PETs The pick input class for the VT125 VT240 VT284 VT286 and VT340 terminals support PETs 1 2 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETS When using the pick class input device the arrow keys move a small square aperture on the workstation surface The graphics handler marks the currently picked structures or portions of structures by outlining the extent rectangle of all or part of the structure Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the ReGIS pick class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial pick identifier I Initial pick path NULL no path Initial status STATUS_OK Echo area La
278. efault values left_margin 1 0 cm right margin 1 0 cm top margin 1 0 cm bottom margin 1 0 cm resolution 300 inch max path 1400 stack size 400 12 5 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fill area pattern and hatch values for all PostScript printers The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns 12 5 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Cross hatches 2 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 3 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 4 Horizontal lines 5 Vertical lines 6 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse PostScript Workstation 12 5 PostScript Workstation 12 5 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 1 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 8 Horizontal lines sparse 9 Vertical lines sparse 12 5 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern value indexes and describes the results Style Index
279. egory OUTIN This device returns a Digital Multinational Character Set text string to the calling program The device requires you to enter the text string using the keyboard To trigger this device press Return To cause a break during request mode press Ctrl U or the Cancel button To edit the string while entering input on all workstations except the Tektronix 4014 use the following keys e Delete to delete the last character of the input string e Ctrl H to move the cursor to the beginning of the string e Ctrl E to move the cursor to the end of the string e Ctrl B to recall only the initial string e Ctrl A to toggle insert and overstrike modes e Left arrow to move the cursor to the left e Right arrow to move the cursor to the right E 2 4 2 String 2 E 4 Supporting Workstations The VWS workstations This device returns an SMG Encoded Key value DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS ignore any prompt and echo type specified for this device By pressing a key you trigger the device the measure of the device is the single character For information concerning this type of text string see the VMS Run Time Library Routines Volume Input Values Input Values E 2 Logical Input Devices E 2 4 3 String 3 Supporting Workstations The Digital ReGIS DECwindows VWS and Tektronix 4107 workstations This device returns the ASCII value associated with the specified character This device requires you to press a single key on the
280. egrees Dark diagonal lines at 45 degrees Dark horizontal lines Dark vertical lines Light diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Light diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Light horizontal lines sparse Light vertical lines sparse Diagonal lines at 45 degrees Diagonal lines at 45 degrees Horizontal lines Vertical lines Very light diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Very light diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Very light horizontal lines sparse Very light vertical lines sparse Darkest diagonal lines at 45 degrees Darkest diagonal lines at 45 degrees Darkest horizontal lines Darkest vertical lines Dark diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Dark diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Dark horizontal lines sparse Dark vertical lines sparse Darkest diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Darkest diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Darkest horizontal lines sparse Darkest vertical lines sparse Dark horizontal lines very fine Dark vertical lines very fine Finely woven grid Sparsely woven grid 17 8 VWS Workstation VWS Workstation 17 5 Pattern and Hatch Values 17 5 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Monochrome for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern value indexes for monochrome VAXstation workstations This table applies to DEC GKS only Style Index Appearance 1 Light diagonally woven pattern 25 2 Darker diagonally
281. ektronix 4014 Workstation 15 5 Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 5 Input Information Supported PETs The locator input class for the Tektronix 4014 terminal supports PETs 1 and 2 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4014 locator class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial position 0 5 0 5 Initial transformation 0 Echo area Largest square Data record NULL 15 5 3 Pick Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported pick class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4014 terminal Pick Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with thumbwheels Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U Supported PETs The pick input class for the Tektronix 4014 terminal supports PETs 1 2 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4014 pick class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial pick identifier 1 Initial pick path NULL no path Initial status STATUS OK Echo area Largest square Data record Aperture 30 71 in device coordinates The size of the pick aperture is limited b
282. el to the x and y axes GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 2 pts array diagonal corner points gdp id 849 data rec number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the specified points have the same x or y value DEC GKS cannot form a rectangle GDPs C 49 400 Packed Cell Array 400 Packed Cell Array Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS supported workstations except for the PostScript workstations This GDP forms a cell array from the starting point diagonal point point R and the contents of a data record The data record includes an array that contains color indexes specified in 1 8 or 16 bits When you specify the color indexes in increments less than a longword the array uses less memory and DEC GKS can read the data quicker You need to pass the following points to the cell array GDPs Starting point Diagonal point Point R which is the third point in the parallelogram moving the starting point to the diagonal point
283. elect any X events on this or any other window In addition this workstation will not redraw itself when exposed or when an icon is expanded to a window In such instances your application should call the REDRAW ALL STRUCTURES function for DEC PHIGS or the REDRAW ALL SEGMENTS function for DEC GKS to force a redraw of the window This workstation does not make use of the DECwindows Toolkit your application has unrestricted use of the DECwindows Toolkit DECwindows Widget Value 213 Workstation type 213 uses a preexisting DECwindows Toolkit widget The widget must be an attached dialogue box and must be realized before calling the OPEN WORKSTATION function This type of workstation allows the use of either SAMPLE or EVENT mode for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS input in addition to using the DECwindows Toolkit in your application However if you call the AWAIT EVENT function you must set the timeout parameter to 0 otherwise if there are no events in the queue your application waits the full timeout amount Note You cannot call REQUEST mode input with this workstation type To do so results in an error Do not destroy the DECwindows workstation widget until after a call to the CLOSE WORKSTATION function DECwindows PEX Values 220 to 223 Workstation types 220 to 223 have the same characteristics as workstation types 210 to 213 The information in this chapter applies to non PEX use of DECwindows software However input informa
284. element specifies the number of points in a polyline This element is a word xandy These element specify the x and y coordinate values of a point If xy datasize in the header is 1 these values are 1 byte signed integers If xy datasize is 2 these values are 2 byte signed integers A 5 Stroke Font Environment Support The following sections describe the environment options for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS These environment options include stroke font path stroke font list and stroke font A 5 1 Stroke Font Path The stroke font path environment option allows you to change the default directory for stroke fonts For example on OpenVMS systems define the logical name for DEC PHIGS as PHIGS STROKE FONT PATH On UNIX systems set the environment variable for DEC GKS to GKSstroke font path The stroke font path environment option will be used only if there is no path in the environment string for the stroke font file name environment string stroke font For example on UNIX systems if the stroke file name is defined as follows for DEC PHIGS the stroke font path will not be used 9 setenv PHIGSstroke font neg100 usr users jim my font neg100 Retum A 5 2 Stroke Font List and Stroke Font The stroke font list and stroke font environment options allow you to change the mapping of font indexes to stroke font files and the list of stroke fonts available For example on OpenVMS systems define logicals for DEC PHIGS as PHIGS STRO
285. en sizeof Ggdprec Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the specified points have the same x or y value DEC GKS cannot form a rectangle GDPs C 29 333 Filled Circle Center and Point on Circumference 333 Filled Circle Center and Point on Circumference C 30 GDPs Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms a circle from the specified center point and a single point on the circle s circumference GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 2 pts_array center point and a point on the circumference gdp_id 333 data rec number of integers 0 data rec len number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the center point and the point on the circumference are the same point DEC GKS cannot form a circle 334 Filled Circle Three Points on Circumference 334 Filled Circle Three Points on Circumference Supporting
286. engths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Component Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 2 Fill the area formed by connecting both ends of the arc to its center 3 Fill the area formed by connecting the beginning and end points of the arc GDPs C 39 341 Filled Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius C 40 GDPs Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the distance between the points is more than twice the specified radius then DEC GKS cannot form the arc 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you specify a value other than 2 or 3 342 Filled Arc Center Starting Point and Angle 342 Filled Arc Center Starting Point and Angle Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the filled circular arc by using the distance between the center point and the arc starting point as a radius and by using the angle value to determine the endpoint of the arc GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 2 pts array center and start
287. engths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 2 address of long array colormap id pixel 516 Inquire Closest Color The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier color_approx_index The color approximation index color_model The direct color model color_triple The color values The output data record contains the following elements Component Description colormap_id The X11 color map identifier pixel The X11 pixel Escapes B 107 517 Inquire Vendor String 517 Inquire Vendor String B 108 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECstation 5000 200 PXG series workstations This escape allows an application to inquire what server platform the client vendor is connected to This information includes such things as the model number software version number and hardware options ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 n
288. ent Descriptions 0 0 0 llle 2 9 Physical File Organization 0 00 e eee eee eee 2 10 CALS and TOP Application Profiles llle eee 2 11 CALS and TOP Data Precision 0 0 0c eee ens 2 12 Font Selection sioe toe aw oe UWS a Oe ee WR de ue ee 2 13 Encoding Examples 4i e ke oka pak GRO eri EWE RORY REG CREE xvii 3 DDIF Output Workstation 3 1 Copying DDIF Files from UNIX Systems to OpenVMS Systems 3 1 3 2 DDIF Outpit 2 22 25 4 3 0e eee da wh i eee d e eb Pee de sine a 3 1 3 3 Environment Options lleee eee eee ees 3 2 3 4 Valid Bit Mask Values 0 0 0 0 cece cece ehe 3 2 3 5 Differences Between DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS and DDIF 3 3 3 6 Color Capabilities ics i dy em d ires tens EEES ERR Ro Rp dnd 3 4 3 6 1 Color R servation i lt 6 doc 4 bead wine obser Rer o Pub wane b ger Gah 3 4 3 7 Pattern and Hatch Values 0 0 0 ce eee 3 5 3 7 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 00 0000 cece eee 3 6 3 7 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS 3 7 3 8 Japanese Fols e 040486500484 ye qoe bE RENEE GRR ES 3 9 4 DECwindows Workstation 4 1 Environment Options llle eee 4 1 4 2 Connection Identifier llle 4 8 4 3 Valid Bit Mask Values o poo ria ch noain hoe ee ESSE EROR EOS ee 4 9 4 4 Programming Considerations llle eee eee 4 11 4 4 1 Display Size Windows and Echo Areas 00
289. entries see the Xdefaults file section in the worksystem documentation for the appropriate operating system The widget class names are documented in the worksystem documentation and are available in the widget definition include files 9 26 OSF Motif Workstation OSF Motif Workstation 9 14 Customization 9 14 2 Widget Hierarchies Figure 9 1 through Figure 9 6 illustrate the widget hierarchy for each of the devices These figures are provided to assist you in changing widget attributes When the OSF Motif input mode is nonfixed the top widget name will differ and the label widget is not used in the following widget hierarchies e Choice e Choice button box e Valuator e String The fixed widget name is on the left and the nonfixed widget name is on the right of the top of the hierarchy Figure 9 1 Menu Bar XmMenuBar menubar_topwidget_menubar XmCascadeButton XmCascadeButton menubar_reset_pushbutton menubar help pushbutton ZK 3784A GE OSF Motif Workstation 9 27 OSF Motif Workstation 9 14 Customization Figure 9 2 Choice Menu XmBulletinBoard XmBulletinBoardDialog choice_topwidget_dialog choice_topwidget_dialog_popup XmLabel XmPushButton choice dialog label choice cancel pushbutton XmScrolledWindow choice resize scrolledwin XmRowColumn choice menu choice 1 choice 2 choice n XmPushButton XmPushButton XmPushButton choice xxx pushbutton choice xxx pushbultton choice xx
290. entries and the number of predefined depth cue indexes See Appendix F for DEC PHIGS depth cueing equations 1 12 Pattern Support for DEC GKS Almost none of the graphics handlers support the SET PATTERN REPRESENTATION SET PATTERN REFERENCE POINT and SET PATTERN SIZE functions DEC GKS accepts calls to these functions but the pattern representation size and reference point used by the graphics handlers remain unaltered The exception to this rule is the graphics handler supporting the Tektronix 4100 Tektronix 4200 and Digital VS500 devices This handler supports the function SET PATTERN REPRESENTATION but not the SET PATTERN REFERENCE POINT and SET PATTERN SIZE functions DEC GKS accepts calls to these functions but the pattern size and reference point used by this graphics handler remain unaltered DEC GKS also supports user settable patterns on the PostScript device Note DEC PHIGS does not support patterns in Version 3 2 1 12 Introduction Introduction 1 13 Generalized Structure Elements 1 13 Generalized Structure Elements DEC PHIGS does not support generalized structure elements GSEs 1 14 Pixel Inquiries for DEC GKS The pixel inquiry functions INQUIRE PIXEL and INQUIRE PIXEL ARRAY are supported on the following graphics handlers e DECwindows e DECwindows PEX e OSF Motif e OSF Motif PEX e Tektronix 4100 and 4200 and Digital VS500 e VWS The pixel inquiry functions INQUIRE PIXEL and INQUIRE PIXEL A
291. er 3 Connect the beginning and end points of the arc 109 Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance the number of specified points is not appropriate for the GDP function For this GDP two points that are not coincident are required 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance the specified arc type is not from the supported set OPEN PIE and CHORD GDPs C 19 110 Arc Center Starting Point and Angle 110 Arc Center Starting Point and Angle Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms an arc by using the distance between the center point and the arc starting point as the radius and using the angle value to determine the endpoint of the arc GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 2 pts array center and starting point gdp id 110 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 1 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array angle address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The argument data rec contains the following elements Component Description arc typ
292. er 131 Output FILE LA86 printer 131 Output FILE LA280 printer 131 Output FILE LA380 printer 131 Output FILE Japanese LN03 PLUS printer 138 Output FILE Japanese DEClaser 2300 printer 139 Output FILE Japanese VWS workstation 141 Uo Japanese VWS workstation display Japanese PostScript 161 Output FILE Japanese PostScript color 162 Output FILE Japanese Encapsulated PostScript 165 Output FILE Japanese Encapsulated PostScript 166 Output FILE color DECwindows output 210 Output DECwindows workstation display DECwindows 211 UO DECwindows workstation display DECwindows Drawable 212 Output DECwindows workstation display DECwindows Widget 213 UO DECwindows workstation display PEX output device 220 Output PEX workstation display PEX device using the DECwindows 221 T O PEX workstation display Toolkit PEX device as an application window 222 Output PEX workstation display PEX device as a device within an 223 T O PEX workstation display application widget OSF Motif output 230 Output Motif workstation display OSF Motif 231 T O Motif workstation display OSF Motif Drawable 232 Output Motif workstation display OSF Motif Widget 233 T O Motif workstation display OSF Motif PEX output 240 Output Motif PEX workstation display 1Also supported on OpenVMS Alpha and Digital UNIX systems 2Supported only on OpenVMS VAX and OpenVMS Alpha systems continued on next page 1 4 Introduction Introduction 1 4 Su
293. er 35 for the LA75 printer 31 for the LA100 printer 34 for the LA210 printer or 131 for the LA84 LA86 LA280 and LA380 printers The possible values for m include the following Value Paper Orientation 0 Landscape The picture is wider than it is tall This is the default setting 1 Portrait The picture is taller than it is wide 14 2 2 LNOS3 PLUS LNO3 J PLUS and DEClaser LNO6 Graphics Handlers For the LN03 PLUS LN03_J PLUS and DEClaser graphics handlers you can specify hexadecimal bit masks as workstation type values Using this device you use the bit mask values to specify the paper size The following bit masks are valid for use with the LN03 PLUS LN03 J PLUS and DEClaser printers Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 37 oxm0nn0025 Digital DEClaser 2200 printer 38 xm0nn0026 Digital LN03 PLUS laser printer 39 oxm0nn0027 Digital DEClaser 2100 printer 138 JoxmOnn008A Digital LN03 J PLUS laser printer 139 oxm0nn008B Digital DEClaser 2300 printer The value in the first part m specifies the paper orientation The next value Onn specifies the paper size The last value is the hexadecimal value 0026 for the LN03 PLUS printer 008A for the LNO3 J PLUS printer or 0025 0027 or 008B for the DEClaser printers of the workstation type These hexadecimal values correspond to the decimal workstation type value equivalents 38 for the LN03 PLUS printer 138 for the LNO3 J PLUS printer or 3
294. er in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding manuals For detailed information on cycling logical input devices and numeric keypad functionality see Section E 3 1 and Section E 3 2 On a Tektronix 4014 terminal press any key to signal the completion of input When the documentation refers to arrow keys use the thumbwheels to move the cursor 15 5 1 Choice Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported choice class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4014 terminal Choice Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Select with thumbwheels Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U Supported PETs The choice input class for the Tektronix 4014 terminal supports PETs 1 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4014 choice class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial choice 1 Initial status STATUS OK Echo area Varies by device Data record Varies by device list of choice strings 15 5 2 Locator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported locator class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4014 terminal Locator Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with thumbwheels Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U T
295. er of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description norm xform The normalized transformation number to use to map the normalized device coordinate point to world coordinate points x value The x coordinate value of a normalized device coordinate point y value The y coordinate value of a normalized device coordinate point B 84 Escapes 402 Evaluate WC Mapping of an NDC Point The output data record contains the following elements Component Description wx value The x coordinate value of the corresponding world coordinate point wy value The y coordinate value of the corresponding world coordinate point Escapes B 85 403 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a DC Point 403 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a DC Point Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape accepts a device coordinate point calculates the corresponding normalized device coordinate point using the current workstation transformation and writes the device coordinate value to the output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array x value y value address of string lengths array NULL addre
296. ere is a limitation in these device handlers that breaks X event handling if the workstation type value is different For example opening two workstations using type x000a00d3 for each is acceptable but opening one with X000000d3 and the other with x000a00d3 workstation type 211 with default number of colors and with 10 colors yields unpredictable handling of asynchronous events 11 4 Programming Considerations You should review Chapter 4 or Chapter 9 before writing an application using the PEX devices with DECwindows and OSF Motif software 11 4 1 General Information This section provides information and guidelines for using DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with a PEX device and DECwindows and OSF Motif software e To open or query DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstation types 220 221 222 223 240 241 242 and 243 your application must be running on a host that runs the DECwindows and OSF Motif client side software The host does not need a physical display device nor does it need the DECwindows and OSF Motif server side software e For workstation types 220 221 240 and 242 the connection identifier specifies the DECwindows and OSF Motif display to use The second argument to the OPEN WORKSTATION function names a connection identifier If you specify an invalid display DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS return an error when they attempt to open or query the workstation e When performing input DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS position the input echo window a
297. es Light attenuation is calculated as follows La 1 C1 C2 NORM 0p Lp F 2 Mathematical Concepts for DEC PHIGS F 2 Depth Mathematical Concepts for DEC PHIGS F 1 Lighting Equations The reflectance vector is calculated as follows Vr 2 Vy V1 Vn V1 In all cases a dot product resulting in a negative value will be replaced by 0 0 Cueing Equations Objects are depth cued toward a specified depth cue color The scaling of a point in between the front depth cue reference plane and the back depth cue reference plane is determined by a linear interpolation of the depth cue scale factors between the depth cue reference planes as indicated by the following equations Any points in front of the front depth cue reference plane or behind the back depth cue plane are rendered in a constant color as indicated in the following equations If z is in front of Pr Cit Sf Ci 1 Sf CDi If z is behind P Ci Sp Ci 1 Sb CDi If z is between P and Py r Sh Z Pp Sf Sp PE Pp Cy r Ci 1 r CDi Symbols used in the equations are defined as follows Symbol Description CD Component of depth cue color Ci Component of input color Cit Component of resultant color Py z coordinate of back reference plane in normalized projection coordinate points Pr z coordinate of front reference plane in normalized projection coordinate points r Depth cue position poi
298. es the maximum WSEXTENT parameter value When monitoring the process you should pay particular attention to the following e Virtual page count To determine the current virtual page count a process is allowed to have use the SYSGEN utility to issue the command SHOW VIRTUALPAGECNT If the value is less than 200 000 you can change the VIRTUALPAGECNT parameter value by adding the following line to the SYS SYSTEM MODPARAMS DAT file MIN_VIRTUALPAGECNT 200000 Note The minimum value of VIRTUALPAGECNT for a working X server is 200 000 if a ZLX E or ZLXp E is installed Set the MIN VIRTUALPAGECNT parameter value as high as the equivalent of your total available physical memory and page file space If the VIRTUALPAGECNT value is less than the sum of your WSEXTENT and PGFLQUO values the server cannot make full use of the quotas e Maximum size of working set The maximum size of the process working set defined by the WSMAX parameter must at least be equal to the largest WSEXTENT value set for your accounts If this is not the case add the following line to the SYS SYSTEM MODPARAMS DAT file MIN WSMAX 32768 e Page file You should increase the size of the page file DECW SERVER_PAGE_FILE parameter to accommodate the page file quotas of both the server and the clients The page file quota for the server is defined by the SYSTEM account page file quota You should set large parameter values only if necessary be
299. estrictions i e ase gebe bode bo EErEE des egens 13 4 13 4 Pattern and Hatch Values 0 0 eee 13 4 13 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 0 20 0 000 ee eee eee 13 4 13 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS 13 4 13 5 Input Information i meg Rem rae REX RE EE GE RAE 13 5 13 5 1 Choice Input Class 42 44 2682264 6ha8ea EEEE ERA dus 13 5 13 5 2 Locator Input Class 5 3 rcx doc cs Ee OR REOR A c HR ERS 13 6 13 5 3 Pick Input Cla88 4a y ee eee Rae ad a ER x es 13 7 13 5 4 String Input Class 44 ha arra RRR E pde EEAS doi o4 e d Ul edd 13 8 13 5 5 Stroke Input Class 1i dies rom her Pau E EE gelo qe AoE Ea 13 8 13 5 6 Valuator Input Class 0 0 0 cee eee 13 9 14 Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 4 Environment Options sels 14 1 14 2 Valid Bit Mask Values 1 0 ccc cet cee e hh ts 14 2 14 2 1 LA50 LA75 LA84 LA86 LA100 LA210 LA280 and LA380 Graphics Handlers l i ss cnis erraten s VESS ADERE EEES EERI 14 2 14 2 2 LN03 PLUS LN03 J PLUS and DEClaser LN06 Graphics H ndlers uuu ues edea E ER DERE T RR RUE Quee RO E d 14 3 14 3 Device Considerations 0 0 ccc rh 14 4 14 3 1 LA50 Switch Settings 20 eens 14 4 14 3 2 Device Queues and Allocation 0 0 0 nee 14 4 14 4 Pattern and Hatch Values 0 0 ccc ee ens 14 5 14 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 0 0 0 0 cc cece eee 14 5 14 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern V
300. ext page PEX Workstation 11 7 PEX Workstation 11 1 Environment Options Table 11 1 Cont PEX Environment Options Syntax Description Stroke Font Index GKS PEX_STROKE_FONTnnn GKS PEX_STROKE_FONT_NEGnnn GKSpex stroke fontnnn GKSpex stroke font negnnn PHIGS PEX STROKE FONTnnn PHIGS PEX STROKE FONT NEGnnn PHIGSpex stroke fontnnn PHIGSpex stroke font negnnn Allows you to set up file names for individual font indexes The variable nnn is the font index For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the stroke font index as follows DEFINE PHIGSSPEX STROKE FONT NEG99 MYFONT FNT Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the stroke font index as follows setenv GKSpex stroke font neg99 myfont fnt Return Stroke Font List GKS PEX STROKE FONT LIST GKSpex stroke font list PHIGS PEX STROKE FONT LIST PHIGSpex stroke font list Controls the list of font indexes for which you have set up names Stroke font index 1 will always be in the stroke font list DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS attempt to open all stroke fonts in the list when they read the environment option If DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS are unable to open the PEX stroke font they do not include the font index in their internal list If you use a stroke font index that is not in the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS internal list font index 1 is used To determine which font index DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS us
301. f integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier clear_I A Boolean specifying whether to clear the image The possible values are as follows e PEX IMM CLR I NOCLEAR 0 Do not clear This is the default value e PEX IMM CLR I CLEAR 1 Clear clear Z A Boolean specifying whether to clear the Z buffer This element must be specified The possible values are as follows e PEX IMM CLR Z NOCLEAR 0 Do not clear e PEX IMM CLR Z CLEAR 1 Clear num clip The number of clip regions to be set If this value is 0 DEC PHIGS uses the whole window as the clip region See the appropriate language definition file for a list of constants and values to be used with this escape B 112 Escapes 522 Set Transparency 522 Set Transparency Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations VS3100 SPX PXG and ZLX series and DECstation 5000 series and VAXstation 4000 xx SPXgt PEX workstations when you use a 24 bit visual type This escape allows you to enable or disable transparency If the transparency flag is 0 transparency is disabled If the transparency flag is 1 transparency is
302. f integer array ws_type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 3 total_methods number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error_status total_methods ret_methods methods_list address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_type The workstation type Escapes B 75 358 Inquire List of Highlighting Methods B 76 Escapes The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status The error status total_methods The total number of highlighting methods supported by the workstation type ret_methods The number of highlighting methods written to the remaining elements of the output data record s integer array methods_list The list of highlighting methods 359 Inquire Edge Representation 359 Inquire Edge Representation Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape returns the edge bundle representation for a give
303. ffering If MIT double buffering is not supported by the server DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS use pixmap double buffering If you want pixmap double buffering set the double buffering flag to 1 and the MIT double buffering flag to 0 For example on OpenVMS systems you define the logical name to enable double buffering as follows DEFINE PHIGS DOUBLE BUFFERING 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the environment variable to disable double buffering as follows setenv GKSdouble buffering 0 Return continued on next page PEX Workstation 11 3 PEX Workstation 11 1 Environment Options Table 11 1 Cont PEX Environment Options Syntax Description Hardware Dials and Buttons Flag PHIGS USE DIALS AND BUTTONS PHIGSuse dials and buttons Specifies whether the button and dial hardware must be available If the value of this option is set to 0 DEC PHIGS emulates the button and dial boxes with on screen widgets If the value is set to 1 DEC PHIGS aborts if the button and dial box hardware is not available If no value is specified for this option DEC PHIGS uses the buttons and dials hardware if they are available or emulates them if they are not For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the dials and buttons as follows DEFINE PHIGSS USE DIALS AND BUTTONS 1 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the dials and buttons as follows
304. fic chapters in this manual list the default echo area for the default logical input device of a given class To determine the default echo area for other devices of the same class call one of the INQUIRE DEFAULT class DATA inquiry functions and pass it the appropriate device number For complete information concerning logical input devices physical input devices and the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS input process see the DEC GKS User s Guide and the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding manuals The following section specifies which DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations implement which logical input devices Input Values E 1 Input Values E 2 Logical Input Devices E 2 Logical Input Devices The following section describes the logical input devices that can be implemented on workstations supported by DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS E 2 1 Choice Devices The following section describes the choice class logical input devices and specify which DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations support each device Digital Workstations Using one of the Digital workstations you can use the Lock key feature for any of the choice logical input devices For more information see Section E 3 E 2 1 1 Choice 1 6 7 8 Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN For workstations that do not have a mouse or puck this device requires that you press the arrow keys to highlight various choices To trigger this device press Return To caus
305. fier is an ASCII string consisting of the X display identifier and the X drawable identifier separated by an exclamation point Both values are expressed as decimal numbers An example of a valid connection identifier would be 1234857 388291 PEX Workstation 11 9 PEX Workstation 11 2 Connection Identifier Workstation Types 223 and 243 For workstations of types 223 and 243 the connection identifier is an ASCII string representing the widget identifier Both values are expressed as decimal numbers An example of a valid connection identifier would be 396251 11 2 1 HLHSR Mechanism Support for PEX Devices All PEX devices support HLHSR identifiers see Table 1 3 and Table 1 4 PEX devices also support the following HLHSR modes Mode Description 0 HLHSR none uses the HLHSR identifier 2 Z buffer 5 HLHSR ignored If the HLHSR mode is set to HLHSR MODE NONE the current HLHSR identifier a structure element is used to determine which HLHSR mode is used All Digital PEX servers support forced color highlighting which overrides interior and back interior color specifications The use of forced highlighting with HLHSR may cause artifacts to be generated when unhighlighting is performed 11 2 2 Anti Aliasing Modes If you have DEC Open3D installed on your system you can use the PXG SPXg and SPXgt SFB and ZLX graphics accelerators with DEC PHIGS The following sections describe how to use anti aliasing on th
306. fies the address of an integer array the array itself contains the integers int value 1 and int value 2 Each GDP description in this appendix describes the purpose of these integers GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE uses the address provided in the fourth component to locate the integer array The fifth component specifies the address of a real array the array itself contains the integer real value 1 The sixth component specifies the address of a string length array the array itself contains the integers str len value 1 str len value 2 and str len value 3 The seventh component specifies the address of a string address array the array itself contains the integers str addr value 1 str addr value 2 and str addr value 3 Note To place array addresses in the fourth fifth sixth and seventh components of the data record you need to use a technique specific to your programming language For example using DEC Fortran you can use the LOC built in function For more information concerning addresses and pointers see the documentation set for your programming language The eighth component is an integer value that specifies the number of valid pointers in the pointer array The ninth component of the data record specifies the address of the generic pointer array of the data record The tenth component is an integer value that specifies the number of valid longs in the pointer array GDPs C 1 Data Record For
307. fined using a valid X11 display identifier The syntax depends on the communication transport mechanism as shown in the following table Syntax Transport Mechanism nodename n n Connect to display using DECnet nodename n n Connect to display using TCP IP DECW DISPLAY OpenVMS specified by the SET DISPLAY command local 0 UNIX shared memory unix 0 UNIX domain sockets In the previous table e The nodename is the name of the host machine to which the display is physically connected e The first n is required It specifies the display on the host machine and is usually 0 e The second n is optional It is the screen identifier and defaults to 0 Workstation Type 272 For workstations of type 272 the connection identifier is an ASCII string consisting of the X display identifier and the X drawable identifier separated by an exclamation point Both values are expressed as decimal numbers An example of a valid connection identifier would be 1234857 388291 Workstation Type 273 For workstations of type 273 the connection identifier is an ASCII string representing the widget identifier This value is expressed as a decimal number An example of a valid connection identifier would be 396251 10 8 OpenGL Workstation OpenGL Workstation 10 2 Connection Identifier 10 2 1 HLHSR Mechanism Support for OpenGL Devices All OpenGL devices support HLHSR identifiers see Table 1 4 OpenGL devices also support th
308. fined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS 16 5 Input Information 2i 2 xd nes deeb hades obs EG UR Hee RR 16 5 1 How to Use Additional Physical Devices llle 16 5 2 Using Logical Device Mappings llle 16 5 3 Choice Input CaS esseere tnus Orud ENESE ERS ee E UR EI d 16 5 4 Locator Input Class llle 16 5 5 Pick Input ClassS 5 er Rh e REL RS ORES OO AURI E Rosie 16 5 6 String Input Cla88 vo rpm ey ER eor v sm er ORE 16 5 7 Stroke Input Class i e 4r RR inep EEEE E rrr EERE 16 5 8 Valuator Input Class llle eee VWS Workstation 17 4 Environment Options llle ra 17 2 Valid Bit Mask Values l l 17 3 Device Considerations llli 17 3 1 Display Size Windows and Echo Areas 00002 eee 17 3 2 Additional Information llle 17 4 Cell Array Restriction for DEC GKS 0 2 20 00 ee ees 17 5 Pattern and Hatch Values 0 0 cece ene 17 5 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 0 0 00 c cece eee ee 17 5 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Monochrome for DEC GKS 17 5 3 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Color for DEC GKS 17 6 Input Information eee 17 6 1 Choice Input Class secere ns tt na cR a a kee RR TRO RR ee RR a 17 6 2 Locator Input Class llle 17 6 3 Pick Input Class o errek resents nkr ure m de Ed 17 6 4 String Input Class 45 94 or RR e EVER TE VR ET 17 6 5 Stroke In
309. fined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the center point and the point on the circumference are the same point DEC GKS cannot form a circle 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you specify a value other than 1 2 or 3 GDPs C 17 109 Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius 109 Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius C 18 GDPs Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms an arc from the specified beginning and end points and forms the radius vector point The arc is drawn so that the circumference clockwise from the first point to the second is no greater than pi radians half a circle GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 4 pts array two points vector origin point and radius vector point gdp id 109 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Component Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 1 Form an arc 2 Connect both ends of the arc to its cent
310. for VAXstation workstations running VWS Choice Device Types Input Action 1 6 7 8 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Keypad key is selection and trigger Function key is selection and trigger Mouse button down is selection and trigger ao Co N Mouse button up is selection and trigger Supported PETs The choice input class for VWS supports PETs 1 1 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs 17 12 VWS Workstation VWS Workstation 17 6 Input Information Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for VWS choice class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial choice 1 Initial status STATUS_OK Echo area Varies by device Data record Varies by device list of choice strings 17 6 2 Locator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported locator class logical input devices for VAXstation workstations running VWS Locator Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Supported PETs The locator input class for VWS supports PETs 13 DEC GKS only 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manual
311. format of Computer Graphics Metafiles CGM DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS define the workstation category CGM_OUTPUT to use when creating metafiles Note that DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS can create but cannot interpret metafiles If you need to understand the CGM encoding formats in depth see the CGM standard ANSI X3 122 1986 All references to the CGM standard in this chapter use this standard document 2 1 Computer Graphics Metafiles DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support the CGM encoding format for use in creating metafiles To create a file formatted for CGM open and activate a workstation of category CGM_OUTPUT Note that DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS cannot interpret files formatted for CGM The CGM standard defines a metafile as a mechanism for retaining and transporting graphical data and control information This device independent information contains one or more pictures Because the CGM standard provides functionality for many types of graphics applications not just DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS certain DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS functionality may not be supported by the CGM format and certain CGM capabilities cannot be used within a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS program When you create a CGM using DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS CGM records only those features supported by the CGM format 2 2 Environment Options Table 2 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with CGM structures CGM Output 2 1 CGM Output 2 2 Environment Options Table 2 1 CGM Environment Opt
312. function This type of workstation allows the use of either SAMPLE or EVENT mode for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS input in addition to using OSF Motif software in your application However if you call the AWAIT EVENT function you must set the timeout parameter to 0 otherwise if there are no events in the queue your application waits forever Note You cannot call REQUEST mode input with this workstation type To do so results in an error Do not destroy the OSF Motif workstation widget until after a call to the CLOSE WORKSTATION function OSF Motif PEX Values 240 to 243 Workstation types 240 to 243 have the same characteristics as the DECwindows workstation types 220 to 223 The information in this chapter applies to non PEX use of OSF Motif software however the input information for OSF Motif on PEX workstations is identical to that for OSF Motif on non PEX workstations For more information on PEX workstation types see Chapter 11 OSF Motif OpenGL Values 270 to 273 Workstation types 270 to 273 have characteristics similar to those of PEX workstation types 240 to 243 This chapter does not provide OpenGL specifics however the input information for OSF Motif on OpenGL workstations is identical to that for OSF Motif on workstations without the OpenGL driver For more information on the OpenGL workstation types see Chapter 10 9 10 OSF Motif Workstation OSF Motif Workstation 9 4 Programming Considerations 9 4 Programm
313. fy a value other than 1 2 or 3 GDPs C 15 108 Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius 108 Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms a circular arc by using the two vectors to calculate directions from the center point DEC GKS uses the vector direction to form rays whose angles along with the radius value determine the starting and ending points of the arc GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 5 pts array center vector origin point two vectors points and the radius vector point gdp id 108 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Component Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 1 Form an arc 2 Connect both ends of the arc to its center 3 Connect the beginning and end points of the arc C 16 GDPs 108 Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not de
314. ge value 22 The default value PHIGS LANGUAGE is 0 See Section 9 15 for more information on internationalization PHIGSlanguage For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the Hebrew language as follows DEFINE PHIGS LANGUAGE 21 On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the Japanese language as follows Return setenv GKSlanguage 22 Menu Bar Size GKS DECW MENU BAR SIZE GKSdecw menu bar size PHIGS DECW MENU BAR SIZE PHIGSdecw menu bar size When you run a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS application on an OSF Motif workstation geometry management conflicts may arise with different window managers If you get the error message MENU BAR SIZE attribute incorrect set this logical name to the value printed in the error message and run the application again If you specify the value 0 the menu bar will not be created and no screen space will be used For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the menu bar size as follows DEFINE PHIGSS DECW MENU BAR SIZE 10 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for no menu bar as follows 9 setenv GKSdecw menu bar size 0 Return Resize Mode GKS RESIZE ZOOM GKSresize zoom PHIGS RESIZE ZOOM PHIGSresize zoom Specifies the behavior of the output image when the main application widget is resized Either the graphics can be resized to
315. ger array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 4 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array watch_state watch_id offset_start offset_end address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The output data record contains the following elements Component Description watch_state The watch state If the value is 1 the watch ranger is active If it is 0 the watch range is not active watch_id DEC PHIGS ignores this argument The escape can be called only when a structure is open and DEC PHIGS assumes the range is within the currently open structure offset_start The offset start in the range 0 to n 1 where n is the current number of elements in the open structure offset end The offset end in the range 0 to n where n is the current number of elements in the open structure 524 Inquire BQUM Range The watch range is a closed interval This means that the watch range is null when the ending offset is equal to one less than the starting offset This also means that the offset end must be greater than
316. ghting Method B 60 360 Inquire Language Identifier B 79 852 Inquire Line Cap and Join Facilities B 68 350 Inquire List of Available Escapes B 65 302 Inquire List of Edge Indexes B 53 858 Inquire List of Highlighting Methods B 75 356 Inquire Maximum Number of Edge Bundles B 74 Index 5 Escapes cont d 308 Inquire Menu Bar Identifier B 63 307 Inquire Pasteboard Identifier B 62 855 Inquire Predefined Edge Representation B 72 303 Inquire Segment Extent B 55 305 Inquire Segment Highlighting Method B 58 309 Inquire Shell Identifier B 64 517 Inquire Vendor String B 108 531 Inquire View Dirty Flag B 126 255 Inquire Viewport Data B 50 804 Inquire Window Identifiers B 57 533 Inquire Workstation Structure Memory B 130 miscellaneous Inquire BQUM Flags B 122 Inquire BQUM Range B 118 Inquire View Dirty Flag B 126 Inquire Workstation Structure Memory B 130 Render Element Range B 128 Set BQUM Flags B 120 Set BQUM Range B 115 Set View Dirty Flag B 124 OpenGL 10 12 output Set Edge Control Flag B 23 PEX 11 16 106 Pop Workstation B 9 107 Push Workstation B 10 532 Render Element Range B 128 508 Set Anti Alias Mode B 96 501 Set Background Pixmap B 93 525 Set BQUM Flags B 120 523 Set BQUM Range B 115 204 Set Cancel String B 41 440 Set Connection Identifier String B 90 100 Set Display Speed B 6 500 Set Dou
317. hardware cursor map 9 11 4 String Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported string class logical input devices for the OSF Motif workstation String Device Types Input Action 1 2 4 Enter characters from keyboard Trigger with Return key or Enter button Break by selecting Cancel button when echoing is enabled or by selecting Ctrl U when echoing is disabled 3 ASCII encoded string Keypress enters character and triggers device Supported PETs The string input class for the OSF Motif workstation supports PET 1 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETS Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the OSF Motif workstation string class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial string NULL Echo area Varies by device Data record Input buffer size 20 ASCII characters Initial position 1 9 18 OSF Motif Workstation OSF Motif Workstation 9 11 Input Information 9 11 5 Stroke Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported stroke class logical input devices for the OSF Motif workstation Stroke Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Points are entered with mouse motion Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Supported PETs The stroke input class for the OSF Mot
318. he blue green and red intensity values in that order Table 3 2 lists the color table files that define these color values Table 3 2 Color Table Files Operating System File Name OpenVMS SYS SHARE VAXGFX DDIF_COLOR_TABLE DAT UNIX lib vaxgfx ddif color table dat For example on OpenVMS systems define your own color table for DEC PHIGS as follows DEFINE PHIGSSDDIF COLOR TABLE TABLE FILENAME Return On UNIX systems define your own color table for DEC GKS as follows setenv GKS ddif color table table filename Return The default table holds the definitions of 248 colors You can add more colors to the table by defining more blue green and red combinations Up to 32K colors can be requested If there is no color table file available the DDIF device handler uses an internal color table that is the same as the VAXstation II GPX color table The number of colors available is as follows e Ifyou request more colors than are in the table all the colors in the table are made available e If you request fewer colors than are in the table the number requested is made available starting with color 1 For more information on workstation type bit masks and color index reservation see Section 3 4 3 7 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fill area pattern and hatch values for all DDIF output The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative value
319. he border size as follows setenv GKSdecw border size 20 Return continued on next page OSF Motif Workstation 9 1 OSF Motif Workstation 9 1 Environment Options Table 9 1 Cont OSF Motif Environment Options Syntax Description Color Map Size GKS DECW_COLORMAP_ SIZEmmm GKSdecw_colormap_sizemmm PHIGS DECW_COLORMAP_ SIZEmmm PHIGSdecw_colormap_sizemmm Used in conjunction with the mm field in the workstation type bit mask to specify the size of the color table allocated by the workstation For example if the bit mask is set to FF and you define this option to be 38 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS will use 38 colors If you do not define this option DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS will use 255 colors because the hexadecimal value FF is 255 You cannot allocate more than 255 colors On OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to use 36 colors in the color map as follows DEFINE PHIGS DECW_COLORMAP_SIZE255 36 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable to use 16 colors in the color map as follows 9 setenv GKSdecw colormap size255 16 Return Connection Identifier GKS CONID GKSconid PHIGS CONID PHIGSconid Specifies the default workstation connection information On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the conn
320. he connection identifier also depends on which type of workstation you are using as defined by the display identifier The following sections are broken down by workstation type Workstation Types 210 and 211 For DECwindows workstations of type 210 and 211 the connection identifier must be defined using a valid DECwindows display identifier The syntax depends on the transport mechanism Syntax Transport Mechanism nodename n n Connect to display using DECnet nodename n n Connect to display using TCP IP DECW DISPLAY OpenVMS specified by the SET DISPLAY command local 0 ULTRIX shared memory In the previous table e The nodename is the name of the host machine to which the display is physically connected e The first n is required It specifies the display on the host machine and is usually 0 e The second n is optional It is the screen identifier and defaults to 0 Workstation Type 212 For workstations of type 212 the connection identifier is an ASCII string consisting of the X display identifier followed by the X drawable identifier separated by an exclamation point Both values are expressed as decimal numbers An example of a valid connection identifier is 1234857 388291 Workstation Type 213 For workstations of type 213 the connection identifier is an ASCII string representing the decimal value of the widget identifier An example of a valid connection identifier is 396251 4 3 Valid Bit Ma
321. he error status viewport The viewport that defines the region changed or exposed in device coordinates XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX If XMAX and YMAX are 0 nothing has changed concerning the workstation viewport since the last time this escape was called Escapes B 51 300 Inquire Current Display Speed 300 Inquire Current Display Speed B 52 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations The LVP16 printer and all HP GL plotter workstations This escape writes the current display speed see 100 Set Display Speed to the output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 1 number of reals 1 number of strings 0 address of integer array error status address of real array display speed address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following
322. he specified language e Translated text in output widgets e Control over text direction in output widgets Any text that is displayed outside of a widget is not translated Use environment options to dictate which language to use See Table 9 1 The language environment option can be set to any of the following integers e 0 English e 21 Hebrew e 22 Japanese If no language environment option is set the default integer is 0 English By setting the language environment option a language specific UID file is read in at startup In addition the text direction field is set in accordance with the language type To notify OSF Motif of the current language in use the language type can be set through the session manager If a session manager is not available the language type can be set through an environment option or with the Xdefaults file See the OSF Motif documentation appropriate to your operating system To use the Japanese fonts with English workstation types set the language environment variable to Japanese value 22 If you use the Japanese OSF Motif workstation types 33n you do not need to set the language environment option The bit mask values and many other characteristics of the Japanese OSF Motif workstation types are the same as the English OSF Motif workstation types Note Hebrew support is not included as part of the base DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS product but is included as part of the localized version
323. header and a set of character descriptors The header structure has common information for all characters in a stroke font file and control data Each character descriptor contains the data for each character To point to each character descriptor there are offset arrays in the header structure The index of an offset array is calculated by subtracting the first character from the output character code Each offset array has the number of bytes from the top of the stroke font file A character descriptor has all the information to make a character This includes the number of polylines in a character the character width and the data set of each polyline which contains the number of points in the polyline and the set of x and y point coordinates Device Independent Fonts A 3 Device Independent Fonts A 4 Stroke Font File A 4 1 Stroke Font File Header Figure A 4 illustrates the structure of the header of the stroke font file Figure A 4 Stroke Font File Header Structure I 4 Bytes 5 int Identifier with value 1 int Size of font file int Version number of font file 2 Flag to indicate whether Ini SBROBOPIONSI proportionally or monospaced font int outline font Flag to indicate whether outlined or filled font int Flag to indicate whether X and Y f coordinates are BYTE or WORD int Maximum width of font in this file int left_kern Width of left kern int Reserved area for future use int Distance
324. his types the specified file at your terminal When you are finished use the command tset to restore terminal attributes before attempting to do other work 15 3 Programming Considerations DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support the Tektronix 4014 terminal with the Enhanced Graphics Option Tektronix option number 34 The Enhanced Graphics Option provides four additional vector line formats and a higher resolution All recently purchased Tektronix 4014 terminals include the option as a standard feature However early Tektronix 4014 terminals were available without the option If you have an early model you must add the Enhanced Graphics Option to use the terminal with DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS Note For DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS only the Tektronix 4014 with enhanced graphics module option 34 or equivalent is supported The emulation of a Tektronix 4014 is not supported on any hardware 15 3 1 Echo of Characters To avoid having each typed character echoed twice on the Tektronix 4014 terminal set local echo on the data communication interface card to OUT 15 3 2 GIN Mode Configuration DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS input on the Tektronix 4014 terminal make extensive use of graphics input GIN mode GIN mode is enabled by an escape sequence and terminated by user action pressing a key on the keyboard The Tektronix 4014 terminal sends a string of characters back to DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS The string of characters is the PLOT 10 representation
325. ials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS D 5 Error Messages Error Message User Action ERROR_NEG_451 ERROR_NEG_452 ERROR_NEG_453 Choice device could not be used buttons are not available on the PCM device in routine name PCM initialization failed hardware dials and buttons not available in routine name PCM configuration failed valuator or choice device not initialized in routine name Check to make sure the PCM button box is connected properly power cycle the PCM and restart the PCM server Check to make sure the PCM box is connected properly power cycle the PCM and check to make sure the PCM server is running If the PCM box is not available or not functioning remove the definition of the use dials and buttons environment variable This causes DEC PHIGS to perform software simulation of the PCM and the application will continue to execute Check to make sure the PCM box is connected properly power cycle the PCM and check to make sure the PCM server is running If the PCM box is not available or not functioning remove the definition of the use dials and buttons environment variable This causes DEC PHIGS to perform software simulation of the PCM and the application will continue to execute Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS D 7 Input Values E Input Values This appendix provides input information that is applicable to all
326. ic keypad functionality see Section E 3 1 and Section E 3 2 For locator pick stroke and valuator class devices you can press the Shift key while using the joydisk and thumbwheels to move the cursor in shorter increments Note On certain 4207 devices holding the Shift key does nothing On these devices the speed of the cursor increases if you press harder on the joydisk 16 5 1 How to Use Additional Physical Devices The default input device for the Tektronix 4107 and 4207 devices is the joydisk For the Tektronix 4128 4129 and the Digital VS500 devices the default input devices are thumbwheels If you want to use additional physical input devices with any of these terminals or workstations on an OpenVMS system you must define the following logical names as shown for DEC PHIGS 16 6 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 5 Input Information Terminal Logical Name Tektronix 4107 DEFINE PHIGS 82_INPUT_DEVICES physical device logical device Tektronix 4207 DEFINE PHIGS 84 INPUT DEVICES physical device logical device Tektronix 4128 DEFINE PHIGS 86 INPUT DEVICES physical device logical device Tektronix 4129 and VS500 DEFINE PHIGS 88 INPUT DEVICES physical device logical device If you want to use additional physical input devices with any of these terminals or workstations on ULTRIX systems y
327. ica Oblique DEC Narkisstam Bold R 307 Same as Helvetica Bold DEC Narkisstam Bold O 308 Same as Helvetica Bold Oblique DEC Gam Medium R 309 Same as Courier DEC Gam Medium O 310 Same as Courier Oblique DEC Gam Bold R 811 Same as Courier Bold DEC Gam Bold O 312 Same as Courier Bold Oblique If the font mode option is all all the fonts listed in Section 4 11 3 in the range 301 to 500 are included in the list of available fonts 4 11 2 Font Mode Options Table 4 2 lists the possible font mode values to use with the OpenVMS logical names GKS DECW FONT MODE and PHIGS DECW FONT MODE and ULTRIX environment variables GKSdecw font mode and PHIGSdecw font mode Table 4 2 DECwindows Font Modes Value Meaning No definition Only the default set of fonts is available The default set depends on the current language The set of fonts on the X server is not checked for availability The DECwindows device handler checks the value of the font list option Any fonts listed in the font list option are added to the font list or redefined as existing fonts continued on next page 4 22 DEOCwindows Workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 11 Font Support Table 4 2 Cont DECwindows Font Modes Value Meaning check default default check all all check all all check Only the default set of fonts is available The default set depe
328. ice Independent Fonts A 13 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 12 Medium Duplex Roman Font 4 5 x 0 7 8 25 f g amp 0 X3 X 3 A 14 Device Independent Fonts 6 with stroke precision gt H R I 8 e J T A K U B L V C M W N X E 0 Y F P Z G Q f f n ZK 1579 GE Figure A 13 Medium Duplex Greek N Fa Gk go Font x 4 stroke with gt 0 I K A A 5 M r N A 4 E 0 Z I H P gt i Device Independent Fonts 7 A 6 Device Independent Fonts precision T p d o T i 4 p X W Qo Device Independent Fonts A 15 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 14 Medium Duplex Italic Font ES Z amp O f 1 2 3 A 16 Device Independent Fonts 4 8 with stroke precision gt H R vow S o J T A K U b L V C M W D N X E O Y F C Q I I f P U W ZK 1581 GE Figure A 15 Large Complex Roman Font M o d J A K B L C M N E 0 FP G Q 9 with stroke R S Device Independent Fonts f 8 A 6 Device Independent Fonts precision ZK 1582 GE Device Independent Fonts A 17 Device Independent Fonts A 6 Device Independent Fonts Figure A 16 Large Complex
329. ice using DECwindows 212 x0nmm00D4 As an output only device within an application drawable window or pixmap 213 x0nmm00D5 As an input output device within an application widget 220 x0nmm00DC As an output only device using DECwindows PEX 221 x0nmm00DD As an input output device using DECwindows PEX 222 x0nmm00DE As an output only device within a PEX application drawable window or pixmap 223 x0nmm00DF As an input output device within a PEX application widget Color Table Size Valid values for mm are 00 through FF specified in hexadecimal notation The value mm specifies the size of the color table used by DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS If mm is 0 the workstation uses a color table of the default size If mm value is nonzero it determines the name of the color map size environment option to be translated The size of the color table can also affect the size and content of the bundle tables For more information concerning the effect of color table size on bundle tables see Section 1 8 Color Table Dynamics Valid values for n are 0 the default behavior and 1 dynamic color changes The value n is not supported by DEC PHIGS A value of 1 causes all SET COLOUR REPRESENTATION function calls to change the color representation immediately the application does not have to update the workstation DECwindows Output Only Value 210 Workstation type 210 is output only In all other respects it behaves exactly like workstation type 21
330. ics Protocol Workstation 8 1 Environment Options nad hae Ra rens TERI REOR RR OS ADR E AL Rede d 8 2 Valid Bit Mask Values 0 ccc cece eh 8 3 Device Considerations llle 8 3 1 LVP16 Switch Settings 0 0 ees 8 3 2 Device Queues and Allocation 0 es 8 4 Pattern and Hatch Values 0 0 0 ec eens 8 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 0 0 0 cece eee 8 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples 0 00 2 9 OSF Motif Workstation 9 1 Environment Options eges wo S Ea eur Ope c9 A RR ORIS Oe BE os 9 2 Connection Identifier llle 9 3 Valid Bit Mask Values 0 0 0 0 ccc eet eens 9 4 Programming Considerations llle 9 4 1 Display Size Windows and Echo Areas 000000 00s 9 5 Overlay Plane Support 0 0 0 eee eens 9 6 Cell Array Restriction for DEC GKS 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 9 7 General Information llle 9 8 Minimizing Color Traversal for DEC PHIGS 44 9 9 Bundle Indexes8 c 89S bo wea wee MEER DEE ERG EE ERG RRS 9 10 Pattern and Hatch Values 0 0 0 ccc ee eee 9 10 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 00 0000 cc cece eee 9 10 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Monochrome for DEC GKS 9 10 3 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Color for DEC GKS 5 1 5 2 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 3 6 1 6
331. ics Protocol Workstation l a e e N Q Cr Q D Oh C Ov D Q C O amp D Ue C O M Mm C CG ee oA A A o4 De Pw lt lt CS UK OX OO OR O Ov rr t0 OR PF Po Oo D mn Prectstfon 7 D la viz B a A lo t Yy 8 9 A string B C D E F ZK 2097 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 8 LVP16 Font Number 5008 Font 5008 Precision string 0 1 28 45 6789 B C DEF 0 A 3 1 PF G 2 192 8 Lo gt E 4 xf 5 13 1 6 9h 2 3 7 tAAa5 8 4221 9 57 7 A rI JAL B yy 5 C P229 D a AU E 3 bx F yy ZK 2098 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 13 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 9 LVP16 Font Number 5009 Font 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 P p 1 1 4AQaq 2 e BRbrnfr 3 3CScs 4 Ha4npTuat 5 25 E Ueu 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 ZGOWgw 8 8HXhx 9 9IYigsy A x JZjz B K k C SLAI D M m E gt N n F 0 0 8 14 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 009 Precfsfton string 9 A B C D E F ZK 2099 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 10 LVP16 Font Number 5030 Font 5030 Prectston string o 12 3 4556867859 B C D E F 0 0 eG P p 1 1 1A 0a dq 2 2 BRobr 3 3CSces 4 H LIB gt 5 9EkEUeu 6 amp 6 F v T v
332. ied value This escape is functionally equivalent to the SET EDGE COLOR INDEX function ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array color index address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description color index The edge color index Escapes B 27 157 Set Edge Index 157 Set Edge Index B 28 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape sets the current edge index entry to the specified index value This escape is functionally equivalent to the SET EDGE INDEX function ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array edge index address of real array NULL
333. if Widget 333 T O Japanese Motif workstation display Japanese OSF Motif PEX 340 Output Japanese Motif PEX workstation display Japanese OSF Motif PEX 341 T O Japanese Motif PEX workstation display Japanese OSF Motif PEX Drawable 342 Output Japanese Motif PEX workstation display Japanese Motif PEX Widget 343 T O Japanese Motif PEX workstation display Japanese DDIF 350 Output FILE 1Also supported on OpenVMS Alpha and Digital UNIX systems 3Supported only on Digital UNIX and OpenVMS Alpha systems Introduction 1 5 Introduction 1 5 Supported Fonts 1 5 Supported Fonts All the devices support the following device independent fonts Simplex means that the characters are made up of one line Duplex means that the characters are made up of two lines Complex means that the characters are made up of more than two lines Each of these device independent fonts is illustrated in stroke precision in Appendix A Table 1 2 lists the device independent fonts Table 1 2 Device independent Fonts Number Descriptive Name 1 ISO Standard Character Set 1 ISO Standard Character Set 2 Small Simplex Roman and Greek 8 Large Simplex Appendix A illustrates Roman 4 Large Simplex Greek 5 Large Simplex Script 6 Medium Duplex Roman 7 Medium Duplex Greek 8 Medium Duplex Italic 9 Large Complex Roman 10 Large Complex Greek 11 Large Complex Italic 12 Large Simplex Roman 13 Large Complex Script 14 Larg
334. if workstation supports PETs 1 3 and 4 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the OSF Motif workstation stroke class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial number of points 0 Initial transformation 0 Echo Largest square Data record Stroke buffer size 80 points Editing position 0 x interval 0 01 in world coordinate points y interval 0 01 in world coordinate points Time interval 0 0 seconds 9 11 6 Valuator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported valuator class logical input devices for the OSF Motif workstation Valuator Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 or Enter button Break by selecting Cancel button when echoing is enabled or by selecting mouse button 2 when echoing is disabled 5 to 12 Rotation of hardware dials is selection and trigger Supported PETs The OSF Motif workstation valuator device types 1 2 3 and 4 support PETs 4 8 2 1 1 2 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETS OSF Motif Workstation 9 19 OSF Motif Workstation 9 11 Input Information The OSF Motif workstation valuator device types 5 to 12 support PETs 4 3
335. ifying whether transparency is disabled 0 or enabled 1 B 114 Escapes 523 Set BQUM Range 523 Set BQUM Range Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All This escape allows a DEC PHIGS application to perform multiple edit operations within the currently open structure that result in a single quick update action A quick update action is defined as being one traversal to erase one or more primitives that are affected by the edit followed by a second traversal to redraw primitives affected by the edits This assumes that the structure is currently posted to a workstation and the workstation is in quick update mode Such a function is useful when an application wants to change two attributes of a primitive for example color and current local transformation but would like a single quick update to happen as a result of the two edits The Set BQUM Batch Quick Update Method Range escape uses a three step process 1 Call Set BQUM Range to activate a watch range 2 Carry out all edits to be batched 3 Call Set BQUM Range to deactivate the watch range After step 3 is completed DEC PHIGS will have initiated a quick update erase traversal followed by a quick update draw traversal For the erase traversal DEC PHIGS will accumulate the pipeline state up to the element just before the starting element of the watch range then erase all primitives defined within the watch range The watch ra
336. ilable fonts 4 11 1 2 Japanese Fonts The following fonts are the default fonts for Japanese They are available in string precision only X Font Name Font Index Courier Medium R 1 Times Medium R 101 Times Medium I 102 Times Bold R 103 Times Bold I 104 Helvetica Medium R 105 Helvetica Medium O 106 Helvetica Bold R 107 Helvetica Bold O 108 Courier Medium R 109 Courier Medium O 110 Courier Bold R 111 Courier Bold O 112 Symbol 113 JDECW Screen JISX0201 RomanKana 10001 JDECW Screen JISX0208 Kanjill 10001 DECwindows Workstation 4 21 DECwindows Workstation 4 11 Font Support X Font Name Font Index J DEC W Mincho JISX0201 1976 0 10101 JDECW Mincho JISX0208 1983 1 10101 J DECW Gothic JISX0201 1976 0 10102 J DECW Gothic JISX0208 1983 1 10102 4 11 1 3 Hebrew and ISO Latin 8 Fonts The following fonts are the default fonts for Hebrew and ISO Latin 8 They are available in string precision only X Font Name Font Index Comment DEC Gam Medium R 1 Same as Courier Symbol 113 DEC David Medium R 301 Same as Times DEC David Medium O 302 Same as Times Oblique DEC David Bold R 303 Same as Times Bold DEC David Bold O 304 Same as Times Bold Oblique DEC Narkisstam Medium R 305 Same as Helvetica DEC Narkisstam Medium O 306 Same as Helvet
337. ility is present only on Digital PEX platforms On other PEX platforms it will revert to default PEX behavior If the image I clear is not present on the PEX platform DEC PHIGS can perform a requested clear The clipping rectangles work on all platforms This escape will not cause the swapping of double buffers To perform that action either call UPDATE WORKSTATION while not rendering or use 515 Swap Buffers to force the swap if double buffering is enabled ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 4 number of reals num clip 4 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id clear_I clear_Z num_ clip address of real array num_clip 4 reals address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 109 520 Set PEX Begin Render Clear Action B 110 Escapes Argument Required Value out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component ws id clear I clear Z
338. inding reference manuals for more information on PETS Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the OSF Motif workstation locator class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial position Ignored Initial view 0 transformation Echo area Largest square Data record NULL 9 11 3 Pick Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported pick class logical input devices for the OSF Motif workstation Pick Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 5 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 2 6 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 3 OSF Motif Workstation 9 17 OSF Motif Workstation 9 11 Input Information Supported PETs The pick input class for the OSF Motif workstation supports PETs 1 2 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the OSF Motif workstation pick class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial pick identifier 1 Initial pick path NULL no path for DEC PHIGS only Initial status STATUS OK Echo area Largest square Data record Aperture 0 0027 in device coordinates The size of the pick aperture is limited by the
339. ing Considerations You should review the following information before programming with DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS using the OSF Motif workstation 9 4 1 Display Size Windows and Echo Areas The OSF Motif workstation provides a banner that runs across the top of each window and borders that line each side DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not include borders and banners in specified window sizes or input echo area sizes You need to adjust your window and echo area sizes for banners and borders Use the INQUIRE DISPLAY SPACE SIZE 3 function to adjust the input echo areas so they do not overlap the output drawing area 9 5 Overlay Plane Support Some X and PEX servers support overlay visuals using the X property SERVER_OVERLAY_VISUALS If you have a server that supports this technique DEC PHIGS supports it as a DEC PHIGS 232 Motif in an X drawable workstation type The program phigs_planedemo c in the examples directory provides an example of overlay plane support For information on how to use overlay planes see the init_overlays function To work correctly DEC PHIGS requires the application to use the transparent pixel overlay technique for workstation type 232 This pixel will be used as the background for DEC PHIGS workstations created in the overlay visual This allows you to see through anything drawn with indexed color 0 Error number 460 has been added The message text is as follows Workstation not started overlay planes of type tr
340. ing point gdp id 342 data_rec number of integers 1 number of reals 1 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc_type address of real array angle address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data_rec_len sizeof Ggdprec The data_rec argument contains the following elements Component Description arc_type The arc type angle The angle in radians The element arc_type can be any of the following values Value Description 2 Fill the area formed by connecting both ends of the arc to its center 3 Fill the area formed by connecting the beginning and end points of the arc GDPs C 41 342 Filled Arc Center Starting Point and Angle Error Messages C 42 GDPs Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the center point and the point on the circumference are the same point DEC GKS cannot form a circle 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you specify any value other than 2 or 3 343 Filled Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors 343 Filled Ellipse Center and Two Axis Vectors Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the ellipse using a center point one axis vector the largest of
341. ings 1 address of integer array ws_id address of real array 0 address of string lengths array length_of_new_string address of string pointer array new_string number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier length_of_new_string An integer array containing the length of new_string in bytes new_string The new reset button character string 204 Set Cancel String 204 Set Cancel String Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows workstation type 211 PEX workstation type 221 and OSF Motif workstation type 231 This escape sets the string used by the cancel buttons of input devices It has no effect on input devices presently displayed ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 1 address of integer array ws id a
342. integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 2 address of long array colormap id pixel Escapes B 105 516 Inquire Closest Color B 106 Escapes The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id color approx index indexed color model color index The workstation identifier The color approximation index The indexed color model The color index The output data record contains the following elements Component Description colormap id pixel The X11 color map identifier The X11 pixel The following table describes the data record format for a direct color Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 3 number of reals 3 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id color approx index color model address of real array color triple address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string l
343. invalid in routine name For instance if you specify a value other than 1 2 or 3 107 Arc Three Points on Circumference 107 Arc Three Points on Circumference Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the circular arc using a line beginning at the first point running through the second point and connecting to the third point GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 3 pts_array three points on the circumference gdp_id 107 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Component Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 1 Form an arc 2 Connect both ends of the arc to its center 3 Connect the beginning and end points of the arc Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance the three points may form a straight line 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you speci
344. ion 4 12 UIL Files The UID files for DEC PHIGS are e gfx decw uid e gfx decw en uid UID language specific file for English e gfx decw jp uid UID language specific file for Japanese To run the DECwindows device handler the UID files must be in one of the following directories e The standard English language UID file area for OpenVMS systems DECWSUSER DEFAULTS defaults to SYSSLOGIN DECWSSYSTEM DEFAULTS e The standard English language UID file area for ULTRIX systems usr lib X11 uid On ULTRIX systems DECwindows software searches the user s home directory before searching the standard UID file area You can place the UID file in any directory and set the environment option for the UID search path to that directory Specify the full directory path name but do not include the UID file names 4 13 Customization You can customize certain DECwindows attributes through the use of an Xdefaults file Customization can also be done with the UIL files For this capability contact your Digital Customer Support Center 4 13 1 Use of Xdefaults Files Attributes modified in the Xdefaults files can either be the widget class or the actual instance of the widget When using the widget class prefix the class specification with the application resource If this is not done all widgets of that class that run from the user s session will adopt the resource change To explicitly access the device widgets through the Xdefaults fil
345. ions Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID GKSconid PHIGS CONID PHIGSconid Specifies the default workstation connection information On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier for the device as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID FILE CGM Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier for the device as follows setenv GKSconid file cgm Font Element List GKS CGM FONTS GKScgm fonts PHIGS CGM_FONTS PHIGScgm_fonts Defines a list of font indexes You can specify Hershey fonts the default value PostScript fonts or both For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the PostScript fonts as follows DEFINE PHIGS CGM FONTS POSTSCRIPT Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for both the Hershey and PostScript fonts as follows setenv GKScgm fonts all Return See Section 2 12 for more information on selecting fonts Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value On OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the CGM outp
346. ions 17 1 color map size 17 1 connection identifier 17 1 workstation type 17 2 environment variables 17 1 fonts 17 16 hardware color map 17 2 hatch values 17 7 lighting equations F 2 locator input 17 13 logical input devices 17 12 logical names 17 1 pick input 17 13 pixel inquiries 1 13 string input 17 14 stroke input 17 15 valuator input 17 15 virtual color map 17 2 virtual map size 17 3 window resizing 17 6 workstation type 17 2 Index 17 W Window VWS resizing 17 6 Workstation choice input device numbers E 2 Digital printers 14 1 See also Sixel printer HP7475 8 1 HPPCL 5 1 LA324 7 1 LCGO1 6 1 LJ250 7 1 LPS40 12 1 LVP16 8 1 MPS 2000 8 1 OpenGL 10 1 PEX 11 1 PostScript 12 1 supported devices 1 2 to 1 5 types bit mask constants 1 2 modifiers 1 2 VWS 17 1 Workstations bundle values 1 10 DEC GKS specific input values E 1 to E 10 DEC PHIGS specific input values E 1 to E 10 DECwindows 4 1 Digital VS500 16 1 lock key E 9 OSF Motif 9 1 ReGIS devices 13 1 SMG encoded input string E 4 Tektronix 4014 15 1 Tektronix 4107 16 1 Tektronix 4128 16 1 Tektronix 4129 16 1 Tektronix 4207 16 1 Workstation type 1 2 DECwindows 4 9 environment option CGM 2 2 DDIF 3 2 DECwindows 4 8 HPPCL 5 1 LCGO1 6 1 LJ250 7 1 LVP16 and HP GL 8 2 OpenGL 10 7 OSF Motif 9 7 PEX 11 8 PostScript 1 14 12 2 ReGIS 13 1 sixel 14 2
347. ions All DEC GKS workstations This escape accepts a world coordinate point and a normalization transformation number and writes the corresponding normalized device coordinate point value to the output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array norm_xform address of real array NULL address of real array x_value y_value address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array nx_value ny_value address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description norm_xform The normalized transformation number x_value The x coordinate value of a world coordinate point y_value The y coordinate value of a world coordinate point B 80 Escapes 400 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a WC Point The output data record contains the following elements Component Description nx_value The x coordinate value of the corresponding normalized devi
348. ions are supported for the LJ250 printer The LJ250 printer supports 8 different colors in 180 dpi mode and 256 colors in 90 dpi mode The printer does not support 72 dpi or 144 dpi The following bit mask is valid for use with an LA324 printer Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 93 xmO0nn005D Digital LA324 printer The value in the first part mOnn specifies the paper orientation and size The value in the second part 005D is the hexadecimal value of the workstation type value 93 The possible values for m include the following Value Paper Orientation 0 Landscape The picture is wider than it is tall 1 Portrait The picture is taller than it is wide The possible values for nn include the following Value Paper Size 00 Paper size A 8 5 x 11 inches 01 Legal paper size 8 5 x 14 inches 06 Tracker feed paper 11 x 14 inches Performance Considerations The performance of the color sixel device driver is significantly affected by the density you select For example using 180 dpi instead of 90 dpi is two to four times slower because of the added size of the bitmap Density is not selectable for workstation type 93 7 3 Device Considerations When using the LJ250 or LA324 printer as either an allocated or a queued device on an OpenVMS system you need to set terminal characteristics by entering the following DCL commands SET TERMINAL device name NOBROADCAST NOECHO EIGHTBIT NOWRA
349. is is the default setting 1 Landscape The picture is wider than it is tall Page size is specified by bb The possible values include the following Value Paper Size 00 Paper size is A 8 5 x 11 inches This is the default setting 01 Paper size is Legal 8 5 x 14 inches 02 Paper size is B 11 x 17 inches 03 Paper size is C 17 x 22 inches 04 Paper size is D 22 x 34 inches 05 Paper size is E 34 x 44 inches 10 Paper size is A0 84 1 x 118 9 centimeters 20 Paper size is A1 59 4 x 84 1 centimeters 30 Paper size is A2 42 x 59 4 centimeters 40 Paper size is A3 29 7 x 42 centimeters 50 Paper size is A4 21 x 29 7 centimeters 60 Paper size is A5 14 8 x 21 centimeters 70 Paper size is B4 25 7 x 36 4 centimeters 80 Paper size is B5 18 2 x 25 7 centimeters The number of requested colors is specified by c This number is expressed as a power of 2 c can be any value from 0 the default value to 7 A value of 0 selects the maximum number of available colors The value in the second part 00FA is the hexadecimal value of the DDIF workstation type decimal 250 3 5 Differences Between DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS and DDIF Because DDIF is designed to format files for many types of graphics applications there is no unique relationship between DDIF and DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS If DDIF does not support a graphics facility of DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS the metafile does not attempt to simulate such a facil
350. ith English workstation types you must set the language environment option to Japanese value 22 If you use the Japanese PEX workstation types 32n or 34n you do not need to set the language environment option The bit mask values and many other characteristics of the Japanese PEX workstation types are the same as the English PEX workstation types 11 8 Escapes For a list of supported escapes run the GKS PREDEF or PHIGS PREDEF program 11 16 PEX Workstation PostScript Workstation 12 PostScript Workstation This chapter provides the information you need to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with all printers that support the PostScript graphics language DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support these devices as workstations of category WSCAT_OUTPUT 12 1 Environment Options Table 12 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with the PostScript printers Table 12 1 PostScript Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID GKSconid PHIGS CONID PHIGSconid ISO Latin1 Encoding Specifies the default workstation connection information On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier for a PostScript device as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID FILE PS Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the con
351. itle_string Pint threshold Pint smoothing Pfloat num_turns Pvalpet_0004 The data record for the DEC PHIGS PHIGS binding interface contains the following components real low_value real high_value address title_string integer title_length integer threshold integer smoothing real num_turns Check the language appropriate constants file phigs_defs for the phigs typ_valpet_0004 data structure and syntax Because the DEC PHIGS Fortran binding interface contains the low and high value as explicit arguments to the INITIALIZE VALUATOR function include only the following three fields in the data record integer threshold integer smoothing real num turns In the data records for PET 4 the low and high fields are floating point values and they specify the minimum and maximum return range of the valuator values The title string is not currently implemented A future release will feature software simulation of the hardware valuators and this field will be used at that time You should supply a valid string value to avoid generating an error The threshold field is an integer value between 1 and 255 The threshold value determines the threshold at which data is returned For example if the threshold is 16 dial data will not be generated unless a dial delta of 16 or more occurs Each 360 degree turn of the dial can return a maximum of 255 data events Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS D 3 Dials and Buttons Su
352. ity If the metafile structure supports a graphic facility unsupported by DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS program will not generate those unsupported DDIF elements DDIF Output Workstation 3 3 DDIF Output Workstation 3 5 Differences Between DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS and DDIF DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not define graphics output in terms of pictures as does DDIF Consequently the DDIF interpreter must determine what constitutes a new DDIF picture definition The following list presents the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS graphics facilities that are not supported by DDIF e DDIF does not support the changing of workstation transformations Workstation transformations cause the DDIF interpreter to start a new picture definition e A call to CLEAR WORKSTATION causes the DDIF interpreter to start a new picture definition For example if at least one meaningful element call such as POLYLINE appears before the CLEAR WORKSTATION call DDIF produces a file with only one page e DDIF has no elements that correspond to the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS SET primitive REPRESENTATION functions e DDIF does not support the DEC GKS segment and DEC PHIGS structure storage The following list presents the DDIF facilities that are not supported by DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS e DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not support the extended text processing facilities of DDIF such as changing character sets and appended text e DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not support au
353. l area pattern and hatch values for the plotters and recorders The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns 8 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Cross hatches Diagonal lines at 45 degrees Diagonal lines at 45 degrees Horizontal lines Vertical lines Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Horizontal lines sparse Vertical lines sparse 8 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS The HP GL device handler does not support patterns 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples The LVP16 plotter supports 19 hardware fonts in string precision Figures 8 1 through 8 19 list the hexadecimal ASCII values of the supported LVP16 hardware fonts LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 1 LVP16 Font Number 5000 Font 5000 Precisio
354. l array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description erase flag The erase flag When this argument is FALSE 0 all erase traversals that are normally done as part of BQUMs are suppressed When this argument is TRUE 1 all erase traversals are enabled draw flag The draw flag When this argument is FALSE 0 all draw traversals that are normally done as part of BQUMs are suppressed When this argument is TRUE 1 all draw traversals are enabled These flags are useful when the application knows what the visual effect of an edit will be For example if the application is trying to highlight a primitive through BQUMs it can set the erase flag to FALSE In this case carrying out 525 Set BQUM Flags the erase traversal does nothing to enhance the quality of the quick update and slows down performance Unlike the Set BQUM Range escape you can call Set BQUM Flags just after OPEN WORKSTATION and the flag will remain in affect for BQUMs until the workstation is closed Note that DEC PHIGS makes no attempt to remember the state of the erase and draw flags if a workstation is closed Each time a workstation is opened the erase and draw flags are initialized to be TRUE Escapes B 121
355. l lines at 45 degrees sparse Darkest diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Darkest horizontal lines sparse Darkest vertical lines sparse Dark horizontal lines very fine Dark vertical lines very fine Finely woven grid Sparsely woven grid 3 6 DDIF Output Workstation DDIF Output Workstation 3 7 Pattern and Hatch Values 3 7 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance c 0o 10 OCt t FF Co Pl H w w w w CO Q2 CO Co ho bo ho bo LO bo bo bh M lh HL LH Bee Bee n O Ou Co ir O d o 40 OUO C Rl O dw oo 10 C 4 0 0 2 c Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 Light diagonally woven pattern 2596 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 Darker diagonally woven pattern 5096 Dark diagonally woven pattern 7596 Dark diagonally woven pattern 7596 Dark diagonally woven pattern 7596 Blue dark diagonally woven pattern 7596 Dark diagonally woven pattern 7596 Dark diagonally woven
356. l names 8 1 paper sizes 8 3 portrait orientation 8 2 HP7550 8 1 to 8 24 See also HP7475 environment options 8 1 environment variables 8 1 logical names 8 1 HP7580 8 1 to 8 24 See also HP7475 environment options 8 1 environment variables 8 1 logical names 8 1 HP7585 8 1 to 8 24 See also HP7475 environment options 8 1 environment variables 8 1 logical names 8 1 HP GL device coordinate information 1 13 pixel inquiries 1 13 HPPCL 5 1 to 5 3 bit masks 5 2 device coordinate information 1 13 environment options 5 1 connection identifier 5 1 workstation type 5 1 file format 5 3 landscape orientation 5 2 pixel inquiries 1 13 portrait orientation 5 2 resolution 5 3 Identifiers HLHSR 1 11 Image clearing environment option PEX 11 1 Implicit regeneration VAXstation specific use of 17 6 Input choice devices on DECwindows 4 16 choice devices on OSF Motif 9 16 choice devices on Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 9 choice devices on VWS 17 12 DEC GKS logical input device numbers E 1 to E 6 DEC GKS specific values E 1 to E 10 DEC PHIGS logical input device numbers E 1 to E 6 DEC PHIGS specific values E 1 to E 10 DECwindows 4 16 default data records 16 6 to 16 13 echo area titles E 6 keypad functionality E 6 to E 10 keypad zoning mechanism E 5 Input cont d locator devices on DECwindows 4 17 locator devices on OSF Motif 9 17 locator devices on Tektronix 4107 and 4207
357. led information on cycling logical input devices and numeric keypad functionality see Section E 3 1 and Section E 3 2 13 5 1 Choice Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported choice class logical input devices for ReGIS devices Choice Device Device Types Input Action VT125 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 Select with arrow keys Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U 2 Keypad key is selection and trigger VT240 VT284 VT286 1 4 5 6 7 8 Select with arrow keys VT330 and VT340 Trigger with Return without mouse Break with Ctrl U 2 Keypad key is selection and trigger 3 Function key is selection and trigger VT330 and VT340 with 1 6 7 8 Select with mouse mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 2 Keypad key is selection and trigger 3 Function key is selection and trigger 4 Mouse button down is selection and trigger 5 Mouse button up is selection and trigger ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 5 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 5 Input Information Supported PETs The choice input class for the VT125 VT240 VT284 VT286 and VT340 terminals support PETs 1 1 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the ReGIS choice class logical input devices Input Construct Def
358. lement Component Description pixmap_id The pixmap identifier Escapes B 95 508 Set Anti Alias Mode 508 Set Anti Alias Mode B 96 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECstation 5000 series modes 1 and 2 and VAXstation 4000 xx SPXg SPXgt modes 1 and 3 workstations This escape allows you to enable anti aliasing mode for a workstation If the flag in the input data record is set to 0 anti aliasing will be disabled If the flag is set to 1 anti aliasing will be enabled The change takes effect at the next structure traversal or at the next call to the immediate mode function BEGIN RENDERING See Section 11 2 2 for more information on using anti aliasing on PEX workstations ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id anti alias mode address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0
359. lements Component Description error status mem_total struct_overhead elem_overhead prim_data other_data The error status The structure memory total The structure memory per structure overhead The structure memory per element overhead Structure memory primitive data Other structure memory data Escapes B 131 GDPs C GDPs This appendix describes the DEC GKS supported generalized drawing primitives GDPs GDPs are output primitives you use to address special geometric workstation capabilities Most of the GDPs are supported by all the DEC GKS workstations For each GDP this appendix indicates the supporting workstations All GDPs have negative values as identification numbers You pass the identification number to GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE DEC GKS defines GDP constants in the definition file for your particular programming language For further information concerning the use of GDPs see the control function GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE in the DEC GKS binding manuals The error codes appendix in each binding manual lists the errors that may be generated by using any GDP Some of the GDPs require additional information contained in a data record All required data records must be passed to GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE in the DEC GKS GDP standard data record format For all GDPs you must pass the exact data record size in bytes as specified in the descriptions in this appendix If you do not the
360. line If the value of this element is not equal to 0 then the font is assumed to be stored as outline This means that the polylines specified are filled instead of being drawn xy datasize This element indicates whether x and y coordinates are stored as a byte signed integer byte or as a 2 byte signed integer word If this element is 1 the x and y coordinates are stored as a byte If this element is 2 the coordinates are stored as a word max width This element specifies the width of the font characters This is an integer If the font is proportionally spaced this number specifies the maximum width of the font left kern This element specifies the maximum length of the negative direction for the x coordinate of the character in the stroke font file This element is an integer reserved 1 Reserved for future use cap base This element specifies the distance of the cap line above the base line This element is an integer top cap This element specifies the distance of the top line above the cap line This element is an integer bottom base This element specifies the distance of the bottom line below the base line This element is an integer reserved 2 Reserved for future use first char This element specifies the numeric value of the first character in the font First refers to an ascending order For example for the ASCII character set the first noncontrol character is a space that has the numeric value
361. liw Large icon width in pixels 5 lih Large icon height in pixels 6 Small_Icon Color indexes for the small icon bit map siw sih 6 Large_Icon Color indexes for the large icon bit map 251 Inquire Current Writing Mode 251 Inquire Current Writing Mode Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes the value of the current writing mode see 150 Set Writing Mode to its output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error status writing mode address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error status The error status writing mode The writing mode See the appropriate language definition file for a list of
362. ll the graphics handlers except PEX and OSF Motif PEX support the hidden line hidden surface removal HLHSR modes and identifiers listed in Table 1 3 and Table 1 4 Table 1 3 HLHSR Mechanisms for DEC GKS Mechanism Description Mode 0 No HLHSR identifier 1 Use the HLHSR identifier Identifier 0 None 1 Painter s algorithm 6 Average Z Table 1 4 HLHSR Mechanisms for DEC PHIGS Mechanism Description Mode 0 None Use the HLHSR identifier 5 IGNORE_ID No HLHSR identifier Identifier 0 None 1 Painter s algorithm 6 Average Z An HLHSR mode removes lines or surfaces hidden by other objects from the drawing or does not draw these lines or surfaces at all The HLHSR identifier is set as a structure element For information about HLHSR identifiers see the SET HLHSR IDENTIFIER and SET HLHSR MODE functions in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding manuals Note The current implementation of the Painter s HLHSR algorithm generates incorrect results on vector type devices such as the Tektronix 4014 the LVP16 and the HP GL plotters These devices cannot delete lines that have already been drawn therefore not displaying hidden lines in a graphics output requires some effort Using the Painter s algorithm value 1 without a solution for removing hidden lines requires more CPU processing time and has no visible effect on the output Introduction 1 11 Introduction 1 10 Lighting Support for D
363. ll_style fill_index address of real array line_width expand_factor address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 35 163 Set Highlighting Method B 36 Escapes Argument Required Value out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component high_method color_index linetype fill_style fill_index line_width expand_factor Description The highlighting method The color index to use with the highlighting method color The line type to use with the highlighting method The fill area attributes to use with the highlighting method The fill index to use with the highlighting method The line width scale factor for the line drawn around the extent of the item being highlighted The distance the highlighted region should extend around the item being highlighted It is defined in terms of a scale factor of the nominal line width The high_method is one of the following constants Value Descrip
364. locator class logical input devices DECwindows Workstation 4 17 DECwindows Workstation 4 10 Input Information Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial position Ignored Initial view 0 transformation Echo area Largest square Data record NULL 4 10 3 Pick Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported pick class logical input devices for the DECwindows workstation Pick Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 5 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 2 6 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 3 Supported PETs The pick input class for the DECwindows workstation supports PETs 1 2 and 3 See the chapter on input functions in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the DECwindows workstation pick class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial pick identifier 1 Initial pick path NULL no path for DEC PHIGS only Initial status STATUS_OK Echo area Largest square Data record Aperture 0 0027 in device coordinates The size of the pick aperture is limited by the hardware cursor map 4 10 4 String Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported string class logical
365. ls 6 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array xform address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id The workstation identifier xform An array of reals that specifies the values for the transformation matrix For more information on transformation matrices see the description of the EVALUATE TRANSFORMATION MATRIX function in the DEC GKS binding reference manuals Escapes B 31 161 End Transformation Block 161 End Transformation Block B 32 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape ends the transformation process initiated by the call to 160 Begin Transformation Block ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real a
366. lustrates the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS multinational font It is a monospaced font all characters have the same extent DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS use this as the default font The Hershey fonts are also available The character information for these fonts has been organized into 23 fonts as shown in Figures A 8 to A 30 The Hershey fonts are not monospaced each character extent is a different size The character extent for each character is not necessarily the same size as the character In most cases the character extent is larger than the character although for some characters for example those with descenders the character may go outside its extent A 2 Font File Formats The center line for all fonts lies exactly halfway between the left and right lines of each character Similarly the half line lies exactly halfway between the base line and the cap line This restriction applies to the font file formats because the center line and the halfline are calculated by DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS and are not data items in the font file Digital reserves the right to change font file formats in future releases Figure A 1 illustrates the font lines Device Independent Fonts A 1 Device Independent Fonts A 2 Font File Formats Figure A 1 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS Font Lines TOPLNE CAP LINE HALF LINE BASE LINE BOTTOM LINE ZK 1
367. marizes the environment options you can use with sixel printers Table 14 1 Sixel Printer Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID GKSconid PHIGS CONID PHIGSconid Specifies the default workstation connection information On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for a sixel device as follows DEFINE PHIGSSCONID TT Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for a sixel device as follows setenv GKSconid tt Return continued on next page Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 1 Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 1 Environment Options Table 14 1 Cont Sixel Printer Environment Options Syntax Description Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the Digital LA50 workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYPE 32 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the Digital LA75 workstation type as follows 9 setenv GKSwstype 35 14 2 Valid Bit Mask Values You can use bit masks to specify modifiers to th
368. mat The last component of the data record specifies the address of the long array of the data record C 2 Generalized Drawing Primitives GDPs The following sections describe the generalized drawing primitives GDPs that DEC GKS supports The sections identify each GDP by the following e The title of the primitive for instance Circle e The list of supporting workstations e The description of the primitive e The list of the arguments passed to GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE and the contents of the data record if applicable e The list of GDP specific error messages if applicable To determine the constant equivalent of the numeric identifier see the definition file for your programming language For a list of possible GDP specific error messages see the DEC GKS binding manuals If you specify points to GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE that cannot be used to uniquely define a primitive you generate error number ERROR_NEG_158 For more information concerning error ERROR_NEG_158 see the individual GDP description in this appendix Most of the DEC GKS GDPs are capable of generating error number ERROR_100 number of points is invalid in routine name If it is not clear how a GDP can generate this error message the description of the individual GDP provides additional information Note In error messages name is replaced by the name of the routine that generated the error The following information applies to
369. me specific tuning The following sections describe how to modify various system parameters to ensure optimal server performance For additional information on these parameters refer to the OpenVMS documentation G 4 1 Minimum System Requirements System tuning is a two step process you must modify both SYSTEM account quota values and the server quota values to improve performance Table G 1 shows the minimum SYSTEM account quota values for a three dimensional accelerated system with at least 32 MB of physical memory running complex client applications Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 11 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 4 Tuning on OpenVMS VAX Systems Table G 1 Minimum Recommended Quotas for System Tuning Account Quotas Recommended Values FILLM ENQLM WSDEF WSQUO WSEXTENT PGFLQUO 400 1024 8192 10240 16384 200000 To set the SYSTEM account quotas to the values shown in Table G 1 you can use the AUTHORIZE utility In addition to the SYSTEM account quotas you must modify the server quotas in the SYS COMMON SYSMGR DECW PRIVATE SERVER SETUP COM If this file does not exist copy DECW PRIVATE SERVER SETUP TEMPLATE to DECW PRIVATE SERVER SETUP COM Then define the following minimum values in this file EFINE NO FINE NO FINE NO FINE NO FINE NO Ur Ur Ur Ur Ur Ur D D D D D D X3 LE X9 DEI DE FINE NO j0G PROC 0G PROC 0G PROC 0G PR
370. minal Bold R DoubleWide ISO8859 1 119 Terminal Bold R Narrow ISO8859 1 120 Terminal Bold R Wide 1808859 1 121 I nterimDM Medium I 122 _BigelowHolmes Menu Medium R 123 AvantGardeBook R 124 _AvantGardeBook O 125 _AvantGardeDemi R 126 _AvantGardeDemi O 127 _LubalinGraph Book R 128 LubalinGraph Book O 129 OSF Motif Workstation 9 23 OSF Motif Workstation 9 12 Font Support X Font Name Font Index LubalinGraph Demi R 130 LubalinGraph Demi O 131 NewCenturySchoolbook Medium R 132 NewCenturySchoolbook Medium I 133 _NewCenturySchoolbook Bold R 134 NewCenturySchoolbook Bold I 135 _Souvenir Demi R 136 _Souvenir Demi I 137 Souvenir Light R 138 Souvenir Light I 139 DEC David Medium R 301 DEC David Medium O 302 DEC David Bold R 303 DEC David Bold O 304 DEC Narkisstam Medium R 305 DEC Narkisstam Medium O 306 DEC Narkisstam Bold R 307 DEC Narkisstam Bold O 308 DEC Gam Medium R 309 DEC Gam Medium O 310 DEC Gam Bold R 311 DEC Gam Bold O 312 DEC Miriam Medium R 813 DEC Miriam Medium O 314 DEC Miriam Bold 815 DEC Miriam Bold O 816 DEC MiriamFixed Medium R 817 DEC MiriamFixed Medium O 318 DEC MiriamFixed Bold R 319 DEC MiriamFixed Bold 0O
371. mitives need not be transmitted to the server during structure traversal The PEX or OpenGL server may also choose to store the primitive in a state that is optimal for sending drawing commands to the graphic hardware With primitives stored in structures DEC PHIGS can also save extent information that can be used to clip the entire primitive without checking each of its points For these reasons structure mode is usually faster than immediate mode Other benefits of using structure mode include improved exposure event handling better color allocation and the ability to use pick input In immediate mode the application passes each primitive to DEC PHIGS when it is to be drawn and reduces the cost of structure creation This mode is appropriate when many primitives change from one frame to the next Immediate mode requires more effort by the programmer to maintain the correctness of the display whereas structure mode manages the correctness of the display without additional programmer intervention Furthermore in immediate mode your DEC PHIGS application can control the following features e On PEX and OpenGL workstations the application can determine whether the image and Z buffers are cleared when the BEGIN RENDERING function is called e On PEX workstations the application can define a set of device coordinate clipping regions which will take effect on the next call to BEGIN RENDERING The control of these features is enable
372. mode to green use the following syntax GFX GFXChoicePopup choice_menu DwtPushButton background green For further information on the syntax of Xdefaults file entries see the Xdefaults file section in the worksystem documentation for the appropriate operating system The widget class names are documented in the worksystem documentation and are available in the widget definition include files DECwindows Workstation 4 27 DECwindows Workstation 4 13 Customization 4 13 2 Widget Hierarchies Figure 4 1 through Figure 4 6 illustrate the widget hierarchy for each of the devices These figures are provided to assist you in changing widget attributes When the DECwindows input mode is nonfixed the top level label widget is not used in the following widget hierarchies e Choice e Choice Button Box e Valuator e String Figure 4 1 Menu Bar DwtMenuBar menubar topwidget menubar DwtPushButton menubar reset pushbutton ZK 9844 GE 4 28 DEOCwindows Workstation Figure 4 2 Choice Menu DwtDialogBox choice_topwidget_dialog DwtLabel choice dialog label DwtPushButton choice cancel pushbutton DwtDialogBox choice resize dialog box DwtMenu choice menu choice 1 choice 2 DwtPushButton DwtPushButton choice_xxx_pushbutton choice_xxx_pushbutton xxx default for choice PETs 2 to 5 Xxx trans for other choice PETs DECwindows Workstation 4 13 Customization DwtScrollBar choic
373. mouse or puck Trigger with mouse or puck button 3 Supported PETs The pick input class for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 devices support PETs 1 2 and 3 Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 pick class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial pick identifier 1 Initial pick path NULL no path Initial status STATUS OK Echo area Largest square Data record Aperture 3 07 in device coordinates 3 26 in device coordinates for the Tektronix 4128 and 4129 and the Digital VS500 The size of the pick aperture is limited by the hardware cursor map 16 5 6 String Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported string class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 workstations String Device Types Input Action 1 2 4 Enter characters from keyboard Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U 3 ASCII encoded string Keypress enters character and triggers device Supported PETs The string input class for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 devices support PET 1 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 11 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 5 Input Information Default Input Values The following table identifies the default in
374. n OSF Motif Workstation 9 12 Font Support 9 12 1 2 Japanese Fonts The following fonts are the default fonts for Japanese They are available in string precision only X Font Name Font Index Courier Medium R 1 Times Medium R 101 Times Medium I 102 Times Bold R 103 Times Bold I 104 Helvetica Medium R 105 Helvetica Medium O 106 Helvetica Bold R 107 Helvetica Bold O 108 Courier Medium R 109 Courier Medium O 110 Courier Bold R 111 Courier Bold O 112 Symbol 113 J DECW Screen JISX0201 RomanKana 10001 JDECW Screen JISX0208 Kanjill 10001 JDECW Mincho JISX0201 1976 0 10101 JDECW Mincho JISX0208 1983 1 10101 JDECW Gothic JISX0201 1976 0 10102 J DECW Gothic JISX0208 1983 1 10102 9 12 1 3 Hebrew and ISO Latin 8 Fonts The following fonts are the default fonts for Hebrew and ISO Latin 8 They are available in string precision only X Font Name Font Index Comment DEC Gam Medium R 1 Same as Courier Symbol 113 DEC David Medium R 301 Same as Times DEC David Medium O 302 Same as Times Oblique DEC David Bold R 303 Same as Times Bold DEC David Bold O 304 Same as Times Bold Oblique DEC Narkisstam Medium R 305 Same as Helvetica DEC Narkisstam Medium O 306 Same as Helvetica Oblique DEC Narkisstam Bold R 307 Same as Helvetica Bold DEC Narkisstam
375. n 6 Brick pattern at 45 degrees n Brick pattern at 45 degrees 8 Finely woven grid 9 Sparsely woven grid 10 Downward scales fish like 11 Upward scales 12 Rightward scales 13 Leftward scales 14 to 28 Increasing densities of grey no hatch style starting at 1 16 density incrementing by 1 16 up to 15 16 density 4 9 3 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values Color for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern values for color index 1 and describes the results Style Index Appearance an FF Co bh HL 4 14 DECwindows Workstation Light diagonally woven pattern 25 Darker diagonally woven pattern 50 Dark diagonally woven pattern 75 Horizontal brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Brick pattern at 45 degrees DECwindows Workstation 4 9 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance Brick pattern at 45 degrees Finely woven grid Sparsely woven grid 10 Downward scales fish like 12 Rightward scales 13 Leftward scales 14 to 28 Increasing densities of grey no hatch style starting at 1 16 density incrementing by 1 16 up to 15 16 density 29 Vertical lines sparse 6 2596 30 Vertical lines sparse 12 596 31 Vertical lines sparse 50 32 Vertical lines sparse 7596 33 Vertical lines very fine 5096 34 Vertical lines 2596 35 Vertical lines 5096 36 Vertical lines 7596 37 Horizontal lines sparse 6 2596 38 Horizontal lines sparse 12
376. n string 0 1 2 8 4 5 86 7 8 9 A B C D EF 0 0 08 P p 1 1 4AQaqq 2 oeoBHbrnr 3 3 CScs 4 4DTdt 5 25 E Ueu 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 76Wgw 8 8HX h x 9 9IYiy A x d J 2 B KI k i c LLAI D M m E N n F i 0 9 8 6 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 2 LVP16 Font Number 5001 e e 0 7 mo O UU gt NO A WN Im 0 1 Font 2 0 a9 fA s _ 1 e 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A VM Oz xr ACH TOTMOQ gt Oe e e pa Ac ebNXXxXxEC MHOO 3G Ua P4 o o 2 BrP Weer Two naOoOa an oO Prectston string 8 9 A B C D E F Ta Nx XZ lt C t0 3n Us t ZK 2092 GE LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 7 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 3 LVP16 Font Number 5002 Font 5002 Precision string 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AB C D E F 0 0 eG P p 1 1A 0adq 2 2 BRobr 3 Io CS es 4 4DTdt 5 x5 EuUeu 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 76 Wg w 8 8H Xh x 9 9gSIYiy A x d gx B K kK c Lc1 D M m E gt N n F 0_ 0 ZK 2093 GE 8 8 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 5 LVP16 Font Support and Font Samples Figure 8 4 LVP16 Font Number 5003 Font 5003 Precislon string 0 1 2 3 4 58 78 9 A B C DEF 0
377. n OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for pixmap double buffering as follows DEFINE PHIGS DOUBLE BUFFERING 1 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for pixmap double buffering as follows setenv GKSdouble buffering 1 Retum Font Index GKS DECW FONT nnn GKSdecw font nnn PHIGS DECW FONT nnn PHIGSdecw font nnn Specifies the X font name string associated with the font index For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the font index as follows DEFINE PHIGSSDECW FONT 103 X font name Retum On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the font index as follows setenv GKSdecw font 105 X font name Return Font List GKS DECW FONT LIST GKSdecw font list PHIGS DECW FONT LIST PHIGSdecw font list Defines a list of font indexes The handler uses this list to compose the logical name that contains the X font name string For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the font list as follows DEFINE PHIGSSDECW FONT LIST 103 105 107 Retun On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the font list as follows setenv GKSdecw font list 110 Return See Section 4 11 for more information on the fonts supported by the DECwindows workstation continued on next page DECwindows Workstation 4 3 DECwind
378. n workstation ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data out_data number of integers 3 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id bundle_index set_ realized address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 4 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error_status control_flag edge_ type color_index address of real array edge_width address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier bundle_index The edge bundle index set_realized The return type of the values either SET or REALIZED Escapes B 77 359 Inquire Edge Representation B 78 Escapes The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status The error status control_flag The edge control flag edge_type The edge type color_index The edge color index edge_width The edge width scale factor 360 Inquire Language Identifier 360 Inquire Language Identifier
379. n your application program call the INITIALIZE CHOICE function using application prompt and echo type PET 2 This PET specifies the state of the 32 buttons ON or OFF The init parameter for this function is not used with the hardware buttons but you should still supply an integer in the range 1 to 32 to avoid generating an error For example with the DEC PHIGS C binding interface PET 2 has the following data record typedef struct Pint number number of alternatives Pprf enable array of prompts Pchoicepet0002 typedef enum PPR OFF PPR ON Pprf All other functions involving choice devices are supported and operate as documented Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS D 5 Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS D 4 Workstation Support D 4 Workstation Support The following sections describe using the PCM server with the DECwindows PEX OSF Motif and PEX Motif workstation types Workstation Type Values 211 DECwindows 221 DECwindows PEX 231 OSF Motif and 241 PEX Motif You do not need to supply additional application code to use buttons and dials with these workstation type values Workstation Type Values 212 DECwindows 222 DECwindows PEX 232 OSF Motif and 242 PEX Motif Because these workstation type values are for output only devices the application must make direct calls to the Input Device Library IDL See the DEC Open3D IDL User Guide for more information on the I
380. nabled when the HLHSR_MODE is set to OFF When the HLHSR_MODE mode is set to ZBUFFER anti aliasing is suppressed 11 2 2 2 VAXstation SPXg and SPXgt Accelerators For PEX servers for the VAXstation accelerators SPXg and SPXgt there are three available settings for anti aliasing each with a separate set of functionality and restrictions The three modes are as follows Mode 0 No anti aliasing When you use mode 0 no restrictions due to anti aliasing exist Mode 1 DEC PHIGS uses the anti aliasing technique of drawing the three closest integer pixel locations along the direction of the minor axis for each major axis unit step The intensity of the pixels is weighted as a function of the fractional error with the ideal floating point coordinate value DEC PHIGS uses four bits of subpixel resolution and a Gaussian weighting function If Z buffering is on the Z buffer will be updated when anti aliased lines are drawn However DEC PHIGS updates only the location in the the Z buffer that corresponds to the middle of the three pixels being drawn You can disable the updating of the Z buffer by setting the OpenVMS logical name STP AA ZUPDATE MODE see Restrictions DEC PHIGS takes the maximum of the larger pixel value that is already in the frame buffer with the pixel value to be drawn on a color component basis to blend the pixels This yields a graceful blend with the frame buffer when each of the color components of the original line to
381. nd PEXEnd include the file PEX h which includes the PEX C binding constants If you are using another language hard code the values Escapes B 129 533 Inquire Workstation Structure Memory 533 Inquire Workstation Structure Memory B 130 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All This escape returns the memory used to hold structures on a per workstation basis ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 6 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error status mem_total struct overhead elem overhead prim data other data address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws id The workstation identifier 533 Inquire Workstation Structure Memory The output data record contains the following e
382. nd the dash key at the same time Press the Local key again Press the Setup key Type the string code ansi and press Return o m Fw NHN Press the Setup key again 16 4 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 3 Programming Considerations This process resets only the values affected by the interrupted DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS program Note If a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS program is interrupted while the Tektronix or Digital VS500 device has a graphics input GIN device active deactivate the GIN device before you run another DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS program To learn how to deactivate the GIN device see the Tektronix reference manual for your device 16 4 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fill area pattern and hatch values for Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series devices The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns 16 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and desc
383. nds on the current language The set of fonts on the X server is checked for availability The DECwindows device handler checks the value of the font list option Only the default set of fonts is available The default set depends on the current language The set of fonts on the X server is not checked for availability This mode is the fastest mode The DECwindows device handler does not check the value of the font list option Only the default set of fonts is available but the default set is checked to make sure the font exists on the DECwindows server This is slightly slower than the previous option The DECwindows device handler does not check the value of the font list option All known DECwindows fonts for the current language are made available in the font list The set of fonts on the X server is not checked for availability See Section 4 11 3 for a complete list The DECwindows device handler checks the value of the font list option Any fonts listed in the font list option are added to the font list or redefined as existing fonts All known DECwindows fonts for the current language are made available in the font list The set of fonts on the X server is checked for availability See Section 4 11 3 for a complete list The DECwindows device handler checks the value of the font list option Any fonts listed in the font list option are added to the font list or redefined as existing fonts All known DECwindows fonts for all la
384. ndscape The picture is wider than it is tall 1 Portrait The picture is taller than it is wide This is the default setting The possible values for y include the following Value Paper Size 0 300 dpi 1 75 dpi 2 150 dpi The possible values for nn include the following Value Paper Size 0 Paper size A letter 8 5 x 11 inches 1 Legal paper size 8 5 x 14 inches 5 Paper size A4 21 x 29 7 centimeters 5 2 1 Device Queues and Allocation When using the HPPCL printer as either allocated or queued devices on OpenVMS systems you need to set terminal characteristics by entering the following DCL command SET TERMINAL device name INTERACTIVE NOECHO NOTYPEAHEAD Return _S PASSTHRU NOESCAPE NOHOSTSYNC TTTSYNC LOWERCASE TAB NOWRAP HARDCOPY Retum NOEIGHTBIT NOBROADCAST FORM FULLDUP SPEED set speed Retum Replace device name with the name of the device to be allocated Replace set speed with a value equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the printer 5 2 HPPCL Workstation HPPCL Workstation 5 2 Valid Bit Mask Values For more information on device allocation see the ALLOCATE command in the OpenVMS DCL Dictionary When using the HPPCL printer as either allocated or queued devices on UNIX systems you need to set terminal characteristics by entering the following command stty pass8 echo new speed lt dev ttynn Return Replace speed with a valu
385. nection identifier for a PostScript device as follows setenv GKSconid file ps Retum GKS ISO_ENCODE GKSiso_encode PHIGS ISO ENCODE PHIGSiso encode Determines whether the handler uses ISO Latin1 characters either enabled 1 or disabled 0 The default value is 0 For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the encoding flag to be enabled as follows DEFINE PHIGSSISO_ENCODE 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the encoding flag to be disabled as follows 9 setenv GKSiso encode 0 Return continued on next page PostScript Workstation 12 1 PostScript Workstation 12 1 Environment Options Table 12 1 Cont PostScript Environment Options Syntax Description Language GKS LANGUAGE Specifies whether to use the English language value 0 or Japanese GKSlanguage value 22 language The default value is 0 See Section 12 6 for more PHIGS LANGUAGE information on font support PHIGSlanguage For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the English language as follows DEFINE PHIGS LANGUAGE 0 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the Japanese language as follows setenv GKSlanguage 22 Return Printer Description File GKS PS_DESCRIPTION_nn GKSps_description_nn PHIGS PS_DESCRIPTION_nn PHIGSps_description_nn
386. nent Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 1 Form an arc 2 Connect both ends of the arc to its center 3 Connect the beginning and end points of the arc 116 Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance due to the specified values DEC GKS may attempt to form a straight line 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you specify a value other than 1 2 or 3 GDPs C 27 125 Rectangle Two Corners 125 Rectangle Two Corners Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the rectangle from the specified diagonal corner points The sides of the rectangle are parallel to the x and y axes GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 2 pts array diagonal corner points gdp id 2185 data rec number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158
387. nerate Hardcopy of Workstation Surface B 7 1083 Beep i2 en RR ER RR bed ebb RI ERG pa ERE ETa E B 8 106 Pop Workstation cunas xe Rr ada eee wed REDE ROC RC B 9 107 Push Workstation 0 0 0 0 ccc es B 10 108 Set Error Handling Mode llle B 11 109 Set Viewport Event llle B 12 110 Associate Workstation Type and Connection Identifier B 14 111 Software Clipping llle B 16 150 Set Writing Mode llli B 17 151 Set Line Cap Style 0 eee B 19 152 Set Line Join Style 1 eee B 21 153 Set Edge Control Flag llli llle B 23 154 Set Edge Type 2 eee RE Rae qure b gore ban B 24 155 Set Edge Width Scale Factor llli B 26 156 Set Edge Color Index llle B 27 157 Set Edge Index llleeeee eee B 28 158 Set Edge Aspect Source Flag ASF 00 000008 B 29 160 Begin Transformation Block 000 eee eee B 31 161 End Transformation Block 0 0 0 0 eee ee B 32 162 Set Segment Highlighting Method 0 0 B 33 163 Set Highlighting Method 0 0 0 0 cee eee B 35 164 Begin Transformation Block 3 0 000 eee eee B 37 200 Set Edge Representation 0 0 ccc eee eee B 38 202 Set Window Title llleelee ees B 39 208 Set Reset String llle eller B 40 204 Set Cancel String 2 92
388. ng and the second opcode listed is the character string used by the clear text encoding Table 2 2 CGM Element Descriptions Element Name Opcode Argument Data Description BEGIN METAFILE 3 0 2 0 A string value specifying the metafile identifier BEGMF END METAFILE 3 0 2 1 No data required ENDMF BEGIN PICTURE 3 0 2 2 A string value specifying the picture identifier BEGPIC BEGIN PICTURE 3 0 2 3 No data required BODY BEGPICBODY END PICTURE 3 0 2 4 No data required ENDPIC METAFILE VERSION 3 1 2 0 An integer value corresponding to the version of the MFVERSION CGM standard being used METAFILE 3 1 2 1 A string value that describes the metafile contents DESCRIPTION MFDESC VDC TYPE 3 1 2 2 An enumerated type specifying the virtual display VDCTYPE coordinate type which corresponds to the DEC GKS normalized device coordinate plane INTEGER REAL INTEGER 3 1 2 3 A value of an encoding dependent data type that PRECISION INTEGERPREC specifies the integer precision REAL PRECISION 3 1 2 4 A value or values of an encoding dependent data REALPREC type that specify the subfields of the real number precision INDEX PRECISION 3 1 2 5 A value of an encoding dependent data type that INDEXPREC specifies the precision of an index into a bundle table COLOR PRECISION 3 1 2 6 A value of an encoding dependent data type that COLRPREC specifies the subfields of the precision of red green and blue color intensity values COLOR INDEX 3 1 2 7 A
389. ng is the most efficient because DEC PHIGS is tuned to this binding and because there are relatively few parameters Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 1 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 1 Device Independent Tuning e DEC C language binding This binding is very efficient as its form is close to that of the ISO C binding e PHIGS language binding This binding is less efficient than the ISO C and DEC C bindings because it has more parameters and these parameters do not have a one to one mapping with the ISO C or DEC C binding parameters e Ada language binding This binding is less efficient than the PHIGS binding because it is a layer on top of the PHIGS binding and requires additional copying of data While it is more difficult to use than the Ada binding the PHIGS Ada interface PHIGS_DEF ADA is more efficient than the Ada binding because less copying and reformatting of data is required e Fortran language binding This binding is less efficient than the PHIGS binding because it is a layer on top of this binding and requires additional copying of data G 1 2 Defining the Level of Primitive Aggregation Primitive aggregation involves combining many small primitives into fewer large primitives You can combine polylines into polyline sets and can combine fill areas into fill area sets indexed polygons triangle strips or quadrilateral meshes The aggregation of primitives decreases the memory required for individual
390. ng predefined bundle tables and supported escapes e Color bundle table e Marker bundle table e Line bundle table e Interior bundle table e Edge bundle table e Text bundle table e View bundle table e Depth cue bundle table e Light bundle table e Highlight bundle table e HLHSR bundle table e Curve and surface information e Available escapes e Connection identifier e Workstation type 1 8 Introduction Introduction 1 7 Predefined Bundle Table Indexes for DEC PHIGS On OpenVMS systems PHIGS_PREDEF is located in the directory SYSSCOMMON SYSHLP EXAMPLES PHIGS The logical name PHIGS EXAMPLES points to this directory On UNIX systems PHIGS_PREDEF is located in the directory usr lib PHIGS examples Example 1 2 provides an example of using this program on a OpenVMS system to list predefined color indexes for the Digital LCP01 printer device Example 1 2 PHIGS PREDEF Program Example PREDEF PREDEF Return Parameters all color marker line interior edge text view depth light highlight hlhsr curve surface li escapes connid wstype PREDEF COLOR WSTYPE 15 Return list list list list list list list list list list predefi predefi predefi predefi predefi predefi predefi predefi predefi list list st list predefi available hlhsr modes identifiers d surface information available escapes curve an PHIGSSEXAMPLES PH
391. ng system only and not under the OpenVMS Alpha ULTRIX or Digital UNIX operating systems Japanese VWS devices are supported on DEC GKS for OpenVMS VAX systems only 17 1 Environment Options Table 17 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with VWS devices Table 17 1 VWS Environment Options for OpenVMS Systems Syntax Description Color Map Size GKS VWS_COLOR_MAP_ Used in conjunction with the mm field in the workstation type bit mask SIZEmmm to specify the size of the color table allocated by the workstation PHIGS VWS_COLOR_MAP_ For example if the bit mask is set to FF and you define this option to be 38 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS will use 38 colors If you do not define this option DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS will use 255 colors because the hexadecimal value FF is 255 You cannot allocate more than 255 colors On OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to use 36 colors in the color map as follows SIZEmmm DEFINE PHIGS VWS COLORMAP SIZE255 36 Retum continued on next page VWS Workstation 17 1 VWS Workstation 17 1 Environment Options Table 17 1 Cont VWS Environment Options for OpenVMS Systems Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID PHIGS CONID Specifies the default workstation connection information The startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC P
392. ng the display in double buffer mode the picture may change colors briefly as the picture is drawn into the backing buffer To minimize color traversal you can create a structure with e POLYLINE SET WITH DATA element with a different vertex color corresponding to each fixed color needed This element can be degenerate and should be clipped away e SET INTERIOR REFLECTANCE EQUATION element with the diffuse equation 9 12 OSF Motif Workstation OSF Motif Workstation 9 8 Minimizing Color Traversal for DEC PHIGS e TRIANGLE STRIP 3 WITH DATA element with a different vertex color corresponding to each lighted shaded and depth cued color This element can be degenerate and should be clipped away When this structure is posted DEC PHIGS allocates a cell in the X color map for each color in the POLYLINE SET WITH DATA element DEC PHIGS allocates a constant hue gamut in the X color map for each color in the TRIANGLE STRIP WITH DATA element If the rest of the application uses only these colors no reallocation of color map pixels takes place no double buffer color problems occur 9 9 Bundle Indexes Use the program PHIGS_PREDEF included with the DEC PHIGS development kit or GKS_PREDEF included with the DEC GKS development kit to display information on the predefined bundle tables and supported escapes for other OSF Motif workstation types See Example 1 1 or Example 1 2 Use the available inquiry function in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS
393. nge is a closed interval range includes end points For the draw traversal DEC PHIGS will use the same pipeline state as was used for the erase traversal then redraw all primitives within the watch range If after the watch range is activated the application edits elements that have an offset smaller than the start of the watch range those edits may not have any effect on the quick update ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 4 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array watch_state watch_id offset_start offset_end address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 115 523 Set BQUM Range B 116 Escapes Argument Required Value out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description watch_state The watch state DEC PHIGS activates the watch range if this value is 1 and deactivates the watch range if this value i
394. ngful element call such as POLYLINE appears before the CLEAR WORKSTATION call CGM produces a file with only one page e CGM has no elements that correspond to the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS SET primitive REPRESENTATION functions e CGM does not support the DEC GKS segment and DEC PHIGS structure storage The following list presents the CGM facilities that are not supported by DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS e DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not support the extended text processing facilities of CGM such as changing character sets and appended text e DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not support auxiliary color and direct color specification CGM facilities 2 5 CGM Structure The CGM standard defines three components within a metafile as shown in Figure 2 1 Figure 2 1 CGM Components Metafile Metafile Metafile Descriptor Defaults Picture ZK 5847 GE The metafile descriptor component contains data relevant to the functional capabilities required to interpret that metafile For example this component can contain data such as a metafile descriptive string or title the version number of the CGM standard used by the implemented CGM interpreter the date of the metafile creation and so forth Note that the format of this data depends on the encoding you choose The metafile defaults component contains data relevant to all the picture definitions contained in the metafile For example this component can contain data such as the virtual display coo
395. nguages are made available in the font list The set of fonts on the X server is not checked for availability See Section 4 11 3 for a complete list The DECwindows device handler checks the value of the font list option Any fonts listed in the font list option are added to the font list or redefined as existing fonts All known DECwindows fonts for all languages are made available in the font list The set of fonts on the X server is checked for availability See Section 4 11 3 for a complete list The DECwindows device handler checks the value of the font list option Any fonts listed in the font list option are added to the font list or redefined as existing fonts 4 11 3 Known Fonts The following fonts are considered known to the DECwindows device handler X Font Name Font Index Courier Medium R 1 Times Medium R 101 Times Medium I 102 Times Bold R 103 Times Bold I 104 _Helvetica Medium R 105 DECwindows Workstation 4 23 DECwindows Workstation 4 11 Font Support X Font Name Font Index _Helvetica Medium O 106 _Helvetica Bold R 107 _Helvetica Bold O 108 Courier Medium R 109 _Courier Medium O 110 _Courier Bold R 111 _Courier Bold O 112 _Symbol 113 Terminal Medium R Normal ISO8859 1 114 Terminal Medium R DoubleWide 1808859 1 115 Terminal Medium R Narrow I1S08859 1 116
396. nix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 7 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 5 Input Information The result of this mapping is that all choice and pick devices use the mouse all other input devices use the default input device You can also specify specific logical devices as shown in the following example for DEC GKS OpenVMS DEFINE GKS 82_INPUT_DEVICES MOUSE CHOICE 1 Return ULTRIX setenv GKS82 input devices mouse choice 1 Retum In this example choice device 1 uses the mouse All other input devices use the default physical input device The following is a list of the recognized logical device keywords e CHOICE e LOCATOR e PICK e STRING e STROKE e VALUATOR You can combine all these physical and logical device features Any illegally specified strings result in the use of the previously specified physical devices which in most cases will be the default Note Errors often occur because of misplaced parentheses and misspelled keywords Consider the following examples for DEC PHIGS OpenVMS DEFINE PHIGS 84 INPUT DEVICES PORTO LOCATOR 1 2 VALUATOR 1 2 3 Return ULTRIX setenv PHIGS84_input_devices port0 locator 1 2 valuator 1 2 3 Retum The previous example defines the devices and ports as follows e The tablet at PORTO is used for LOCATOR 1 and 2 and VALUATOR 1 2 and 3 e The joydisk is used for the remaining devi
397. not generate a corresponding circle GDPs C 11 104 Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius 104 Circle Two Points on Circumference and Radius C 12 GDPs Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms a circle from the specified circumference points and the radius vector point The circle is drawn so that the circumference clockwise from the first point to the second is no greater than pi radians half the circle GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 4 pts_array two points vector origin point and radius vector endpoint gdp_id 104 data rec number of integers 0 data rec len number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the distance between points is more than twice the specified radius then DEC GKS cannot form the circle 106 Arc Center and Two Points on Arc 106 Arc Center and Two Points on Arc Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms a circular arc using the center point the second p
398. not get visual return 1 if visual_info gt class TrueColor printf Cannot get TrueColor visual return 1 continued on next page 10 14 OpenGL Workstation OpenGL Workstation 10 9 Examples Example 10 1 Cont Creating a Window for Workstation Type 272 wattr event_mask ButtonPressMask ExposureMask StructureNotifyMask wattr background pixel XWhitePixel x display XDefaultScreen x display wattr bit gravity CenterGravity wattr border pixel 0x00000000 valuemask CWEventMask CWBackPixel CWBitGravity CWBorderPixel wattr colormap XCreateColormap x display RootWindow x display 0 visual info visual AllocNone XInstallColormap x display wattr colormap valuemask CWColormap Phigs window XCreateWindow x display RootWindow x display 0 window offset window offset window width window height 15 visual info depth InputOutput visual info visual valuemask amp wattr XSetWindowColormap x display Phigs window wattr colormap return 0 Example 10 2 illustrates the calls you could use to create a window for workstation type 273 Example 10 2 Creating a Window for Workstation Type 273 include Xm Xm h General Motif header include X11 Shell h Shell widget class include Xm MainW h Main Window widget class include Xm RowColumn h Row Column widget class include Xm CascadeB h Cascade Button
399. nquire Edge Representation 359 Inquire Extent of a GDP 404 Inquire Highlighting Method 306 Inquire Language Identifier 360 continued on next page Escapes B 3 Escapes B 2 List of Escape Identifiers B 4 Escapes Table B 1 Cont Alphabetical Listing of Escapes Escape Function Escape Identifier Inquire Line Cap and Join Facilities Inquire List of Available Escapes Inquire List of Edge Indexes Inquire List of Highlighting Methods Inquire Maximum Number of Edge Bundles Inquire Menu Bar Identifier Inquire Pasteboard Identifier Inquire Predefined Edge Representation Inquire Segment Extent Inquire Segment Highlighting Method Inquire Shell Identifier Inquire Vendor String Inquire View Dirty Flag Inquire Viewport Data Inquire Window Identifiers Inquire Workstation Structure Memory Pop Workstation Push Workstation Render Element Range Set Anti Alias Mode Set Background Pixmap Set BQUM Range Set BQUM Flags Set Cancel String Set Connection Identifier String Set Display Speed Set Double Buffering Set Edge Aspect Source Flag ASF Set Edge Color Index Set Edge Control Flag Set Edge Index Set Edge Representation Set Edge Type Set Edge Width Scale Factor Set Enter String Set Error Handling Mode Set Highlighting Method Set Icon Bitmaps 952 950 302 958 956 308 307 955 303 305 309 517 581 255 304 533 106 107
400. ns 11 8 Escaped patiserie te kee ue oe ew sede rove e ae Ne oe ae 9 15 9 16 9 17 9 17 9 18 9 19 9 19 9 20 9 20 9 20 9 21 9 21 9 22 9 23 9 25 9 25 9 26 9 27 9 31 9 31 10 1 10 8 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 11 10 12 10 12 10 12 10 12 10 12 10 13 11 1 11 9 11 10 11 10 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 13 11 15 11 15 11 15 11 15 11 15 11 16 11 16 12 PostScript Workstation 12 1 Environment Options lee 12 1 12 2 Valid Bit Mask Values llle 12 2 12 8 Encapsulated PostScript llle ees 12 3 12 44 Device Considerations 0 0 0 ee ee ees 12 4 12 4 1 Device Queues and Allocation 0 cee eee eee 12 4 12 4 2 Printer Description Files llle 12 4 12 5 Pattern and Hatch Values 0 0 cece ens 12 5 12 5 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values 20 0 00 cece eee eae 12 5 12 5 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS 12 6 12 6 FontiSupport 5 wk REEF ERE RES OC EEG RAE PEG Pa neqae s 12 6 127 ISO Latinl Character Support elles 12 8 13 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 4 Environment Options llle eer 13 1 13 2 Valid Bit Mask Values 0 0 0 cece es 13 2 13 2 1 ReGIS Bit Masks dez Rue RR ao UR EROR S Ee haa Ree 13 2 13 2 2 ReGIS Output to a File ca ccc ec ee ee rt ee ee ee ee 13 2 13 2 3 Bit Mask for the VT340 to Restore the Color Map 13 3 13 3 Mode R
401. nt Sp Back scale factor Sr Front scale factor Z Depth value of point in normalized projection coordinate points Mathematical Concepts for DEC PHIGS F 3 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS This appendix presents techniques for improving DEC PHIGS performance In particular the following subjects are discussed Device independent tuning DECwindows and OSF Motif workstation tuning Tuning on Digital UNIX systems Tuning on OpenVMS VAX systems Tuning on OpenVMS Alpha systems Note that this appendix does not provide absolute performance numbers G 1 Device Independent Tuning You can perform certain techniques to achieve better system performance on both DECwindows and OSF Motif devices These device independent techniques include Choosing a language binding Defining the level of primitive aggregation Choosing appropriate primitive types Providing optional primitive information Selecting the drawing mode structure mode versus immediate mode Executing structures Avoiding regenerations when posting to views Performing quick updates Defining the X transport mechanism Using the conditional traversal feature Using performance DEC PHIGS tools The following sections describe each of these tuning techniques G 1 1 Choosing a Language Binding The selection of a language binding can affect system performance The available bindings are ISO C language binding This bindi
402. nt B 80 Evaluate WC Mapping of an NDC Point B 84 workstation description table inquiry Inquire Default Display Speed B 67 Inquire Edge Facilities B 70 Inquire Line Cap and Join Facilities B 68 Inquire List of Available Escapes B 65 Inquire List of Highlighting Methods B 75 Inquire Maximum Number of Edge Bundles B 74 Inquire Predefined Edge Representation B 72 workstation state list inquiry Inquire Current Display Speed B 52 Inquire Highlighting Method B 60 Inquire List of Edge Indexes B 53 Inquire Segment Extent B 55 Inquire Segment Highlighting Method B 58 Inquire Viewport Data B 50 Inquiry Extent of a GDP B 88 Evaluate DC Mapping of an NDC Point 401 B 82 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a DC Point 403 B 86 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a WC Point 400 B 80 Evaluate WC Mapping of an NDC Point 402 B 84 F File PostScript description 12 4 Fill area pattern values predefined VWS monochrome 17 9 Fill Area Set 332 C 29 Filled Arc Center and Two Points on Arc 338 C 34 Filled Arc Center Starting Point and Angle 342 C 41 Filled Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius 340 C 37 Filled Arc Three Points on Circumference 339 C 36 Filled Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius 341 C 39 Filled Circle Center and Point on Circumference 333 C 30 Filled Circle Center and Radius 335 C 32 Filled Circle Three Points on Circumference 334 C 31 Filled
403. nt Options Syntax Description Stroke Font List PHIGS STROKE FONT LIST PHIGSstroke font list Controls the list of font indexes for which you have set up names Stroke font index 1 will always be in the stroke font list DEC PHIGS attempts to open all stroke fonts in the list when it reads the environment option If DEC PHIGS is unable to open the stroke font it does not include the font index in its internal list If you use a stroke font index that is not in the DEC PHIGS internal list font index 1 is used To determine which font index DEC PHIGS uses for the stroke font list use the INQUIRE TEXT FACILITIES function For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the stroke font list as follows DEFINE PHIGSS STROKE FONT LIST 101 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the stroke font list as follows setenv PHIGSstroke font list 101 103 Return Stroke Markers PHIGSS USE STROKE MARKERS PHIGSuse stroke markers 10 4 OpenGL Workstation Specifies whether stroke markers are used When the value of this option is 0 DEC PHIGS uses bitmap markers for all marker types When the value of this option is 1 the default DEC PHIGS uses stroke markers for positive integer marker types and bitmap markers for negative integer marker types On ZLX graphics options stroke markers are rendered more quickly than bitm
404. nt variable for the connection identifier of the device as follows setenv GKSconid file hppcl Return Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup GKSwstype procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default PHIGS WSTYPE value PHIGSwstype For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the HPPCL workstation as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYPE 261 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the HPPCL workstation as follows setenv GKSwstype 261 Return HPPCL Workstation 5 1 HPPCL Workstation 5 2 Valid Bit Mask Values 5 2 Valid Bit Mask Values For the HPPCL graphics handler you can specify hexadecimal bit masks as workstation type values Using this device you use the bit mask values to specify the paper orientation The following bit masks are valid for use with the HPPCL printer Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 261 xmynn0105 HPPCL printer 300 dpi This is the default value The value in the first part mynn specifies the paper orientation The value in the second part is the hexadecimal value 0105 of the workstation type These hexadecimal values correspond to the decimal workstation type value equivalents 261 for the default 300 dpi HPPCL printer The possible values for m include the following Value Paper Orientation 0 La
405. nteger value n_longwords using the following formula n_longwords rows columns bits_per_index 31 32 Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the starting and diagonal points have the same x or y value DEC GKS cannot form a cell array rectangle In DEC GKS 3D M the three points defining the image array box are ordered P Q and R In DEC GKS the three points are ordered P R and Q This change allows both the cell array primitive and the image array primitive to have their PQR points defined in the same order The image array primitive and the cell array primitives have similar functionality Figure C 3 illustrates the order of the points used to define the GDP 400 Packed Cell Array Figure C 3 GDP IMAGE ARRAY Order of Points GKS P R Q GKS 3D P Q R ZK 1998A GE GDPs C 51 Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS D Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS This appendix provides information on dial and button support The hardware consists of a 8 dial box and a 32 button box DEC PHIGS supports dials and buttons for use with the DECwindows OSF Motif and PEX workstation types The dial box is implemented as a series of valuator input devices numbered 5 to 12 The button box is implemented as choice input device number 10 Additionally there is choice device 9 which is a software simulated button
406. ntegers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 1 address of integer array ws id address of real array 0 address of string lengths array length of new title address of string pointer array new title number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id length of new title new title The workstation identifier An integer array containing the length of new title in bytes The new window title character string Escapes B 39 203 Set Reset String 203 Set Reset String B 40 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows workstation types 210 and 211 PEX workstation types 220 and 221 and OSF Motif workstation types 230 and 231 This escape changes the string displayed in the reset button on the menu bar ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of str
407. nter Resolutions 14 5 Printer Resolutions This section describes the printer resolutions in dots per inch dpi Printer Horizontal Vertical LA50 144 0 72 0 LA75 144 0 144 0 LA84 LA86 and LA280 180 0 180 0 LA100 131 5 72 0 LA210 330 0 72 0 LN03 and LN03_J PLUS 150 0 150 0 DEClaser 2100 2200 and 300 0 300 0 2300 Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 7 Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 Tektronix 4014 Workstation This chapter describes the information needed when using DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with the Tektronix 4014 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support this device as a workstation of category WSCAT_OUTIN Note Tektronix 4014 devices are not supported on OpenVMS Alpha and Digital UNIX systems 15 1 Environment Options Table 15 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with Tektronix 4014 devices Table 15 1 Tektronix 4014 Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier GKS CONID Specifies the default workstation connection information On GKSconid OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS CONID PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value PHIGSconid For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier to a terminal as follows DEFINE PHIGSSCONID TT Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier to a terminal as follows 9 setenv
408. ntifier of the device as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID FILE LCGO1 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier of the device as follows 9 setenv GKSconid file lcg01 Retum continued on next page LCGO1 Workstation 6 1 LCGO01 Workstation 6 1 Environment Options Table 6 1 Cont LCG01 Environment Options Syntax Description Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup GKSwstype procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets a PHIGS WSTYPE default for this option PHIGSwstype For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the Digital LCGO1 printer workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYPE 15 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for for the Digital LCGO1 printer workstation type as follows setenv GKSwstype 15 Return 6 2 Valid Bit Mask Values To use the LCGO01 graphics handler you can specify hexadecimal bit masks as workstation type values The following bit mask is valid for use with an LCGO1 device Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 15 xm000000F Digital LCGO01 printer The value in the first part 15000 specifies the paper orientation The value in the second part is the hexadecimal value of the workstation type The possible values for m include the following
409. num clip Description The workstation identifier An integer specifying whether to clear the image at each call to BEGIN RENDER The possible values are as follows e PEX IMM CLR I NOCLEAR 0 Do not clear This is the default value e PEX IMM CLR I CLEAR 1 Clear e PEX IMM CLR I DEFAULT 2 Return DEC PHIGS to its default behavior A Boolean specifying whether to clear the Z buffer at each call to BEGIN RENDER The possible values are as follows e PEX IMM CLR Z NOCLEAR 0 Do not clear e PEX IMM CLR Z CLEAR 1 Clear This is the default value The number of clip regions to be set If this value is 0 DEC PHIGS uses the whole window as the clip region See the appropriate language definition file for a list of the constants and values to be used with this escape 521 Set PEX Clear Region 521 Set PEX Clear Region Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations VS3100 SPX and DECstation 5000 series and VAXstation 4000 xx SPXgt PEX workstations This escape allows you to clear a region during an immediate mode rendering on a PEX workstation It also allows you to control whether DEC PHIGS should clear the image or Z buffer By default this escape implicitly sets the clip region to the specified region but performs no clearing You could use this escape to handle exposure events This escape implicitly causes a begin rendering to cause these actions to occur The re
410. oding 4 Clear text encoding The remaining sections describe the following topics in detail e Differences between CGM and DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS graphics facilities e CGM structure e Supported encodings e Element descriptions e CGM physical file organization e CGM encoding examples 2 4 Differences Between DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS and CGM Because CGM is designed to format files for many types of graphics applications there is no unique relationship between CGM and DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS If CGM does not support a graphics facility of DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS the metafile does not attempt to simulate such a facility If the metafile structure supports a graphic facility unsupported by DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS program will not generate those unsupported CGM elements DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not define graphics output in terms of pictures as does CGM Consequently the CGM interpreter must determine what constitutes a new CGM picture definition The following list presents the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS graphics facilities that are not supported by CGM e CGM does not support the changing of workstation transformations Workstation transformations cause the CGM interpreter to start a new picture definition CGM Output 2 3 CGM Output 2 4 Differences Between DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS and CGM e Acall to CLEAR WORKSTATION causes the CGM interpreter to start a new picture definition For example if at least one meani
411. of cells 9 7 General Information This section provides general information you should consider when programming with DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS using the OSF Motif workstation e To open or query OSF Motif workstation types 230 231 232 and 233 for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS your application must be running on a system that runs the OSF Motif workstation client side software The client does not need a physical display device nor does it need the OSF Motif workstation server side software e For OSF Motif workstation types 230 and 231 the connection identifier specifies the OSF Motif workstation display to use e If you resize the window it may be erased and redrawn causing the loss of primitives e The resource identification of the window created for output can be fetched using the Inquire Window Identifiers 304 escape function e The OSF Motif workstation supports double buffering in two ways For example on OpenVMS systems you can enable double buffering by defining the double buffering environment option name to be any value or you can call the escape function SET DOUBLE BUFFERING When double buffering is enabled output is first written to a buffer and only displayed when you call UPDATE WORKSTATION or an equivalent flush operation 9 8 Minimizing Color Traversal for DEC PHIGS On OSF Motif X11 devices DEC PHIGS does a special traversal for colors to determine what colors are needed in the X color table When regenerati
412. of the first byte is the sign bit the value 0 for nonnegative numbers the value 1 for negative numbers Bits labeled b specify the numeric value in binary The most significant bits are in the first byte and the least significant bits are in the last byte CGM encodes each real number as an integer mantissa followed by an exponent The exponent is the power of 2 by which the integer mantissa is to be multiplied Figure 2 3 illustrates how CGM uses the basic format to encode real numbers 2 6 CGM Output CGM Output 2 6 Character Encoding Figure 2 3 CGM Basic Encoding Format for Real Numbers Bit Bit 8 1 E ASIE EA ED eae e e EEE PEEP n ZK 5849 GE In Figure 2 3 bit e is the extension bit and bit s is the sign bit Bit p is the exponent follows bit which is always the value 1 The last three bits in the first byte contain the exponent the remaining bits are the mantissa The DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS CGM character encoding scheme uses the displacement mode to encode point list data Displacement mode specifies pairs of VDC values that are the X and Y delta values relative to the last specified point CGM codes character strings as sequences of bytes starting with the designated OPEN CHARACTER STRING character and ending with the STRING TERMINATOR character The CGM encoding scheme defines many ways to encode data For complete information concerning character encoding see the CGM standard 2 7 Clear Text Encoding Th
413. offset 0 Draw 9 pixels in foreground Draw 3 pixels in background Draw 3 pixels in foreground Draw 3 pixels in background ZK 2224A GE 511 Set Plane Mask 511 Set Plane Mask Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations This escape allows an application to restrict the planes to which the display is rendered By default all planes are used The plane mask does not affect Z buffering ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 1 address of long array plane_mask out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier plane_mask The plane mask Escapes B 99 512 Set Marker Pattern 512 Set Marker Pattern B 100 Escapes Operating States f
414. oice locator stroke and valuator Supporting Workstations VWS workstations When you use several logical input devices at one time the measure of a device can change if you move the mouse s tracking cursor across the device If the device is in sample mode and if the application happens to sample from that device as you move the tracking cursor across the device s echo area inappropriate values may be returned to the application program DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS allow you to lock a logical input device so that its measure cannot be altered until you unlock the device If a device is locked you can still trigger the device if in request or event mode but the measure cannot be altered by moving the tracking cursor across the device s echo area To lock a device depress the Lock key this activates the red Lock light at the top of the keyboard move the cursor into the device s echo area and press any mouse button Once the device is locked press the Lock key again the Lock light turns off and continue to enter input values in other devices The locked device always returns the same measure Input Values E 9 Input Values E 3 Keypad Functionality To unlock the device depress the Lock key activating the Lock light move the cursor into the locked device s echo area and press any mouse button Once the device is unlocked press the Lock key again the Lock light turns off and you can now change the measure of the device E
415. oint an enumerated flag and a TEXT string If the flag is NOT FINAL you can specify elements to change the text attributes between this element and the APPEND TEXT element If the flag is FINAL the string is the entire string to be displayed RESTRICTED TEXT 2 4 Two VDC values that are the height and width RESTRTEXT vectors a VDC starting point an enumerated flag as described in TEXT and a string The text must be contained within the parallelogram created using the starting point and height and width vectors APPEND TEXT 2 5 An enumerated flag value as described in TEXT APNDTEXT and a string The flag value determines whether you can specify other elements between this element and a subsequent APPEND element POLYGON 2 6 A series of VDC points specifying a polygon INCRPOLYGON POLYGON SET 2 7 A flagged point list each list item containing a point INCRPOLYGONSET and an enumerated flag Each point is connected to the subsequent point or to the current closure point but not to both The flag can be one of the edge values INVISIBLE VISIBLE CLOSE INVISIBLE CLOSE VISIBLE CELL ARRAY 2 8 Two diagonal VDC corner points a third corner CELLARRAY point clockwise between the starting point and diagonal points a two dimensional list of either color indexes or intensity values and local color precision format determined by the encoding GDP 2 9 An integer generalized drawing primitive GDP GENERALIZED identifier a point list and a data
416. oint as a starting point of the arc and the third point as one of the following components e The second point located on the arc e The second point of a ray the first point is the center point whose intersection with the circular path of the arc determines the second point of the arc GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 3 pts array center point and the beginning and end points of the arc gdp id 106 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Component Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 1 Form an arc 2 Connect both ends of the arc to its center 3 Connect the beginning and end points of the arc GDPs C 13 106 Arc Center and Two Points on Arc C 14 GDPs Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance the center point and one of the points on the circumference may be the same point 159 Arc type is
417. ointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier swap_mode The swap mode flag If the flag is set to 0 DEC PHIGS automatically displays the backing buffer If the flag is set to 1 DEC PHIGS disables the automatic display of the backing buffer Escapes B 103 515 Swap Buffers 515 Swap Buffers B 104 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations PEX and OSF Motif workstations This escape allows an application to force DEC PHIGS to display the backing buffer when in double buffer mode ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array
418. ollows setenv GKSdecw font mode check Return continued on next page OSF Motif Workstation 9 3 OSF Motif Workstation 9 1 Environment Options Table 9 1 Cont OSF Motif Environment Options Syntax Description Font Path GKS DECW_FONT_PATH GKSdecw_font_path PHIGS DECW_FONT_PATH PHIGSdecw_font_path Specifies the OSF Motif font path The font path is the full directory specification for the font path or a list of font paths separated by a comma The default system directory is always searched before the user supplied font path For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the font path as follows DEFINE PHIGS DECW_FONT_PATH Retum SYSTEM DISK NAME FONTS Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the font path as follows 9 setenv GKSdecw font path usr users smith Return Note that this option is not currently implemented Hardware Dials and Buttons PHIGS USE DIALS AND BUTTONS PHIGSuse dials and buttons Specifies whether the button and dial hardware is required to be available If the value of this option is set to 0 DEC PHIGS emulates the button and dial boxes with on screen widgets If the value is set to 1 DEC PHIGS aborts if the button and dial boxes are not available If no value is specified for this option DEC PHIGS uses the button and dial hardware if it is available or fall
419. ollows DEFINE PHIGSS LANGUAGE 0 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the Japanese language as follows setenv GKSlanguage 22 Retum Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE GKSwstype PHIGS WSTYPE PHIGSwstype Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the DDIF output workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYPE 250 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the DDIF output workstation type as follows setenv GKSwstype 250 Return 3 4 Valid Bit Mask Values The standard DDIF workstation type is defined as a constant DDIF in the binding dependent header files for DEC PHIGS and DEC GKS You can specify hexadecimal bit mask values as workstation type values Using DDIF output you use the bit mask values to control color mapping 3 2 DDIF Output Workstation DDIF Output Workstation 3 4 Valid Bit Mask Values The following bit mask is used for DDIF output Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 250 xacbb00FA DDIF Output The value in the first part acbb specifies the orientation and size of the output page The possible values for a include the following Value Paper Orientation 0 Portrait The picture is taller than it is wide Th
420. on Note that the PCM server will support using either the dial or button box separately D 1 1 PCM on OpenVMS Systems On OpenVMS systems the PCM server is located in SYS SYSTEM To start the dial and button box server process on an OpenVMS system execute the following command file from a privileged account SYSSSTARTUP PCMSSTARTUP COM Return The default terminal port is csa0 If the dial and button box is connected to a different terminal port edit the file SYS STARTUP PCM STARTUP COM to define the correct terminal port You may wish to add execution of this command file to your system startup file Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS D 1 Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS D 1 Starting the PCM Server D 1 2 PCM on UNIX Systems On UNIX systems the PCM server is located in usr bin pcmserver There are two ways to start the server manually and at system startup The following sections describe how to start the PCM on ULTRIX and Digital UNIX systems Using ULTRIX Systems To start the server manually on an ULTRIX system be sure the file etc ttys contains the following entry where xx is the port number ttyxx etc getty std 9600 unknown off nomodem buttons and dials Execute the server as follows usr bin pemserver dev ttyxx amp Retum The parameter dev ttyxx is optional If you do not supply the parameter the server uses dev tty00 On ULTRIX systems to start the server a
421. on Profiles The CALS and MAP TOP application communities define the application profiles of CGM These two profiles are virtually identical The application profile specifies constraints on generators and interpreters for technical details that are left undefined in the CGM standard The application profile also specifies semantics that were left ambiguous in the CGM standard For example the CALS and TOP profiles limit primitives such as polylines to 1024 points The CALS and TOP application profiles eliminate some of the uncertainty of using CGM by making the resource requirements known rendering elements unambiguous and prohibiting the use of private data in the metafile CGM Output 2 13 CGM Output 2 11 CALS and TOP Data Precision 2 11 CALS and TOP Data Precision CGM output is written in VDC points VDC points are integer numbers in either low precision 16 bits or high precision 32 bits The default is low precision Either precision can be selected along with normal or CALS and TOP mode using the workstation type bit mask as follows x00mn0007 The value for n specifies the encoding method described in Section 2 6 The possible values for m include the following Value Encoding 0 Low precision normal mode 1 Low precision CALS and TOP mode 2 High precision normal mode 3 High precision CALS and TOP mode 2 12 Font Selection CGM contains the element font list that associates a text string with a font index in
422. on to input a single point in the stroke E 2 6 Valuator Devices The following section describes the valuator class logical input devices and specifies which DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations support each device VWS Workstations Using one of the VWS workstations you can use the Lock key feature for any of the valuator class logical input devices For more information see Section E 3 E 2 6 1 Valuator 1 2 3 and 4 Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN For workstations that do not have a mouse or puck these devices require you to press the arrow keys to move the valuator prompt To trigger the device press Return To cause a break during request mode press Ctrl U For workstations that do have a mouse or puck these devices require you to move the tracking device to move the valuator prompt To trigger the device press the left button To cause a break during request mode press the middle button on the mouse or the top button on the puck or select the Cancel button Input Values E 5 Input Values E 2 Logical Input Devices On the Digital ReGIS and the Tektronix 4107 workstations you can use the numeric keypad as a zoning mechanism when using device numbers 1 and 2 For more information concerning the numeric keypad see Section E 3 For more information on dial support for the valuator input devices see Appendix D E 2 7 Input Devices and Echo Area Titles For all choi
423. onix 4014 device Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 70 oxnnnn0046 Tektronix 4014 terminal output only 72 xnnnn0048 Tektronix 4014 terminal input output The value in the first part nnnn specifies the number of SYN characters written to the terminal in between primitive generations For instance if your terminal is running at 9600 baud you should specify five SYN characters by defining the first part of the bit mask as 0005 The second part of the bit mask QOWW contains the hexadecimal value 46 for the output only device and 48 for the input output device of the workstation type These hexadecimal values correspond to the decimal workstation type values 70 for the output only terminal and 72 for the input output terminal When using the decimal workstation type value 70 you can pass a file specification to the connection identifier argument to the OPEN WORKSTATION function After program execution on OpenVMS systems use the DCL command SET TERMINAL PASSTHRU which inhibits Ctrl Y Ctrl C and other line editing commands Then type the specified file at your terminal When you are finished use the DCL command SET TERMINAL NOPASSTHRU before attempting to do other work 15 2 Tektronix 4014 Workstation Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 2 Valid Bit Mask Values After program execution on ULTRIX systems enter the following commands stty raw Return cat file name Retum T
424. onment variable setenv PHIGSdevice struct support xxx n Retum In both cases xxx is the workstation type which can have the value 220 to 223 or 240 to 243 on PEX devices and 270 to 273 on OpenGL devices The value n is the structure mode option which can be one of the following e Structure mode 0 In this mode all DEC PHIGS structures are stored on the client During each structure traversal all DEC PHIGS structure elements are transmitted to the PEX or OpenGL server This method uses the least amount of memory for storing structures but is the slowest for PEX devices For OpenGL devices with direct rendering support however the performance may be sufficient e Structure mode 3 PEX only In this mode all DEC PHIGS structures are stored on the server During each structure traversal DEC PHIGS sends only a minimum of commands to the PEX server This mode is usually the fastest for PEX however it does not support all of the PHIGS PLUS or DEC PHIGS extension functions as these functions are not defined in PEX Version 5 1 the current version of Digital PEX servers e Structure mode 4 In this mode DEC PHIGS stores each primitive in a PEX or OpenGL server display list Although attributes are not usually stored in server display lists they may be stored there when the mapping of DEC PHIGS to OpenGL commands requires it Structure traversal is performed by the DEC PHIGS client which transmits attribute commands and
425. ons 9 1 border size 9 1 color map size 9 1 connection identifier 9 2 dials and buttons 9 4 double buffering 9 2 font index 9 3 font list 9 38 font mode 9 3 font path 9 3 input mode 9 4 language 9 5 menu bar size 9 5 resize mode 9 5 title size 9 6 UID search path 9 7 workstation type 9 7 environment variables 9 1 font support 9 20 hardware color map 9 8 hatch values 9 13 locator input 9 17 logical input devices 9 15 logical names 9 1 minimum requirements 9 1 pick input 9 17 pixel inquiries 1 13 programming considerations 9 11 restrictions 9 12 string input 9 18 stroke input 9 19 valuator input 9 19 virtual color map 9 8 workstation type 9 8 OSF Motif PEX pixel inquiries 1 13 OSF Motif UIL Files 9 25 OSF Motif workstations G 7 to G 11 changing attributes on OpenGL devices G 10 choosing double buffering method G 10 disabling input devices G 11 grouping primitives with same attributes G 10 improving pick performance G 7 limiting primitive size G 7 minimizing color traversal 9 12 modifying structure mode G 8 other tuning techniques G 11 P PrintServer 40 Packed Cell Array 400 C 50 Paper size 1 2 DDIF 3 3 DEClaser 14 3 HP7475 8 3 LA324 7 3 LN03 PLUS and LNO3 J PLUS 14 3 LVP16 8 3 PostScript 12 3 Patterns DDIF 3 5 support DEC GKS 1 12 PCM server D 1 to D 7 button support D 5 dial support D 2 errors D 6 event handling D
426. ont 136 ITC Bookman Demi font 137 ITC Bookman Demiltalic font 138 Palatino font 139 Palatino Italic font 140 Palatino Bold font 141 Palatino Bold Italic font 142 ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic font 143 ITC Zapf Dingbats font 10101 Japanese Ryumin Light Roman font 10101 Japanese Ryumin Light Katakana font 10101 Japanese Ryumin Light EUC H font 10102 Japanese GothicBBB Medium Roman font 10102 Japanese GothicBBB Medium Katakana font 10102 Japanese GothicBBB Medium EUC H font The PostScript handler supports all the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS Hershey software stroke precision fonts To use the Japanese fonts with English workstation types you must set the language environment option to Japanese value 22 If you use the Japanese PostScript workstation types 16n you do not need to set the language environment option The bit mask values and many other characteristics for the Japanese PostScript workstation types are the same as the English PostScript workstation types 12 7 ISO Latin1 Character Support ISO Latin1 characters are supported by the PostScript device handler To enable this feature set the ISO Latin1 encoding flag value to 1 The default mode for this feature is disabled ISO Latin1 encoding flag value 0 For compatibility with some nondigital printers the PostScript graphics handler outputs the ISO Latinl characters in a 7 bit format Font numbers 101 to 129
427. ont buffer back buffer The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws id The workstation identifier The output data record contains the following elements Component Description buffer index The current buffer index front buffer The identifier for the front buffer back buffer The identifier for the back buffer 514 Set Swap Mode 514 Set Swap Mode Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations PEX and OSF Motif workstations This escape allows an application to control whether DEC PHIGS will automatically display the backing buffer when in double buffer mode If the flag is set to TRUE DEC PHIGS disables the automatic display of the backing buffer The application must call 515 Swap Buffers to force DEC PHIGS to display the backing buffer ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data out_data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id swap_mode address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string p
428. or DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations PEX and OSF Motif workstations This escape allows an application to define a new marker pattern Valid marker type numbers are 1 to 128 The marker is defined using a 16 element array of 16 bit values with the low order bit on the left Each word specifies a row of the marker The center of the marker is specified by the offset x and offset y values measured from the upper left corner of the marker with positive y increasing downward Marker scale is ignored when rendering user defined marker patterns ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 4 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id marker type offset x offset y address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 1 address of generic pointer array address of 16 element word array for the pattern number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements 512 Set Marker Pattern Componen
429. or a set of red FILLCOLR green and blue intensity values HATCH INDEX 3 6 2 3 An integer value that specifies a hatch style HATCHINDEX PATTERN INDEX 3 6 2 4 An integer value that specifies a pattern type PATINDEX EDGE BUNDLE 3 6 2 5 An integer value that points into the edge bundle INDEX EDGEINDEX table EDGE TYPE 3 6 2 6 An integer value that specifies the edge type EDGETYPE EDGE WIDTH 3 6 2 7 Either an absolute edge width specified in a VDC EDGEWIDTH value or an edge width scale factor EDGE COLOR 3 6 2 8 Either an integer color index value or a set of red EDGECOLR green and blue intensity values EDGE VISIBILITY 3 6 2 9 An enumerated value specifying edge visibility EDGEVIS OFF ON FILL REFERENCE 3 6 2 10 A real value specifying the fill area reference point POINT FILLREFPT 2 12 CGM Output continued on next page Table 2 2 Cont CGM Element Descriptions CGM Output 2 8 Element Descriptions Element Name Opcode Argument Data Description PATTERN TABLE 3 6 2 11 An integer value specifying the placement of this PATTABLE pattern in the pattern table a two dimensional list of either color indexes or intensity values and local color precision format determined by the encoding PATTERN SIZE 3 6 2 12 Two VDC values that specify the x and y components PATSIZE of the height distance vector and two VDC values that specify the x and y components of the width distance vector COLOR TABLE 3 6 3 0 An integer that specifies
430. or use with a PostScript device 12 2 PostScript Workstation PostScript Workstation 12 2 Valid Bit Mask Values Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 61 xm0nn003D PostScript support 62 xm0nn003E Color PostScript 65 xmO0nn0041 Encapsulated PostScript 66 xmO0nn0042 Color encapsulated PostScript The value in the first part mOnn specifies the paper orientation and size The value in the second part is the hexadecimal value of the workstation type value 61 62 65 or 66 The possible values for m include the following Value Paper Orientation 0 Landscape The picture is wider than it is tall 1 Portrait The picture is taller than it is wide The possible values for nn include the following Value Paper Size 00 Paper size A 8 5 x 11 inches 01 Legal paper size 8 5 x 14 inches 02 Paper size B 11 x 17 inches 03 Paper size C 17 x 22 inches 04 Paper size D 22 x 34 inches 05 Paper size E 34 x 44 inches 10 Paper size A0 84 1 x 118 9 centimeters 20 Paper size A1 59 4 x 84 1 centimeters 30 Paper size A2 42 x 59 4 centimeters 40 Paper size A3 29 7 x 42 centimeters 50 Paper size A4 21 x 29 7 centimeters 60 Paper size A5 14 8 x 21 centimeters 70 Paper size B4 25 7 x 36 4 centimeters 80 Paper size B5 18 2 x 25 7 centimeters The default setting for the PostScript handler is landscape orientation using the paper size 8 5 x 11 inches The LPS40 printer supports si
431. ordinate array that you pass to GENERALIZED DRAWING PRIMITIVE For instance the GDP 108 Arc Center 2 Vectors and a Radius requires in the x and y coordinate array the following values The center point of the circular arc The vector origin point The second point in a vector whose angle determines an endpoint of the arc The second point in another vector whose angle determines another endpoint of the arc The second point in a third vector that specifies the distance used for the radius of the circular arc DEC GKS calculates the vector values from the vector origin point to specified second points and then applies those values to the center point of the circular arc Two useful vector origin points would be the center point of the arc or the origin of the world coordinate plane 0 0 0 0 Using the center point of the arc would allow you to specify vector values in direct relation to the coordinates used to form the arc using the origin of the world coordinate plane can make it easier for you to calculate vector values without tying them to the actual coordinate values of the arc For instance the center of the arc may move due to altered normalization transformations forcing you to keep altering your vector origin point according to the new position of the arc s center Figure C 1 illustrates the use of two different vector origin points GDPs C 2 Generalized Drawing Primitives GDPs Figure C
432. orkstation VWS Workstation 17 3 Device Considerations e When performing input DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS position the display window as defined by the input echo area device coordinates When generating output DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS position the display window as defined by the current workstation viewport If you resize or move the display window DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS perform an implicit call to SET WORKSTATION VIEWPORT and then performs an implicit regeneration which has the same effect as calling UPDATE WORKSTATION and passing the constant PERFORM_FLAG For more information on implicit regenerations see the control chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals e The second argument to OPEN WORKSTATION names a connection identifier for all the workstations supported by DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS except the VWS workstation The VWS graphics handler uses the string specified as the second argument to OPEN WORKSTATION to label the auxiliary window used for generated output If you specify CONID_DEFAULT as the second argument without defining the logical name PHIGS CONID for DEC PHIGS or GKS CONID for DEC GKS the label TT is centered at the top of the output window e The VWS graphics handler supports five marker sizes The handler maps the specified marker size scale factor to the nearest size marker The nominal marker size which is also the smallest marker produced by the VAXstation workstation is 0 00163984 device coordina
433. ors GKS NUM FIXED COLORS GKSnum fixed colors PHIGS NUM FIXED COLORS PHIGSnum fixed colors If the visual type of the screen is PseudoColor this option specifies the number of colors to allocate for use by free standing widgets such as the choice or valuator windows The default value is 6 and the minimum value is 4 For example on an OpenVMS system you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to allocate 32 colors for DEC PHIGS as follows DEFINE PHIGS NUM FIXED COLORS 32 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable to allocate 16 colors for DEC PHIGS as follows Q setenv GKSnum fixed colors 16 Retum Number of Greens in the Color Cube PHIGS NUM_GREEN_FOR_TRUE PHIGSnum_green_for_true Specifies the number of shades of green that DEC PHIGS allocates in the true color map The value of this option defaults to four shades of green This environment option is used only when DirectColor PseudoColor visuals are encountered PseudoColor visuals are common on PEX 8 plane workstations For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the number of greens to 2 as follows DEFINE PHIGS NUM_GREEN_FOR_TRUE 2 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the number of greens to 4 as follows Q setenv PHIGSnum_green_for_true 4 Return Number of Pseudo Colors PHIGS NUM_PSEUDO_COLORS PHIGSnum_pse
434. other display windows Remember that if you push a workstation window you push all input windows associated with that workstation ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier 108 Set Error Handling Mode 108 Set Error Handling Mode Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All workstations This escape allows you to suppress as much error checking as possible if set to off Otherwise DEC GKS executes normally and logs errors as necessary returning those errors specified by standard and internal errors ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 num
435. ottom row corresponds to choice number 18 E 8 Input Values Input Values E 3 Keypad Functionality Key Set Numbering Assignments Key Set 3 These shaded keys are the arrow keys The up arrow key corresponds to choice number 19 the down arrow key corresponds to choice number 20 the left arrow key corresponds to choice number 21 and the right arrow key corresponds to choice number 22 Tektronix 4107 The keys F1 through F4 return valid choice numbers when using this device Digital VT125 The arrow keys are located in a row in the top right portion of the keyboard E 3 4 Auxiliary Keypad Choice Supporting Devices Choice device number 3 Supporting Workstations The Digital ReGIS workstations These keys operate in the same manner as the numeric keypad for choice input The upper left shaded key is equivalent to choice prompt 1 the upper right to choice prompt 3 the lower left to choice prompt 4 and the lower right to choice prompt 6 In addition the keys located at the top of the keyboard labeled F7 through F20 correspond to the equivalent choice prompt The workstation triggers the choice prompt of the number you pressed You can use this keypad choice device number 3 on the VT240 if you have up to 20 choices If you have nine or fewer choices you can use the numeric keypad for choice device number 2 on either the VT125 or the VT240 E 3 5 The Lock Key Supporting Devices Ch
436. ou can change the representations of predefined bundle indexes using the SET REPRESENTATION functions For more information see the chapter on attribute functions in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding manuals The number of predefined color and bundle indexes may not be the maximum number allowed for a given workstation For instance DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS may predefine 10 bundles but allow a total of 15 bundle representations leaving 5 additional undefined bundle indexes All bundle representations can be changed To determine the maximum number of bundle indexes allowed for your workstation call the inquiry function INQUIRE WORKSTATION STATE TABLE LENGTHS for DEC PHIGS or INQUIRE MAXIMUM LENGTH OF WORKSTATION STATE TABLES for DEC GKS These functions return the maximum number of bundle indexes for the various kinds of bundle tables If you change the representation of a color index all output primitive bundle indexes using that color index change also The bundles use the newly defined representation of the color index Introduction 1 8 Color and Bundle Indexes e Color and bundle index changes either occur dynamically or require an implicit regeneration Implicit regenerations cause the loss of all output primitives not contained in structures or segments For complete information on these changes see the chapter on control functions in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding manuals 1 9 Device Independent HLHSR Mechanisms Support A
437. ou must define the following environment variables as shown for DEC GKS Terminal Logical Name Tektronix 4107 setenv GKS82 input devices physical device logical device Tektronix 4207 setenv GKS84 input devices physical device logical device Tektronix 4128 setenv GKS86 input devices physical device logical device Tektronix 4129 and VS500 setenv GKS88 input devices physical device logical device Tektronix 4107 and 4207 and VS500 Physical Device Information The following table lists all the physical devices the terminals on which they are valid and a brief description about how to use the device Device Terminal Number Description JOYDISK 4107 4207 Default THUMBWHEELS 4128 4129 VS500 Default MOUSE 4128 4129 VS500 4207 Mouse JOYSTICK 4128 4129 VS500 Joystick plugged into joystick port Note See the Tektronix programmer s reference guide for your terminal for more information on ABSOLUTE and RELATIVE modes 16 5 2 Using Logical Device Mappings Using a logical device name can become even more complex than defining physical devices For example you can separate different physical device to logical device mappings by commas as in the following example shown for DEC PHIGS OpenVMS DEFINE PHIGS 82 INPUT DEVICES MOUSE CHOICE ALL PICK ALL Return ULTRIX setenv PHIGS82 input devices mouse choice all pick all Retum Tektro
438. ows Workstation 4 1 Environment Options Table 4 1 Cont DECwindows Environment Options DEC GKS Syntax DEC PHIGS Syntax Font Mode GKS DECW FONT MODE GKSdecw font mode PHIGSS DECW FONT MODE PHIGSdecw font mode Specifies the mode that will replace the default behavior Valid values include no definition check default default check all all check all all check See Table 4 2 for more information on font modes For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the font mode as follows DEFINE PHIGSSDECW FONT MODE all Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the font mode as follows setenv GKSdecw font mode check Return Font Path GKS DECW FONT PATH GKSdecw font path PHIGS DECW FONT PATH PHIGSdecw font path Specifies the DECwindows font path The font path is the full directory specification for the font path or a list of font paths separated by a comma The default system directory is always searched before the user supplied font path For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the font path as follows DEFINE PHIGSSDECW FONT PATH Retum _ SYSTEM DISK USER FONTS Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the font path as follows setenv GKSdecw font path usr users lee fonts Return Note that this option is not currently
439. pe DDIF 3 3 HP7475 8 2 HPPCL 5 2 LA100 14 3 LA210 14 3 LA280 14 3 LA324 7 3 LA880 14 3 LA5O 14 3 LA75 14 3 LA84 14 3 LA86 14 3 LCGOI1 6 2 LJ250 7 2 LVP16 8 2 MPS 2000 8 2 PostScript 12 3 sixel printers 14 3 Language environment option DECwindows 4 5 OpenGL 10 3 OSF Motif 9 5 PEX 11 4 PostScript 12 1 LaserJet II printer See HPPCL LCG01 6 1 to 6 4 bit masks 6 2 device coordinate information 1 13 environment options 6 1 connection identifier 6 1 workstation type 6 1 environment variables 6 1 hatch values 6 3 landscape orientation 6 2 logical names 6 1 pixel inquiries 1 13 portrait orientation 6 2 workstation type 6 2 Levels of GKS 1 1 Lighting source color 1 12 11 15 support 1 12 11 15 Lighting equations DECwindows F 2 LA324 F 2 LJ250 F 2 Tektronix and VS500 F 2 VWS F 2 Lines of fonts A 1 LJ250 7 1 to 7 6 bit masks 7 2 depth cueing F 3 device coordinate information 1 13 environment option connection identifier 7 1 workstation type 7 1 hatches 7 4 landscape orientation 7 2 lighting equations F 2 pixel inquiries 1 13 portrait orientation 7 2 LJ250 and LA324 printers environment options 7 1 environment variables 7 1 logical names 7 1 workstation type 7 2 LN03 PLUS 14 1 to 14 7 See also Sixel printer bit masks 14 3 paper size 14 3 LNO03 J PLUS 14 1 to 14 7 See also Sixel printer bit masks 14 3 LN03_J PLUS PL
440. plotter and recorder 8 4 PostScript 12 4 sixel 14 4 Angles GDPs C 3 Anti aliasing environment option OpenGL 10 1 PEX 11 1 on OpenGL devices 10 9 ZLX 10 9 on PEX devices 11 10 PXG 11 10 SFB 11 12 SPXg and SPXgt 11 11 ZLX 11 13 Arc Center and Two Points on Arc C106 C 13 Arc Center Starting Point and Angle 110 C 20 Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius 108 C 16 Arc Three Points on Circumference C107 C 15 Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius C109 C 18 Arcs direction of formation C 5 ASCII VT125 240 string input E 5 Aspect ratio LA5O 14 4 Associate Workstation Type and Connection Identifier C110 B 14 Attributes DDIF color bundles 3 1 3 4 workstations bundles 1 10 Auxiliary keypad choice input E 9 Index Baseline A 1 Beep C103 B 8 Begin Transformation Block 160 B 31 Begin Transformation Block 3 C164 B 37 Bit mask constants 1 2 DDIF 3 2 DEClaser 14 3 DECwindows 4 9 HP7475 8 2 HPPCL 5 2 LA100 14 2 LA210 14 2 LA324 7 2 LA5O 14 2 LA75 14 2 LCGO1 6 2 LJ250 7 2 LN03 PLUS and LNO3 J PLUS 14 3 LVP16 8 2 MPS 2000 8 2 OpenGL 10 9 OSF Motif 9 8 PEX 11 13 PostScript 12 2 ReGIS devices 13 2 sixel printers 14 2 Tektronix 4014 15 2 Tektronix and VS500 16 3 VWS 17 2 Blues environment option PEX 11 5 Border size environment option DECwindows 4 2 OSF Motif 9 1 Bottom line A 1 Bundles DDIF in color 3 1 workstations 1
441. ported where the DEC GKS workstation is implemented in a windowing environment The user may change the workstation viewport through the window system The DEC GKS VAXstation User Interface System UIS workstation type and the DECwindows series of workstation types are windowing environments where this event can be reported See 255 Inquire Viewport Data for related viewport data information ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id on_off address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 109 Set Viewport Event The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier on_off A flag used to turn on or off the reporting of the change in the workstation viewport TRUE turns it on FALSE turns it off Escapes B 13 110 Associate Workstation Type and Conn
442. pplied data name For instance if the distance between points is more than twice the specified radius then DEC GKS cannot form the circle GDPs C 33 338 Filled Arc Center and Two Points on Arc 338 Filled Arc Center and Two Points on Arc Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms a filled circular arc using the center point the second point as a starting point of the arc and the third point as one of the following components e The second point located on the arc e The second point of a ray the first point is the center point whose intersection with the circular path of the arc determines the second point of the arc GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 3 pts array center point and beginning and end points of the arc gdp id 338 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Component Description arc type The arc type The element arc ype can be any of the following values Value Description 2 Fill the area formed by connecting both ends of the arc to
443. pport for DEC PHIGS D 2 Dial Support The smoothing field is an integer value between 1 and 255 The smoothing value averages return values and groups together identical values into a single return value The num_turns field is a float value that must be greater than 0 0 This value controls the number of turns 360 degree rotations from the dial that correspond to the maximum valuator range As this value increases the return granularity of the data increases The recommended default value is 2 0 All other functions involving VALUATOR devices are supported and operate as documented D 2 1 Spaceball Support The PCM server and IDL libraries have spaceball support for Motif and DECwindows device handlers On OpenVMS systems the PCM STARTUP COM file is new DEC PHIGS does not support the spaceball at this time However DEC PHIGS can perceive spaceball events as dial events valuator device numbers 5 to 12 the same as the PCM dials To use spaceballs as dials on OpenVMS systems perform the following steps 1 Make sure the files PCM STANDARD SS DAT and PCM DIALS ONIX SS DAT are in the SYS MANAGER directory 2 Replace the last line of PCM STANDARD SS DAT with the following line inc SYSSMANAGER PCMSDIALS ONLY SS DAT 3 Follow the editing instructions in PCM STARTUP COM for enabling the spaceball and execute the command file 4 Run the PHIGS application and use valuator devices 5 to 12 The PCM STANDARD SS DAT and PCM DIAL
444. pported Workstations Table 1 1 Cont Supported Devices Device Value Type Output OSF Motif PEX 241 Io Motif PEX workstation display OSF Motif PEX Drawable 242 Output Motif PEX workstation display OSF Motif PEX Widget 243 Uo Motif PEX workstation display DDIF 250 Output FILE Hewlett Packard LaserJet II 300 dpi 261 Output FILE OpenGL output 270 Output OpenGL workstation display OpenGL input output 271 Uo OpenGL workstation display OpenGL Drawable 272 Output OpenGL workstation display OpenGL Widget 273 T O OpenGL workstation display Japanese DECwindows output 310 Output Japanese DECwindows workstation display Japanese DECwindows 311 T O Japanese DECwindows workstation display Japanese DECwindows Drawable 312 Output Japanese DECwindows workstation display Japanese DECwindows Widget 313 T O Japanese DECwindows workstation display Japanese PEX output device 320 Output Japanese PEX workstation display Japanese PEX device using the 321 Uo Japanese PEX workstation display DECwindows Toolkit Japanese PEX device as an application 322 Output Japanese PEX workstation display window Japanese PEX device as a device within 323 Uo Japanese PEX workstation display an application window Japanese OSF Motif output 330 Output Japanese Motif workstation display Japanese OSF Motif 331 Uo Japanese Motif workstation display Japanese OSF Motif Drawable 332 Output Japanese Motif workstation display Japanese OSF Mot
445. ptimal performance The polyline set primitive may also use less memory when it is stored in a structure G 2 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 1 Device Independent Tuning G 1 4 Providing Optional Primitive Information With primitives such as fill area and fill area set you can define additional DEC PHIGS information that can improve performance For instance the argument shape flag allows an application to provide data about a primitive s shapes which can be defined as UNKNOWN COMPLEX NONCONVEX or CONVEX When a primitive s facets are defined as CONVEX performance can be greatly improved Another way of obtaining better performance is to specify a facet s normals In this way DEC PHIGS is not required to compute the normals which can unnecessarily slow performance Note however that certain types of optional data can decrease performance particularly if used in rendering G 1 5 Selecting the Drawing Mode Structure Versus Immediate Two drawing modes are available with DEC PHIGS structure mode and immediate mode In structure mode DEC PHIGS primitives are stored in structures and DEC PHIGS redraws the display from the internally stored display list Structure mode is appropriate when most of the graphic data remains static from frame to frame With PEX or OpenGL workstations structures and primitives can be stored in the PEX or OpenGL server respectively In these cases the pri
446. put Class 4s 64s dees AUR CR REA EER EERE ERROR OS 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 3 15 3 15 4 15 4 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 6 15 7 15 7 15 8 16 1 16 3 16 3 16 4 16 4 16 5 16 5 16 5 16 6 16 6 16 7 16 9 16 9 16 10 16 11 16 12 16 13 17 1 17 2 17 4 17 4 17 6 17 7 17 7 17 8 17 9 17 9 17 12 17 12 17 13 17 13 17 14 17 15 17 6 6 Valuator Input Class 0 0 0 cc eee nee 17 15 147 Font Support ek owas Oak Ra ook 6 eee OO R SE OR MEE ERE S 17 16 A Device Independent Fonts A 1 Device Independent Fonts lille A 1 A 2 Font Pile Formats 1 21 54 ret res due eg ex el oe RE A 1 A 3 Font Desig se oi ee REA EG ELAR ERS EERE ER SEEDER ERY RE ERA ER ados A 2 A 4 Stroke Pont File ic ie rosiy renen ede Ue egre whee a UR Se WS ee a A 3 A 4 1 Stroke Font File Header 0 0 0 ccc ee ens A 4 A 4 2 Character Descriptor 0 0 eee ees A 6 A 5 Stroke Font Environment Support selle A 7 A 5 1 Stroke Font Path i esses ae Side Rb IRURE Rob ea See a e s A 7 A 5 2 Stroke Font List and Stroke Font 0 0 cc cece eee A 7 A 6 Device Independent Fonts 0 00 ccc ees A 7 B Escapes B 1 Escape Function Changes selle B 1 B 1 1 New Escape Record Definitions llle B 2 B 2 List of Escape Identifiers 0 0 eee ene B 3 B 3 Escape Syntax oss chad aed Meade FAR BERS wR OETA CER RSME RS E B 5 100 Set Display Speed 1 0 cece eee B 6 101 Ge
447. put values for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 string class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial string NULL Echo area Varies by device Data record Input buffer size 20 ASCII characters Initial position 1 16 5 7 Stroke Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported stroke class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 workstations Siroke Device Input Device Types Input Action No mouse or puck 1 2 3 4 Enter point with space key Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U Delete last point with Delete key Mouse or puck 1 2 3 4 Enter point with mouse or puck button 3 Trigger with mouse or puck button 1 Break with mouse or puck button 2 Delete last point with Delete key Supported PETs The stroke input class for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 devices support PETs 1 and 4 Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 stroke class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial number of points 0 Initial transformation 0 Echo area Largest square Data record Stroke buffer size 80 points Editing position 0 x interval 0 01 in world coordinate points y interval 0 01 in world coordinate points Time interval 0 0 seconds
448. r Puck button down is selection and trigger Supported PETs The choice input class for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 devices support PETs 1 1 and 3 Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 choice class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET Initial choice Initial status Echo area Data record 1 1 STATUS_OK Varies by device Varies by device list of choice strings 16 5 4 Locator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported locator class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4100 and 4200 series and Digital VS500 workstations Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 9 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 5 Input Information Input Device Locator Device Types Input Action No mouse or puck Mouse 3 buttons Puck 4 buttons 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 Select with arrow keys or joydisk Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U Movement is selection and trigger Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 2 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 3 Movement is selection and trigger Select with puck Trigger with puck button 1 Bre
449. r Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance due to the vector values DEC GKS may attempt to form a straight line 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you specify a value other than 1 2 or 3 GDPs C 25 116 Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc 116 Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc C 26 GDPs Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms an elliptic arc using two focal points the beginning point of the elliptic arc and the end point as one of the following components e The end point located on the arc e The second point of a ray the first point is the first specified focal point of the ellipse whose intersection with the elliptic path of the arc determines the end point of the arc GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 4 pts array two focal points and two points on the circumference gdp id 116 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL data rec len sizeof Ggdprec The integer array contains the following element Compo
450. r array ws id edge index edge flag edge type color index address of real array scale factor address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id The workstation identifier edge index The edge index edge flag The edge flag edge type The edge type color index The edge color index scale factor A real number that specifies the edge width scale factor to be associated with the specified edge bundle index B 38 Escapes 202 Set Window Title 202 Set Window Title Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows workstation types 210 and 211 PEX workstation types 221 and 222 and OSF Motif workstation types 231 232 and 238 This escape changes the string displayed in the title bar ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of i
451. r double buffering is enabled 1 or disabled 0 501 Set Background Pixmap 501 Set Background Pixmap Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations On DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations the pixmap is defined as the background image When you specify a background pixmap DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS creates a pixmap and copies the application specified background pixmap to its own pixmap After this call DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS never references the application pixmap To modify the background pixmap inquire the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS background pixmap identifier and then modify it ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 1 address of long array pixmap_id out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input da
452. ray NULL address of string lengths array length_of_new_string address of string pointer array new_string number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier length_of_new_string An integer array containing the length of new_string in bytes new_string The new enter button character string 206 Set Icon Bitmaps 206 Set Icon Bitmaps Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows workstation types 210 and 211 PEX workstation type 221 and OSF Motif workstation type 231 Icon bitmaps are defined one integer per pixel The integer values are used in a device dependent manner to determine the icon appearance Where possible the integers will specify the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS color indexes to be used for each pixel The pixels are specified in row major order with pixel 0 0 being the upper left corner of the icon left to right then
453. ray ws_type bundle_index address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 4 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error_status control_flag edge_ type color_index address of real array edge_width address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_type The workstation type bundle_index The edge bundle index 355 Inquire Predefined Edge Representation The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status The error status control_flag The edge control flag edge_type The edge type color_index The edge color index edge_width The edge width scale factor Escapes B 73 356 Inquire Maximum Number of Edge Bundles 356 Inquire Maximum Number of Edge Bundles B 74 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes the maximum number of edge bundle table entries for the specified workstation type to the output data record ESCAPE
454. rd Color Map GKS USE STANDARD COLOR MAP GKSuse standard color map PHIGS USE STANDARD COLOR MAP PHIGSuse standard color map Allows workstations to share the same color map thereby preventing the display of false colors and the technicolor effect Before you open any workstations you must create and name a standard color map On UNIX systems the standard color map can be created using the xstdcmap executable For example on OpenVMS systems you specify the atom name for the standard color map as follows DEFINE PHIGSS USE STANDARD COLOR MAP Return RGB DEFAULT MAP This command specifies that the color map named RGB DEFAULT MAP is to be shared by all open workstations On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the standard color map as follows Return 9 setenv GKSuse standard color map Return RGB DEFAULT MAP This command specifies that the color map named RGB DEFAULT MAP is to be shared by all open workstations Return Title Size GKS DECW TITLE SIZE GKSdecw title size PHIGS DECW TITLE SIZE PHIGSdecw title size 9 6 OSF Motif Workstation When you run a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS application on an OSF Motif workstation geometry management conflicts may arise with different window managers If you get the error message TITLE SIZE attribute incorrect set this environment option to the value printed in the error message an
455. rd length accurately reflects whether you want to use the title components E 3 Keypad Functionality DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS allow you to press keys other than the arrow keys to control the input prompt This section describes how to use the various keypad buttons during input If you use logical input devices that take advantage of these keypads remember to provide the user with the information necessary to operate the device E 6 Input Values Input Values E 3 Keypad Functionality E 3 1 Cycling Logical Input Devices Supporting Devices All logical input devices used on a single workstation Supporting Workstations The Digital ReGIS and the Tektronix 4014 and 4107 workstations The shaded key to the far left is the PF1 key This key cycles through the devices present on a single workstation in a workstation determined order The second shaded key from the left is the PF2 key This key ends the cycling process and activates the prompts of all logical input devices present on a workstation If you are using the Tektronix 4107 terminal these keys are labeled F5 and F6 The third shaded key from the left is the PF3 key This key decreases the increment size of the cursor when it is moved with the arrow keys The shaded key to the far right is the PF4 key This key increases the increment size of the cursor when it is moved with the arrow keys When you use more than one logical input device
456. rd widget The pasteboard is a dialogue box that contains the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS output window widget and all input widgets You should not change the size of this widget ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 1 address of generic pointer array widget_id number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier The output data record contains the following element Component Description widget_id The pasteboard widget identifier 308 Inquire Menu Bar Identifier 308 Inquire Menu Bar Identifier Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows workstation types 210 and 211 PEX workstation type 221 and OSF Motif workstation type 231 This es
457. rdinate boundary this corresponds to the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS normalized device coordinate plane attribute settings and so forth Each metafile picture component contains data relevant to pictures created by a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS program Because the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS standards do not define graphics output in terms of pictures the CGM interpreter must use the display surface empty and new frame necessary at update entries in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS state list to determine when a picture ends and when a new picture begins CGM files contain components called elements Each element serves a distinct purpose and depending on its functionality includes applicable data CGM specifies an element by providing the encoding dependent opcode and argument data The opcode is a character or series of characters that specify the beginning of a distinct element 2 4 CGM Output CGM Output 2 5 CGM Structure The following list describes the types of elements in a metafile Category Description Delimiter elements Separate components within the metafile Metafile descriptor elements Describe the functional content and unique characteristics of the metafile Picture descriptor elements Define the limits of the VDC points and the parameter modes for the attribute elements Control elements Specify size and precision of the VDC points and format descriptions of the CGM elements Graphical primitive elements Describe the geometric objec
458. re e gfx motif uid e gfx motif en uid UID language specific file for English e gfx motif jp uid UID language specific file for Japanese To run the OSF Motif device handler the UID files must be in one of the following directories e The standard English language UID file area for OpenVMS systems DECWSUSER DEFAULTS defaults to SYSSLOGIN DECWSSYSTEM DEFAULTS e The standard English language UID file area for UNIX systems usr lib X11 uid On UNIX systems OSF Motif software searches the user s home directory prior to searching the standard UID file area You can place the UID file in any directory and set the environment option for the UID search path to that directory Specify the full directory path name but do not include the UID file names 9 14 Customization You can customize certain OSF Motif attributes through the use of an Xdefaults file OSF Motif Workstation 9 25 OSF Motif Workstation 9 14 Customization 9 14 1 Use of Xdefaults Files Attributes modified in the Xdefaults files can either be the widget class or the actual instance of the widget When using the widget class prefix the class specification with the application resource If this is not done all widgets of that class that run from the user s session will adopt the resource change To explicitly access the device widgets through the Xdefaults file use the following prefix e Nonpopup mode Different for each widget type Choice GFX
459. re 17 3 through Figure 17 6 illustrate the VWS hardware fonts 17 16 VWS Workstation VWS Workstation 17 7 Font Support Figure 17 3 VWS Font 200 Taber 1 BEXER pee SOLS 456785 gt Eo HPIBCDE FD HEIJKLMN P RZS TL Ye e YI bcderzhijkimnn porstuvexye dit ZK 3062 GE VWS Workstation 17 17 VWS Workstation 17 7 Font Support Figure 17 4 VWS Font 201 Bold Taber IT XK p 70423 456769 gt 7 R8CDEFG IILJKLHHOPURSTUVWXYZ 1 abede Fahi tk lana pqratuvuwugztbi ZK 3063 GE 17 18 VWS Workstation VWS Workstation 17 7 Font Support Figure 17 5 VWS Font 203 Bold Wide Taber LURACH C MH 7 0123 45678090 lt gt RBABRCDEFG HIAKLMNOPORSTUVWkK YZ E SJ _ abcdefagh igkimna PQestuwwnyziij ZK 3064 GE VWS Workstation 17 19 VWS Workstation 17 7 Font Support Figure 17 6 VWS Font 202 Wide Taber EU SES ff ee OL AGGYEBS Gf BANHCLIE Fei HI IJIKRLMANODORSTUY WHY 1 SI h cdes gHni ijktinno EMIT Stupewrows 17 7 ZK 3065 GE 17 20 VWS Workstation Device Independent Fonts A Device Independent Fonts This appendix provides information about the environment options and fonts that can be accessed from the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS software in stroke precision text A 1 Device Independent Fonts Font 1 is used as the standard DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS font for stroke precision text Figure A 6 il
460. re information on hardware dials and buttons support Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the DECwindows workstation valuator class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial value 0 5 Echo area Varies by device Data record Minimum 0 0 Maximum 1 0 4 11 Font Support The following sections describe how to manipulate the set of fonts supported by the DECwindows workstation They describe the default set of fonts for each language type 4 11 1 Default Fonts The default set of fonts for each language is determined by defining the language logical name or environment variable See Section 4 14 4 20 DECwindows Workstation 4 11 1 1 English and ISO Latin 1 Fonts DECwindows Workstation 4 11 Font Support The following fonts are the default fonts for English and ISO Latin 1 They are available in string precision only X Font Name Font Index Courier Medium R 1 Times Medium R 101 Times Medium I 102 Times Bold R 103 Times Bold I 104 Helvetica Medium R 105 Helvetica Medium O 106 Helvetica Bold R 107 Helvetica Bold O 108 Courier Medium R 109 Courier Medium O 110 Courier Bold R 111 Courier Bold O 112 Symbol 113 If the font mode option is all then all the fonts listed in Section 4 11 3 in the range 101 to 300 are included in the list of ava
461. reateMainWindow top level Parent main Name arg list Argument list arg count Argument count XtManageChild main widget Create Menu bar arg_count 0 menu_bar XmCreateMenuBar main_widget Parent menu bar Name arg list Argument list arg count Argument count XtManageChild menu bar Create an Exit cascade button v arg count 0 XtSetArg arg list arg count XmNlabelString XmStringCreateLtoR Exit arg count XtSetArg arg list arg count XmNactivateCallback callbacks arg count exit button XmCreateCascadeButton menu bar Parent exitbutton Name arg list Argument list arg count Argument count XtManageChild exit button continued on next page OpenGL Workstation 10 17 OpenGL Workstation 10 9 Examples Example 10 2 Cont Creating a Window for Workstation Type 273 Create a bulletin board widget for PHIGS uri arg count 0 XtSetArg arg list arg count XmNmarginWidth 0 arg count XtSetArg arg list arg count XmNmarginHeight 0 arg_count phigs widget XmCreateBulletinBoard main widget Parent phigs Name arg_list Argument list arg_count Argument count XtManageChild phigs_widget Place menu bar PHIGS window and scroll bars on main window XmMainWindowSetAreas main_widget Widget to set up menu_bar
462. record is packed with a connection identifier and how the escape function is called 440 Set Connection Identifier String Example B 1 Using the Fortran Escape Function 440 20 PROGRAM FB ESC EXAMPLE INCLUDE SYSSLIBRARY GKSSFORBND FOR INTEGER WKID KCONID WSTYPE PARAMETER WKID 1 KCONID 0 WSTYPE 211 INTEGER FCTID LIDR MLODR LODR INTEGER IL IA RL RA SL LSTR 1 ERRIND LDR CHARACTER 80 IDR ID STR 1 ODR REAL X 2 Y 2 Z 2 INIT GKS CALL GOPKS 1 10000 Define the conid string by use of Pack record and the Fortran binding Escape function 440 Here it is a remote DECwindows server IL 0 IA 0 RL 0 RA 0 SL 1 MLDR 10 LSTR 1 LEN NODE 0 0 STR 1 NODE 0 0 CALL GPREC IL IA RL RA SL LSTR STR MLDR ERRIND LDR IDR FCTID 440 MLODR 0 LODR 0 CALL GESC FCTID LDR IDR MLODR LODR ODR Open and Activate the Workstation CALL GOPWK WKID KCONID WSTYPE CALL GACWK WKID CALL GSDS WKID 0 1 Draw the object CALL GSLWSC 2 0 CALL GSPLCI 2 CALL GCRSG 1 Z 1 0 0 Z 2 0 0 X 1 0 0 Y 1 0 0 X 2 1 0 Y 2 1 0 CALL GPL3 2 X Y Z CALL GCLSG PAUSE CONTINUE CALL GDAWK WKID CALL GCLWK WKID CALL GCLKS END Escapes B 91 500 Set Double Buffering 500 Set Double Buffering B 92 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP
463. reference manuals for more information on PETs The OSF Motif workstation choice device types 9 and 10 support PETs 1 1 2 and 3 See Appendix D for more information on hardware dials and buttons support For OSF Motif devices keys F1 through F6 are available and are returned as choice numbers 21 through 26 See Appendix E for more information on keypad functionality Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the OSF Motif workstation choice class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial choice 1 Initial status STATUS_OK Echo area Varies by device Data record Varies by device list of choice strings 9 16 OSF Motif Workstation OSF Motif Workstation 9 11 Input Information 9 11 2 Locator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported locator class logical input devices for the OSF Motif workstation Locator Device Types Input Action 1 2 8 4 7 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 5 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 2 6 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 3 8 Movement is selection and trigger Supported PETs The locator input class for the OSF Motif workstation supports PETs 13 DEC GKS only 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS b
464. ress of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier struct_id The structure identifier for the structure that contains the range to be rendered start_whence Specifies what the start offset is relative to PEXBeginning 0 PEXCurrent 1 or PEXEnd 2 This argument is for PEX workstations only start_offset The offset to the element that starts the range to be rendered For PEX workstations the start_whence argument specifies the base of the offset For all other workstations the offset is from the beginning of the structure 532 Render Element Range Component Description end whence Specifies what the end offset is relative to PEXBeginning 0 PEXCurrent 1 or PEXEnd 2 This argument is for PEX workstations only end offset The offset to the element that ends the range to be rendered For PEX workstations the end whence argument specifies the base of the offset For all other workstations the offset is from the beginning of the structure To use the constants PEXBeginning PEXCurrent a
465. rface Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations The ReGIS devices and Tektronix 4014 terminals This escape generates a hardcopy of the currently displayed picture on a printer attached to the workstation ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier Escapes B 7 103 Beep 103 Beep B 8 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations The VWS workstations ReGIS devices VT output only devices Tektronix 4014 and Tektronix 4107 workstations DECwindows PEX workstations types 221 222
466. rgest square Data record Aperture 4 29 in device coordinates ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 7 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 5 Input Information The size of the pick aperture is limited by the hardware cursor map 13 5 4 String Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported string class logical input devices for the ReGIS devices String Device Device Types Input Action VT125 VT240 VT330 12 4 Enter characters from keyboard and VT340 Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U 3 ASCII encoded string Keypress enters character and triggers device VT284 and VT286 1 Enter characters from keyboard Input string with Kana Kanji conversion Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U 2 4 Enter characters from keyboard Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U 3 ASCII encoded string Keypress enters character and triggers device Supported PETs The string input class for the VT125 VT240 VT284 VT286 and VT340 terminals support PET 1 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the ReGIS string class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial string NULL Echo area Varies by device Data record Input buffer size 20 ASCII characters Initial position 1 13 5 5
467. ribes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Cross hatches 2 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 3 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 4 Horizontal lines 5 Vertical lines 6 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 1 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 8 Horizontal lines sparse 9 Vertical lines sparse 16 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 White cross hatches 2 White vertical zig zag Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 5 Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 4 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 Pattern and Hatch Values Style Index Appearance 3 White horizontal zig zag 4 White horizontal lines 5 White squares 6 Red brick i White vertical lines 8 White diagonal lines 9 Dense white dots 10 White dots 11 White dashed diagonals 12 White vertical dots 13 White sparse dots 14 White vertical dashes 15 Rainbow vertical lines 16 Black and white stone fence 16 5 Input Information Each of the following input class sections lists the supported logical input device numbers and supported prompt and echo type PET numbers For a complete description of these numbers see the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals For detailed information on cycling logical input devices and numer
468. ring Device Types Input Action VWS 1 3 4 Enter characters from keyboard Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U 2 SMG encoded string Keypress enters character and triggers device Japanese VWS 1 Enter characters from keyboard String input with Kana Kanji conversion Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U 2 SMG encoded string Keypress enters character and triggers device 3 4 Enter characters from keyboard Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U Supported PETs The string input class for VWS supports PET 1 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs 17 14 VWS Workstation VWS Workstation 17 6 Input Information Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for VWS string class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial string NULL Echo area Varies by device Data record Input buffer size 20 ASCII characters Initial position 1 17 6 5 Stroke Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported stroke class logical input devices for VAXstation workstations running VWS Stroke Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Points are entered with mouse motion Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Supported PETs The stroke input class for VWS supports PETs 1 3 and 4 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC
469. rior shading method or back interior shading method is set to COLOR the COLOR setting will be applied to both the front and back facing primitives Note The OpenGL driver supports only the NONE and COLOR settings of the SET INTERIOR SHADING METHOD and SET BACK INTERIOR SHADING METHOD functions e Facet Normals and Vertex Colors Quad mesh and triangle strip area primitives with facet normals and vertex colors defined are handled differently by the PEX and OpenGL drivers Unlike PEX OpenGL does not process facet normals Therefore when OpenGL encounters a quad mesh or triangle strip area primitive with facet normals and vertex colors defined it divides these primitives into separate rectangles and triangles respectively As a result these primitives may not be shaded in the same way on PEX and on OpenGL e Specular Highlighting Effects The specular exponent defined in the SET REFLECTANCE PROPERTIES function does not generate the same display on PEX and OpenGL workstations To achieve the PEX specular highlighting effects on OpenGL the application should multiply the specular exponent defined on PEX by two 10 9 Examples The examples in this section show how to create windows for workstation types 272 and 273 Because window creation for workstation types 270 and 271 is easier than for types 272 and 273 only the 272 and 273 type examples are provided in this document OpenGL Workstation 10 13 OpenGL Workstation 10 9
470. ription of these numbers see the chapter on input functions in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding manuals OSF Motif Workstation 9 15 OSF Motif Workstation 9 11 Input Information For all input classes you specify the echo area in device coordinates The OSF Motif workstation device coordinate system origin is in the lower left corner of the workstation display surface When you request input the OSF Motif device handler places the workstation viewport at the top of any other overlapping viewports Viewport appearance before and after the input request is unchanged 9 11 1 Choice Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported choice class logical input devices for the OSF Motif workstation Choice Device Types Input Action 1 6 7 8 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break by selecting Cancel button when echoing is enabled or with mouse button 2 when echoing is disabled Keypad key is selection and trigger Function key is selection and trigger Mouse button down is selection and trigger Mouse button up is selection and trigger oo fF WO DW Select and trigger software button box with mouse button 1 10 Select and trigger hardware button box by pressing button Supported PETs The choice input class for the OSF Motif workstation excluding choice device types 9 and 10 supports PETs 1 1 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding
471. rompt as follows FLAGGING IN OUT Return This setting should be saved in nonvolatile memory for the Tektronix 4100 series and 4207 devices as follows NVSAVE Return 16 3 2 Resetting the Terminal After an Interrupt If you cause a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS program to interrupt for instance by generating an access violation while the terminal is in vector mode you need to reset the terminal Follow the instructions under the type of Tektronix device you use Resetting the Tektronix 4107 and 4207 Devices To reset the terminal press the Setup key type the string reset and press Return If completely resetting your terminal is too time consuming perform the following steps 1 Press the Setup key 2 Type the string local and press Return 3 Press the Setup key again 4 Press Shift Ctrl and the dash key at the same time 5 Press the Setup key again 6 Type the string ocal no and press Return 7 Type the string acursor 2 and press Return 8 Type the string code ansi and press Return 9 Press the Setup key again This process resets only the values affected by the interrupted DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS program Resetting the Tektronix 4128 and 4129 and the Digital V8500 Devices To reset the terminal press the Reset button on the graphics processor If completely resetting your terminal is too time consuming perform the following steps Press the Local key Press Shift Ctrl a
472. rray NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance the point may be on the line segment between the focal points 346 Filled Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors 346 Filled Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms the elliptic arc using a center point one axis vector the largest of the two to establish the distance and direction of the major axis a second axis vector to establish the distance of the minor axis and two vectors whose directions are used to determine the arc endpoints GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n_points 6 pts_array the center point vector origin point two directional axis vectors and two end point vectors gdp_id 346 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL
473. rray NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier 162 Set Segment Highlighting Method 162 Set Segment Highlighting Method Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape sets the segment highlighting method but it does not change the highlighted state of a segment Use the SET HIGHLIGHTING function to change the segment highlighted state If the segment is currently highlighted when this escape is called and the segment highlighting method or attributes are different the segment is unhighlighted and then highlighted again with the new attributes This function may also cause a regeneration of the workstation display depending on the workstation regeneration mode ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 6 number of reals 2
474. rted by your printer see the documentation accompanying your printer The hardware fonts supported by the PostScript handler are as follows Font Description 101 Times Roman font 102 Times Italic font 103 Times Bold font 104 Times Bold Italic font 105 Helvetica font 106 Helvetica Oblique font 107 Helvetica Bold font 108 Helvetica Bold Oblique font 109 Courier font 110 Courier Oblique font 111 Courier Bold font 112 Courier Bold Oblique font 113 Symbol Math font 114 ITC Lubalin Graph Book font 115 ITC Lubalin Graph Book Oblique font 116 ITC Lubalin Graph Demi font 117 ITC Lubalin Graph Demi Oblique font 118 New Century Schoolbook Roman font 119 New Century Schoolbook Italic font 120 New Century Schoolbook Bold font 121 New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic font 122 ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book font 123 ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique font 124 ITC Avant Garde Demi font 125 ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique font 126 ITC Souvenir Light font 127 ITC Souvenir Light Italic font 128 ITC Souvenir Demi font 129 ITC Souvenir Demi Italic font 130 Helvetica Narrow font 131 Helvetica Narrow Oblique font PostScript Workstation 12 7 PostScript Workstation 12 6 Font Support Font Description 132 Helvetica Narrow Bold font 133 Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique font 134 ITC Bookman Light font 135 ITC Bookman Light Italic f
475. s setenv PHIGSconid node 0 Return In the previous commands replace node with your node name G 1 10 Using the Conditional Traversal Feature DEC PHIGS includes a feature called conditional traversal This feature enables the application to alter the DEC PHIGS traversal process by providing tests that control further execution Conditional traversal is most commonly used to determine how objects are drawn if an object will result in only a few pixels being drawn on the display DEC PHIGS draws a simple object which is faster than drawing a large and complex primitive See the conditional traversal section in the language binding manuals for more information Note This feature is not available in DEC PHIGS Version 3 2 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 5 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 1 Device Independent Tuning G 1 11 Using DEC PHIGS Performance Tools DEC PHIGS provides several methods for determining the source of performance problems within an application e DEC PHIGS tracer The DEC PHIGS tracer generates a log of DEC PHIGS commands that can be examined for redundant or unnecessary function calls Activate the trace on OpenVMS systems by entering DEFINE PHIGS DEBUG TRACE Return DEFINE PHIGSSTRACE OUTPUT TRACE OUT Return Activate the trace on UNIX systems by entering setenv PHIGSdebug TRACE Return setenv PHIGStrace output trace out Retum e DEC PHIGS timer The DEC
476. s B 68 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows OSF Motif and PostScript workstations This escape writes the line cap and line join facilities for the specified workstation type to the output data record See 151 Set Line Cap Style and 152 Set Line Join Style ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws type address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 5 ret cap styles ret join styles number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error status num cap styles ret cap styles num join styles ret join styles cap style list join style list address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws type The workstation type 352 Inquire Line Cap and Join Facilities The output data r
477. s 13 2 Tektronix 4014 15 2 OpenGL 10 1 to 10 18 Tektronix and VS500 16 3 anti aliasing modes 10 9 DEClaser 14 3 bit masks 10 9 HP7475 8 2 connection identifiers 10 8 HPPCL 5 2 environment options 10 1 LA100 14 2 anti aliasing 10 1 LA210 14 2 connection identifier 10 1 LA280 14 2 dials and buttons 10 2 LA324 7 2 display list indices 10 2 LA380 14 2 double buffering 10 2 LA50 14 2 language 10 3 LA75 14 2 stroke font index 10 3 LA84 14 2 stroke font list 10 3 LA86 14 2 stroke marker 10 4 LCGO1 6 2 structure storage 10 4 LJ250 7 2 vertex array extension 10 5 LN03 PLUS and LN03 J PLUS 14 3 visual depth 10 5 LVP16 8 2 visual properties 10 6 MPS 2000 8 2 workstation type 10 7 PostScript 12 2 environment variables 10 1 sixel printers 14 2 escapes 10 12 VWS 17 2 font support 10 12 Mathematical concepts F 1to F 3 input devices 10 12 Menu bar size logical names 10 1 environment option workstation type 10 9 DECwindows 4 5 OPEN WORKSTATION OSF Motif 9 5 DECwindows specific use 4 12 Metafiles OSF Motif specific use 9 12 CGM 2 1 to 2 17 OPEN WORKSTATION function CGM RMS format 2 13 VWS connection identifier 17 7 internal structure 2 1 OSF Motif 9 1 to 9 31 bit masks 9 8 cell array restrictions 9 12 Index 12 OSF Motif cont d choice input 9 16 connection identifier 9 7 9 12 default input values 9 15 device coordinate information 1 13 environment opti
478. s 0 watch_id DEC PHIGS ignores this argument The escape can only be called when a structure is open and DEC PHIGS assumes the range is within the currently open structure offset_start The offset start in the range 0 to n 1 where n is the current number of elements in the open structure offset_end The offset end in the range 0 to n where n is the current number of elements in the open structure If you pass a value for either offset that is less than the allowable range the offset is set to the low end of the range Similarly if you pass a value for either offset that is greater than the allowable range the offset is set to the high end of the allowable range The watch range is a closed interval This means that the watch range is null when the ending offset is equal to one less than the starting offset This also means that the offset end must be greater than or equal to the offset_start 1 As a result of the edits done between the activate BQUM range and deactivate BQUM range the watch range starting and ending offsets can change Elements inserted just before and just after the watch range are included in the watch range If the starting element is deleted the starting offset is incremented If the ending element is deleted the ending offset is decremented If the entire watch range is deleted the starting offset is set to be one greater than the end of the watch range and the ending offset is unchanged DEC PHIG
479. s and many other characteristics of the Japanese DDIF workstation type are the same as the English DDIF workstation type DDIF Output Workstation 3 9 DECwindows Workstation 4 DECwindows Workstation This chapter describes the information you need to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with the DECwindows workstation All information applies to both DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS unless otherwise indicated To use DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS on a DECwindows workstation the workstation must meet the following minimum requirements e Run X11 display e Have DECwindows software installed as a client where the application is actually being run e Have DECwindows software installed as a server on the display device e Run DECwindows XUI window manager on the display device Note DECwindows devices are not supported on OpenVMS Alpha and Digital UNIX systems 4 1 Environment Options Table 4 1 summarizes the environment options you can use with the DECwindows workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 1 DECwindows Workstation 4 1 Environment Options Table 4 1 DECwindows Environment Options DEC GKS Syntax DEC PHIGS Syntax Border Size GKS DECW BORDER SIZE GKSdecw border size PHIGS DECW BORDER SIZE PHIGSdecw border size When you run a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS application on a DECwindows workstation geometry management conflicts may arise with different window managers If you get the error message BORDER SIZE attribu
480. s are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns DDIF Output Workstation 3 5 DDIF Output Workstat 3 7 Pattern and Hatch ion Values 3 7 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the predefined fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance Cross hatches Dark diagonal lines at 45 degrees Dark diagonal lines at 45 degrees Dark horizontal lines Dark vertical lines Light diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Light diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Light horizontal lines sparse Light vertical lines sparse Diagonal lines at 45 degrees Diagonal lines at 45 degrees Horizontal lines Vertical lines Very light diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Very light diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Very light horizontal lines sparse Very light vertical lines sparse Darkest diagonal lines at 45 degrees Darkest diagonal lines at 45 degrees Darkest horizontal lines Darkest vertical lines Dark diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Dark diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse Dark horizontal lines sparse Dark vertical lines sparse Darkest diagona
481. s back to the on screen emulation if it is not For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the dials and buttons as follows DEFINE PHIGS USE DIALS AND BUTTONS 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the dials and buttons as follows 9 setenv PHIGSuse dials and buttons 1 Return For specific information on hardware dials and buttons support see Appendix D Input Mode GKS INPUT FIXED GKSinput fixed PHIGS INPUT FIXED PHIGSinput fixed 9 4 OSF Motif Workstation Specifies whether the widgets used to display choice string and valuator input devices are fixed to the main output widget value 1 or nonfixed to any widget value 0 When input is not fixed these widgets can be moved or minimized individually or will be minimized with the main widget The default value is 0 For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for fixed input mode as follows DEFINE PHIGSSINPUT FIXED 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for nonfixed input mode as follows setenv GKSinput fixed 0 Retum continued on next page OSF Motif Workstation 9 1 Environment Options Table 9 1 Cont OSF Motif Environment Options Syntax Description Language GKS LANGUAGE Specifies whether to use the English language value 0 Hebrew GKSlanguage language value 21 or Japanese langua
482. s defined by the input echo area in device coordinates When generating output DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS position the display window as defined by the current workstation viewport e DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS provide a method to inquire about the window identifier and widget identifiers using escapes The escapes and how to use them are described in Appendix B 11 5 Input Information The PEX devices support input devices in the same manner as DECwindows and OSF Motif devices See Chapter 4 for input information on the DECwindows workstation See Chapter 9 for input information on the OSF Motif workstation 11 6 Lighting Support for DEC PHIGS You can use the INQUIRE LIGHT SOURCE FACILITIES function to list the maximum number of light source indexes the maximum number of simultaneous active lights and the number of available light source types On PEX devices using the PXG option the maximum number of light source indexes is 32 and the maximum number of simultaneous active lights is 12 On PEX devices using the ZLX option the maximum number of light source indexes is 32 and the maximum number of simultaneous active lights is 32 PEX Workstation 11 15 PEX Workstation 11 7 Font Support 11 7 Font Support All PEX servers support 24 English fonts and a Japanese font value 10001 in stroke precision You can specify character or string precision for these fonts but the PEX handler always uses stroke precision To use Japanese fonts w
483. s for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for VWS locator class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial position 0 5 0 5 Initial transformation 0 Echo area Largest square Data record NULL 17 6 3 Pick Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported pick class logical input devices for VAXstation workstations running VWS VWS Workstation 17 13 VWS Workstation 17 6 Input Information Pick Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Supported PETs The pick input class for VWS supports PETs 1 2 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for VWS pick class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial pick identifier 1 Initial pick path NULL no path Initial status STATUS_OK Echo area Largest square Data record Aperture 0 0027 in device coordinates The size of the pick aperture is limited by the hardware cursor map 17 6 4 String Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported string class logical input devices for VAXstation workstations running VWS Device St
484. s logical input devices for the ReGIS devices Valuator Device Device Types Input Action VT125 VT240 VY284 1 2 3 4 Select with arrow keys VT286 VT330 and Trigger with Return VT340 without mouse Break with Ctrl U VT330 and VT340 with 1 2 3 4 Select with mouse mouse Trigger with mouse button 1 Break with mouse button 2 Supported PETs The valuator input class for the VT125 VT240 VT284 VT286 and VT340 terminals support PETs 1 2 and 3 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 9 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 5 Input Information Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the ReGIS valuator class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial value 0 5 Echo area Varies by device Data record Minimum 0 0 maximum 1 0 13 10 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation This chapter provides the information you need to use DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS with the following Digital printers LA50 LA75 LA84 LA86 LA100 LA210 LA280 LA380 LN03 PLUS and LN03_J PLUS DEClaser 2100 2200 and 2300 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support these printers as workstations of the category WSCAT_OUTPUT 14 1 Environment Options Table 14 1 sum
485. s may reduce performance by a factor of 10 because they add a considerable number of flushes to the output stream Therefore when performing speed critical drawing operations you should turn off all input devices that draw to the output display region for example locator stroke pick G 2 8 Other Tuning Techniques Depending on the graphics hardware used certain software operations can dramatically affect performance On graphics hardware that has a small amount of pixel memory such as the ZLX EI reducing the use of pixmaps can improve performance You can reduce the use of pixmaps for example by turning off the save under attribute using a smaller window turning off Z buffering and turning off double buffering On some graphics devices the use of certain software features may force the drawing to be done entirely by the software Because the accelerated features of the graphics hardware are not used to perform drawing operations the system performance is slower For instance on many graphics devices transparency is performed by the software G 3 Tuning on Digital UNIX Systems To ensure optimum performance of your three dimensional applications you may need to tune your Digital UNIX system For more information refer to the DEC Open3D Installation Guide for Digital UNIX Systems G 4 Tuning on OpenVMS VAX Systems The DECwindows server for three dimensional applications is very demanding on system resources and requires so
486. s of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL Escapes B 123 530 Set View Dirty Flag 530 Set View Dirty Flag B 124 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All This escape allows the application to control which views in a workstation will be repainted when DEC PHIGS updates the workstation The escape accepts pairs of view identifiers and flags The view identifiers must be in the range 0 to 31 The flags must be either 0 the view does not need to be updated or 1 the view needs to be updated ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data out_data number of integers 2 2 num_views number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id num_views view_id1 dirty_flag1 view_id2 dirty flag2 view id last dirty flag last address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL
487. s possible to form larger primitives For example if you had 10 polylines in a structure with a color change just before each polyline you could replace all color and polyline elements with a single call to the POLYLINE SET 3 WITH COLOR function Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 9 Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS G 2 Tuning DECwindows and OSF Motif Workstations G 2 4 Grouping Primitives with the Same Attributes Attribute structure elements slow down the geometry pipeline Digital recommends that you group primitives with the same attributes and avoid using unnecessary attribute settings G 2 5 Changing Attributes on OpenGL Devices Changing attributes can degrade performance on OpenGL devices if you use structure mode 4 When DEC PHIGS primitives and attributes are mapped to OpenGL commands many attributes can be stored in OpenGL server display lists If these attributes are changed during editing of the DEC PHIGS structure the next traversal will delete and re create the OpenGL display list to maintain the correct picture Therefore if attributes are changed frequently the constant reconstruction of the display list can have a negative effect on system performance The attributes that must be stored in OpenGL display lists are e Polyline related none e Polymarker related marker type e Text related all text attributes e Annotation text related All text attributes Annotation text style View index Composite
488. s with the ZLX options there are three available settings for anti aliasing each with a separate set of functionality and restrictions The three modes are e Mode 0 No anti aliasing When you use mode 0 no restrictions due to anti aliasing exist e Mode 1 DEC PHIGS renders anti aliased lines DEC PHIGS blends each pixel on the anti aliased line with the contents of the frame buffer The pixels are always written regardless of the computed value The width of the anti aliased line is a function of line width Anti aliasing will function whether the HLHSR_MODE mode is set to ZBUFFER or OFF If Z buffering is on the Z buffer will be updated when anti aliased lines are drawn e Mode 3 DEC PHIGS performs essentially the same operation as in mode 1 except it blends each pixel on the anti aliased line with the anti alias background color color table entry 0 rather than with the contents of the frame buffer All pixels are written regardless of their computed value This mode is useful for erasing anti aliasing lines in immediate mode as the line color must be set to the background color to erase an anti aliased line 11 3 Workstation Type Values When using the PEX workstation you can specify workstation types as hexadecimal bit masks The following table lists the different workstation type values you can use with PEX Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 220 x000000DC As an output only device 221 x000000
489. se Focal Points and Point on Circumference Filled Elliptic Arc Center Two Axis Vectors and Two Vectors Filled Elliptic Arc Focal Points and Two Points on Arc Filled Rectangle Two Corners Packed Cell Array Rectangle Two Corners 938 340 342 939 341 333 335 334 336 343 345 346 348 349 400 125 GDPs C 7 100 Disjoint Polyline 100 Disjoint Polyline C 8 GDPs Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP creates a series of line segments connecting the first and second specified points the third and fourth specified points and so forth GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points n points two for each requested line segment pts array n x and y coordinate values gdp id 100 data rec number of integers 0 data rec len number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array 0 address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 0 bytes Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the center point and the point on the circumference are the same point DEC GKS cannot form a circle 101 Circle
490. setenv PHIGSgl dl block size 1024 Retum Double Buffering PHIGS DOUBLE BUFFERING Specifies whether double buffering is enabled 1 or disabled 0 PHIGSdouble buffering When the value of this environment option is 1 DEC PHIGS attempts to use OpenGL double buffering The default value is FALSE 0 For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to enable double buffering as follows DEFINE PHIGS DOUBLE BUFFERING 1 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable to disable double buffering as follows 9 setenv PHIGSdouble buffering 0 Return continued on next page 10 2 OpenGL Workstation OpenGL Workstation 10 1 Environment Options Table 10 1 Cont OpenGL Environment Options Syntax Description Hardware Dials and Buttons Flag PHIGS USE_DIALS_AND BUTTONS PHIGSuse_dials_and_buttons Specifies whether the button and dial hardware must be available If the value of this option is set to 0 DEC PHIGS emulates the button and dial boxes with on screen widgets If the value is set to 1 DEC PHIGS aborts if the button and dial box hardware is not available If no value is specified for this option DEC PHIGS uses the buttons and dials if they are available or emulates them if they are not For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the dials and buttons as follows DEFINE PHIGS USE_DIALS_AND BU
491. size of PostScript operand stack When creating the printer description file note the following e Any or all settings can be omitted and they can appear in any order e The text after the exclamation point is a comment e Blank lines case and indentation are not significant e It is an error to omit a value or to specify a negative value 12 4 PostScript Workstation PostScript Workstation 12 4 Device Considerations e Ifyou specify a real number when an integer is needed the handler truncates the decimal portion of the real number e Where units are appropriate you can specify inch or em where cm is the default It is an error to specify a unit value for max_path or stack_size e Specifying a value for max_path or stack_size that is too large for the printer may cause the printer not DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS to generate a fatal error e Ifa single record of this file exceeds 512 bytes it is truncated If significant data is lost information other than comments or white space the handler generates an error e Ifyou attempt to use more than the allowable paper space by setting your margins to be smaller than the minimum margins supported by the printer the device clips the picture at its minimum margin boundary If the translation of the logical name or environment variable is invalid or does not exist or if you omit any of the settings in your description file the PostScript graphics handler uses the following d
492. size of the color table used by DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS If mm is 0 the workstation uses a color table of the default size If mm value is nonzero it determines the name of the color map size environment option to be translated The size of the color table can also affect the size and content of the bundle tables For more information concerning the effect of color table size on bundle tables see Section 1 8 Color Table Dynamics Valid values for n are 0 the default behavior and 1 dynamic color changes The value n is not supported by DEC PHIGS A value of 1 causes all SET COLOUR REPRESENTATION function calls to change the color representation immediately the application does not have to update the workstation OSF Motif Output Only Value 230 Workstation type 230 is output only In all other respects it behaves exactly like workstation type 231 which performs both input and output OSF Motif Input and Output Value 231 Workstation type 231 performs input and output and uses OSF Motif software Because of a restriction in OSF Motif software your application may not initialize OSF Motif if it uses workstation types 230 or 231 In addition you should not select events on any windows created by the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS workstation You can create widgets that are children of certain widgets belonging to the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS workstation Escape functions are provided to obtain the identifiers of these widgets The escapes are do
493. sk Values When using the DECwindows workstation you can specify workstation types as hexadecimal bit masks Use the bit mask values to control color mapping The DECwindows workstation contains a hardware color map that must be shared by all windows open on the workstation The DECwindows workstation associates a virtual color map that maintains the color values for that window If possible the DECwindows workstation maps the virtual color maps onto the hardware color map so that the virtual maps do not overlap That is all virtual color maps are resident DECwindows Workstation 4 9 DECwindows Workstation 4 3 Valid Bit Mask Values By default DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS allocate a color map of 64 entries where available on the hardware If you need a different size color map then you can use a workstation type modifier to specify the size of the color map By default for DEC GKS the DECwindows workstation color maps are shared among applications This means that changes to DEC GKS color representations do not occur dynamically You can use a workstation type modifier to tell DEC GKS to use a dynamically changeable color map instead of the default color map so that color representation changes happen immediately The following bit masks are valid for use with the DECwindows workstation Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 210 xOnmm00D2 As an output only device using DECwindows 211 x0nmm00D3 As an input output dev
494. sport mechanism For more information on local transports see Section G 1 9 When using DEC PHIGS e On OpenVMS systems define the logical name PHIGS CONID e On UNIX systems define the environment variable PHIGSconid When using DEC GKS e On OpenVMS systems define the logical name GKS CONID e On UNIX systems define the environment variable GKSconid The connection identifier also depends on which type of workstation you are using as defined by the display identifier The following sections are broken down by workstation type Workstation Types 220 221 240 and 241 For workstations of type 220 221 240 and 241 the connection identifier must be defined using a valid DECwindows and OSF Motif display identifier The syntax depends on the communication transport mechanism as shown in the following table Syntax Transport Mechanism nodename n n Connect to display using DECnet nodename n n Connect to display using TCP IP DECW DISPLAY OpenVMS specified by the SET DISPLAY command local 0 UNIX shared memory unix 0 UNIX domain sockets In the previous table e The nodename is the name of the host machine to which the display is physically connected e The first n is required It specifies the display on the host machine and is usually 0 e The second n is optional It is the screen identifier and defaults to 0 Workstation Types 222 and 242 For workstations of type 222 and 242 the connection identi
495. ss of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array nx value ny value address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id The workstation identifier x value The x coordinate value of a device coordinate point y value The y coordinate value of a device coordinate point B 86 Escapes 403 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a DC Point The output data record contains the following elements Component Description nx value The x coordinate value of the corresponding normalized device coordinate point ny value The y coordinate value of the corresponding normalized device coordinate point Escapes B 87 404 Inquire Extent of a GDP 404 Inquire Extent of a GDP Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes the coordinate range representing the GDP extent rectangle to its output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 4 number of reals 0
496. station 10 1 Environment Options Table 10 1 Cont OpenGL Environment Options Syntax Description Connection Identifier PHIGS CONID Specifies the default workstation connection information PHIGSconid On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier of a workstation as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID SYSTEM NAME 0 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the connection identifier of a workstation using the TCP IP transport as follows Q setenv PHIGSconid nodename n n Return Display List Indices PHIGS GL_DL_BLOCK_SIZE Specifies the size of the block of OpenGL display list indices PHIGSgl dl block size that is allocated by DEC PHIGS You can use this option to minimize the number of allocations which can enhance the performance of your application The default block size is 1024 Digital recommends that the block size be equal to the maximum number of primitive structure elements that will be present For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the block size of the OpenGL display list indices as follows DEFINE PHIGS GL DL BLOCK SIZE 10000 Retur On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the block size of the OpenGL display list indices as follows
497. station identifier The output data record contains the following element Component Description pixmap id The pixmap identifier 503 Inquire Background Pixmap 503 Inquire Background Pixmap Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations When double buffering is enabled and a background pixmap is defined on the DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations this escape allows the application to query the pixmap identifier ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 1 address of long array pixmap_id The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier The output data record contains the following e
498. status address of real array xmin xmax ymin ymax address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following elements Component Description ws id The workstation identifier segment id The segment name Escapes B 55 303 Inquire B 56 Escapes Segment Extent The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status The error status xmin xmax The four world coordinate XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX ymin ymax values of the segment s extent rectangle using the current transformation values 304 Inquire Window Identifiers 304 Inquire Window Identifiers Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All DECwindows workstation types PEX workstation types 221 222 and 223 and OSF Motif workstation types 231 232 and 233 This escape returns the display and window identifiers of the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS output window ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer arra
499. stroke input 15 7 terminal characteristics 15 3 valuator input 15 8 workstation type 15 2 Tektronix 4100 and 4200 device coordinate information 1 13 pixel inquiries 1 13 Tektronix 4107 16 1 to 16 13 cycling logical input devices E 7 programming considerations 16 3 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 choice input 16 9 data records 16 6 default input values 16 6 hatch values 16 5 locator input 16 9 logical input devices 16 6 PETs 16 6 pick input 16 10 string input 16 11 stroke input 16 12 valuator input 16 13 Tektronix 4128 16 1 to 16 13 programming considerations 16 3 Tektronix 4129 16 1 to 16 13 programming considerations 16 3 Tektronix 4207 16 1 to 16 13 programming considerations 16 3 Tektronix and VS500 bit masks 16 3 depth cueing F 3 lighting equations F 2 workstation type 16 3 Terminals DECwindows 4 1 Digital VS500 16 1 OSF Motif 9 1 ReGIS devices 13 1 Tektronix 4014 15 1 Tektronix 4107 16 1 Tektronix 4128 16 1 Tektronix 4129 16 1 Tektronix 4207 16 1 Text fonts A 1 Threshold value environment option LVP16 and HP GL 8 1 Title size environment option DECwindows 4 7 OSF Motif 9 6 Toggle Double Buffering Target 528 B 123 Toggling logical input devices E 7 overstrike insert string input E 4 Top line A 1 Transformations GDPs C 3 translating DC to NDC points B 82 B 86 translating WC to NDC points B 84 vector origin points C 4 Type workstation 1 2
500. t Component Description arc_type The arc type The element arc_type can be any of the following values Value Description 2 Fill the area formed by connecting both ends of the arc to its center 3 Fill the area formed by connecting the beginning and end points of the arc GDPs C 37 340 Filled Arc Center Two Vectors and a Radius C 38 GDPs Error Messages Error Number Message and Meaning 158 GDP primitive is not defined by the supplied data in routine name For instance if the center point and the point on the circumference are the same point DEC GKS cannot form a circle 159 Arc type is invalid in routine name For instance if you specify any value other than 2 or 3 341 Filled Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius 341 Filled Arc Two Points on Arc and Radius Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This GDP forms an arc from the specified beginning and end points and from the radius vector point The arc is drawn so that the circumference clockwise from the first point to the second is no greater than pi radians half of a circle GDP Function Arguments Argument Required Value n points 4 pts array two points vector origin point and radius vector point gdp id 841 data rec number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array arc type address of real array NULL address of string l
501. t Description ws_id marker_type offset_x offset_y The workstation identifier The marker type The valid values for this element are 1 to 128 The x offset to the center of the marker The y offset to the center of the marker Escapes B 101 513 Inquire Double Buffer Buffers 513 Inquire Double Buffer Buffers B 102 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations PEX and OSF Motif workstations Fetches the buffers used for Massachusetts Institute of Technology MIT double buffering This allows applications to use these buffers for their own purposes such as providing backing store If MIT double buffering is not being used 0 is returned for all values ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array buffer index address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 2 address of long array fr
502. t Values E 3 Keypad Functionality press the shaded key in the exact center the cursor moves to the center of the echo area If you press the rightmost shaded key in the second shaded row of keys the cursor moves to the middle of the right border of the rectangular echo area E 3 3 Numeric Keypad Choice Supporting Devices Choice device number 2 Supporting Workstations The Digital ReGIS and the Tektronix 4107 workstations Key Set 1 Key Set 2 Key Set 3 C EEE The workstations trigger the choice that corresponds to the number assigned to the shaded keys The number assignments are as follows Key Set Numbering Assignments Key Set 1 On most supporting workstations the numbers on these shaded keys correspond to the choice numbers 1 to 9 Incrementing from left to right the bottom row contains keys 1 2 and 3 the middle row contains keys 4 5 and 6 and the top row contains keys 7 8 and 9 Key Set 2 Beginning with the shaded key in the lower left corner the corresponding choice numbers increment as you move clockwise around the key set The shaded key in the lower left corner corresponds to choice number 10 The key in the upper left corner corresponds to choice number 11 the next key moving clockwise in the top row corresponds to choice number 12 and so forth The middle key on the b
503. t edge attributes to its output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL number of integers 9 number of reals 1 number of strings 0 address of integer array error status edge index edge flag edge type edge color edge flag ASF edge type ASF edge width ASF edge color ASF address of real array edge width address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL 254 Inquire Current Edge Attributes The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error status edge index edge flag edge type edge color edge flag ASF edge type ASF edge width ASF edge color ASF edge width The error status The current edge index The current edge control flag The current edge type The current edge color index The edge control flag aspect source flag ASF The edge type ASF The edge width scale factor ASF The edge color ASF The
504. t input E 4 VWS 17 14 Index 15 Stroke DECwindows 4 19 font list environment option OpenGL 10 3 PEX 11 8 keypad zoning mechanism E 5 keypad zoning of cursor E 7 logical input device numbers E 5 OSF Motif 9 19 ReGIS devices 13 8 Tektronix 4014 15 7 Tektronix 4107 and 4207 16 12 VWS 17 15 Stroke font internationalization support A 7 Stroke font file A 3 character descriptor A 3 A 6 elements A 7 header A 3 A 4 elements A 4 Stroke font file header A 4 elements A 4 Stroke marker environment option OpenGL 10 4 Structure metafiles 2 1 Structure storage environment option OpenGL 10 4 PEX 11 7 Supported depth cue modes 1 12 devices list 1 2 fonts list 1 6 light source types 1 12 11 15 patterns DEC GKS 1 12 pixel inquiries 1 13 Supported devices capabilities 1 1 Swap Buffers 515 B 104 T Tektronix 15 1 to 15 8 environment options 16 1 connection identifier 16 2 workstation type 16 2 environment variables 16 1 logical names 16 1 Tektronix 4014 bit masks 15 2 choice input 15 5 connection identifier 15 2 Index 16 Tektronix 4014 cont d default input values 15 5 device coordinate information 1 13 environment options 15 1 connection identifier 15 1 workstation type 15 1 environment variables 15 1 hatch values 15 4 locator input 15 5 logical input devices 15 5 logical names 15 1 pick input 15 6 pixel inquiries 1 13 string input 15 7
505. t system startup edit etc ttys to include the following ttyxx usr bin pcmserver dev ttyxx unknown on nomodem buttons and dials For more information on the syntax of etc ttys see the section on ttys in your operating system documentation To determine which tty devices are reserved for system use see the owner s manual for your system Using Digital UNIX Systems To start the server at system startup on a Digital UNIX system be sure the file etc inittab contains the following entry where xx is the port number pcm 3 respawn usr bin pcmserver dev ttyxx To start the system manually use the following command usr bin pemserver dev ttyxx amp Retum The parameter dev ttyxx is optional If you do not supply the parameter the server uses dev tty00 D 2 Dial Support DEC PHIGS supports the hardware dials as type VALUATOR Each dial on the dial box is a separate device numbered 5 to 12 Figure D 1 illustrates the numbering of the dials on the hardware dial box D 2 Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS Dials and Buttons Support for DEC PHIGS D 2 Dial Support Figure D 1 Hardware Dial Box COCOCOGO OOGG ZK 2226A GE Prompt and echo type PET 4 has been added for the INITIALIZE VALUATOR function so you can use hardware dials in your application For example with the DEC PHIGS C binding interface PET 4 has the following data record typedef struct Pfloat low Pfloat high Char t
506. ta number of integers 6 number of reals 2 number of strings 0 address of integer array error_status high_method color_index linetype fill_style fill_index address of real array line_width expand_factor address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier B 58 Escapes 305 Inquire Segment Highlighting Method The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error_status high_method color_index linetype fill_style fill_index line_width expand_facto The error status The highlighting method The color index to use with the highlighting method color The line type to use with the highlighting method The fill area attributes to use with the highlighting method The fill index to use with the highlighting method The line width scale factor for the line drawn around the extent of the item being highlighted r The distance the highlighted region should extend around the item being highlighted It is defined in terms of a scale factor of the nominal line width The high_method element is one of the following constants Value Description 0 Use the workstation dependent default highlighting method
507. ta record contains the following elements Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier pixmap_id The pixmap identifier Escapes B 93 502 Inquire Double Buffer Pixmap 502 Inquire Double Buffer Pixmap B 94 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations When double buffering is enabled on the DECwindows PEX and OSF Motif workstations DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS writes to a pixmap This escape queries the X11 pixmap identifier so the application can write to that pixmap ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 1 address of long array pixmap id The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws id The work
508. tation type On OpenVMS systems the startup procedure PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for an OpenGL workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSS WSTYPE 270 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable name for an OpenGL workstation type as follows setenv PHIGSwstype 271 Return OpenGL Workstation 10 7 OpenGL Workstation 10 2 Connection Identifier 10 2 Connection Identifier A connection identifier must be defined for DEC PHIGS to work with the OpenGL devices If you do not define the connection identifier the OPEN WORKSTATION function returns an error You can define the connection identifier in your code or in a logical name table to which your program has access The definition depends on whether you are running under the OpenVMS or UNIX operating system and on the communication transport mechanism For more information on local transports see Section G 1 9 When using DEC PHIGS on OpenVMS systems define the logical name PHIGS CONID When using DEC PHIGS on UNIX systems define the environment variable PHIGSconid The connection identifier also depends on which type of workstation you are using as defined by the display identifier The following sections are broken down by workstation type Workstation Types 270 and 271 For workstations of type 270 and 271 the connection identifier must be de
509. te incorrect set this logical name to the value printed in the error message and run the application again For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the border size as follows DEFINE PHIGS DECW BORDER SIZE 20 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the border size as follows Q setenv GKSdecw border size 20 Retum Color Map Size GKS DECW COLORMAP SIZEmmm GKSdecw colormap sizemmm PHIGS DECW COLORMAP SIZEmmm PHIGSdecw colormap sizemmm Used in conjunction with the mm field in the workstation type bit mask to specify the size of the color table allocated by the workstation For example if the bit mask is set to FF and you define this option to be 38 DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS will use 38 colors If you do not define this option DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS will use 255 colors because the hexadecimal value FF is 255 You cannot allocate more than 255 colors On OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name to use 36 colors in the color map as follows DEFINE PHIGSS DECW COLORMAP SIZE255 36 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable to use 16 colors in the color map as follows setenv GKSdecw colormap size255 16 Retum Connection Identifier GKS CONID GKSconid PHIGS CONID PHIGSconid 4 2 DECwindows Workstation Specifies the default workstation connection information On OpenVMS
510. te units meters The largest marker produced by the VWS workstation is 0 010167 device coordinate units 17 4 Cell Array Restriction for DEC GKS DEC GKS uses the following criteria to determine whether to simulate a cell array e The projection type is PERSPECTIVE You set the projection type by calling the function EVALUATE VIEW MAPPING MATRIX 3 e The cell array is clipped e The borders of the cell array are not parallel to the x and y axes of the device For better performance DEC GKS also simulates cell arrays if the size of the cells is big in relation to the number of cells 17 5 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fill area pattern and hatch values for color VAXstation workstations The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns VWS Workstation 17 7 VWS Workstation 17 5 Pattern and Hatch Values 17 5 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance Cross hatches Dark diagonal lines at 45 d
511. ter 52 xm0nn0034 Digital LVP16 pen plotter 11 x 17 53 xm0nn0035 HP7550 pen plotter 54 xm0nn0036 HP7580 pen plotter 55 xm0nn0037 MPS 2000 film recorder 56 xm0nn0038 HP7585 pen plotter The value in the first part mOnn specifies the paper orientation and size The value in the second part is the hexadecimal value of the workstation type for example 33 for the LVP16 8 5x11 and HP7475 plotters 8 2 LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation LVP16 and HP GL Graphics Protocol Workstation 8 2 Valid Bit Mask Values The possible values for m include the following Value Paper Orientation 0 Landscape The picture is wider than it is tall 1 Portrait The picture is taller than it is wide The possible values for nn include the following Value Paper Size 00 Paper size A 8 5 x 11 inches 01 Legal paper size 8 5 x 14 inches 02 Paper size B 11 x 17 inches 03 Paper size C 17 x 22 inches 04 Paper size D 22 x 34 inches 05 Paper size E 34 x 44 inches 10 Paper size A0 84 1 x 118 9 centimeters 20 Paper size A1 59 4 x 84 1 centimeters 30 Paper size A2 42 x 59 4 centimeters 40 Paper size A3 29 7 x 42 centimeters 50 Paper size A4 21 x 29 7 centimeters 60 Paper size A5 14 8 x 21 centimeters 70 Paper size B4 25 7 x 36 4 centimeters 80 Paper size B5 18 2 x 25 7 centimeters The default setting for all handlers is landscape orientation using 8 5 x 11 inch paper The LVP16 HP7475
512. tes G 10 G 2 5 Changing Attributes on OpenGL Devices 000000 G 10 G 2 6 Choosing a Double Buffering Method Pixmap Versus MIT PEX Only ade tey hed eai de e Soter uda ek aha malade duet ede hs ead E G 10 G 2 7 Disabling Input Devices 0 ee ee G 11 G 2 8 Other Tuning Techniques llle G 11 G 3 Tuning on Digital UNIX Systems 1 0 0 0 cee eee G 11 G 4 Tuning on OpenVMS VAX Systems llle nes G 11 G 4 1 Minimum System Requirements llle G 11 G 4 2 System Requirements for Large Applications G 12 G 4 3 Optimizing Performance llle eee G 13 G 5 Tuning on OpenVMS Alpha Systems 2 0 20 cee eee eee G 14 Index Examples 1 1 GKS PREDEF Program Example l l 1 7 1 2 PHIGS PREDEF Program Example 000 ee eeee 1 9 2 1 Metafile Creation 0 0 ees 2 16 2 2 Clear Text Encoded Metafile 0 0 0 0 cece eee 2 16 10 1 Creating a Window for Workstation Type 272 Ln 10 14 10 2 Creating a Window for Workstation Type 273 lun 10 15 B 1 Using the Fortran Escape Function 440 00000 B 91 Figures 2 1 CGM Components lese 2 4 2 2 CGM Basic Data Encoding Format 000 ee eee 2 6 2 3 CGM Basic Encoding Format for Real Numbers 2 7 4 1 Menu Bats oth sera enhe bdahe bane e back ares a oad Danes ddan 4
513. the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN You should review this appendix before working with the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS input functions If you need further workstation specific input information see the device specific chapters in this manual This chapter describes the following input values that are available for all devices supported by DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS e Input devices e Prompt and echo types PETs e Data records e Keypad functionality E 1 Logical Input Device Numbers Logical input device numbers determine the physical device such as a keypad or a mouse used to control the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS logical input devices You pass the device numbers described in this section to the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS input functions DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS define at least four logical input device numbers for each input class If the workstation does not support the device number you specify the workstation uses device number 1 Several of the input devices use special sections of the keyboard available on specific workstations If you use these devices you should remember that you need to provide the user with the information necessary to operate them For further information concerning input keypad functionality see Section E 3 To allow you to use several logical input devices of the same class during sample or event mode DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS define different echo areas for devices of a single class The device speci
514. the picture portion of the CGM file This information is used by a CGM interpreter in an attempt to use the original font that the generating application intended The contents of the font list are selected through a logical name on OpenVMS systems or through an environment variable on UNIX systems See Table 2 1 for the logical name and environment variable For DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS the values for the environment options are as follows Value Description PostScript Use the PostScript font list only Hershey Use the Hershey font list only All Use both the PostScript and Hershey font lists If no environment option is provided the default value is Hershey The CGM font list for Hershey contains the following elements e DEC ISO_LATIN_SIMPLEX e DEC ISO_LATIN_SIMPLEX e HERSHEY CARTOGRAPHIC_ROMAN_GREEK e HERSHEY SIMPLEX_ROMAN e HERSHEY SIMPLEX GREEK e HERSHEY SIMPLEX_ SCRIPT e HERSHEY MEDIUM COMPLEX ROMAN e HERSHEY MEDIUM COMPLEX GREEK e HERSHEY MEDIUM COMPLEX ITALIC 2 14 CGM Output CGM Output 2 12 Font Selection e HERSHEY COMPLEX ROMAN e HERSHEY COMPLEX GREEK e HERSHEY COMPLEX ITALIC e HERSHEY DUPLEX ROMAN e HERSHEY COMPLEX SCRIPT e HERSHEY COMPLEX CYRILLIC e HERSHEYTRIPLEX ROMAN e HERSHEY TRIPLEX_ITALIC e HERSHEY GOTHIC_GERMAN e HERSHEY GOTHIC_ENGLISH e HERSHEY GOTHIC_ITALIAN e HERSHEY SYMBOL SET 1 e HERSHEY SYMBOL SET 2 e HERSHEY SYMBOL SET 3 e HERSHEY MATH SYMBOLS The CGM font list for
515. the positive and negative directions for the VDC plane BACKGROUND 3 2 2 6 A set of red green and blue intensity values for the COLOR BACKCOLR background color VDC INTEGER PREC 3 3 2 0 A value of an encoding dependent data type VDCINTEGERPREC containing the precision for integers used to designate VDC points VDC REAL PREC 3 3 2 1 A value of an encoding dependent data type VDCREALPREC containing the precision for real numbers used to designate VDC points AUXILIARY COLOR 3 3 2 2 An integer auxiliary color index used to color a AUXCOLR primitive in transparency mode continued on next page CGM Output 2 9 CGM Output 2 8 Element Descriptions Table 2 2 Cont CGM Element Descriptions Element Name Opcode Argument Data Description TRANSPARENCY 3 3 2 3 An enumerated type that specifies whether the TRANSPARENCY transparency color is used to draw subsequent primitives OFF ON CLIP RECTANGLE 3 3 2 4 Two VDC point values specifying the clipping CLIPRECT rectangle range CLIP INDICATOR 3 3 2 5 An enumerated type specifying the clipping status CLIP OFF ON POLYLINE 2 0 A set of points each consecutive point connected to INCRLINE the last by a line DISJOINT POLYLINE 2 1 A set of points the first connected to the second INCRDISJTLINE the third connected to the fourth and so on leaving spaces in the line POLYMARKER 2 2 A set of points a special character drawn at each INCRMARKER point TEXT 2 3 A VDC starting p
516. tion 0 Use the workstation dependent default highlighting method 1 Highlight the segment by drawing it in complement mode 2 Highlight the segment by drawing it using the color index specified in the integer array 3 Highlight the segment by drawing an extent box around it using the line attributes specified in the integer and float arrays The extent box is drawn using complement mode The extent will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width 4 Highlight the segment by drawing a complement mode fill area around it using the fill area attributes specified in the integer array The extent box will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width 5 Highlight the segment by drawing both a line and fill area around it using the attributes specified The extent box will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width If the highlighting method is not available on the workstation on which the segment is displayed the default value of 0 is used 164 Begin Transformation Block 3 164 Begin Transformation Block 3 Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape applies the specified transformation to all subsequently drawn primitives not contained in segments The transformation continues until you call the escape function 161 End Transformation Block or until you open a segment ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value
517. tion 0 Use the workstation dependent default highlighting method 1 Highlight the segment by drawing it in complement mode 2 Highlight the segment by drawing it using the color index specified in the integer array 3 Highlight the segment by drawing an extent box around it using the line attributes specified in the integer and float arrays The extent box is drawn using complement mode The extent will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width 4 Highlight the segment by drawing a complement mode fill area around it using the fill area attributes specified in the integer array The extent box will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width 5 Highlight the segment by drawing both a line and fill area around it using the attributes specified The extent box will be expanded by expand_factor times the nominal line width If the highlighting method is not available on the workstation on which the segment is displayed the default value of 0 is used Escapes B 61 307 Inquire Pasteboard Identifier 307 Inquire Pasteboard Identifier B 62 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations DECwindows workstation types 210 and 211 PEX workstation type 221 and OSF Motif workstation type 231 This escape is for OpenVMS systems only This escape returns the widget identifier of the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS pasteboa
518. tion for DECwindows software on PEX workstations is identical For more information on PEX workstation types see Chapter 11 4 4 Programming Considerations You should review the following information before programming with DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS using the DECwindows workstation DECwindows Workstation 4 11 DECwindows Workstation 4 4 Programming Considerations 4 4 1 Display Size Windows and Echo Areas The DECwindows workstation provides a banner that runs across the top of each window and borders that line each side DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS do not include borders and banners in specified window sizes or input echo area sizes You need to adjust your window and echo area sizes for banners and borders Use the INQUIRE DISPLAY SPACE SIZE 3 function to adjust the input echo areas so they do not overlap the output drawing area 4 5 Cell Array Restriction for DEC GKS DEC GKS uses the following criteria to determine whether to simulate a cell array e The projection type is PERSPECTIVE You set the projection type by calling the function EVALUATE VIEW MAPPING MATRIX 3 e The cell array is clipped e The borders of the cell array are not parallel to the x and y axes of the device For better performance DEC GKS also simulates cell arrays if the size of the cells is big in relation to the number of cells 4 6 General Information This section provides general information you should consider when programming with DEC GKS and
519. to 180 degrees When you use the OpenGL driver however this angle can be only from 0 to 90 degrees Note though that the OpenGL driver does support the case when the DEC PHIGS spread angle is 180 degrees 10 12 OpenGL Workstation OpenGL Workstation 10 8 Limitations e Reflectance Properties DEC PHIGS allows reflectance be to calculated for front facing area primitives back facing area primitives or both The OpenGL driver however calculates reflectance only for both front and back facing area primitives it does not allow reflectance calculations for a single side Therefore if the facet distinguishing mode is YES and the application specifies that front facing area primitives are lit and back facing area primitives are not OpenGL will light both front and back facing primitives according to the setting of the SET REFLECTANCE MODEL function If instead the back facing primitives are lit and the front facing primitives are not both sets of primitives will be lit according to the setting of the SET BACK REFLECTANCE MODEL function e Shading DEC PHIGS allows an application to specify an interior shading method and a back interior shading method When the facet distinguishing mode is YES both shading methods are applied to area primitives The OpenGL driver however does not allow different shading methods to be applied to front and back facing area primitives As a result if the facet distinguishing mode is YES and the inte
520. to the function OPEN WORKSTATION You can also compare the workstation type constant with the values returned by the INQUIRE WORKSTATION CONNECTION AND TYPE function To determine the corresponding workstation type constant names for a specific language binding see the language definitions file Table 1 1 lists the supported workstation types The use of FILE in the Output column refers to whether the output of the workstation is a file Unless otherwise indicated all devices are supported on both OpenVMS VAX and ULTRIX systems For detailed information about any device refer to the chapter describing this device Table 1 1 Supported Devices Introduction 1 4 Supported Workstations Device Value Type Output Default workstation type 0 Default CGM Metafile 7 Output FILE Digital VT125 10 Output FILE Digital VT125 color 11 T O Terminal display Digital VT125 monochrome 12 T O Terminal display Digital VT240 color 13 T O Terminal display Digital VT240 monochrome 14 T O Terminal display Digital LCGO01 printer 15 Output FILE Digital VT330 monochrome 16 T O Terminal display Digital VT340 color 17 UO Terminal display LA34 printer graphics 31 Output FILE LA100 printer 31 Output FILE LA50 printer 32 Output FILE LA210 printer 34 Output FILE LA75 printer 35 Output FILE LN03 PLUS printer 38 Output FILE DEClaser 2100 2200 printer 39 Output FILE VWS workstation 41 L
521. ts in the picture Attribute elements Describe the various appearances of the graphics elements Escape elements Describe device and system specific functionality External elements Pass information not needed for the creation of a picture for example a message sent to the user of the metafile Although CGM defines many data types that correspond to graphics data for example an index data type for bundle index specifications there are a few data types from which all others are derived The following list presents all the basic data types of information contained in a metafile Data Type Description Integer Integer values such as bundle indexes integer data and so forth Real Real values such as VDC distance values red green and blue color intensities coordinate points and so forth String Character strings such as metafile description titles and string data Point list Lists of points such as polyline points polymarker points and so forth The characters used to specify an opcode and its data are encoding specific The following sections provide a brief overview of the supported encodings 2 6 Character Encoding The CGM character encoding provides a character code for each of the element opcodes and provides storage saving methods for storing argument data This is the most storage efficient encoding The CGM character encoding specifies either one or two 7 bit ASCII characters that correspond to each element op
522. tual map then the first part also specifies the number of color indexes to reserve in the physical color map section The value in the second part 0029 or 008D is the hexadecimal value of the VWS workstation type value 41 or 141 Acceptable values for m are as follows Value Description 0 Specifies that the virtual color map need not be made resident Because most DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS programs usually do not execute in conjunction with other programs that require overlapping of virtual color maps this is the default VWS workstation setting 1 Specifies that you wish to have a resident virtual color map The VWS graphics handler converts nn to a decimal value appends it to the logical name VWS COLOR MAP SIZE and checks to see if there is a valid translation for that logical name If the logical name translates to a valid integer the graphics handler reserves the number of colors specified by the translation If there is no valid translation the graphics handler uses the appended decimal number nn as the number of reserved colors For example for DEC PHIGS if you specified 20 as the hexadecimal value for nn the graphics handler attempts to translate the logical name PHIGS VWS COLOR MAP SIZE 32 If it does not translate to a valid integer the graphics handler reserves 32 colors in the physical color map section Acceptable values for nn depend on the number of previously reserved indexes Use caution when reserving
523. turns the widget identifier of the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS application shell widget ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 1 address of generic pointer array widget_id number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws_id The workstation identifier The output data record contains the following element Component Description widget_id The shell widget identifier 350 Inquire List of Available Escapes 350 Inquire List of Available Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS supported workstations This escape returns the list of escapes supported by a specified workstation ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data
524. type 241 performs input and output and uses the OSF Motif Toolkit and OSF Motif software Because of a restriction in the DECwindows Toolkit and OSF Motif software your application may not initialize the DECwindows Toolkit and OSF Motif software if it uses workstation type 221 In addition you should not select events on any windows created by the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstation You can create widgets that are children of certain widgets belonging to the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstation Escape functions are provided to obtain the identifiers of these widgets When the user or window manager resizes workstations of types 221 and 241 the picture may be clipped at the new window boundaries A push button on the menu bar enables the user to restore the window to its default size and location Scroll bars enable the user to pan the displayable region of a clipped picture PEX Drawable Values 222 and 242 Workstation types 222 and 242 use a preexisting drawable and are output only Your application must open the display and create the drawable before calling the OPEN WORKSTATION function and it must not close the display or destroy the drawable until after it has called the CLOSE WORKSTATION function These workstations do not select any X events Consequently your application is free to select any X events on this or any other drawable In addition these workstations will not redraw themselves when exposed or when an icon is expanded to
525. ual to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the printer Note For many of the sixel printers you can specify the device type using the SET TERMINAL DEVICE sixel device command The value sixel device specifies the particular printer you are using For more information see the SET TERMINAL command in the OpenVMS DCL Dictionary For more information on device allocation see the ALLOCATE command in the OpenVMS DCL Dictionary When using the sixel devices as either allocated or queued devices on UNIX systems you need to set terminal characteristics by entering the following command stty pass8 echo new speed dev ttynn Return Replace speed with a value equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the printer Replace nn with the port number 14 4 Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation Sixel Graphics Protocol Workstation 14 4 Pattern and Hatch Values 14 4 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fill area pattern and hatch values for the Digital sixel printers The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation D
526. uck button The measure is the choice number corresponding to the button released The left button corresponds to choice 1 the middle button corresponds to choice 2 the right button corresponds to choice 3 If you use a puck the bottom button corresponds to choice 4 E 2 2 Locator Devices The following section describes the locator class logical input devices and specifies which DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations support each device Digital Workstations Using one of the Digital workstations you can use the Lock key feature for any of the locator class logical input devices For more information see Section E 3 E 2 2 1 Locator 1 2 3 and 4 Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS workstations of category OUTIN For workstations that do not have a mouse or puck these devices require you to press the arrow keys to move the locator prompt To trigger the device press Return To cause a break during request mode press Ctrl U For workstations that do have a mouse or puck these devices require you to move the tracking device to move the locator prompt To trigger the device press the left button To cause a break during request mode press the middle button on the mouse or the top button on the puck On Digital ReGIS terminals and on the Tektronix 4107 workstations you can use the numeric keypad as a zoning mechanism using device numbers 1 and 2 For more information concerning the numeric keypad see Section E 3
527. udo_colors 11 6 PEX Workstation Specifies the number of color cells that DEC PHIGS uses for its pseudo color table The value of this option defaults to 64 color cells For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the number of pseudo colors to 0 as follows DEFINE PHIGSSNUM PSEUDO COLORS 0 Retur On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the number of pseudo colors to 32 as follows setenv PHIGSnum pseudo colors 32 Retum continued on next page PEX Workstation 11 1 Environment Options Table 11 1 Cont PEX Environment Options Syntax Description Number of Reds in the Color Cube PHIGS NUM_RED_FOR_TRUE PHIGSnum_red_for_true Specifies the number of shades of red that DEC PHIGS allocates in the true color map The value of this option defaults to eight shades of red This environment option is used only when DirectColor PseudoColor visuals are encountered PseudoColor visuals are common on PEX 8 plane workstations For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the number of reds to 4 as follows DEFINE PHIGS NUM_RED_FOR_TRUE 4 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC PHIGS environment variable for the number of reds to 2 as follows Q setenv PHIGSnum red for true 2 Retum Structure Storage GKS DEVICE_STRUCT_SUPPORT_ GKSdevice_struct_support_ PHIGS DEVICE_STRUCT
528. ue is 0 in your private server startup command file SYS MANAGER DECW PRIVATE_SERVER_SETUP COM the Z buffer will not be updated when an anti aliased line is drawn This assumes that anti aliased line drawing is the last operation performed Under these conditions proper Z buffer operation and anti aliasing blending with the frame buffer occurs This ensures that proper anti aliasing blending occurs at intersecting lines If the anti aliased line is not drawn last improper Z buffer display can occur and blending to an incorrect background color can occur If you want to preserve Z buffer correctness at the expense of anti aliasing quality use the default value 1 Intersecting lines and lines over surfaces may not blend correctly If you want to allow for correct anti aliasing blending at the expense of occasional incorrect Z buffer action and only when the line is not drawn last set the value to 0 11 2 2 3 SFB Accelerators For PEX servers with the SFB accelerators there are four available settings for anti aliasing each with a separate set of functionality and restrictions The four modes are as follows e Mode 0 No anti aliasing When you use mode 0 no restrictions due to anti aliasing exist e Mode 1 Lines are 2 5 pixels wide DEC PHIGS blends the anti aliased lines from the line color to the anti aliasing background color color table entry 0 DEC PHIGS writes pixels only when the computed pixel value is greater than
529. uffer Buffers 513 e Inquire Double Buffer Pixmap 502 Inquire Menu Bar Identifier C308 e Inquire Pasteboard Identifier 307 Escapes B 1 Escape Function Changes e Inquire Shell Identifier C309 e Inquire Window Identifiers 304 e Set Background Pixmap 501 e Set Marker Pattern 512 e Set Plane Mask 511 B 2 List of Escape Identifiers This appendix presents the escape identifiers in numerical order Table B 1 lists the escapes in alphabetical order and includes the corresponding escape identifier Table B 1 Alphabetical Listing of Escapes Escape Function Escape Identifier Associate Workstation Type and Connection Identifier 110 Beep 103 Begin Transformation Block 160 Begin Transformation Block 3 164 End Transformation Block 161 Evaluate DC Mapping of an NDC Point 401 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a DC Point 403 Evaluate NDC Mapping of a WC Point 400 Evaluate WC Mapping of an NDC Point 402 Generate Hardcopy of Workstation Surface 101 Inquire BQUM Flags 526 Inquire BQUM Range 524 Inquire Background Pixmap 503 Inquire Closest Color 516 Inquire Current Display Speed 300 Inquire Default Display Speed 351 Inquire Double Buffer Buffers 513 Inquire Double Buffer Pixmap 502 Inquire Current Edge Attributes 254 Inquire Current Line Cap Style 252 Inquire Current Line Join Style 253 Inquire Current Writing Mode 251 Inquire Edge Facilities 354 I
530. uivalent X11 writing modes See the appropriate language definition file for a list of constants and values to be used with this escape 151 Set Line Cap Style 151 Set Line Cap Style Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP Supporting Workstations The PostScript DDIF DECwindows OSF Motif and PEX workstations This escape sets the current ine cap style entry for all subsequently drawn polylines that use this facility The line cap style determines the appearance of the polyline endpoints The initial line cap style is 1 which is workstation dependent If a workstation cannot implement a specified style DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS uses style number 1 ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers DEC GKS 1 or DEC PHIGS 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array DEC GKS cap style or DEC PHIGS ws id cap style address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array
531. umber of reals 0 number of strings 1 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array vendor string length address of string pointer array vendor string number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws id The workstation identifier The output data record contains the following elements Component Description vendor string length The length of the vendor string vendor string The vendor string 520 Set PEX Begin Render Clear Action 520 Set PEX Begin Render Clear Action Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations PEX workstations This escape allows an application to control whether DEC PHIGS performs the following actions e Clear the image buffer e Clear the Z buffer e Which regions to clear specified in device coordinates The real array contains num clip sets of 4 reals XMIN YMIN XMAX YMAX The values are in device coordinates meters To clip a pair of rectangular regions 0 1 meters in size one with its corner at the origin and the other at the upper corner of the former the array would contain 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 where 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 is the first clip region and 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 is the second clip region The Z clear control capab
532. umber of strings 0 address of integer array error_status dirty_flag1 dirty_ flag2 dirty flag last address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws id The workstation identifier 531 Inquire View Dirty Flag The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error status dirty flagl dirty flag2 dirty flag last The error status The first view dirty flag The second view dirty flag The last view dirty flag Escapes B 127 532 Render Element Range 532 Render Element Range B 128 Escapes Operating States for DEC PHIGS PHOP WSOP Supporting Workstations All This escape allows the application to render a range of elements without entering immediate or quick update mode ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 6 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id struct_id start_whence start_offset end_whence end_offset address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 add
533. ur application You will use the bulletin board widget for your PHIGS workstation 8 Realize the widget hierarchy you have just created You can then pass the bulletin board widget to the OPEN WORKSTATION function Be sure to call the CLOSE WORKSTATION function before you close the display or destroy the OSF Motif widget These types of workstations allow you to use either SAMPLE or EVENT mode for DEC PHIGS input in addition to using the OSF Motif Toolkit in your application If you use the AWAIT EVENT function however you must set the timeout parameter to 0 to avoid hanging up the devices Note You cannot use REQUEST mode input with this workstation type To do so results in an error 10 4 Programming Considerations You should review Chapter 9 before writing an application using the OpenGL devices with OSF Motif software OpenGL Workstation 10 11 OpenGL Workstation 10 4 Programming Considerations 10 4 4 General Information This section provides information and guidelines for using DEC PHIGS with an OpenGL device and OSF Motif software To open or query DEC PHIGS workstation types 270 271 272 and 273 your application must be running on a host that runs the OSF Motif client side software The host does not need a physical display device nor does it need the OSF Motif server side software For workstation types 270 and 271 the connection identifier specifies the OSF Motif display to use The second argument
534. ure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS CONID PHIGS STARTUP COM sets the default value PHIGSconid For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the connection identifier for a PostScript device as follows DEFINE PHIGS CONID FILE PS Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the connection identifier for a PostScript device as follows setenv GKSconid file ps Return Workstation Type GKS WSTYPE Specifies the workstation type On OpenVMS systems the startup GKSwstype procedure GKSTARTUP COM or PHIGS STARTUP sets the default PHIGS WSTYPE value PHIGSwstype For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the monochrome PostScript printer workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSSWSTYPE 61 Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the color PostScript printer workstation type as follows 9 setenv GKSwstype 62 Return See Chapter 12 for a complete list of the environment options supported by PostScript devices All the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS OpenVMS logical names begin with GKS and PHIGS respectively All the DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS UNIX environment variables begin with GKS and PHIGS respectively followed by the name of the environment variable in lowercase letters 1 14 Introduction CGM Output 2 CGM Output This chapter provides a brief overview of the internal
535. urrent window By default DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS allocate the largest possible virtual color map when you open a VWS workstation This is not a problem when your programs open a single workstation at a time However when you open multiple workstations at one time the virtual color maps overlap If you do not need the full size virtual color map use a workstation type bit mask to tell DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS to allocate a smaller virtual color map for a given workstation You can also use a workstation type bit mask to tell DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS to keep a workstation s virtual color map resident in the hardware color map In this case no other workstation process can access that portion of the hardware color map This means that the colors specified by the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS workstation that reserved the physical color map section cannot be changed by the overlapping of the virtual color map of another workstation or process 17 2 VWS Workstation VWS Workstation 17 2 Valid Bit Mask Values The following bit mask is valid for use with the VWS workstation Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 41 x0mnn0029 VWS workstation 141 x0mnn008D Japanese VWS workstation The value in the first part Omnn specifies that the workstation needs a specific size virtual map or requires a resident virtual map which reserves a physical color map section for the workstation s virtual map If the workstation requires a resident vir
536. ut Values The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4014 stroke class logical input devices Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 7 Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 5 Input Information Input Construct Default Value PET Initial number of points Initial transformation Echo area Data record 1 0 0 Largest square Stroke buffer size 80 points Editing position 0 x interval 0 01 in world coordinate points y interval 0 01 in world coordinate points Time interval 0 0 seconds 15 5 6 Valuator Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported valuator class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4014 terminal Valuator Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with thumbwheels Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U Supported PETs The valuator input class for the Tektronix 4014 terminal supports PETs 1 and 2 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4014 valuator class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET Initial value Echo area Data record 1 0 5 Varies by device Minimum 0 0 maximum 1 0 15 8 Tektronix 4014 Workstation Tektronix 4100 4200 and VS500 Series Workstations 16 Tektronix 4100 4200 and V
537. ut workstation type as follows DEFINE PHIGSS WSTYPE 7 Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the CGM output workstation type as follows setenv GKSwstype 7 Return 2 3 Valid Bit Mask Values The CGM standard defines three encodings Encodings are formats used to store data within the metafile The data types and values used to store information within the metafile varies depending on the encoding you use to create the metafile The following list presents the three CGM encodings e Character encoding A format whose physical file takes a minimal amount of storage e Binary encoding A format easily stored and read by many types of machine architectures and applications 2 2 CGM Output CGM Output 2 3 Valid Bit Mask Values e Clear text encoding A format that can easily be read or edited by application programmers who wish to use the metafile DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS support all three formats The following bit mask is valid for use with the CGM output workstation Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 7 x000n0007 CGM output using integer virtual display coordinates VDC The value in the first part 0007 specifies the desired encoding The value in the second part is the hexadecimal value of the CGM output workstation type 7 decimal The possible values for n include the following Value Encoding 2 Character encoding 3 Binary enc
538. v ttynn Return Replace speed with a value equal to the baud rate as determined by the switches currently set on the printer Replace nn with the port number 6 4 Pattern and Hatch Values This section describes the available fill area pattern and hatch values for the LCGO01 printer The positive numeric style values are patterns mixtures of colors and the negative values are hatches device dependent designs such as cross hatches dots horizontal lines and so forth The style values are passed with the SET FILL AREA STYLE INDEX function If you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns 6 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Cross hatches 2 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 3 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 4 Horizontal lines 5 Vertical lines 6 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 7 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 8 Horizontal lines sparse 9 Vertical lines sparse 10 to 19 Varying densities each density in each color 83 to 126 Hatching with the corresponding ASCII character 6 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern value indexes and describes the results Style
539. value of an encoding dependent data type that PRECISION COLRINDEXPREC specifies the precision of an index into a color table MAX COLOR INDEX 3 1 2 8 A positive nonzero integer that is the maximum MAXCOLRINDEX color index value COLOR VALUE 3 1 2 9 Two sets of red green and blue intensity real values EXTENT COLRVALUEEXT that are the minimum and maximum color values METAFILE 3 1 2 10 A value of an encoding dependent data type ELEMENT MFELEMLIST containing a list of all application specific elements LIST contained in this metafile BEGIN DEFAULTS 3 1 2 11 Control picture descriptor and attribute element REPLACEMENT BEGMFDEFAULTS list of the same format as described for the 2 8 CGM Output corresponding elements continued on next page Table 2 2 Cont CGM Element Descriptions CGM Output 2 8 Element Descriptions Element Name Opcode Argument Data Description END DEFAULTS 3 1 2 12 No data required REPLACEMENT ENDMFDEFAULTS FONT LIST 3 1 2 13 A list of strings that assigns a font index value FONTLIST beginning with the value 1 to each font in the list CHARACTER SET 3 1 2 14 A list of information that specifies up to five of LIST CHARSETLIST the supported character sets from ISO 2022 Each pair consists of an enumerated value such as lt 94 character gt followed by a short string describing the tail end of designating escape sequences for that set such as 4 1 CHARACTER 3 1 2 15 An enumerated type specif
540. values for this element Escapes B 45 252 Inquire Current Line Cap Style 252 Inquire Current Line Cap Style B 46 Escapes Operating States for DEC GKS GKOP WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes the value of the current line cap style see 151 Set Line Cap Style to its output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 2 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array error status cap style address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL The output data record contains the following elements Component Description error status The workstation identifier cap style The line cap style See the appropriate language definition file for a list of values for this element 253 Inquire Current Line Join Style 253 Inquire Current Line Join Style Operating States for DEC GKS
541. ved or minimized individually or will be minimized with the main widget The default value is 1 fixed input For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for fixed input mode as follows DEFINE PHIGSSINPUT FIXED 1 Retum On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for nonfixed input mode as follows Q setenv GKSinput fixed 0 Return Language GKS LANGUAGE Specifies whether to use the English language value 0 GKSlanguage Hebrew language value 21 or Japanese language value 22 PHIGS LANGUAGE The default value is 0 See Section 4 14 for more information PHIGSlanguage on internationalization For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the Hebrew language as follows DEFINE PHIGS LANGUAGE 21 Return On ULTRIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the Japanese language as follows setenv GKSlanguage 22 Return Menu Bar Size GKS DECW MENU BAR SIZE GKSdecw menu bar size PHIGS DECW MENU BAR SIZE PHIGSdecw menu bar size When you run a DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS application on a DECwindows workstation geometry management conflicts may arise with different window managers If you get the error message MENU BAR SIZE attribute incorrect set this logical name to the value printed in the error message and run the application again If you specify the value 0 the menu bar will not
542. workstation is opened and do not restore it when the workstation is closed Use the following bit masks to control whether the color map is restored to its original state Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 17 x00000011 Digital VT340 color Do not restore the color map 16777233 x01000011 Digital VT340 color Restore the color map The following error status is also associated with this bit mask 44 Error trying to save or restore VT340 color map routine ERROR NEG 44 Error DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS received an error from the VT340 when trying to acquire or reset the color map This could happen if the OpenVMS device characteristics SET TERMINAL do not match the actual terminal characteristics This could also happen on UNIX systems See the use of the stty command to display and set the terminal characteristics Explanation Reset the terminal and check that the OpenVMS device characteristics match the terminal characteristics In particular note that this function temporarily resets the device to NO ESCAPE mode You may need to reset the terminal to ESCAPE mode before continuing On UNIX systems reset the terminal and check that the device and terminal characteristics match Note that this function sets the terminal to raw mode You may need to reset the terminal with the tset command before continuing ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 3 ReGIS Graphics Protocol Workstation 13 3 Mode
543. x however it may be faster to regenerate the view If you want a quick update following an attribute change Digital recommends using batch quick updates BQUMs See Appendix B for information on how to use the BQUM escapes Quick update performance on PEX workstations can be improved by turning off Z buffering and by avoiding the use of facet or vertex colors for output primitives that support such colors G 1 9 Defining the X Transport Mechanism Shared memory transport is fastest when the client and server are run on the same system On an OpenVMS operating system you define the transport mechanism as follows SET DISPLAY TRANSPORT LOCAL Return DEFINE PHIGS CONID DECWSDISPLAY Return On a UNIX system you define the transport mechanism as follows setenv PHIGSconid local 0 Return If you use unix 0 DEC PHIGS uses UNIX domain sockets DECnet or TCP IP transport is required when the client and server are run on different systems On an OpenVMS operating system with DECnet you define the transport mechanism as follows DEFINE PHIGSSCONID node 0 Retum You can also define the transport mechanism using the commands SET DISPLAY NODE NODENAME Retum DEFINE PHIGS CONID DECWSDISPLAY On a UNIX system with DECnet you define the transport mechanism as follows setenv PHIGSconid node 0 Return On a UNIX system with TCP IP you define the transport mechanism as follow
544. x 4107 and 4207 16 10 VWS 17 13 Pixel inquiries 1 13 Plotter See also Printer HP7475 8 1 LVP16 8 1 Pop Workstation C106 B 9 Portrait DDIF 3 3 HP7475 8 2 HPPCL 5 2 LA100 14 3 LA210 14 3 LA280 14 3 LA324 7 3 LA380 14 3 LA5O 14 3 LA75 14 3 LA84 14 3 LA86 14 3 LCG01 6 2 LJ250 7 2 LVP16 8 2 MPS 2000 8 2 PostScript 12 3 sixel printers 14 3 PostScript 12 1 to 12 8 bit masks 12 2 default settings 12 5 description files 12 4 device coordinate information 1 13 encapsulated 12 3 environment options 12 1 Index 14 PostScript environment options cont d connection identifier 1 14 12 1 ISO Latinl encoding 12 1 language 12 1 printer description file 12 2 workstation type 1 14 12 2 environment variables 12 1 fonts 12 6 ISO Latinl support 12 8 landscape orientation 12 3 logical names 12 1 paper sizes 12 3 pixel inquiries 1 13 portrait orientation 12 3 Precision text fonts A 1 Predefined fill area pattern values VWS monochrome 17 9 Predefined bundle table indexes GKS 1 6 PHIGS 1 8 Printer 7 1 description file environment option PostScript 12 2 Digital 14 1 See also Sixel printer HP7475 8 1 HPPCL 5 1 HPPCL resolution 5 3 LCG01 6 1 LPS40 12 1 LVP16 8 1 PostScript 12 1 sixel resolution 14 7 Prompts See Echo area Pseudo colors environment option PEX 11 6 Push Workstation 107 B 10 R Radians GDPs C 3 Radius GDPs C 3 Recorder
545. x pushbutton xxx default for choice PETs 2 to 5 XXX trans for other choice PETs ZK 3800A GE 9 28 OSF Motif Workstation OSF Motif Workstation 9 14 Customization Figure 9 3 Choice Button Box Software XmBulletinBoard XmBulletinBoardDialog choiceb_topwidget_dialog choiceb_topwidget_dialog_popup XmLabel choiceb dialog label XmScrolledWindow choiceb_resize_scrolledwin XmBulletinBoard choiceb_buttons_board choice 1 choice 2 choice n XmPushButton XmPushButton XmPushButton choiceb_buttonbox_pushbutton choiceb_buttonbox_pushbutton choiceb_buttonbox_pushbutton ZK 3799A GE OSF Motif Workstation 9 29 OSF Motif Workstation 9 14 Customization Figure 9 4 Valuator XmBulletinBoard XmBulletinBoardDialog valuator_topwidget_dialog valuator_topwidget_dialog_popup ZK 3803A GE Figure 9 5 String XmBulletinBoard XmBulletinBoardDialog string_topwidget_dialog string_topwidget_dialog_popup XmLabel XmPushButton string title label string reset pushbutton XmTextField XmPushButton string_text_stext string_cancel_pushbutton XmPushButton string_enter_pushbutton ZK 3804A GE 9 30 OSF Motif Workstation OSF Motif Workstation 9 14 Customization Figure 9 6 Message Box XmMessageDialog message_errors_messagebox ZK 3805A GE 9 15 Internationalization The OSF Motif device handler provides the following internationalization features e Default font set for t
546. xels are written regardless of their computed value This mode is useful for erasing anti aliasing lines in immediate mode as the line color must be set to the background color to erase an anti aliased line 10 3 Workstation Type Values When using the OpenGL workstation you can specify workstation types as hexadecimal bit masks The following table lists the different workstation type values you can use with OpenGL OpenGL Workstation 10 9 OpenGL Workstation 10 3 Workstation Type Values Workstation Hexadecimal Type Value Description 270 x0000010E Output only device using OSF Motif OpenGL 271 x0000010F Input output device using OSF Motif OpenGL 272 x00000110 Output only device within an OpenGL X11 application drawable window or pixmap 273 x00000111 Input output device within an OSF Motif OpenGL application widget OpenGL Output Only Value 270 Workstation type 270 is output only DEC PHIGS creates an output window but does not select any X events Consequently your application is free to select any X events on this or any other window In addition these workstations will not redraw themselves when exposed or when an icon is expanded to a window In such instances your application should call the REDRAW ALL STRUCTURES function to force DEC PHIGS to redraw the window These workstations do not make use of the OSF Motif Toolkit so your application is free to use this toolkit OpenGL Input and Output Value 271
547. xiliary color and direct color specification DDIF facilities 3 6 Color Capabilities This section provides information on the number of reserved color indexes for the DDIF workstation DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS predefine these indexes for your use within applications 3 6 14 Color Reservation The number of reserved color indexes affects the number of colors in the color table In turn the number of colors in the color table determines the size of each of the bundle tables The number of predefined colors for the DDIF devices is in the range 2 to 248 The DDIF handler replicates each entry in each primitive s bundle set by color table entries 1 to n The value for n ranges from 1 to 7 depending on the number of reserved color indexes If you reserve more than eight color indexes the value of n is 7 The default bundle tables never use the color index 0 The first eight default colors and their equivalent intensity values are as follows Index Red Green Blue 0 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 0 000 0 000 0 000 2 1 000 0 000 0 000 3 0 000 1 000 0 000 3 4 DDIF Output Workstation DDIF Output Workstation 3 6 Color Capabilities Index Red Green Blue 4 0 000 0 000 1 000 5 0 000 1 000 1 000 6 1 000 0 000 1 000 7 1 000 1 000 0 000 Color indexes 8 to 32 are random colors defined so that any two colors can be used side by side without causing difficulty in distinguishing between them Indexes 33 to 248 are defined by incrementing t
548. y NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out data number of integers 0 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array NULL address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 1 address of generic pointer array display id number of longs 1 address of long array window id The input data record contains the following element Component Description ws id The workstation identifier The output data record contains the following elements Component Description display id The X11 display identifier window id The X11 window identifier Escapes B 57 305 Inquire Segment Highlighting Method 305 Inquire Segment Highlighting Method Operating States for DEC GKS WSOP WSAC SGOP Supporting Workstations All DEC GKS workstations This escape writes the values of the segment highlighting method and attributes to its output data record ESCAPE Arguments Argument Required Value in_data number of integers 1 number of reals 0 number of strings 0 address of integer array ws_id address of real array NULL address of string lengths array NULL address of string pointer array NULL number of pointers 0 address of generic pointer array NULL number of longs 0 address of long array NULL out_da
549. y the hardware cursor map 15 6 Tektronix 4014 Workstation Tektronix 4014 Workstation 15 5 Input Information 15 5 4 String Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported string class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4014 terminal Siring Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Enter characters from keyboard Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U Supported PETs The string input class for the Tektronix 4014 terminal supports PET 1 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Input Values The following table identifies the default input values for the Tektronix 4014 string class logical input devices Input Construct Default Value PET 1 Initial string NULL Echo area Varies by device Data record Input buffer size 20 ASCII characters Initial position 1 15 5 5 Stroke Input Class Supported Logical Input Devices The following table identifies the supported stroke class logical input devices for the Tektronix 4014 terminal Stroke Device Types Input Action 1 2 3 4 Select with thumbwheels Trigger with Return Break with Ctrl U Enter point with space key Supported PETs The stroke input class for the Tektronix 4014 terminal supports PETs 1 and 4 See the input chapter in the DEC GKS or DEC PHIGS binding reference manuals for more information on PETs Default Inp
550. ycling Logical Input Devices lesen Numeric Keypad Zoning Mechanism Numeric Keypad Choice 0 000000 cece eee Auxiliary Keypad Choice 000 eee eee The Lock Key i 2 sade m RR aed ORE F Mathematical Concepts for DEC PHIGS F 1 F2 Lighting Equations llle Depth Cueing Equations 0 00 eee G Performance Tuning for DEC PHIGS xii G 1 G 1 1 G 1 2 G 1 3 G 1 4 G 1 5 Device Independent Tuning llle Choosing a Language Binding 05 Defining the Level of Primitive Aggregation Choosing the Appropriate Primitive Types Providing Optional Primitive Information Selecting the Drawing Mode Structure Versus Immediate G 1 6 Executing Structures 0 0 eens G 4 G 1 7 Avoiding Regenerations when Posting to Views G 4 G 1 8 Performing Quick Updates 0 0 0 0 eee G 5 G 1 9 Defining the X Transport Mechanism llle G 5 G 1 10 Using the Conditional Traversal Feature 00005 G 5 G 1 11 Using DEC PHIGS Performance Tools 000000 G 6 G 2 Tuning DECwindows and OSF Motif Workstations G 7 G 2 1 Improving Pick Performance llle G 7 G 2 2 Lining Primitive S1ze ssepe ERREUR EAE Yes G 7 G 2 3 Modifying the Structure Mode 0 0 0 0 eee G 8 G 2 4 Grouping Primitives with the Same Attribu
551. ying the code extension CODING CHARCODING technique assumed by the metafile creator ANNOUNCER BASIC 7 BIT BASIC 8 BIT EXTENDED 7 BIT EXTENDED 8 BIT SCALING MODE 3 2 2 0 An enumerated type value and a real value The SCALEMODE enumerated value specifies either ABSTRACT or METRIC If ABSTRACT the VDC space is correctly displayed at any size If METRIC the real value is the workstation surface distance in millimeters that corresponds to a single VDC point COLOR SELECT 3 2 2 1 An enumerated type that specifies color selection MODE COLRMODE support INDEXED DIRECT DIRECT specifies that color selections are by red green and blue intensity value LINE WIDTH SPEC 3 2 2 2 An enumerated type specifying line width MODE LINEWIDTHMODE ABSOLUTE specifies a measurement in VDC points SCALED specifies a scale factor to be applied to a workstation dependent nominal width MARKER SIZE 3 2 2 3 An enumerated type specifying marker size SPEC MODE MARKERSIZEMODE ABSOLUTE specifies a measurement in VDC points SCALED specifies a scale factor to be applied to a workstation dependent nominal size EDGE WIDTH 3 2 2 4 An enumerated type specifying edge width SPEC MODE EDGEWIDTHMODE ABSOLUTE specifies a measurement in VDC points SCALED specifies a scale factor to be applied to a workstation dependent nominal width VDC EXTENT 3 2 2 5 Two sets of points that define opposite corners of a VDCEXT rectangular area of the VDC plane This establishes
552. you change the default color representations all patterns using that color index use the new color representation DEC PHIGS does not support patterns 7 4 1 Available Fill Area Hatch Values The following table identifies the available fill area hatch value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance 1 Cross hatches 2 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 3 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees 4 Horizontal lines 5 Vertical lines 6 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 7 Diagonal lines at 45 degrees sparse 8 Horizontal lines sparse 9 Vertical lines sparse 7 4 LJ250 and LA324 Workstation LJ250 and LA324 Workstation 7 4 Pattern and Hatch Values 7 4 2 Predefined Fill Area Pattern Values for DEC GKS The following table identifies the predefined fill area pattern value indexes and describes the results Style Index Appearance c 0o 10 OCt t FF Co Pl H m m Nl c 13 14 to 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Light diagonally woven pattern 25 Darker diagonally woven pattern 50 Darkest diagonally woven pattern 75 Horizontal brick pattern Vertical brick pattern Brick pattern at 45 degrees Brick pattern at 45 degrees Finely woven grid Sparsely woven grid Downward scales fish like Upward scales Rightward scales Leftward scales Increasing densities of grey no hatch style starting at 1 16 density incrementing by 1 16
553. you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the font index as follows DEFINE PHIGSSDECW FONT 103 X font name Return On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the font index as follows setenv GKSdecw font 105 X font name Retum Font List GKS DECW FONT LIST GKSdecw font list PHIGS DECW FONT LIST PHIGSdecw font list Defines a list of font indexes The handler uses this list to compose the environment option that contains the X font name string For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the font list as follows DEFINE PHIGS DECW FONT LIST 103 105 107 Reiun On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the font list as follows setenv GKSdecw font list 110 Return See Section 9 12 for more information on the fonts supported by the OSF Motif workstation Font Mode GKS DECW FONT MODE GKSdecw font mode PHIGS DECW FONT MODE PHIGSdecw font mode Specifies the mode that will replace the default behavior Valid values include no definition check default default check all all check all all check See Section 9 12 2 for more information on font modes For example on OpenVMS systems you define the DEC PHIGS logical name for the font mode as follows DEFINE PHIGSS DECW FONT MODE ALL Retum On UNIX systems you define the DEC GKS environment variable for the font mode as f
554. zes A and B only The specified bit mask values are also valid with color PostScript and encapsulated PostScript output 12 3 Encapsulated PostScript Encapsulated PostScript output allows you to include PostScript files into other documents Therefore it requires some different information in the PostScript file To produce encapsulated PostScript files certain things must be done differently in producing the files For example all clipping is software simulated before the PostScript commands are output into the file Also because encapsulated PostScript is intended to be a single page per file the encapsulated PostScript Workstation 12 3 PostScript Workstation 12 3 Encapsulated PostScript PostScript handler outputs multiple files instead of multiple pages when the application performs a clear workstation function or equivalent For example if the encapsulated PostScript output file is specified as filename epsf the first page output is placed in the file flename epsf Subsequent pages are placed in files with file names of the form filename epsf_nn 12 4 Device Considerations The following sections provide information about device queues and printer description files 12 4 1 Device Queues and Allocation To use the PostScript printers as either allocated or queued devices on an OpenVMS system set terminal characteristics by entering the following DCL command SET TERMINAL device name NOWRAP NOBROADCAST MODEM Return

Device Specifics Reference Manual for DEC GKS and DEC PHIGS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents